diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:28:51 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:28:51 -0700 |
| commit | 1ed4f76bc4b477d7f9564679ee8f274c4e047bda (patch) | |
| tree | 8d603c166d698161b5d6593cb124570b71aac7f8 /7070-h | |
Diffstat (limited to '7070-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 7070-h/7070-h.htm | 15283 |
1 files changed, 15283 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/7070-h/7070-h.htm b/7070-h/7070-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..015a7b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/7070-h/7070-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,15283 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta content="pg2html (binary v0.17)" name="linkgenerator" /> + <title> + The Treasure of the Incas, by G. A. Henty + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .75em; margin-bottom: .75em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; text-align: justify; font-size: 80%; font-style: italic;} + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + .xx-small {font-size: 60%;} + .x-small {font-size: 75%;} + .small {font-size: 85%;} + .large {font-size: 115%;} + .x-large {font-size: 130%;} + .indent5 { margin-left: 5%;} + .indent10 { margin-left: 10%;} + .indent15 { margin-left: 15%;} + .indent20 { margin-left: 20%;} + .indent25 { margin-left: 25%;} + .indent30 { margin-left: 30%;} + .indent35 { margin-left: 35%;} + .indent40 { margin-left: 40%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; right: 1%; font-size: 0.6em; + font-variant: normal; font-style: normal; + text-align: right; background-color: #FFFACD; + border: 1px solid; padding: 0.3em;text-indent: 0em;} + .side { float: left; font-size: 75%; width: 15%; padding-left: 0.8em; + border-left: dashed thin; text-align: left; + text-indent: 0; font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; + font-weight: bold; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: solid 1px;} + .head { float: left; font-size: 90%; width: 98%; padding-left: 0.8em; + border-left: dashed thin; text-align: center; + text-indent: 0; font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; + font-weight: bold; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: solid 1px;} + p.pfirst, p.noindent {text-indent: 0} + span.dropcap { float: left; margin: 0 0.1em 0 0; line-height: 0.8 } + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} +</style> + </head> + <body> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treasure of the Incas, by G. A. Henty + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Treasure of the Incas + A Story of Adventure in Peru + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: December, 2004 [EBook #7070] +First Posted: March 5, 2003 +Last Updated: April 12, 2019 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS *** + + + + +Etext produced by Anne Soulard, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team. + +HTML file produced by David Widger + + + + + +</pre> + <div style="height: 8em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS + </h1> + <h2> + A Story of Adventure in Peru + </h2> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <h2> + BY G. A. HENTY + </h2> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <p> + <b>CONTENTS</b> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_PREF"> PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_4_0002"> <b>THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS</b> </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I — HOW IT CAME ABOUT </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II — THE START </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III — AT LIMA </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV — A STREET FRAY </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V — AMONG THE MOUNTAIN </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI — A TROPICAL FOREST </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII — AN INDIAN ATTACK </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII — DEFEAT OF THE NATIVES </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX — THE SIGNAL STAR </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X — A FRESH START </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI — BRIGANDS </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII — PRISONERS </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0013"> CHAPTER XIII — LETTERS FROM HOME </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV — THE CASTLE OF THE DEMONS </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV — INVESTIGATIONS </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI — THE SEARCH BEGINS </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII — AT WORK </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII — DISAPPOINTMENT </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX — THE TREASURE </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX — HOME </a> + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_PREF" id="link2H_PREF"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION + </h2> + <p> + The mysterious loss of a large portion of the treasure of the Incas has + never been completely cleared up. By torturing the natives to whom the + secret had been entrusted, the Spaniards made two or three discoveries, + but there can be little doubt that these finds were only a small + proportion of the total amount of the missing hoards, although for years + after their occupation of the country the Spaniards spared no pains and + hesitated at no cruelty to bring to light the hidden wealth. The story of + the boat which put to sea laden with treasure is historical, and it was + generally supposed that she was lost in a storm that took place soon after + she sailed. It was also morally certain that the Peruvians who left the + country when the Spaniards became masters carried off with them a very + large amount of treasure into that part of South America lying east of + Peru. Legends are current that they founded a great city there, and that + their descendants occupy it at the present time. But the forests are so + thick, and the Indian tribes so hostile, that the country has never yet + been explored, and it may be reserved for some future traveller, + possessing the determination of my two heroes, to clear up the mystery of + this city as they penetrated that of the lost treasure-ship. It need + hardly be said that the state of confusion, misrule, and incessant civil + wars which I have described as prevailing in Peru presents a true picture + of the country at the period in which this story is laid. + </p> + <p> + G. A. HENTY. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_4_0002" id="link2H_4_0002"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS + </h1> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER I — HOW IT CAME ABOUT + </h2> + <p> + Two men were sitting in the smoking-room of a London club. The room was + almost empty, and as they occupied arm-chairs in one corner of it, they + were able to talk freely without fear of being overheard. One of them was + a man of sixty, the other some five or six and twenty. + </p> + <p> + "I must do something," the younger man said, "for I have been kicking my + heels about London since my ship was paid off two years ago. At first, of + course, it didn't matter, for I have enough to live upon; but recently I + have been fool enough to fall in love with a girl whose parents would + never dream of allowing her to marry a half-pay lieutenant of the navy + with no chance in the world of getting employed again, for I have no + interest whatever." + </p> + <p> + "It is an awkward case certainly, Prendergast," the other said; "and upon + my word, though I sympathize with you, I cannot blame Fortescue. He is not + what you might call a genial man, but there is no doubt that he was a + splendid lawyer and a wonderful worker. For ten years he earned more than + any man at the bar. I know that he was twice offered the + solicitor-generalship, but as he was making two or three times the + official salary, he would not take it. I believe he would have gone on + working till now had he not suddenly come in for a very fine estate, owing + to the death, in the course of two or three years, of four men who stood + between him and it. Besides, I fancy he got hints that in the general + opinion of the bar he had had a wonderfully good innings, and it was about + time that younger men had a share in it. What his savings were I do not + know, but they must be very large. His three sons are all at the bar, and + are rising men, so there was no occasion for him to go on piling up money + for them. But, as I say, he has always had the reputation of being a hard + man, and it is practically certain that he would never allow his daughter + to marry a man whom he would regard as next door to a pauper. Now, what + are you thinking of doing?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, sir, Miss Fortescue has agreed to wait for me for two years, and of + course I am eager to do something, but the question is what? I can sail a + ship, but even could I get the command of a merchantman, it would not + improve my position in the eyes of the parents of the lady in question. + Now, you have been knocking about all over the world, I do wish you would + give me your advice. Where is there money to be got? I am equally ready to + go to the North Pole or the Equator, to enter the service of an Indian + prince, or to start in search of a treasure hidden by the old bucaneers." + </p> + <p> + "You talk Spanish, don't you?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes; all my service has been in the Mediterranean. We were two years off + the coast of Spain, and in and out of its ports, and as time hung heavily + on our hands, I got up the language partly to amuse myself and partly to + be able to talk fluently with my partners at a ball." + </p> + <p> + The elder man did not speak for a minute or two. + </p> + <p> + "You have not thought of South America?" he said at last. + </p> + <p> + "No, Mr. Barnett; I don't know that I have ever thought of one place more + than another." + </p> + <p> + The other was again silent. + </p> + <p> + "I don't think you could do better anywhere," he said slowly. "It is a + land with great possibilities; at any rate it is a land where you could be + understood, and of course it would be folly to go anywhere without a + knowledge of the language. I was, as you know, five years out there, and + came home when the war broke out between Chili and the Spaniards. I have + been more in Peru than in Chili, and as Peru was still in the hands of the + Spanish, it would have been impossible for me to go there again as long as + the war lasted. Knocking about as I did, I heard a great deal from the + natives (I mean the Indians). I gathered from them a number of their + traditions, and I am convinced that they know of any number of gold mines + that were formerly worked, but were blocked up when the Spaniards invaded + the country, and have been kept secret ever since. + </p> + <p> + "The natives have never spoken on the subject at all to the Spaniards. If + they had, they would have been flogged until they revealed all they knew—that + is to say, they would have been flogged to death, for no tortures will + wring from an Indian anything he knows about gold. They look upon that + metal as the source of all the misfortunes that have fallen upon their + race. With an Englishman whom they knew and trusted, and who, as they also + knew, had no wish whatever to discover gold mines, they were a little less + reticent. I never asked them any questions on a subject in which I had not + a shadow of interest, but I certainly had some curiosity, not of a + pecuniary kind, because the matter had always been a riddle as to the + hiding-place of the Incas' treasures. And from what I learned I should say + it is absolutely certain that a great portion of these escaped the search + of their Spanish tyrants. + </p> + <p> + "Whether the men who were employed in the work all died without revealing + the secret, or whether it had been trusted to a chosen few, I know not; + but the natives believe that there are still a few among them to whom the + secret has been passed down from father to son. Anyhow, all had heard + vague traditions. Some said that part of the treasure was carried hundreds + of miles inland and given over to a tribe of fierce savages, in a country + into which no European can enter. Another tradition is that a portion of + it was carried off by sea in a great canoe, which was never heard of again + and was believed to have been lost. I am not for a moment supposing, + Prendergast, that if you went out there you would have the most remote + chance of discovering what the Spaniards, ever since they landed there, + have been in vain trying to find, and I certainly should not think of + recommending a mad-brained adventure, but undoubtedly there are many rich + gold mines yet to be found. There are openings for trade, too; and I can + give you introductions to merchants both in Chili and Peru. It is not a + thing I should recommend to everyone, far from it; but if you want to + combine adventure with a chance, however small, of making money, I don't + know that you can do better than go to South America. You are fitted for + no calling here; your income, counting your half-pay, would suffice to + keep you out there, and a couple of years of such a life would do you no + harm." + </p> + <p> + "It is just what I should like," the young man said enthusiastically; + "though I don't know how I should set to work if I did find a mine." + </p> + <p> + "You would have to bring home specimens, with particulars of the width of + the lode. Of course you would crush pieces up and wash them yourself, or + get your Indian to wash them; that would give you an approximate idea of + the percentage of gold. If it were rich, I could introduce you to men who + would advance money for working it, giving you a share of the profits. + They would send out a mining expert with you. He would verify your report, + and then you would take up the concession. I don't know whether there have + been any changes in the regulations, but there is no difficulty in + learning how to proceed from one or other of the men to whom I will give + you introductions. The thing would not be worth thinking of were it not + that the man who always went with me as guide and muleteer is an Indian, + and has, I am convinced, a knowledge of some of these places. He was with + me all the time I was out there. I saved his life when a puma sprang upon + him, and he more than once hinted that he could make me a rich man, but I + had no inclination that way, my income being sufficient for all my wants. + Still, on the chance that he is alive—and he was about thirty when + he was with me fifteen years ago, so it is probable that he is still to + the fore—I will give you a letter to him telling him that you are a + dear friend of mine, and that I trust to him to do any service he can for + you just as he would have done for myself. Had it not been for that I + should never have mentioned the matter to you. These old mines are the + dream of every Peruvian. They have been searching for them ever since the + conquest of the country, and as they have failed, it is absurd to think + that an Englishman would have the slightest chance of lighting upon a + mine, still less of finding any of the Incas' treasures. But with the + Indian's aid it is just possible that you may find something, though I + should advise you most strongly not to build in any way upon the chance. I + consider that you cannot possibly win Miss Fortescue; that being so, two + years of knocking about will not make your position worse, and by the time + you come back, you may have ceased to struggle against fate. It will + afford you a remote—but distinctly remote—opportunity of + bettering your position, will give you something else to think about + besides that young lady's charms, and you may even come to recognize that + life is, after all, possible without her. You may shake your head, lad; + but you know children cry for the moon sometimes, yet afterwards come to + understand that it would not be a desirable plaything." + </p> + <p> + "Well, at any rate, Mr. Barnett, I am extremely obliged for your + suggestion and for your offer of introductions. It is just the life that I + should enjoy thoroughly. As you say, the chance that anything will come of + it is extremely small, but at least there is a possibility, and I take it + as a drowning man catches at a straw." + </p> + <p> + "By the way, you mustn't think only of gold; silver is, after all, the + chief source of the riches of Peru, and there are numbers of + extraordinarily rich mines. It is calculated that three hundred millions + have been produced since the first occupation by the Spaniards. + Quicksilver is also very abundant; copper and lead are found too, but + there is not much to be done with them at present, owing to the cost of + carriage. There is good shooting in the mountains on the eastern side of + the Andes, and you will find plenty of sport there." + </p> + <p> + They talked over the matter for some time before they separated, and Harry + Prendergast became quite excited over it. On his return to his rooms he + was astonished to find the candles alight and a strong smell of tobacco + pervading the place. A lad of about sixteen leapt from the easy-chair in + which he had been sitting, with his feet on another. + </p> + <p> + "Hullo, Harry, I didn't expect you back so soon! The maid said you were + dining out, and I suppose that generally means one o'clock before you are + back." + </p> + <p> + "Well, what brings you here, Bert? I thought I had got you off my hands + for a year at least." + </p> + <p> + "I thought so, myself," the lad said coolly; "but circumstances have been + too strong for me. We were running down the Channel the night before last, + when a craft that was beating up ran smack into us. I don't know that it + was his fault more than ours; the night was dark, and it was very thick, + and we did not see each other until she was within a length of us. Luck + was against us; if she had been a few seconds quicker we should have + caught her broadside, but as it was she rammed us, knocking a hole in our + side as big as a house, and we had just time to jump on board her. Our old + craft went down two minutes after the skipper, who was of course the last + man, left her. The other fellow had stove his bow in. Luckily we were only + about a couple of miles off Dungeness, and though she leaked like a sieve, + we were able to run her into the bay, where she settled down in two and a + half fathoms of water. As soon as it was light we landed and tramped to + Dover. A hoy was starting for the river that evening, and most of us came + up in her, arriving at the Pool about three hours ago. It is a bad job, + Harry, and I am horribly put out about it. Of course nothing could be + saved, and there is all the new kit you bought for me down at the bottom. + I sha'n't bother you again; I have quite made up my mind that I shall ship + before the mast this time, and a five-pound note will buy me a good enough + outfit for that." + </p> + <p> + "We need not talk about that now, Bertie. You are certainly an unlucky + beggar; this is the second time you have been wrecked." + </p> + <p> + "It is a frightful nuisance," the boy said. "It is the kit I am thinking + of, otherwise I should not mind. I didn't care for the skipper. He seemed + all right and decent enough before we started, but I soon heard from + fellows who had sailed with him before that he was a tartar; and what was + worse, they said he was in the habit of being drunk two nights out of + three. However, that has nothing to do with it. I am really awfully sorry, + Harry. You have been a thundering good elder brother. I hated to think + that you had to shell out last time, and I have quite made up my mind that + you sha'n't do it again." + </p> + <p> + "Well, it cannot be helped; it is no fault of yours; still, of course, it + is a nuisance. Thank God that no harm has come to you, that is the + principal thing. Now, sit down and go on with your pipe, you young monkey. + I did not think you had taken to smoking." + </p> + <p> + "One has to," the lad said, "everyone else does it; and there is no doubt + that, when you have got the middle watch on cold nights with foul winds, + it is a comfort." + </p> + <p> + "Well, go on smoking," his brother said. "I will light up too. Now shut + your mouth altogether. I want to think." + </p> + <p> + They were silent for fully ten minutes, then Harry said; + </p> + <p> + "I told you about that business of mine with Miss Fortescue." + </p> + <p> + Bertie grinned all over his face, which, as he sat, was not visible to his + brother. Then with preternatural gravity he turned towards him. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, you told me about it; an uncomfortable business wasn't it?—surly + old father, lovely daughter, and so on." + </p> + <p> + "I will pull your ear for you, you young scamp," Harry said wrathfully, + "if you make fun of it; and I have a good mind not to say what I was going + to." + </p> + <p> + "Say it, Harry, don't mind my feelings," the lad said. "You can't say I + did not stand it well when I was here last week, and gave you no end of + sympathy. Go ahead, old fellow; I dare say I shall be taken bad some day, + and then I shall be able to make allowances for you." + </p> + <p> + "I'll have nothing more to say to you, you young imp." + </p> + <p> + "Don't say that, Harry," the lad said in a tone of alarm. "You know how + sympathizing I am, and I know what a comfort it is for you to unburden + yourself; but I do think that it won't be necessary to go into personal + descriptions, you know, or to tell me what you said to her or she said to + you, because you told me all that ten days ago, also what her tyrannical + old father said. But really seriously I am awfully sorry about it all, and + if there is anything that I can possibly do for you I shall be only too + pleased. I don't see that it would be any advantage for me to go and give + the old gentleman my opinion of him; but if you think it would, and can + coach me in some of his sore points, we might see how we could work upon + them." + </p> + <p> + "I always thought you were a young ass, Bertie," Harry said sternly, "but + I have not realized before how utterly assified you are." + </p> + <p> + "All right, Harry!" the lad said cheerfully; "hit me as hard as you like, + under the circumstances I feel that I cannot kick." + </p> + <p> + Harry said nothing for another five minutes. + </p> + <p> + "This is a serious matter," he said at last, "and I don't want any + tomfoolery." + </p> + <p> + "All right, Harry! I will be as serious as a judge." + </p> + <p> + "I am thinking of going away for two years." + </p> + <p> + The lad turned half round in his chair and had a good look at his brother. + </p> + <p> + "Where are you going to?" seeing by Harry's rather gloomy face that he was + quite in earnest. + </p> + <p> + "I believe I am going to Peru." + </p> + <p> + "What are you going there for, Harry?" the lad said quietly. + </p> + <p> + "I told you," the other went on, "that Mr. Fortescue said that he had no + personal objection to me, but that if I was in a position to give his + daughter a home equal to that which I wanted her to leave, he would be + content." + </p> + <p> + Bertie nodded. + </p> + <p> + "This seemed to me hopeless," Harry went on. "I told you that she was + willing to wait for two years, but that she couldn't promise much longer + than that, for her father had set his mind on her making a good match; he + has certainly put a tremendous pressure upon her. When I was talking at + the club this evening to Mr. Barnett—you know that he is our oldest + friend and is one of our trustees—I told him about it, and said that + though I was ready to do anything and go anywhere I could not see my way + at all to making a big fortune straight away. He agreed with me. After + talking it over he said he knew of but one way by which such a thing would + be at all possible, but the betting would be twenty thousand to one + against it. Of course I said that if there was even a possibility I would + try it. Well, you know he was in Peru for some years. He says that the + natives have all sorts of legends about rich mines that were hidden when + the Spaniards came first, and that it is certain that, tremendous as was + the amount of loot they got, a great part of the Incas' treasure was + hidden away. Once or twice there had been great finds-in one case two + million and a half dollars. It is believed that the secret is still known + to certain Indians. When he went out there he had a muleteer, whose life + he saved when he was attacked by some beast or other, and this man as much + as hinted that he knew of a place where treasure might be concealed; but + as Barnett was interested in beasts and plants and that sort of thing, and + had a comfortable fortune, he never troubled himself about it one way or + another. Well, he offered to give me a letter to this man, and he regarded + it as just possible that the fellow, who seems to be a descendant of some + of the people who were members of the Incas' court at the time the + Spaniards came, may have some knowledge of the rich mines that were then + closed down, and that he may be able to show them to me, from his feeling + of gratitude to Barnett. It is but one chance in a million, and as I can + see no other possibility of making a fortune in two years, I am going to + try it." + </p> + <p> + "Of course you will," the lad said excitedly, "and I should think that you + would take me with you." + </p> + <p> + "I certainly had not dreamt of doing so, Bertie. But if I have to keep on + getting fresh outfits for you, the idea has come into my mind during the + last half-hour that I could not do better." + </p> + <p> + "Harry, you are sure to be disappointed lots of times before you hit on a + treasure, and then if you were all by yourself you would get down in the + mouth. Now, I should be able to keep you going, pat you on the back when + you felt sick, help you to fight Indians and wild beasts, and be useful in + all sorts of ways." + </p> + <p> + "That is like your impudence, Bertie," the other laughed. "Seriously, I + know I shall be a fool to take you, and if I really thought I had any + chance to speak of I should not do so; but though I am going to try, I + don't expect for a moment that I shall succeed. I feel that really it + would be a comfort to have someone with me upon whom I could rely in such + a life as I should have to lead. It certainly would be lonely work for one + man. The only doubt in my mind is whether it will be fair to you—you + have got your profession." + </p> + <p> + "But I can go back to it if nothing good turns up, Harry. I can visit the + firm and tell them that I am going to travel with you for a bit, and hope + that on my return they will take me back again and let me finish my + apprenticeship. I should think they would be rather glad, for they always + build and never buy ships, and it will take them six months to replace the + <i>Stella</i>. Besides, it will do me a lot of good. I shall pick up + Spanish—at least, I suppose that is the language they speak out + there—and shall learn no end of things. As you know, we trade with + the west coast of America, so I should be a lot more useful to the firm + when I come back than I am now." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I will think it over, and let you know in the morning. I must + certainly consult Mr. Barnett, for he is your trustee as well as mine. If + we go I shall work my way out. It will be a big expense, anyhow, and I + don't mean, if possible, to draw upon my capital beyond three or four + hundred pounds. I believe living is cheap out there, and if I buy three or + four mules I shall then have to pay only the wages for the muleteers, and + the expenses of living. Of course I shall arrange for my income and + half-pay to be sent out to some firm at Lima. Now, you had better go off + to bed, and don't buoy yourself up with the belief that you are going, for + I have by no means decided upon taking you yet." + </p> + <p> + "You will decide to take me, Harry," the lad said confidently, and then + added with a laugh: "the fact that you should have adopted a plan like + this is quite sufficient to show that you want somebody to look after + you." + </p> + <p> + Harry Prendergast did not get much sleep that night. He blamed himself for + having mentioned the matter at all to Bertie, and yet the more he thought + over it the more he felt that it would be very pleasant to have his + brother with him. The lad was full of fun and mischief, but he knew that + he had plenty of sound sense, and would be a capital companion, and the + fact that he had been three years at sea, and was accustomed to turn his + hand to anything, was all in his favour. If nothing came of it he would + only have lost a couple of years, and, as the boy himself had said, the + time would not have been altogether wasted. Bertie was down before him in + the morning. He looked anxiously at his brother as he came in. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, I have thought it over in every light. But in the first place, + Bertie, if you go with me you will have to remember that I am your + commanding officer. I am ten years older than you, and besides I am a + lieutenant in the King's Navy, while you are only a midshipman in the + merchant service. Now, I shall expect as ready obedience from you as if I + were captain of my own ship and you one of my men; that is absolutely + essential." + </p> + <p> + "Of course, Harry, it could not be otherwise." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, then; in the next place I shall abide by what Mr. Barnett + says. He is your guardian as well as trustee, and has a perfect right to + put a veto upon any wild expedition of this sort. Lastly, I should hope, + although I don't say that this is absolutely necessary, that you may get + your employer's promise to take you back again in order that you may + complete your time." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you very much, Harry!" the lad said gratefully. "The first + condition you may rely upon being performed, and I think the third will be + all right, for I know that I have always been favourably reported upon. + Old Prosser told me so himself when he said that I should have a rise in + my pay this voyage. As to Mr. Barnett, of course I can't say, but I should + think, as it was he who put you up to this, he must see that it would be + good for you to have someone to take care of you." + </p> + <p> + "I think he is much more likely to say that I shall have quite enough to + do to take care of myself, without having the bother of looking after you. + However, I will go and see him this morning. You had better call upon your + employers." + </p> + <p> + "Don't you think I had better go to Mr. Barnett with you, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Not as you are now anyhow, Bertie. Your appearance is positively + disgraceful. You evidently had on your worst suit of clothes when you were + wrecked, and I can see that they have not been improved by the experience. + Why, there is a split right down one sleeve, and a big rent in your + trousers!" + </p> + <p> + "I got them climbing on board, for I had no time to pick and choose, with + the <i>Stella</i> sinking under my feet." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you may as well go as you are, but you had better borrow a needle + and thread from the landlady and mend up the holes. You really cannot walk + through the city in that state. I will see about getting you some more + clothes when we get back, for I cannot have you coming here in these in + broad daylight. Here are three guineas; get yourself a suit of pilot cloth + at some outfitter's at the East End. It will be useful to you anyhow, + whether you go with me or ship again here." + </p> + <p> + "There is a good deal in what you say, Harry," Mr. Barnett said when + Prendergast asked his opinion as to his taking his brother with him. "Two + years would not make any material difference in his career as a sailor; it + simply means that he will be so much older when he passes as mate. There + is no harm in that. Two or three and twenty is quite young enough for a + young fellow to become an officer, and I don't think that many captains + care about having lads who have just got their certificate. They have not + the same sense of responsibility or the same power of managing. Then, too, + Bertie will certainly have a good deal of knocking about if he spends a + couple of years in South America, and the knowledge he will gain of + Spanish will add to his value with any firm trading on that coast. As far + as you are concerned, I think it would be a great advantage to have him + with you. In a long expedition, such as you propose, it is a gain to have + a companion with you. It makes the work more pleasant, and two men can + laugh over hardships and disagreeables that one alone would grumble at; + but apart from this, it is very important in case of illness. + </p> + <p> + "A lonely man laid up with fever, or accidental injury, fares badly indeed + if he is at a distance from any town where he can obtain medical + attendance, and surrounded only by ignorant natives. I was myself at one + time down with fever for six weeks in a native hut, and during that time I + would have given pretty nearly all that I was worth for the sight of a + white face and the sound of an English voice. As to the fact that it is + possible that the lad might catch fever, or be killed in an affray with + natives, that must, of course, be faced; but as a sailor he runs the risk + of shipwreck, or of being washed overboard, or killed by a falling spar. + Everything considered, I think the idea of his going with you is a good + one. I don't suppose that many guardians would be of the same opinion, but + I have been so many years knocking about in one part of the world or + another, that I don't look at things in the same light as men who have + never been out of England." + </p> + <p> + "I am glad you see it in that way, sir. I own that it would be a great + satisfaction to have him with me. He certainly would be a cheery + companion, and I should say that he is as hard as nails, and can stand as + much fatigue and hardship as myself. Besides, there is no doubt that in + case of any trouble two men are better than one." + </p> + <p> + "I cannot advance any money out of the thousand pounds that will come to + him when he is of age. By your father's will it was ordered that, in the + event of his own death before that time, the interest was to accumulate. + Your father foresaw that, like you, probably Bertie would take to the sea, + and as the amount would be fully two thousand pounds by the time he comes + of age, it would enable him to buy a share in any ship that he might, when + he passed his last examination, command; but I will myself draw a cheque + for a hundred pounds, which will help towards meeting expenses. I feel + myself to some extent responsible for this expedition. I somewhat regret + now having ever spoken to you on the subject, for I cannot conceal from + myself that the chance of your making a discovery, where the Spaniards, + with all their power of putting pressure on the natives for the past two + or three hundred years, have failed, is so slight as to be scarcely worth + consideration. + </p> + <p> + "I tell you frankly that I broached the subject chiefly because I thought + it was much better for you to be doing something than kicking your heels + about London, and mooning over this affair with Miss Fortescue. There is + nothing worse for a young man than living in London with just enough to + keep him comfortably without the necessity of working. Therefore I thought + you would be far better travelling and hunting for treasure in Peru, than + staying here. Even if you fail, as I feel is almost certain, in the object + for which you go out, you will have plenty to occupy your thoughts, and + not be dwelling continually upon an attachment which in all probability + will not turn out satisfactorily. I do not suppose that you are likely to + forget Miss Fortescue, but by the time you return you will have accustomed + yourself to the thought that it is useless to cry for the moon, and that, + after all, life may be very endurable even if she does not share it. + Therefore I propounded this Peruvian adventure, feeling sure that, + whatever came of it, it would be a benefit to you." + </p> + <p> + "No doubt it will, sir. I see myself the chance of success is small + indeed, but there is none at all in any other way. It is just the sort of + thing I should like, and I quite feel myself that it would be good for me + to have plenty to think about; and now that you have consented to Bertie's + going with me, I feel more eager than before to undertake the expedition. + The place is in rather a disturbed state, isn't it?" + </p> + <p> + "If you are going to wait until Peru ceases to be in a disturbed state, + Harry, you may wait another hundred years. The Spanish rule was bad, but + Peru was then a pleasant place to live in compared with what it is now. It + is a sort of cock-pit, where a succession of ambitious rascals struggle + for the spoils, and the moment one gets the better of his rivals fresh + intrigues are set on foot, and fresh rebellions break out. There are good + Peruvians—men who have estates and live upon them, and who are good + masters. But as to the politicians, there is no principle whatever at + stake. It is simply a question of who shall have the handling of the + national revenue, and divide it and the innumerable posts among his + adherents. But these struggles will not affect you largely. In one respect + they will even be an advantage. Bent upon their own factious aims, the + combatants have no time to concern themselves with the doings of an + English traveller, whose object out there is ostensibly to botanize and + shoot. Were one of them to obtain the undisputed control of affairs he + might meddle in all sorts of ways; but, as it is, after you have once got + pretty well beyond the area of their operations, you can regard their + doings with indifference, knowing that the longer they go on fighting the + fewer scoundrels there will be in the land. + </p> + <p> + "But even were they to think that it was mining, and not science or sport + that took you out there, they would scarcely interfere with you. It is + admitted by all the factions that Peru needs capital for her development, + and at present that can best be got from this country. The discovery of a + fresh mine means employment to a large number of people, and the increase + of the revenues by a royalty or taxation. English explorers who have gone + out have never had any reason to complain of interference on the part of + the authorities. You will find the average better class of Peruvians a + charming people, and extremely hospitable. The ladies are pretty enough to + turn the head of anyone whose affections are not already engaged. The men + are kindly and courteous in the extreme. However, you would have little to + do with these. + </p> + <p> + "In the mountains you would largely depend upon your rifle for food, and + on what you could get in the scattered native villages. The Indians have + no love for the Peruvians. They find their condition no better off under + them than it was under the Spaniards. Once they find out that you are + English they will do all in their power for you. It is to Cochrane and the + English officers with him that they owe the overthrow and expulsion of + their Spanish tyrants, and they are vastly more grateful than either the + Chilians or Peruvians have shown themselves to be." + </p> + <p> + On returning to their lodgings Harry met his brother, who had been into + the city. + </p> + <p> + "Old Prosser was very civil," said Bertie. "He said that as their ships + were chiefly in the South American trade it would be a great advantage for + me to learn to speak Spanish well. They had not yet thought anything about + whether they should order another ship to replace the <i>Stella</i>; at + any rate, at present they had no vacancy, and would gladly give me + permission to travel in South America, and would find me a berth to finish + my apprenticeship when I returned. More than that, they said that as I had + always been so favourably reported upon they would put me on as a + supernumerary in the <i>Para</i>, which will sail in a fortnight for + Callao. I should not draw pay, but I should be in their service, and the + time would count, which would be a great pull, and I should get my passage + for nothing." + </p> + <p> + "That is capital. Of course I will take a passage in her too." + </p> + <p> + "And what does Mr. Barnett say?" + </p> + <p> + "Rather to my surprise, Bertie, he did not disapprove of the plan at all. + He thought it would be a good thing for me to have you with me in case of + illness or anything of that sort. Then no doubt he thought to some extent + it would keep you out of mischief." + </p> + <p> + "I don't believe he thought anything of the sort. Did he say so?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, no, he didn't; but I have no doubt he felt it in some way a sort of + relief." + </p> + <p> + "That is all very fine. I know, when I have been down to his place in the + country between voyages, I have always been as well behaved as if I had + been a model mid." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I have heard some tales of your doings, Bertie, that didn't seem + quite in accord with the character you give yourself." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, of course I had a few larks! You cannot expect a fellow who has been + away from England for a year to walk about as soberly as if he were a + Methodist parson!" + </p> + <p> + "No, I should not expect that, Bertie. But, on the other hand, I should + hardly have expected that he would, for example, risk breaking his neck by + climbing up to the top of the steeple and fastening a straw-hat on the + head of the weathercock." + </p> + <p> + "It gave it a very ornamental appearance; and that weathercock was never + before watched so regularly by the people of the village as it was from + that time till the hat was blown away in a gale." + </p> + <p> + "That I can quite believe. Still, Mr. Barnett told me that the rector + lodged a complaint about it." + </p> + <p> + "He might complain as much as he liked; there is no law in the land, as + far as I know, that makes the fixing of a straw-hat upon a weathercock a + penal offence. It did no end of good in the village, gave them something + to talk about, and woke them up wonderfully." + </p> + <p> + "And there were other things too, I think," his brother went on. + </p> + <p> + "Oh, well, you need not go into them now! they are an old story. Besides, + I fancy I have heard of various tricks played by Mr. Midshipman Harry + Prendergast, and, as I heard them from your lips, I cannot doubt but that + they were strictly veracious. Well, this is jolly now. When are we going + to begin to get our outfit?" + </p> + <p> + "We will lose no time about that. But really there is not much to get—a + couple of good rifles and two brace of pistols, with a good store of + ammunition, those clothes you have just bought, and two or three suits of + duck for the voyage. I shan't get any special kit until we arrive there, + and can take the advice of people at Lima whether we had better travel in + European clothes or in those worn by the Peruvians. Of course saddles and + bridles and all that sort of thing we can buy there, and we shall want a + small tent to use when we get into out-of-the-way places. I shall take + three hundred pounds in gold. I have no doubt we can exchange it into + silver profitably; besides, it is much more handy for carrying about. I + shall go down this afternoon and see Prosser and secure a berth." + </p> + <p> + "I think you will have to arrange that with the captain. Very few of our + ships have accommodation for passengers, but the captains are allowed to + take one or two if they like." + </p> + <p> + "All right! At any rate I must go to the office first. They can refer me + to the skipper if they like; that would be better than my going to him + direct." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER II — THE START + </h2> + <p> + Harry Prendergast went down to Leadenhall Street and saw the managing + owner of the <i>Para</i>. As Bertie had anticipated, Mr. Prosser, after + hearing Harry's statement that he wished to take a passage to Callao in + the vessel advertised to start in a week's time, and that he was much + obliged to them for giving Bertie a berth as supernumerary midshipman, + said: + </p> + <p> + "We shall certainly have pleasure in putting your brother's name on the + ship's books. He has already explained to me his desire to go out with + you; we have had every reason to be satisfied with him since he entered + our service, and he had better draw pay as usual, as his service during + the voyage will then count towards his time. As for yourself, we do not + book passengers, it is more bother than it is worth; but we have no + objection to our masters taking one or two. The addition of a mouth or so + practically makes very little difference in the amount of ships' stores + consumed. The masters pay us a small sum a head and make their own terms + with the passengers they take. In that way we are saved all complaints as + to food and other matters. Of course a passenger would put on board for + himself a stock of such wines, spirits, and little luxuries as he may + choose. + </p> + <p> + "You will find Captain Peters down at the docks. The last cargo has been + discharged, and they are giving an overhaul to the rigging and making a + few repairs; he is not a man to leave his ship if he can help it while + work is going on there." + </p> + <p> + Harry at once went down. + </p> + <p> + "Well, sir," the captain said, when he had told him that he wished to take + a passage to Callao, and that the owners had referred him to him, "I had + fully made up my mind that I would not take passengers again. On my last + voyage they were always grumbling at the food, expecting to be treated as + if they were in a first-class hotel." + </p> + <p> + "I am not likely to grumble, Captain; I have been knocking about the + King's service since I was fourteen." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, you are a royal navy man, are you, sir?" + </p> + <p> + "I am; I am a lieutenant." + </p> + <p> + "That makes a difference; and I have no doubt we can arrange the matter to + our satisfaction." + </p> + <p> + "I may tell you," Harry said, "that I have a younger brother coming out + with me. He is an apprentice nearly out of his time, and was on board the + <i>Stella</i> when she was sunk in the Channel. Your owners have kindly + arranged that he shall go out with you as a supernumerary; that is one + reason why I wish to go in your ship." + </p> + <p> + The Master thought for a minute or two. "Well, Mr. Prendergast," he said, + "I like having one of you naval gentlemen on board; if anything goes wrong + it is a comfort to have your advice. If we have bad weather round the + Horn, could I rely upon you to give me a helping hand should I need it? I + don't mean that you should keep watch or anything of that sort, but that + you should, as it were, stand by me. I have a new first mate, and there is + no saying how he may turn out. No doubt the firm would make every enquiry. + Still, such enquiries don't mean much; a master doesn't like to damn a man + by refusing to give him a good character. I dare say he is all right. + Still, I should certainly feel very much more comfortable if I had a naval + officer with me. Now, sir, I pay the firm twelve pounds for each passenger + I take as his share of the cabin stores; you pay me that, and I will ask + for nothing for your passage. I cannot say fairer than that." + </p> + <p> + "You cannot indeed, Captain, and I feel very much obliged to you for the + offer—very much obliged. It will suit me admirably, and in case of + any emergency you may rely upon my aid; and if you have a spell of bad + weather I shall be quite willing to take a watch, for I know that in the + long heavy gales you meet with going round the Horn the officers get + terribly overtaxed." + </p> + <p> + "And how about your brother?" the captain said; "as he is to be a + supernumerary, I suppose that only means that the firm are willing that he + shall put in his time for his rating. I have never had a supernumerary on + board, but I suppose he is to be regarded as a passenger rather than one + of the ship's complement." + </p> + <p> + "No, Captain, he is to be on the pay-sheet; and I think he had much better + be put into a watch. He would find the time hang very heavy on his hands + if he had nothing to do, and I know he is anxious to learn his profession + thoroughly. As he is to be paid, there is no reason why he should not + work." + </p> + <p> + "Very well; if you think so we will say nothing more about it. I thought + perhaps you would like to have him aft with you." + </p> + <p> + "I am much obliged to you, but I think the other way will be best; and I + am sure he would feel more comfortable with the other apprentices than as + a passenger." + </p> + <p> + "Are you going out for long, may I ask you, Mr. Prendergast?" + </p> + <p> + "For a couple of years or so. I am going to wander about and do some + shooting and exploring and that sort of thing, and I am taking him with me + as companion. I speak Spanish fairly well myself, and shall teach him on + the voyage, if you will allow me to do so. A knowledge of that language + will be an advantage to him when he comes back into Prosser & Co.'s + service." + </p> + <p> + "A great advantage," the captain agreed. "Most of us speak a little + Spanish, but I have often thought that it would pay the company to send a + man who could talk the lingo well in each ship. They could call him + supercargo, and I am sure he would pay his wages three or four times over + by being able to bargain and arrange with the Chilians and Peruvians. In + ports like Callao, where there is a British consul, things are all right, + but in the little ports we are fleeced right and left. Boatmen and + shopkeepers charge us two or three times as much as they do their own + countrymen, and I am sure that we could get better bargains in hides and + other produce if we had someone who could knock down their prices." + </p> + <p> + "When do you sail, Captain?" + </p> + <p> + "This day week. It will be high tide about eight, and we shall start to + warp out of dock a good half-hour earlier, so you can either come on board + the night before or about seven in the morning." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, sir; we shall be here in good time. I shall bring my things on + board with me; it is of no use sending them on before, as they will not be + bulky and can be stored away in my cabin." + </p> + <p> + "This will be your state-room," the captain said, opening a door. "I have + the one aft, and the first mate has the one opposite to you. The others + are empty, so you can stow any baggage that you have in one of them; the + second and third officers and the apprentices are in the deck-house + cabins." + </p> + <p> + "In that case, Captain, I will send the wine and spirits on board the day + before. Of course I shall get them out of bond; I might have difficulty in + doing that so early in the morning. You will perhaps be good enough to + order them to be stowed in one of the empty cabins." + </p> + <p> + "That will be the best plan," the captain said. + </p> + <p> + "When do the apprentices come on board?" + </p> + <p> + "The morning before we sail. There is always plenty to be done in getting + the last stores on board." + </p> + <p> + "All right! my brother will be here. Good-morning, Captain, and thank + you!" + </p> + <p> + The following morning at eleven Harry Prendergast was standing in front of + the entrance to the British Museum. A young lady came up. "It is very + imprudent of you, Harry," she said, after the first greeting, "to ask me + to meet you." + </p> + <p> + "I could not help it, dear; it was absolutely necessary that I should see + you." + </p> + <p> + "But it is of no use, Harry." + </p> + <p> + "I consider that it is of particular use, Hilda." + </p> + <p> + "But you know, Harry, when you had that very unpleasant talk with my + father, I was called in, and said that I had promised to wait two years + for you. When he found that I would not give way, he promised that he + would not press me, on the understanding that we were not to meet again + except in public, and I all but promised." + </p> + <p> + "Quite so, dear; but it appears to me that this is surely a public place." + </p> + <p> + "No, no, Harry; what he meant was that I was not to meet you except at + parties." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I should have asked you to meet me to-day even if I had had to + storm your father's house to see you. I am going away, dear, and he could + scarcely say much if he came along and found us talking here. You see, it + was not likely that I should stumble across a fortune in the streets of + London. I have talked the matter over with Barnett—you know our + trustee, you have met him once or twice—and we came to the + conclusion that the only possible chance of my being able to satisfy your + father as to my means, was for me to go to Peru and try to discover a gold + mine there or hidden treasure. Such discoveries have been made, and may be + made again; and he has supplied me with a letter to an Indian, who may + possibly be able to help me." + </p> + <p> + "To Peru, Harry! Why, they are always fighting there." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, they do a good deal of squabbling, but the people in general have + little to do with it; and certainly I am not going out to take any part in + their revolutions. There is not a shadow of doubt that a number of gold + mines worked by the old people were never discovered by the Spaniards, and + it is also certain that a great portion of the treasures of the Incas is + still lying hid. Barnett saved the life of a muleteer out there, and from + what he said he believed that the man did know something about one of + these lost mines, and might possibly let me into the secret. It is just an + off chance, but it is the only chance I can see. You promised your father + that you would never marry without his consent, and he would never give it + unless I were a rich man. If nothing comes of this adventure I shall be no + worse off than I am at present. If I am fortunate enough to discover a + rich mine or a hidden treasure, I shall be in a position to satisfy his + demand. I am going to take Bertie with me; he will be a cheerful + companion, and even now he is a powerful young fellow. At any rate, if I + get sick or anything of that sort, it would be an immense advantage to + have him with me." + </p> + <p> + "I don't like the idea of your going, Harry," she said tearfully. "No, + dear; and if I had the chance of seeing you sometimes, and of some day + obtaining your father's consent to the marriage, all the gold mines in + Peru would offer no temptation to me. As it is, I can see nothing else for + it. In some respects it is better; if I were to stay here I should only be + meeting you frequently at dances and dinners, never able to talk to you + privately, and feeling always that you could never be mine. It would be a + constant torture. Here is a possibility—a very remote one, I admit, + but still a possibility—and even if it fails I shall have the + satisfaction of knowing that I have done all that a man could do to win + you." + </p> + <p> + "I think it is best that you should go somewhere, Harry, but Peru seems to + be a horrible place." + </p> + <p> + "Barnett speaks of it in high terms. You know he was four or five years + out there. He describes the people as being delightful, and he has nothing + to say against the climate." + </p> + <p> + "I will not try to dissuade you," she said bravely after a pause. "At + present I am hopeless, but I shall have something to hope and pray for + while you are away. We will say good-bye now, dear. I have come to meet + you this once, but I will not do so again, another meeting would but give + us fresh pain. I am very glad to know that your brother is going with you. + I shall not have to imagine that you are ill in some out-of-the-way place + without a friend near you; and in spite of the dangers you may have to + run, I would rather think of you as bravely doing your best than eating + your heart out here in London. I shall not tell my father that we have met + here; you had better write to him and say that you are leaving London at + once, and that you hope in two years to return and claim me in accordance + with his promise. I am sure he will be glad to know that you have gone, + and that we shall not be constantly meeting. He will be kinder to me than + he has been of late, for as he will think it quite impossible that you can + make a fortune in two years he will be inclined to dismiss you altogether + from his mind." + </p> + <p> + For another half-hour they talked together, and then they parted with + renewed protestations on her part that nothing should induce her to break + her promise to wait for him for two years. He had given her the address of + one of the merchants to whom Mr. Barnett had promised him a letter of + introduction, so that she might from time to time write, for the voyage + would take at least four months and as much more would be required for his + first letter to come back. He walked moodily home after parting with her. + </p> + <p> + "Hullo, Harry! nothing wrong with you, I hope? why, you look as grave as + an owl." + </p> + <p> + "I feel grave, Bertie. I have just said good-bye to Hilda; and though I + kept up my spirits and made the best of this expedition of ours, I cannot + but feel how improbable it is that we shall meet again—that is to + say, in our present relations; for if I fail I certainly shall not return + home for some years; it would be only fair to her that I should not do so. + I know that she would keep on as long as there was any hope, but I should + not care to think that she was wasting her life. I was an ass to believe + it could ever be otherwise, and I feel that the best thing for us both + would have been for me to go away as soon as I found that I was getting + fond of her." + </p> + <p> + "Well, of course I cannot understand it, Harry, and it seems to me that + one girl is very like another; she may be a bit prettier than the average, + but I suppose that comes to all the same thing in another twenty years. I + can understand a man getting awfully fond of his ship, especially when she + is a clipper. However, some day I may feel different; besides, how could + you tell that her father would turn out such a crusty old beggar?" + </p> + <p> + "I suppose I did not think about it one way or the other, Bertie," Harry + said quietly. "However, the mischief is done, and even if there was no + chance whatever of making money I should go now for my own sake as well as + hers. Well, it is of no use talking more about it; we will go out now and + buy the rifles. I shan't get them new, one can pick up guns just as good + at half the price, and as I know something about rifles I am not likely to + be taken in. Of course I have got my pistols and only have a brace to buy + for you. You will have time on the voyage to practise with them; if you + did not do that you would be as likely to shoot me as a hostile Indian." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, that is bosh!" the boy said; "still, I certainly should like to be a + good shot." + </p> + <p> + After getting the rifles and pistols, Harry went into the city and ordered + six dozen of wine and three dozen of brandy to be sent on board out of + bond; he also ordered a bag of twenty pounds of raw coffee, a chest of + tea, and a couple of dozen bottles of pickles and sauces, to be sent down + to the docks on the day before the <i>Para</i> sailed. Another suit of + seafaring clothes and a stock of underclothing was ordered for Bertie. + Harry spent the intervening time before the vessel sailed in looking up + his friends and saying good-bye to them, and drove down to the docks at + the appointed time, his brother having joined the ship on the previous + day. + </p> + <p> + The <i>Para</i> was a barque-rigged ship of some eight hundred tons. At + present she did not show to advantage, her deck being littered with stores + of all kinds that had come on board late. The deck planks where they could + be seen were almost black, the sails had been partly loosed from the + gaskets, and to an eye accustomed to the neatness and order of a + man-of-war her appearance was by no means favourable; but her sides shone + with fresh paint, and, looking at her lines from the wharf, Harry thought + she would be both fast and a good sea-boat. She was not heavily laden, and + stood boldly up in the water. Nodding to Bertie, who was working hard + among the men, he went up on to the poop, from which Captain Peters was + shouting orders. + </p> + <p> + "Glad to see you, sir," the captain said; "she looks rather in a litter at + present, doesn't she? We shall get her all ataunto before we get down to + the Nore. These confounded people won't send their stores on board till + the last moment. If I were an owner I should tell all shippers that no + goods would be received within five or six hours of the ship's time for + sailing; that would give us a fair chance, instead of starting all in a + muddle, just at the time, too, when more than any other one wants to have + the decks free for making short tacks down these narrow reaches. I believe + half the wrecks on the sands at the mouth of the river are due to the + confusion in which the ships start. How can a crew be lively in getting + the yards over when they have to go about decks lumbered up like this, and + half of them are only just recovering from their bout of drink the day + before?" + </p> + <p> + Up to the last moment everyone on board was hard at work, and when the + order was given to throw off the hawsers the deck was already + comparatively clear. Half an hour later the vessel passed out through the + dock gates, with two boats towing ahead so as to take her well out into + the river; the rest of the crew were employed in letting the sails drop. + As soon as she gathered way the men in the boats were called in, the boats + themselves being towed behind in case they might again be required. + </p> + <p> + The passage from the Pool to the mouth of the river was in those days the + most dangerous portion of the voyage. There were no tugs to seize the + ships and carry them down to the open water, while the channels below the + Nore were badly buoyed and lighted, and it was no uncommon thing for + twenty vessels to get upon the sands in the course of a single tide. + </p> + <p> + The wind was light, and being northerly helped them well on their way, and + it was only in one or two reaches that the <i>Para</i> was unable to lay + her course. She overtook many craft that had been far ahead of her, and + answered the helm quickly. + </p> + <p> + "She is both fast and handy, I see," Harry Prendergast, who had been + watching her movements with interest, remarked. + </p> + <p> + "Yes; there are not many craft out of London can show her their heels when + the wind is free. She does not look quite so well into the wind as I + should wish; still, I think she is as good as most of them." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose you will get down to Gravesend before the tide turns?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, we shall anchor there. The wind is not strong enough for us to stem + the tide, which runs like a sluice there. Once past the Nore one can do + better, but there is no fighting the tide here unless one has a steady + breeze aft. I never feel really comfortable till we are fairly round the + South Foreland; after that it is plain sailing enough. Though there are a + few shoals in the Channel, one can give them a wide berth; fogs are the + things we have to fear there." + </p> + <p> + "Yes. I have never been down the river, having always joined my ships + either at Portsmouth or Plymouth, so I know very little about it; but I + know from men who have been on board vessels commissioned at Chatham or + Sheerness that they are thankful indeed when they once get round the + Goodwins and head west." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Mr. Prendergast, I am against these new-fangled steamboats—I + suppose every true sailor is; but when the <i>Marjory</i> began to run + between London and Gravesend eighteen years ago—in '15 I think it + was—folks did say that it would not be long before sailing craft + would be driven off the sea. I did not believe that then, and I don't + believe it now; but I do say that I hope before long there will be a lot + of small steamers on the Thames, to tow vessels down till they are off the + North Foreland. It would be a blessing and a comfort to us master + mariners. Once there we have the choice of going outside the Goodwins, or + taking a short cut inside if the wind is aft. Why, sir, it would add years + to our lives and shorten voyages by weeks. There we are, now, sometimes + lying off the Nore, five hundred sail, waiting for the wind to shift out + of the east, and when we do get under weigh we have always to keep the + lead going. One never knows when one may bump upon the sands. Some masters + will grope their way along in the dark, but for my part I always anchor. + There are few enough buoys and beacons in daytime, but I consider that it + is tempting Providence to try and go down in a dark night. The owners are + sensible men and they know that it is not worth while running risks just + to save a day or two when you have got a four months' voyage before you. + Once past Dover I am ready to hold on with anyone, but between the Nore + and the North Foreland I pick my way as carefully as a woman going across + a muddy street." + </p> + <p> + "You are quite right, Captain; I thoroughly agree with you. More ships get + ashore going down to the mouth of the Thames than in any other part of the + world; and, as you say, if all sailing ships might be taken down by a + steamer, it would be the making of the port of London." + </p> + <p> + "Your brother is a smart young chap, Mr. Prendergast. I was watching him + yesterday, and he is working away now as if he liked work. He has the + makings of a first-rate sailor. I hold that a man will never become a + first-class seaman unless he likes work for its own sake. There are three + sorts of hands. There is the fellow who shirks his work whenever he has a + chance; there is the man who does his work, but who does it because he has + to do it, and always looks glad when a job is over; and there is the lad + who jumps to his work, chucks himself right into it, and puts his last + ounce of strength on a rope. That is the fellow who will make a good + officer, and who, if needs be, can set an example to the men when they + have to go aloft to reef a sail in a stiff gale. So, as I understand, Mr. + Prendergast, he is going to leave the sea for a bit. It seems a pity too." + </p> + <p> + "He will be none the worse for it, Captain. A year or so knocking about + among the mountains of Peru will do more good to him than an equal time on + board ship. It will sharpen him up, and give him habits of reliance and + confidence. He will be all the better for it afterwards, even putting + aside the advantage it will be to him to pick up Spanish." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, it may do him good," the captain agreed, "if it does not take away + his liking for the sea." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think it will do that. If the first voyage or two don't sicken a + lad, I think it is pretty certain he is cut out for the sea. Of course it + is a very hard life at first, especially if the officers are a rough lot, + but when a boy gets to know his duty things go more easily with him; he is + accustomed to the surroundings, and takes to the food, which you know is + not always of the best, with a good appetite. Bertie has had three years + of it now, and when he has come home I have never heard a grumble from + him; and he is not likely to meet with such luxuries while we are knocking + about as to make him turn up his nose at salt junk." + </p> + <p> + The tide was already turning when they reached Gravesend. As soon as the + anchor was down the steward came up to say that dinner was ready. + </p> + <p> + "I am not at all sorry," Harry said as he went below with the captain. "I + ate a good breakfast before I started at half-past six, and I went below + and had a biscuit and bottle of beer at eleven, but I feel as hungry as a + hunter now. There is nothing like a sea appetite. I have been nearly two + years on shore, and I never enjoyed a meal as I do at sea." + </p> + <p> + The crew had been busy ever since they left the dock, and the deck had now + been scrubbed and made tidy, and presented a very different appearance + from that which met Harry's eye as he came on board. + </p> + <p> + Johnson, the first mate, also dined with the skipper. He was a tall, + powerfully-built man. He was singularly taciturn, and took no share in the + conversation unless directly asked. He seemed, however, to be able to + appreciate a joke, but never laughed audibly, contenting himself with + drawing his lips apart and showing his teeth. + </p> + <p> + The wind was light and baffling, so that they did not round the South + Foreland until the seventh day after leaving dock. After that it was + favourable and steady, and they ran without any change until they + approached the line; then there was a fortnight of calm. At last they got + the wind again, and made a rapid run until within five hundred miles of + Cape Horn. The captain was in high glee. + </p> + <p> + "We have done capitally so far, Mr. Prendergast. I don't think I ever made + so rapid a run. If she goes on like this we shall reach Callao within + three months of starting." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think the weather will continue like this," the mate said. + </p> + <p> + This was the first original observation he had made since he had sailed, + and Harry and the captain looked at him in surprise. + </p> + <p> + "You think there is going to be a change, Mr. Johnson?" the captain said, + after a short pause to recover from his astonishment. + </p> + <p> + The mate nodded. + </p> + <p> + "Glass falling, sky hazy." + </p> + <p> + "Is the glass falling? I am ashamed to say I have not looked at it for the + past twenty-four hours. It has stuck so long at the same point that I have + quite ceased to look at it two or three times a day as I usually do." + </p> + <p> + "It has not fallen much, but it is sinking." + </p> + <p> + The captain got up from the table, and went to look at the glass. + </p> + <p> + "You are right, it has fallen a good eighth; but that may mean a change of + wind. Did you notice any change, Mr. Prendergast?" + </p> + <p> + "No, I can't say that I did. I looked up, as a sailor always does, when I + was on deck this morning, but it was clear enough then, and I have not + noticed it particularly since." + </p> + <p> + But when they went up on deck half an hour later both agreed that the mate + was right. The change overhead was slight, but away to the west a dull + reddish mist seemed to obscure the horizon. + </p> + <p> + "We will get the upper sails off at once, Mr. Johnson. These storms come + so suddenly off the coast that it is as well to lose no time in shortening + sail when one sees any indication of such a change." + </p> + <p> + The mate at once gave the necessary orders. The sailors started up with + looks of surprise. + </p> + <p> + "Look sharp, men!" the mate said. "We shall have wind, and plenty of it. + It will be here before long." + </p> + <p> + The men, who were by no means sorry for a spell of work after going so + long without shifting sail or tack, worked hard, and the white sheets of + canvas were soon snugly furled. By this time all the sailors who had been + to sea for any time recognized the utility of their work. The low bank had + risen and extended the whole width of the western horizon. + </p> + <p> + "What do you think, Mr. Prendergast? Have we got enough off her?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't know about your storms here, Captain; but if it were in the + Levant I should get every stitch of canvas off her excepting + closely-reefed topsails, a storm jib, and fore stay-sail. The first burst + over, one can always shake out more canvas. However, you know these seas, + and I do not." + </p> + <p> + "I think you are right. These pamperos, as we call them, are not to be + trifled with." + </p> + <p> + "In that case there is no time to be lost, Captain, and with your + permission I will lend a hand." + </p> + <p> + "All hands take in sail!" the captain shouted. + </p> + <p> + The mate led the way up the starboard shrouds, while Harry, throwing off + his coat, mounted those to port, closely followed by Bertie. Five minutes' + hard work, and the <i>Para</i> was stripped for the struggle. + </p> + <p> + "That is a good job done," the skipper said to Harry as he reached the + deck. + </p> + <p> + "A very good job, sir. The wind may come, but we are prepared for it; + there is nothing like being ready in time." + </p> + <p> + "She is in good trim for it," said the captain, "not above two-thirds + laden, and as the wind is off the land, there is nothing to worry us + except the Falklands. I shall go outside them. Of course that will + lengthen the voyage, but with this westerly wind I should not care about + being between them and the mainland. You think the same, Mr. Prendergast?" + </p> + <p> + "I do, sir; they are a scattered group, and it would not be pleasant to + have them under lee." + </p> + <p> + It had grown sensibly darker, but the line of mist had not risen higher. + Harry remarked upon this. + </p> + <p> + "I almost doubt whether it is coming after all," he said. + </p> + <p> + The captain shook his head. + </p> + <p> + "It does not spread over the sky," he said, "because it is largely dust + blown off the land. After the first burst you will see that we shall have + a bright blue sky and a roaring wind, just as one gets it sometimes in an + easterly gale in the Channel. We shall have it in another five minutes, I + fancy. I don't think it will be very strong, or we should have had it here + before this." + </p> + <p> + It was not long before a dull, moaning sound was heard, the brown-red fog + changed its appearance, swirls of vapour seemed to dash out in front of + it, and the whole swelled and heaved as if it were being pushed forward by + some tremendous pressure in its rear. + </p> + <p> + The ship's head was pointing nearly east, the canvas hung down motionless, + and there was not a breath of wind. + </p> + <p> + "Hold on all!" the captain shouted. Half a minute later the billowly + clouds swept across the vessel, and a sudden darkness overspread them. + Then there was a glow of white light, a line of foam approached as fleet + as a race-horse, and with a shriek the gale was upon them. The vessel + shook from stem to stern as if she had struck against a rock, and her bow + was pressed down lower and lower until she seemed as if she were going to + dive head-foremost. But as she gathered way, her bow rose, and in a minute + she was flying along at some eighteen knots an hour. + </p> + <p> + "She is all right now, Mr. Prendergast," the captain said. "It is well we + stripped her so thoroughly, and that she is not heavily laden." + </p> + <p> + Four men had been placed at the wheel, and it needed all their strength to + keep her from yawing. In half an hour the sea began to get up, and the + captain laid her course south-east, which put the wind on her quarter. + </p> + <p> + "It is well we were not a degree or so farther south, Captain." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; it would have been as much as we could do to weather the Falklands; + for with this small amount of sail we should have made a terrible amount + of leeway. As it is, all is fair sailing." + </p> + <p> + The darkness gradually passed away, and in an hour after the gale had + struck her the <i>Para</i> was sailing under a bright blue sky. Although + but few points off the wind, she was lying down till her lee scuppers were + under water. The spray was flying over her sparkling in the sun; the + sailors were crouched under the weather bulwark, lashed to belaying-pins + and stanchions to prevent themselves from shifting down to leewards. Six + hours later it was evident that there was some slight diminution in the + force of the wind. + </p> + <p> + "She is going about fourteen knots now," the captain said; "we can head + her more to the south. We must be nearly abreast of the islands, and + according to my reckoning forty or fifty miles to the east of them." + </p> + <p> + It was now dark, and the watch was sent below. + </p> + <p> + "To-morrow morning we shall be able to get some more sail on her," the + master said, "and I hope by the next morning the squall will be over, for + we shall then have made our southing, and the wind will be right in our + teeth when we turn her head west. There is no saying which way it will + come when the squall dies out. What do you think, Johnson?" + </p> + <p> + "We are pretty sure to get it hot from one quarter or another," the man + said. "I should say most likely from the south." + </p> + <p> + "Except for the cold that would be better than west," Harry remarked. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, if it is not too strong; but it is likely to be strong. After such a + gale as we have had, it seldom settles down for some time. As like as not + there will be bad weather for the next month." + </p> + <p> + The next morning when Harry went on deck he saw that the reefs had been + shaken out of the topsails and the spanker hoisted. There was still a + fresh wind, but it had backed round more to the south, and there was so + sharp a nip in it that he went below and put on a pea-jacket. Then he + beckoned to Bertie, who was off duty, to join him on the poop. + </p> + <p> + "That has been a smart blow, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, but I had it worse than that the last time I came round the Horn. I + think we shall be shortening sail again before long. The clouds are + banking up to the south-west. She is a good sea-boat, isn't she?" + </p> + <p> + "She has behaved uncommonly well. We shall want all our clothes before + night, Bertie. It was May when we started, and it is nearly mid-winter + down here." + </p> + <p> + "There is one thing, we shan't have so much risk of coming across drifting + icebergs, most of them will be frozen up hard and fast down in the south. + They don't matter much when the weather is clear, but if it is thick one + has an awful time of it. On my first voyage it was like that, and I tell + you I didn't think I was going to see England again. We had some + desperately close shaves." + </p> + <p> + The wind speedily freshened, and by evening the ship was under + close-reefed canvas again. The clouds were flying fast overhead and the + air was thick. Before the evening watch was set the ship was brought round + on the other tack, and was running to the east of south. + </p> + <p> + "We will lie on this course till morning, Mr. Prendergast," said the + captain, "and then if the wind holds, I think we shall be able to make a + long leg and weather the Horn." + </p> + <p> + For six days the storm raged with unabated violence. The cold was intense, + the spray breaking over the bows froze as it fell, and the crew were + engaged for hours at a time in breaking up the masses of ice thus formed. + Harry had volunteered to take a watch in turn with the first and second + mates. The captain was almost continuously on deck. Twice they encountered + icebergs, and once in a driving snow-storm nearly ran foul of one. + Fortunately it was daylight, and the whole crew being on deck, they were + able to put the vessel about just in time. During this time the vessel had + only gained a few miles' westing. All on board were utterly exhausted with + the struggle against the bitter wind; their hands were sore and bleeding + through pulling upon frozen ropes, their faces inflamed, and their eyelids + so swollen and sore that they could scarcely see. Then the wind began to + abate, and more sail being got on the <i>Para</i>, she was able to lie her + course. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER III — AT LIMA + </h2> + <p> + Three days later the sky cleared, and the captain, getting an observation, + found that they had rounded the southernmost point of the Cape. Another + day and the <i>Para's</i> head was turned north, and a week later they + were running smoothly along before a gentle breeze, with the coast of + Chili twenty miles away. The heavy wraps had all been laid aside, and + although the air was still frosty, the crew felt it warm after what they + had endured. The upper spars and yards had all been sent up, and she was + now carrying a crowd of canvas. The mate had thawed out under the more + congenial surroundings. He had worked like a horse during the storm, + setting an example, whether in going aloft or in the work of clearing off + the ice from the bows, and even when his watch was relieved he seldom went + below. + </p> + <p> + "Well, I hope, Mr. Johnson, we shall sail together until you get your next + step," the captain said. "I could not wish for a better first officer." + </p> + <p> + "I want nothing better, sir. She is a fine ship, well manned and well + commanded. I begin to feel at home in her now; at first I didn't. I hate + changes; and though the last captain I sailed with was a surly fellow, we + got on very well together. I would rather sail with a man like that than + with a skipper who is always talking. I am a silent man myself, and am + quite content to eat my meal and enjoy it, without having to stop every + time I am putting my fork into my mouth to answer some question or other. + I was once six months up in the north without ever speaking to a soul. I + was whaling then, and a snow-storm came on when we were fast on to a fish. + It was twenty-four hours before it cleared off, and when it did there was + no ship to be seen. We were in an inlet at the time in Baffin's Bay. We + thought that the ship would come back, and we landed and hauled up the + boat. The ship didn't come back, and, as I learned long afterwards, was + never heard of again. I suppose she got nipped between two icebergs. + </p> + <p> + "Winter was coming on fast, and the men all agreed that they would rather + try and make their way south overland than stay there. I told them that + they were fools, but I admit that the prospect of a winter there was + enough to frighten any man. I did not like it myself, but I thought it was + wiser to remain there than to move. Some of the men went along the shore, + or out in the boat, and managed to kill several sea-cows. They made a + sledge, piled the meat on it, and started. + </p> + <p> + "Meanwhile I had been busy building a sort of hut. I piled great stones + against the foot of the cliffs, and turned the boat upside down to form a + roof. The men helped me to do that job the last thing before they started. + Then I blocked up the entrance, leaving only just room for me to crawl in + and out. The snow began to fall steadily three days after the others had + gone, and very soon covered my hut two feet deep. I melted the blubber of + the whale in the boat's baler, for we had towed the fish ashore. The first + potful or two I boiled over a few bits of drift-wood. After that it was + easy enough, as I unravelled some of the boat's rope, dipped it in the hot + blubber, and made a store of big candles. There was a lot of meat left on + the sea-cows, so I cut that up, froze it, and stowed as much as I could in + the hut. I was bothered about the rest, as I knew the bears were likely to + come down; but I found a ledge on the face of the perpendicular rock, and + by putting the boat's mast against it I was able to get up to it. Here I + piled, I should say, a ton of meat and blubber. Then I set to work and + collected some dried grass, and soon I had enough to serve as bed and + covers. It took me a month to do all this, and by that time winter was + down on me in earnest. I had spent my evenings in making myself, out of + the skins of the three cows, breeches, high boots, and a coat with a hood + over the head, and in order to make these soft I rubbed them with hot oil. + They were rough things, but I hoped that I might get a bear later on. + Fortunately the boat had two balers, for I required one in which to melt + the snow over the lamp. + </p> + <p> + "Well, sir, I lived there during that winter. I did not find it altogether + dull, for I had several bits of excitement. For a month or so bears and + wolves came down and fought over the carcass of the whale. When that was + eaten up they turned their attention to me, and over and over again they + tried to break in. They had better have left me alone, for though they + were strong enough to have pulled away the rocks that blocked the + entrance, they could not stand fire. As I had any amount of rope, I used + to soak it in rock-oil, set it on fire, and shove it out of the entrance. + Twice small bears managed to wriggle up the passage, but I had sharpened + the boat-hook and managed to kill them both. One skin made me a whole + suit, and the other a first-rate blanket. Not that it was ever + unpleasantly cold, for a couple of my big candles, and the thick coating + of snow over it, kept the place as warm as I cared for. Occasionally, when + the bears had cleared off, I went out, climbed the mast, and got fresh + supplies down. They had made desperate efforts to get at the meat, but the + face of the rock was luckily too smooth for them to get any hold. When + spring came and the ice broke up, I planted the mast on the top of the + cliff with the sail fastened as a flag, and a month after the sea was + clear a whaler came in and took me off. That was how I pretty well lost + the use of my tongue, and though I am better than I was, I don't use it + much now except on duty." + </p> + <p> + "That certainly accounts for it," Harry said; "you must have had an awful + time." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think I minded it very much, sir. Except when I was bothered by + the bears I slept a good lot. I think at first I used to talk out loud a + good deal. But I soon dropped that, though I used to whistle sometimes + when I was cooking the food. I don't think I should have held on so long + if I had only had the sea-cow flesh, but the bears made a nice change, and + I only wished that one or two more had managed to crawl in." + </p> + <p> + "I wonder you were able to kill them with a boat-hook." + </p> + <p> + "I didn't, sir. You know every whaler carries an axe to cut the line if + necessary, and I was able to split their skulls as they crawled in before + they could get fairly on to their feet and use their paws. I was getting + very weak with scurvy towards the end; but as soon as the snow melted + plants began to shoot, and I was able to collect green stuff, so that I + was nearly well by the time I was picked up." + </p> + <p> + The weather continued fine all the time they were coasting up the Chilian + coast. They were a week at Valparaiso getting out the cargo they had + brought for that town, and did some trading at smaller ports; but at last, + just four months after leaving England, they dropped anchor off Callao. + "Well, it has been a jolly voyage, Harry," his brother said as they were + rowed ashore, after a hearty farewell from the captain and the first + officer. + </p> + <p> + "I am glad you enjoyed it, Bertie. I was sorry all the time I hadn't taken + a passage for you aft." + </p> + <p> + "I am better pleased to have been at work; it would have been awfully slow + otherwise. The mates were both good fellows, and I got on well with the + other apprentices. I tried at first not to turn out on night watch, as I + was not obliged to do so, but I soon gave it up; it seemed disgusting to + be lying there when the others had to turn out. It has been a jolly + voyage, but I am glad that we are here at last, and are going to set to + work in search of treasures." + </p> + <p> + "I had begun to think that we should not get on shore to-day," Harry said + as they neared the landing-place. "What with three hours' waiting for the + medical officer, and another three for that bumptious official whom they + call the port officer, and without whose permission no one is allowed to + land, I think everyone on board was so disgusted that we should have liked + nothing better than to pitch the fellow overboard. It was rather amusing + to watch all those boatmen crowding round shouting the praises of their + own craft and running down the others. But a little of it goes a long way. + It is the same pretty nearly at every port I have entered. Boatmen are + harpies of the worst kind. It is lucky that we had so little baggage; a + tip of a couple of dollars was enough to render the custom-house officer + not only civil but servile." + </p> + <p> + As they mounted the steps they were assailed by a motley crowd, half of + whom struggled to get near them to hold out their hands for alms, while + the other half struggled and fought for the right of carrying their + baggage. Accustomed to such scenes, Harry at once seized upon two of them, + gave them the portmanteaux, and, keeping behind them, pushed them through + the crowd, telling them to lead the way to the hotel that the captain had + recommended as being the least filthy in the place. They crossed a square + covered with goods of all kinds. There were long rows of great jars filled + with native spirit, bales of cinchona bark, piles of wheat from Chili, + white and rose-coloured blocks of salt, pyramids of unrefined sugar, and a + block of great bars of silver; among these again were bales and boxes + landed from foreign countries, logs of timber, and old anchors and chains. + Numbers of people who appeared to have nothing to do sauntered about or + sat on logs. In odd corners were native women engaged in making the + picanties upon which the poor largely exist; these were composed of fresh + and salt meat, potatoes, crabs, the juice of bitter oranges, lard, salt, + and an abundance of pepper pods. + </p> + <p> + "That is the sort of thing we shall have to eat, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I should not mind if I had not got to look on at the making; they + smell uncommonly good." + </p> + <p> + The hotel was larger and even more dirty than the captain's description + had led them to expect. However, the dinner that was served to them was + better than they had looked for, and being very hungry after their long + wait, they did full justice to it. + </p> + <p> + "It might have been a good deal worse, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + "I should think so; after four months of salt junk it is splendid!" + </p> + <p> + A cup of really good coffee, followed by a little glass of native spirits, + added to their satisfaction. They had hesitated before whether to push on + at once to Lima or wait there till next morning. Their meal decided them—they + would start at daybreak, so as to get to Lima before the sun became really + hot. Harry asked the landlord to bargain for two riding mules and one for + baggage to be ready at that hour, and they then strolled out to view the + place, although Bertie assured his brother that there was nothing whatever + to see in it. + </p> + <p> + "That may be, Bertie; but we are not going to begin by being lazy. There + is always something to see in foreign lands by those who keep their eyes + open." + </p> + <p> + After an hour's walk Harry was inclined to think that his brother was + right. The houses were generally constructed of canes, plastered with mud, + and painted yellow. As the result of earthquakes, scarce a house stood + upright—some leaned sideways, and looked as if they were going to + topple over into the road; while others leaned back, as if, were you to + push against them, they would collapse and crush the inmates. + </p> + <p> + Their night was not a pleasant one. The beds were simple, consisting only + of hides stretched across wooden frames, but, as they very speedily found, + there were numerous other inhabitants. They therefore slept but little, + and were heartily glad when the first gleam of dawn appeared. + </p> + <p> + Slipping on their clothes, they ran down to the shore and had a bath. By + the time they returned breakfast was ready—coffee, fish, and eggs. + The mules did not appear for another hour, by which time their patience + was all but exhausted. The portmanteaux were speedily strapped on to the + back of the baggage mule, and they mounted the two others. The muleteer + had brought one for himself, and, fastening the baggage animal behind it, + they started. + </p> + <p> + It was six miles to Lima, but as the city is five hundred and twelve feet + above the sea, the ascent was steady and somewhat steep. The road was + desperately bad, and the country uninteresting, being for the most part + dried up. Occasionally they saw great mounds of adobe bricks, the remains + of the ancient habitations. As they neared the town vegetation became + general, small canals irrigating the country. Here were fruit and + vegetable gardens, with oranges, plantains, vines, and flowers. + </p> + <p> + Passing through a gate in the walls they entered the town, which afforded + a pleasant contrast to the squalid misery of Callao. The city, however, + could not be called imposing; the houses were low and irregular, + fantastically painted in squares or stripes, and almost all had great + balconies shut in with trellis-work. + </p> + <p> + Few of the houses had any windows towards the street, the larger ones + being constructed with a central courtyard, into which the rooms all + opened. The streets were all built at right angles, the principal ones + leading from the grand square, in which stood the cathedral and the palace + of the Spanish viceroys, the other sides consisting of private houses, + with shops and arcades below them. The hotel to which they had been + recommended was a large building with a courtyard, with dining and other + rooms opening from it, and above them the bedrooms. In comparison with the + inn at Callao it was magnificent, but in point of cleanliness it left a + great deal to be desired. After settling themselves in their room they + went out. The change in temperature since they had left Callao had been + very great. + </p> + <p> + "The first thing to do, Bertie, is to buy ourselves a couple of good + ponchos. You see all the natives are wearing them." + </p> + <p> + "We certainly want something of the sort, Harry. I thought it was heat + that we were going to suffer from, but it seems just the other way. To + judge from the temperature we might be in Scotland, and this damp mist + chills one to the bone." + </p> + <p> + "I am not much surprised, for of course I got the subject up as much as I + could before starting; and Barnett told me that Lima was altogether an + exceptional place, and that while it was bright and warm during the winter + months, from May till November on the plains only a few miles away, even + in the summer months there was almost always a clammy mist at Lima, and + that inside the house as well as outside everything streamed with + moisture. He said that this had never been satisfactorily accounted for. + Some say that it is due to the coldness of the river here—the Rimac—which + comes down from the snowy mountains. Others think that the cold wind that + always blows down the valley of the river meets the winds from the sea + here, and the moisture contained in them is thus precipitated. I believe + that a few miles higher up we shall get out of this atmosphere altogether. + Still, the ponchos will be very useful, for it will be really cold up in + the mountains. They serve for cloaks in the daytime and blankets at night. + The best are made of the wool of the guanacos, a sort of llama. Their wool + is very fine, and before we start we will get two of coarser wool to use + as blankets to sleep on, while we have the finer ones to cover us." + </p> + <p> + There was no difficulty in finding a shop with the goods they wanted, and + the prices, even of the best, were very moderate. They next bought two + soft felt hats with broad brims. + </p> + <p> + "That is ever so much more comfortable. We will wait until to-morrow + before we begin what we may call business, Bertie. Of course I shall + deliver the other letters of introduction that Mr. Barnett gave me; but + the principal one—that to his former muleteer—is more + important than all put together. If anything has happened to him, there is + an end of any chance whatever of finding treasure. Of course he may have + moved away, or be absent on a journey with his mules, in which case we + shall have either to follow him or wait for his return." + </p> + <p> + "That would be a frightful nuisance." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; still, it is one of the things that we foresaw might happen." + </p> + <p> + "I vote we go at once, Harry, and see if he is here." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think we shall find him here; for Barnett said that he lived in + the village of Miraflores, five miles away on the north, and that if he is + not there, Señor Pasquez, to whom I have a letter, will be likely to tell + me where he is to be found, for he is often employed by him. However, I am + as anxious as you to see him. As it is only eleven o'clock yet, there is + no reason why we should not go to Miraflores. They will get mules for us + at the hotel, and tell us which road to take." + </p> + <p> + It was not necessary, however, to go into the hotel, for when they + returned, two or three men with mules were waiting to be hired. They + engaged two animals, and as the man of whom they hired them had a third, + and he was ready to accompany them for a small fee, they agreed to take + him with them. + </p> + <p> + Before they were a mile out of the town the mist cleared off and the sun + shone brightly. The heat, however, was by no means too great to be + pleasant. Miraflores was a charming village, or rather small town, + nestling among gardens and orchards. + </p> + <p> + "I want to find a muleteer named Dias Otero," Harry said to their guide as + they rode into the place. + </p> + <p> + "I know him well," he said. "Everyone about here knows Dias. His wife was + a cousin of my mother's." + </p> + <p> + "Do you know whether he is at home now?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor; I saw him in Lima three days ago. He had just come down from + the mountains. He had been away two months, and certainly will not have + started again so soon. Shall I lead you to his house at once?" + </p> + <p> + "Do so; it is to see him that I have come to this town. He worked for a + long time with a friend of mine some years ago, and I have brought a + message from him. I may be some time talking with him, so when I go in you + can tie up your mules for a while." + </p> + <p> + "That is his house," the man said presently. + </p> + <p> + It lay in the outskirts of the town, and was neater than the generality of + houses, and the garden was a mass of flowers. They dismounted, handed over + the mules to their owner, and walked to the door. An Indian of some + five-and-forty years came out as they did so. + </p> + <p> + "Are you Dias Otero?" Harry asked. + </p> + <p> + "The same, señor." + </p> + <p> + "I have just arrived from England, and bring a letter to you from Señor + Barnett, with whom you travelled for two or three years some time ago." + </p> + <p> + The man's face lit up with pleasure. "Will you enter, señor. Friends of + Señor Barnett may command my services in any way. It is a delight to hear + from him. He writes to me sometimes, but in these troubles letters do not + always come. I love the señor; there never was a kinder master. He once + saved my life at the risk of his own. Is there any hope of his coming out + again?" + </p> + <p> + "I do not think so, Dias. He is strong and well, but I do not think he is + likely to start again on a journey of exploration. He is my greatest + friend. My brother and I were left under his charge when we were young, + and he has been almost a father to us. It is he who has sent us out to + you. Here is his letter." + </p> + <p> + "Will you read it to me, señor. I cannot read; I am always obliged to get + somebody to read my letters, and write answers for me." + </p> + <p> + The letter was of course in Spanish, and Harry read: + </p> + <p> + "Dear friend Dias, + </p> + <p> + "I am sending out to you a gentleman, Mr. Prendergast, an officer of the + British Navy, in whom I am deeply interested. His brother accompanies him. + I beg that you will treat them as you would me, and every service you can + render him consider as rendered to myself. From a reason which he will no + doubt explain to you in time, it is of the deepest importance to him that + he should grow rich in the course of the next two years. He asked my + advice, and I said to him, 'There is no one I know of who could possibly + put you in the way of so doing better than my friend Dias Otero. I believe + it is in his power to do so if he is willing.' I also believe that for my + sake you will aid him. He will place himself wholly in your hands. He does + not care what danger he runs, or what hardships he has to go through in + order to attain his purpose. I know that I need not say more to you. He + has two years before him; long before that I am sure you will be as + interested in him as you were in me. He has sufficient means to pay all + expenses of travel for the time he will be out there. I know that you are + descended from nobles of high rank at the court of the Incas when the + Spaniards arrived, and that secrets known to but few were passed down from + father to son in your family. If you can use any of those secrets to the + advantage of my friend, I pray you most earnestly to do so. I trust that + this letter will find you and your good wife in health. Had I been ten + years younger I would have come out with my friends to aid them in their + adventure, but I know that in putting them into your hands I shall be + doing them a vastly greater service than I could do were I able to come in + person." + </p> + <p> + When Harry ceased, the Indian sat for some time without speaking, then he + said: + </p> + <p> + "It is a matter that I must think over, señor. It is a very grave one, and + had any other man than Señor Barnett asked this service of me no money + could have tempted me to assent to it. It is not only that my life would + be in danger, but that my name would be held up to execration by all my + people were I to divulge the secret that even the tortures of the + Spaniards could not wring from us. I must think it over before I answer. I + suppose you are staying at the Hotel Morin; I will call and see you when I + have thought the matter over. It is a grave question, and it may be three + or four days before I can decide." + </p> + <p> + "I thank you, Dias; but there is no occasion for you to give a final + decision now. Whether or no, we shall travel for a while, and I trust that + you will go with us with your mules and be our guide, as you did to Mr. + Barnett. It will be time enough when you know us better to give us a final + answer; it is not to be expected that even for Señor Barnett's sake you + would do this immense service for strangers, therefore I pray you to leave + the matter open. Make arrangements for your mules and yourself for a three + months' journey in the mountains, show us what there is to see of the gold + and silver placers, and the quicksilver mines at Huanuco. At the end of + that time you will know us and can say whether you are ready to aid us in + our search." + </p> + <p> + The native bowed his head gravely. + </p> + <p> + "I will think it over," he said; "and now, señors, let us put that aside. + My wife has been busy since you entered in preparing a simple meal, and I + ask you to honour me by partaking of it." + </p> + <p> + "With pleasure, Dias." + </p> + <p> + It consisted of <i>puchero</i>, a stew consisting of a piece of beef, + cabbage, sweet-potatoes, salt pork, sausage-meat, pigs' feet, yuccas, + bananas, quinces, peas, rice, salt, and an abundance of Chili peppers. + This had been cooked for six hours and was now warmed up. Two bottles of + excellent native wine, a flask of spirits, and some water were also put on + the table. The Indian declined to sit down with them, saying that he had + taken a meal an hour before. + </p> + <p> + While they ate he chatted with them, asking questions of their voyage and + telling them of the state of things in the country. + </p> + <p> + "It is always the same, señors, there is a revolution and two or three + battles; then either the president or the one who wants to be president + escapes from the country or is taken and shot, and in a day or two there + is a fresh pronunciamiento. We thought that when the Spaniards had been + driven out we should have had peace, but it is not so; we have had San + Martin, and Bolivar, and Aguero, and Santa Cruz, and Sucre. Bolivar again + finally defeated the Spaniards at Ayacucho. Rodil held possession of + Callao castle, and defended it until January of this year. We in the + villages have not suffered—those who liked fighting went out with + one or other of the generals; some have returned, others have been killed—but + Lima has suffered greatly. Sometimes the people have taken one side, + sometimes the other, and though the general they supported was sometimes + victorious for a short time, in the end they suffered. Most of the old + Spanish families perished; numbers died in the castle of Callao, where + many thousands of the best blood of Lima took refuge, and of these + well-nigh half died of hunger and misery before Rodil surrendered." + </p> + <p> + "But does not this make travelling very unsafe?" + </p> + <p> + The Indian shrugged his shoulders. + </p> + <p> + "Peru is a large country, señor, and those who want to keep out of the way + of the armies and lighting can do so; I myself have continued my + occupation and have never fallen in with the armies. That is because the + fighting is principally in the plains, or round Cuzco; for the men do not + go into the mountains except as fugitives, as they could not find food + there for an army. It is these fugitives who render the road somewhat + unsafe; starving men must take what they can get. They do not interfere + with the great silver convoys from Potosi or other mines—a loaf of + bread is worth more than a bar of silver in the mountains—but they + will plunder persons coming down with goods to the town or going up with + their purchases. Once or twice I have had to give up the food I carried + with me, but I have had little to grumble at, and I do not think you need + trouble yourself about them; we will take care to avoid them as far as + possible." + </p> + <p> + After chatting for an hour they left the cottage, and, mounting their + mules, returned to Lima. + </p> + <p> + "I think he will help us, Harry," Bertie said as soon as they set out. + </p> + <p> + "I think so too, but we must not press him to begin with. Of course there + is a question too as to how far he can help us. He may know vaguely where + the rich mines once existed; but you must remember that they have been + lost for three hundred years, and it may be impossible for even a man who + has received the traditions as to their positions to hit upon the precise + spot. The mountains, you see, are tremendous; there must be innumerable + ravines and gorges among them. It is certain that nothing approaching an + accurate map can ever have been made of the mountains, and I should say + that in most cases the indications that may have been given are very + vague. They would no doubt have been sufficient for those who lived soon + after the money was hidden, and were natives of that part of the country + and thoroughly acquainted with all the surroundings, but when the + information came to be handed down from mouth to mouth during many + generations, the local knowledge would be lost, and what were at first + detailed instructions would become little better than vague legends. You + know how three hundred years will alter the face of a country—rocks + roll down the hills, torrents wash away the soil, forests grow or are + cleared away. I believe with you that the Indian will do his best, but I + have grave doubts whether he will be able to locate any big thing." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you don't take a very cheerful view of things, Harry; you certainly + seemed more hopeful when we first started." + </p> + <p> + "Yes. I don't say I am not hopeful still, but it is one thing to plan out + an enterprise at a distance and quite another when you are face to face + with its execution. As we have come down the coast, and seen that great + range of mountains stretching along for hundreds of miles, and we know + that there is another quite as big lying behind it, I have begun to + realize the difficulties of the adventures that we are undertaking. + However, we shall hear, when Dias comes over to see us, what he thinks of + the matter. I fancy he will say that he is willing to go with us and help + us as far as he can, but that although he will do his best he cannot + promise that he will be able to point out, with anything like certainty, + the position of any of the old mines." + </p> + <p> + Next day they called on Señor Pasquez, who received them very cordially. + </p> + <p> + "So you are going to follow the example of Señor Barnett and spend some + time in exploring the country and doing some shooting. Have you found + Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, and I think he will go with us, though he has not given a + positive answer." + </p> + <p> + "You will be fortunate if you get him; he is one of the best-known + muleteers in the country, and if anyone comes here and wants a guide Dias + is sure to be the first to be recommended. If he goes with you he can give + you much useful advice; he knows exactly what you will have to take with + you, the best districts to visit for your purpose, and the best way of + getting there. For the rest, I shall be very happy to take charge of any + money you may wish to leave behind, and to act as your banker and cash any + orders you may draw upon me. I will also receive and place to your account + any sums that may be sent you from England." + </p> + <p> + "That, sir, is a matter which Mr. Barnett advised me to place in your + hands. After making what few purchases we require, and taking fifty pounds + in silver, I shall have two hundred and fifty pounds to place in your + hands. Mr. Barnett will manage my affairs in my absence, and will send to + you fifty pounds quarterly." + </p> + <p> + "You will find difficulty in spending it all in two years," the merchant + said with a smile. "If you are content to live on what can be bought in + the country, it costs very little; and as for the mules, they can + generally pick up enough at their halting-places to serve them, with a + small allowance of grain. You can hire them cheaply, or you can buy them. + The latter is cheaper in the end, but you cannot be sure of getting mules + accustomed to mountains, and you would therefore run the risk of their + losing their foothold, and not only being dashed to pieces but destroying + their saddles and loads. However, if you secure the services of Dias + Otero, you will get mules that know every path in the mountains. He is + famous for his animals, and he himself is considered the most trusty + muleteer here; men think themselves lucky in obtaining his services. I + would send him with loads of uncounted gold and should be sure that there + would not be a piece missing." + </p> + <p> + Next day Dias came to the hotel. + </p> + <p> + "I have thought it over, señor," he said. "I need not say that were it + only ordinary service, instead of exploring the mountains, I should be + glad indeed to do my best for a friend of Señor Barnett; but as to the + real purpose of your journey I wish, before making any arrangement, that + the matter should be thoroughly understood. I have no certain knowledge + whatever as to any of the lost mines, still less of any hidden treasures; + but I know all the traditions that have passed down concerning them. I + doubt whether any Indians now possess a certain knowledge of these things. + For generations, no doubt, the secrets were handed down from father to + son, and it is possible that some few may still know of these places; but + I doubt it. Think of the hundreds and thousands of our people who have + been killed in battle, or died as slaves in the mines, and you will see + that numbers of those to whom the secrets were entrusted must have taken + their knowledge to the grave with them. + </p> + <p> + "In each generation the number of those who knew the particulars of these + hiding-places must have diminished. Few now can know more than I do, yet I + am sure of nothing. I know generally where the mines were situated and + where some treasures were concealed, and what knowledge I have I will + place at your service; but so great a care was used in the concealment of + the entrances to the mines, so carefully were the hiding-places of the + treasures chosen, and so cunningly concealed, that, without the surest + indications and the most minute instructions, we might search for years, + as men indeed have done ever since the Spanish came here, without finding + them. I am glad that I can lay my hand upon my heart and say, that + whatever may have been possessed by ancestors of mine, no actual details + have ever come down to me; for, had it been so, I could not have revealed + them to you. We know that all who were instructed in these were bound by + the most terrible oaths not to reveal them. Numbers have died under the + torture rather than break those oaths; and even now, were one of us to + betray the secrets that had come down to him, he would be regarded as + accursed. No one would break bread with him, every door would be closed + against him, and if he died his body would rot where it fell. But my + knowledge is merely general, gathered not only from the traditions known + to all our people, but from confidences made by one member of our family + to another. Full knowledge was undoubtedly given to some of them; but all + these must have died without initiating others into the full particulars. + Such knowledge as I have is at your disposal. I can take you to the + localities, I can say to you, 'Near this place was a great mine,' but + unless chance favours you you may search in vain." + </p> + <p> + "That is quite as much as I had hoped for, Dias, and I am grateful for + your willingness to do what you can for us, just as you did for Señor + Barnett." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IV — A STREET FRAY + </h2> + <p> + "Now, señor," Dias said, "as we have settled the main point, let us talk + over the arrangements. What is the weight of your baggage?" + </p> + <p> + "Not more than a mule could carry. Of course we shall sling our rifles + over our shoulders. We have a good stock of ammunition for them and for + our pistols. We shall each take two suits of clothes besides those we + wear, and a case of spirits in the event of accident or illness. We shall + each have three flannel shirts, stockings, and so on, but certainly + everything belonging to us personally would not mount up to more than a + hundred and fifty pounds. We should, of course, require a few cooking + utensils, tin plates, mugs, and cups. What should we need besides these?" + </p> + <p> + "A tent and bedding, señor. We should only have, at the start, to carry + such provisions as we could not buy. When we are beyond the range of + villages in the forests we might often be weeks without being able to buy + anything; still, we should probably be able to shoot game for food. We + should find fruits, but flour we shall have to take with us from the last + town we pass through before we strike into the mountains, and dried meat + for an emergency; and it would be well to have a bag of grain, so that we + could give a handful or so to each of the mules. I am glad you have + brought some good spirits—we shall need it in the swamps by the + rivers. Your tea and coffee will save your having to buy them here, but + you will want some sugar. We must take two picks and a shovel, a hammer + for breaking up ore, a small furnace, twenty crucibles and bellows, and a + few other things for aiding to melt the ore. You would want for the + journey five baggage mules, and, of course, three riding mules. I could + hardly manage them, even with aid from you, in very bad places, and I + would rather not take any strange man with me on such business as we have + in hand. But some assistance I must have, and I will take with me my + nephew José. He has lost his father, and I have taken him as my assistant, + and shall train him to be a guide such as I am. He is but fifteen, but he + already knows something of his business, and such an expedition will teach + him more than he would learn in ten years on the roads." + </p> + <p> + "That would certainly be far better than having a muleteer whom you could + not trust, Dias. My brother and myself will be ready to lend you a hand + whenever you want help of any kind. We have not had any experience with + mules, but sailors can generally turn their hands to anything. Now, how + about the eight mules?" + </p> + <p> + "I have five of my own, as good mules as are to be found in the province; + we shall have to buy the three others for riding. Of course I have saddles + and ropes." + </p> + <p> + "But you will want four for riding." + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; yours and the one I ride will be enough. José at times will + take my place, and can when he likes perch on one of the most lightly + laden animals." + </p> + <p> + "How much will the riding mules cost?" + </p> + <p> + "I can get fair ones for about fifty dollars apiece; trade is slack at + present owing to the troubles, and there are many who would be glad to get + rid of one or two of their train." + </p> + <p> + "And now, Dias, we come to the very important question, what are we to pay + you for yourself, your nephew, and the five mules—say by the month?" + </p> + <p> + "I have been thinking the matter over, señor—I have talked it over + with my wife"—he paused for a moment, and then said: "She wishes to + go with me, señor." + </p> + <p> + Harry opened his eyes in surprise. "But surely, Dias, you could not think + of taking her on such an expedition, where, as you say yourself, you may + meet with many grave dangers and difficulties?" + </p> + <p> + "A woman can support them as well as a man," Dias said quietly. "My wife + has more than once accompanied me on journeys when I have been working on + contract. We have been married for fifteen years, and she has no children + to keep her at home. She is accustomed to my being away for weeks. This + would be for months, perhaps for two years. I made no secret to her that + we might meet with many dangers. She says they will be no greater for her + than for me. At first she tried to dissuade me from going for so long a + time; but when I told her that you were sent me by the gentleman who saved + my life a year after I married her, and that he had recommended you to me + as standing to him almost in the relation of a son, and I therefore felt + bound to carry his wishes into effect, and so to pay the debt of gratitude + that I owed him, she agreed at once that it was my duty to go and do all + in my power for you, and she prayed me to take her with me. I said that I + would put it before you, señor, and that I must abide by your decision." + </p> + <p> + "By all means bring her with you, Dias. If you and she are both willing to + share the dangers we should meet with, surely we cannot object in any + way." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, señor; you will find her useful. You have already seen that + she can cook well; and if we have José to look after the animals when we + are searching among the hills, you will find it not unpleasant, when we + return of an evening, to find a hot supper ready for us." + </p> + <p> + "That is quite true, and I am sure we shall find your wife a great + acquisition to our party. The only difference will be, that instead of one + large tent we must have two small ones—it does not matter how small, + so long as we can crawl into them and they are long enough for us to lie + down. And now about payment?" + </p> + <p> + "I shall not overcharge you," Dias said with a smile. "If my wife had + remained behind I must have asked for money to maintain her while we were + away. It would not have been much, for she has her garden and her house, + and there is a bag hid away with my savings, so that if she had been + widowed she could still live in the house until she chose someone else to + share it with her; she is but thirty-two, and is as comely as when I first + married her. However, as she is going with us, there will be no need to + trouble about her. If misfortune comes upon us and I am killed, it is + likely she will be killed also. We shall have no expenses on the journey, + as you will pay for food for ourselves and the animals. You will remember, + señor, that I make this journey not as a business matter—no money + would buy from me any information that I may have as to hidden mines or + treasures,—I do it to repay a debt of gratitude to my preserver, Don + Henry Barnett, and partly because I am sure that I shall like you and your + brother as I did him. I shall aid you as far as lies in my power in the + object for which you are undertaking this journey. Therefore until it is + finished there shall be no talk about payment. You may have many expenses + beyond what you calculate upon. If we meet with no success, and return to + Lima empty-handed, I shall have lost nothing. I shall have had no expenses + at home, my wife and I will have fed at your expense, and José will have + learned so much that he would be as good a guide as any in the country. + You could then give me the three mules you will buy, to take the place of + any of mine that may have perished on the journey, and should you have + them to spare, I will take a hundred dollars as a <i>bueno mano</i>. If we + succeed, and you discover a rich mine or a hidden treasure, you shall then + pay me what it pleases you. Is it a bargain?" + </p> + <p> + "The bargain you propose is ridiculously one-sided, Dias, and I don't see + how I could possibly accept the offer you make to me." + </p> + <p> + "Those are my terms, señor," Dias said simply, "to take or to leave." + </p> + <p> + "Then I cannot but accept them, and I thank you most heartily;" and he + held out his hand to Dias, and the Indian grasped it warmly. + </p> + <p> + "When do you propose we shall start?" + </p> + <p> + "Will this day week suit you, señor? There are the mules to buy, and the + tents to be made—they should be of vicuña skin with the wool still + on, which, with the leather kept well oiled, will keep out water. We shall + want them in the hills, but we shall sometimes find villages where we can + sleep in shelter." + </p> + <p> + "Not for us, Dias. Mr. Barnett has told me that the houses are for the + most part alive with fleas, and I should prefer to sleep in a tent, + however small, rather than lie in a bed on the floor of any one of them. + We don't want thick beds, you know—a couple of thicknesses of + well-quilted cotton, say an inch thick each, and two feet wide. You can + get these made for us, no doubt." + </p> + <p> + The Indian nodded. + </p> + <p> + "That would be the best for travel; the beds the Peruvian caballeros use + are very thick and bulky." + </p> + <p> + "You will want two for yourself and your wife, and two for José. By the + by, we shall want a tent for him." + </p> + <p> + Dias smiled. "It will not be necessary, señor; muleteers are accustomed to + sleep in the open air, and with two thick blankets, and a leathern + coverlet in case of rain, he will be more than comfortable. I shall have + five leather bags made to hold the beds and blankets. But the making of + the beds and tents will take some time—people do not hurry in Lima,—and + there will be the riding saddles and bridles to get, and the provisions. I + do not think we can be ready before another week. It will be well, then, + that you should, before starting away, visit the ruins of Pachacamac. All + travellers go there, and it will seem only natural that you should do so, + for there you will see the style of the buildings, and also the + explorations that were everywhere made by the Spaniards in search of + treasure." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Dias; then this day week we shall be ready to start. However, + I suppose I shall see you every day, and learn how you are getting on with + your preparations." + </p> + <p> + Bertie had been sitting at the window looking down into the street while + this conversation was going on. "Well, what is it all about?" he asked, + turning round as the Indian left the room. "Is it satisfactory?" + </p> + <p> + "More than satisfactory," his brother answered. "In the first place his + nephew, a lad of fifteen, who is training as a mule-driver, is going with + us, which is much better than getting an outsider; in the next place his + wife is going with us." + </p> + <p> + "Good gracious!" Bertie exclaimed, "what in the world shall we do with a + woman?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, I think we shall do very well with her, Bertie; but well or ill she + has to go. She will not let her husband go without her, which is natural + enough, considering how long we shall be away, and that the journey will + be a dangerous one. But really I think she will be an acquisition to the + party. She is bright and pretty, as you no doubt noticed, and what is of + more importance, she is a capital cook." + </p> + <p> + "She certainly gave us a good meal yesterday," Bertie said, "and though I + could rough it on anything, it is decidedly pleasanter to have a + well-cooked meal." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you see, that is all right." + </p> + <p> + "And how many mules are we to take?" + </p> + <p> + "Five for baggage, and three for riding. I have no doubt Dias's wife will + ride behind him, and the boy, when he wants to ride, will perch himself on + one of the baggage mules. Dias has five mules, and we shall only have to + buy the three for riding." + </p> + <p> + "What is it all going to cost, Harry?" Bertie said when his brother had + told him all the arrangements that had been made. "That is the most + important point after all." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you will be astonished when I tell you, Bertie, that if we don't + succeed in finding a treasure of any kind I shall only have to pay for the + three riding mules, and the expenses of food and so on, and a hundred + dollars." + </p> + <p> + "Twenty pounds!" Bertie said incredulously; "you are joking!" + </p> + <p> + "No, it is really so; the man said that he considered that in going with + me he is only fulfilling the obligation he is under to Mr. Barnett. Of + course I protested against the terms, and would have insisted upon paying + the ordinary prices, whatever they might be, for his services and the use + of his mules; but he simply said that those were the conditions on which + he was willing to go with me, and that I could take them or leave them, so + I had to accept. I can only hope that we may find some treasure, in which + case only he consented to accept proper payment for his services." + </p> + <p> + "Well, it is awfully good of him," Bertie said; "though really it doesn't + seem fair that we should be having the services of himself, his wife, his + boy, and his mules for nothing. There is one thing, it will be an extra + inducement to him to try and put us in the way of finding one of those + mines." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think so, Bertie; he said that not for any sum of money whatever + would he do what he is going to do, but simply from gratitude to Barnett. + It is curious how the traditions, or superstitions, or whatever you like + to call them, of the time of the Incas have continued to impress the + Indians, and how they have preserved the secrets confided to their + ancestors. No doubt fear that the Spaniards would force them to work in + the mines till they died has had a great effect in inducing them to + conceal the existence of these places from them. Now that the Spaniards + have been cleared out there is no longer any ground for apprehension of + that kind, but they may still feel that the Peruvians would get the + giant's share in any mine or treasure that might be found, and that the + Indians would, under one pretence or another, be defrauded out of any + share of it. It is not wonderful that it should be so considering how + these poor people have been treated by the whites, and it would really + seem that the way in which Spain has gone to the dogs is a punishment for + her cruelties in South America and the Islands. It may be said that from + the very moment when the gold began to flow the descent of Spain + commenced; in spite of the enormous wealth she acquired she fell gradually + from her position as the greatest power in Europe. + </p> + <p> + "In 1525, after the battle of Pavia, Spain stood at the height of her + power. Mexico was conquered by Cortez seven years before, Peru in 1531, + and the wealth of those countries began to flow into Spain in enormous + quantities, and yet her decline followed speedily. She was bearded by our + bucaneers among the Islands and on the western coast; the Netherlands + revolted, and after fierce fighting threw off her yoke; the battle of Ivry + and the accession of Henry of Navarre all but destroyed her influence in + France; the defeat of the Armada and the capture of Cadiz struck a fatal + blow both to her power on the sea and to her commerce, and within a + century of the conquest of Peru, Spain was already an enfeebled and + decaying power. It would almost seem that the discoveries of Columbus, + from which such great things were hoped, proved in the long run the + greatest misfortune that ever befell Spain." + </p> + <p> + "It does look like it, Harry; however, we must hope that whatever effect + the discovery of America had upon Portugal or Spain, it will make your + fortune." + </p> + <p> + Harry laughed. + </p> + <p> + "I hope so, Bertie, but it is as well not to be too hopeful. Still, I have + great faith in Dias, at any rate I feel confident that he will do all he + can; but he acknowledges that he knows nothing for certain. I am sure, + however, that he will be a faithful guide, and that though we may have a + rough time, it will not be an unpleasant one. Now, you must begin to turn + to account what Spanish you have learned during the voyage; I know you + have worked regularly at it while you have not been on duty." + </p> + <p> + "I have learned a good lot," Bertie said; "and I dare say I could ask for + anything, but I should not understand the answers. I can make out a lot of + that Spanish <i>Don Quixote</i> you got for me, but when Dias was talking + to you I did not catch a word of what he was saying. I suppose it will all + come in time." + </p> + <p> + "But you must begin at once. I warn you that when I am fairly off I shall + always talk to you in Spanish, for it would look very unsociable if we + were always talking together in English. If you ride or walk by the side + of the boy you will soon get on; and there will be Donna Maria for you to + chat away with, and from what we saw of her I should say she is sociably + inclined. In three months I have no doubt you will talk Spanish as well as + I do." + </p> + <p> + "It will be a horrid nuisance," Bertie grumbled; "but I suppose it has got + to be done." + </p> + <p> + Three days later Dias said he thought they might as well start the next + day to Pachacamac. + </p> + <p> + "We shall only want the three riding mules and one for baggage. Of course + we shall not take José or my wife. By the time we return everything will + be ready for us." + </p> + <p> + "I shall be very glad to be off, Dias. We know no one here except Señor + Pasquez; and although he has been very civil and has begged us to consider + his house as our own, he is of course busy during the day, and one can't + do above a certain amount of walking about the streets. So by all means + let us start to-morrow morning. We may as well go this time in the clothes + we wear, it will be time enough to put on the things we have bought when + we start in earnest." + </p> + <p> + Starting at sunrise, they rode for some distance through a fertile valley, + and then crossed a sandy plain until they reached the little valley of + Lurin, in which stand the ruins of Pachacamac. This was the sacred city of + the natives of the coast before their conquest by the Incas. During their + forty-mile ride Dias had told them something of the place they were about + to visit. Pachacamac, meaning "the creator of the world," was the chief + divinity of these early people, and here was the great temple dedicated to + him. The Incas after their conquest erected a vast Temple of the Sun, but + they did not attempt to suppress the worship of Pachacamac, and the two + flourished side by side until the arrival of the Spaniards. The wealth of + the temple was great; the Spaniards carried away among their spoils one + thousand six hundred and eighty-seven pounds of gold and one thousand six + hundred ounces of silver; but with all their efforts they failed to + discover the main treasure, said to have been no less than twenty-four + thousand eight hundred pounds of gold, which had been carried away and + buried before their arrival. + </p> + <p> + "If the Spaniards could not succeed in getting at the hiding-place, + although, no doubt, they tortured everyone connected with the temple to + make them divulge the secret, it is evident there is no chance for us," + Harry said. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, they made every effort; thousands of natives were employed in + driving passages through the terraces on which the temple stood. I believe + that they did find much treasure, but certainly not the great one they + were searching for. There is no tradition among our people as to the + hiding-place, for so many of the natives perished that all to whom the + secret was known must have died without revealing it to anybody. Had it + not been so, the Spaniards would sooner or later have learned it, for + although hundreds have died under torture rather than reveal any of the + hiding-places, surely one more faint-hearted than the rest would have + disclosed them. Certain it is that at Cuzco and other places they + succeeded in obtaining almost all the treasures buried there, though they + failed in discovering the still greater treasures that had been carried + away to be hidden in different spots. But Pachacamac was a small one in + comparison with Cuzco, and it was believed that the treasures had not been + carried far. Tradition has it that they were buried somewhere between this + town and Lima. Doubtless all concerned in the matter fled before the + Spaniards arrived, at any rate with all their cruelty the invaders never + discovered its position. The report that it was buried near may have been + set about to prevent their hunting for it elsewhere, and the gold may be + lying now somewhere in the heart of the mountains." + </p> + <p> + Harry Prendergast and his brother looked in astonishment at the massive + walls that rose around the eminence on which the temple had stood. The + latter had disappeared, but its situation could be traced on the plateau + buttressed by the walls. These were of immense thickness, and formed of + huge adobe bricks almost as hard as stone; even the long efforts of the + Spaniards had caused but little damage to them. The plateau rose some five + hundred feet above the sea, which almost washed one face of it. Half-way + up the hill four series of these massive walls, whose tops formed + terraces, stood in giant steps some fifty feet high. Here and there spots + of red paint could be seen, showing that the whole surface was originally + painted. The ascent was made by winding passages through the walls. On the + side of the upper area facing the sea could be seen the remains of a sort + of walk or esplanade, with traces of edifices of various kinds. On a hill + a mile and a half away were the remains of the Incas' temple and nunnery, + the style differing materially from that of the older building; it was + still more damaged than the temple on the hill by the searchers for + treasure. + </p> + <p> + Pachacamac was the most sacred spot in South America, vast numbers of + pilgrims came here from all points. The city itself had entirely + disappeared, covered deeply in sand, but for a long distance round, it + had, like the neighbourhood of Jerusalem and Mecca, been a vast cemetery, + and a small amount of excavation showed the tombs of the faithful, + occupied in most cases by mummies. + </p> + <p> + "We will ride across to the Incas' temple. There is not much to see there, + but it is as well that you should look at the vaults in which the + treasures were hid. There are similar places at Cuzco and several of the + other ruins." + </p> + <p> + "It may certainly be useful to see them," Harry agreed, and they rode + across the plain. Leaving their mules outside they entered the ruins. The + Indian led them into some underground chambers. He had brought a torch + with him, and this he now lit. + </p> + <p> + "You have to be careful or you might otherwise tumble into one of these + holes and break a limb; and in that case, if you were here by yourselves, + you would certainly never get out again." + </p> + <p> + They came upon several of these places. The openings were sometimes square + and sometimes circular, and had doubtless been covered with square stones. + They were dug out of the solid ground. For about six feet the sides of the + pit were perpendicular; in some it swelled out like a great vase with a + broad shoulder, in others it became a square chamber of some size. + </p> + <p> + "Some of these places were no doubt meant to store grain and other + provisions," the Indian said, "some were undoubtedly treasuries." + </p> + <p> + "Awkward places to find," Harry said; "one might spend a lifetime in + searching for them in only one of these temples." + </p> + <p> + "They were the last places we should think of searching," Dias said. "For + years the Spaniards kept thousands of men at work. I do not say that there + may not be some few places that have escaped the searchers, but what they + could not with their host of workers find certainly could not be found by + four or five men. It is not in the temples that the Incas' wealth has been + hidden, but in caves, in deep mountain gorges, and possibly in ruins on + the other side of the mountains where even the Spaniards never penetrated. + There are such places. I know of one to which I will take you if our + search fails elsewhere. It is near the sea, and yet there are not half a + dozen living men who have ever seen it, so strangely is it hidden. + Tradition says that it was not the work of the Incas, but of the people + before them. I have never seen it close. It is guarded, they say, by + demons, and no native would go within miles of it. The traditions are that + the Incas, when they conquered the land, found the place and searched it, + after starving out the native chief who had fled there with his followers + and family. Some say that they found great treasure there, others that + they discovered nothing; all agree that a pestilence carried off nearly + all those who had captured it. Others went, and they too died, and the + place was abandoned as accursed, and in time its very existence became + forgotten; though some say that members of the tribe have always kept + watch there, and that those who carelessly or curiously approached it have + always met with their death in strange ways. Although I am a Christian, + and have been taught to disbelieve the superstitions of my countrymen, I + would not enter it on any condition." + </p> + <p> + "If we happen to be near it I shall certainly take a close look at it," + Harry said with a laugh. "I don't fancy we should see anything that our + rifles and pistols would find invulnerable." + </p> + <p> + It was getting dark by the time they had finished their inspection of the + rooms, so, riding two or three miles away, they encamped in a grove up the + valley. Next morning they returned to Lima. Dias had given out that the + two white señors intended to visit all the ruined temples of the Incas, + and as other travellers had done the same their intention excited neither + surprise nor comment. + </p> + <p> + On the following evening after dark Harry and his brother were returning + from the house of Señor Pasquez. + </p> + <p> + "It is a pleasant house," Harry said; "the girls are pretty and nice, they + play and sing well, and are really charming. But what a contrast it was + the other morning when we went in there and accidentally ran against them + when we were going upstairs with their father, utterly untidy, and, in + fact, regular sluts—a maid of all work would look a picture of + neatness beside them." + </p> + <p> + Bertie was about to answer, when there was an outburst of shouts from a + wine-shop they were passing, and in a moment the door burst open and half + a dozen men engaged in a fierce conflict rushed out. Knives were flashing, + and it was evident that one man was being attacked by the rest. By the + light that streamed out of the open door they saw that the man attacked + was Dias. It flashed across Harry's mind that if this man was killed there + was an end to all hope of success in their expedition. + </p> + <p> + "Dash in to his rescue, Bertie," he cried; "but whatever you do, mind + their knives." + </p> + <p> + With a shout he sprang forward and struck to the ground a man who was + dodging behind Dias with uplifted knife, while Bertie leapt on to the back + of another, the shock throwing the man down face forward. Bertie was on + his feet in a moment, and brought the stick he carried with all his force + down on the man's head as he tried to rise. Then, springing forward again, + he struck another man a heavy blow on the wrist. The knife dropped from + the man's hand, and as he dashed with a fierce oath upon Bertie the stick + descended again, this time on his head, and felled him to the ground. In + the meantime one of the assailants had turned fiercely on Harry and aimed + a blow at him with his knife; but with the ease of a practised boxer Harry + stepped back, and before the man could again raise the knife he leaped in + and struck him a tremendous blow on the point of his chin. The fifth man + took to his heels immediately. The other four lay where they had fallen, + evidently fearing they would be stabbed should they try to get on to their + feet. + </p> + <p> + "Are you hurt, Dias?" Harry exclaimed. + </p> + <p> + "I have several cuts, señor, but none of them, I think, serious. You have + saved my life." + </p> + <p> + "Never mind that now, Dias. What shall we do with these fellows—hand + them over to the watch?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, that would be the last thing to do; we might be detained here + for months. I will take all their knives and let them go." + </p> + <p> + "Here are two of them," Bertie said, picking up those of the men he had + struck. + </p> + <p> + Dias stood over the man Harry had first knocked down, and with a fierce + whisper ordered him to give up his knife, which he did at once. The other + was still stupid from the effect of the blow and his fall, and Dias had + only to take his knife from his relaxed fingers. + </p> + <p> + "Now, señor, let us be going before anyone comes along." + </p> + <p> + "What was it all about, Dias?" Harry asked as he walked away. + </p> + <p> + "Many of the muleteers are jealous, señor, because I always get what they + consider the best jobs. I had gone into the wine-shop for a glass of + pulque before going round to see that the mules were all right. As I was + drinking, these men whispered together, and then one came up to me and + began to abuse me, and directly I answered him the whole of them drew + their knives and rushed at me. I was ready too, and wounded two of them as + I fought my way to the door. As I opened it one of them stabbed me in the + shoulder, but it was a slanting blow. Once out they all attacked me at + once, and in another minute you would have had to look for another + muleteer. 'Tis strange, señors, that you should have saved my life as Mr. + Barnett did. It was a great deed to risk your lives with no weapons but + your sticks against five ruffians with their knives." + </p> + <p> + "I did not use my stick," Harry said. "I am more accustomed to use my + fists than a stick, and can hit as hard with them, as you saw. But my + brother's stick turned out the most useful. He can box too, but cannot + give as heavy a blow as I can. Still, it was very lucky that I followed + your advice, and bought a couple of heavy sticks to carry with us if we + should go out after dark. Now you had better come to the hotel, and I will + send for a surgeon to dress your wound." + </p> + <p> + "It is not necessary, señor; my wife is waiting for me in my room, she + arrived this afternoon. Knife cuts are not uncommon affairs here, and she + knows quite enough to be able to bandage them." + </p> + <p> + "At any rate we shall have to put off our start for a few days." + </p> + <p> + "Not at all, señor; a bandage tonight and a few strips of plaster in the + morning will do the business. I shall be stiff for a few days, but that + will not interfere with my riding, and José will be able to load and + unload the mules, if you will give him a little assistance. Adios! and a + thousand thanks." + </p> + <p> + "That was a piece of luck, Bertie," Harry said when they had reached their + room in the hotel. "In the first place, because neither of us got a + scratch, and in the second, because it will bind Dias more closely to us. + Before, he was willing to assist us for Barnett's sake, now it will be for + our own also, and we may be quite sure that he will do his best for us." + </p> + <p> + "It is my first scrimmage," Bertie said, "and I must say that I thought, + as we ran in, that it was going to be a pretty serious one. We have + certainly come very well out of it." + </p> + <p> + "It was short and sharp," Harry laughed. "I have always held that the man + who could box well was more than a match for one with a knife who knew + nothing of boxing. One straight hit from the shoulder is sure to knock him + out of time." + </p> + <p> + Next morning Dias and his wife came up early. The former had one arm in a + sling. As they entered, the woman ran forward, and, throwing her arms + round Bertie, she kissed him on both cheeks. The lad was too much + surprised at this unexpected salute to return it, as his brother did when + she did the same to him. Then, drawing back, she poured out her thanks + volubly, the tears running down her cheeks. + </p> + <p> + "Maria asked me if she might kiss you," Dias said gravely when she + stopped. "I said that it was right that she should do so, for do we not + both owe you my life?" + </p> + <p> + "You must not make too much of the affair, Dias; four blows were struck, + and there was an end to it." + </p> + <p> + "A small matter to you, señor, but a great one to us. A Peruvian would not + interfere if he saw four armed men attacking one. He would be more likely + to turn down the next street, so that he might not be called as a witness. + It is only your countrymen who would do such things." + </p> + <p> + "And you still think that you will be ready to start the day after + to-morrow?" + </p> + <p> + "Quite sure, señor. My shoulder will be stiff and my arm in a sling for a + week, but muleteers think nothing of such trifles,—a kick from a + mule would be a much more serious affair." + </p> + <p> + "You don't think those rascals are likely to waylay us on the road, and + take their revenge?" + </p> + <p> + "Not they, señor. If you could do such things unarmed, what could you not + do when you had rifles and pistols? The matter is settled. They have not + been seriously hurt. If one of them had been killed I should be obliged to + be careful the next time I came here; as it is, no more will be said about + it. Except the two hurt in the wine-shop they will not even have a scar to + remind them of it. In two years they will have other things to think + about, if it is true that Colombia means to go to war with Chili." + </p> + <p> + "What is the quarrel about, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "The Colombians helped us to get rid of the Spaniards, but ever since they + have presumed a right to manage affairs here." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps nothing will come of it." + </p> + <p> + "Well, it is quite certain that there is no very good feeling between + Chili, Bolivia, Colombia, and Peru." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose they will be fighting all round some day?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, and it will interfere with my business. Certainly we are better off + than when the Spaniards were here; but the taxes are heavy, and things + don't go as people expected they would when we got rid of the Spaniards. + All the governments seem jealous of each other. I don't take any interest + in these matters except so far as they interfere with trade. If every man + would attend to his own affairs it would be better for us all." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose so, Dias; but one can hardly expect a country that has been so + many years governed by a foreign power to get accustomed all at once to + governing itself." + </p> + <p> + "Now, señor, I shall be glad if you will go with me and look at the stores + that are already collected. I think you will find that everything is + ready." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER V — AMONG THE MOUNTAIN + </h2> + <p> + Two days later the mules were brought round to the door at sunrise, and + Harry and his brother sallied out from the hotel, dressed for the first + time in the Peruvian costume. They were both warmly clothed. On their + heads were felt hats with broad brims, which could be pulled down and tied + over the ears, both for warmth and to prevent their being blown away by + the fierce winds that sweep down the gorges. A thick poncho of llama wool + fell from their shoulders to their knees, and loosely tied round their + necks were thick and brightly-coloured scarves. They wore high boots, and + carried large knives stuck in a strap below the knee. The rifles were + fastened at the bow of their saddles, and their wallets, with provisions + for the day, were strapped behind. By the advice of Dias each had in his + pocket a large pair of green goggles, to protect their eyes from the glare + of sun and snow. They tied these on before coming downstairs, and both + agreed that had they met unexpectedly in the street they would have passed + each other without the slightest recognition. + </p> + <p> + "It is a pity, Harry," Bertie said seriously, "that you did not have your + portrait taken to send home to a certain young lady. You see, she would + then have been able to hang it up in her room and worship it privately, + without anyone having the slightest idea that it was her absent lover." + </p> + <p> + "You young scamp," Harry said, "I will pull your ears for you." + </p> + <p> + "If you attempt anything of the sort, I shall tie the brim of my hat + tightly over them. I really think it is very ungrateful of you not to take + my advice in the spirit in which I gave it." + </p> + <p> + "If you intend to go on like this, Bert, I shall leave you behind." + </p> + <p> + "You can't do it." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, yes, I can! I might give you in charge for some crime or other; and + in lack of evidence, the expenditure of a few dollars would, I have no + doubt, be sufficient to induce the judge, magistrate, or whatever they + call him, to give you six months' imprisonment." + </p> + <p> + "Then you are an unnatural brother, and I will make no more suggestions + for your good." + </p> + <p> + So they had come downstairs laughing, though feeling a little shy at their + appearance as they issued out of the courtyard. Speedily, however, they + gained courage as they saw that passers-by paid no attention to them. + </p> + <p> + They had spent the previous afternoon in packing the bundles, in which + every item was put away so that it could be got at readily, and in making + sure that nothing had been omitted. The five baggage mules were fastened + one behind another, and José stood at the head of the leading one. As they + came out Dias swung his wife on to a cushion strapped behind his saddle, + and mounted himself before her. Harry and his brother climbed into theirs. + They had both refused to put on the heavy and cruel spurs worn by the + Peruvians, but had, at the earnest request of the Indian, put them in + their saddle-bags. + </p> + <p> + "You will want them," he said. "You need not use them cruelly, but you + must give your mules an occasional prick to let them know that you have + spurs." + </p> + <p> + On leaving the town the road ran up the valley of the Rimac, a small + river, but of vital importance to the country through which it passes, as + small canals branching from it irrigate the land. + </p> + <p> + "The Spaniards have done some good here at least," Harry said to Dias, who + was riding beside him. + </p> + <p> + "Some of these canals were constructed in their time, but the rest existed + long before they came here, and, indeed, long before the Incas came. The + Incas' work lies chiefly beyond the mountains; on this side almost all the + great ruins are of cities and fortresses built by the old people. Cuzco + was the Incas' capital, and almost all the towns between the two ranges of + the Andes were their work. It is true that they conquered the people down + to the sea, but they do not seem to have cared to live here. The treasures + of Pachacamac and the other places on the plains were those of the old + people and the old religion. The inhabitants of the plains are for the + most part descendants of those people. The Incas were strong and powerful, + but they were not numerous. That was why the Spaniards conquered them so + easily. The old people, who regarded them as their masters, did not care + to fight for them, just as the Peruvians did not care to fight for the + Spaniards." + </p> + <p> + "I expect it was a good deal like the Normans in England," Bertie put in. + "They conquered the Saxons because they were better armed and better + disciplined, but they were few in number in comparison with the number + they governed, and in their quarrels with each other the bulk of the + people stood aloof; and it was only when the Normans began their wars in + France and Scotland, and were obliged to enlist Saxon archers and + soldiers, that the two began to unite and to become one people." + </p> + <p> + "I have no doubt that was so, Bertie; but you are breaking our agreement + that you should speak in Spanish only." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, bother! you know very well that I cannot talk in it yet, and you + surely do not expect that I am going to ride along without opening my + lips." + </p> + <p> + "I know you too well to expect that," Harry laughed, "and will allow an + occasional outbreak. Still, do try to talk Spanish, however bad it may be. + You have got cheek enough in other things, and cheek goes a long way in + learning to talk a foreign language. You have been four months at your + Spanish books, and should certainly begin to put simple sentences + together." + </p> + <p> + "But that is just what one does not learn from books," the lad said. "At + any rate, not from such books as I have been working at. I could do a + high-flown sentence, and offer to kiss your hand and to declare that all I + have is at your disposal. But if I wanted to say, 'When are we going to + halt for dinner? I am feeling very peckish,' I should be stumped + altogether." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you must get as near as you can, Bertie. I dare say you cannot turn + slang into Spanish; but you can find other words to express your meaning, + and when you cannot hit on a word you must use an English one. Your best + plan is to move along on the other side of Dias, and chat to his wife." + </p> + <p> + "What have I got to say to her?" + </p> + <p> + "Anything you like. You can begin by asking her if she has ever gone a + long journey with her husband before, how far we shall go to-day—things + of that sort." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I will try anyhow. I suppose I must. But you go on talking to Dias, + else I shall think that you are both laughing at me." + </p> + <p> + Five miles from Lima they passed through the little village of Quiraz. + Beyond this they came upon many cotton plantations, and in the ravines by + the side of the valley or among the ruins of Indian towns were several + large fortresses. They also passed the remains of an old Spanish town and + several haciendas, where many cattle and horses were grazing. They were + ascending steadily, and after passing Santa Clara, eleven miles from Lima, + the valley narrowed and became little more than a ravine. On either side + were rents made in the hills by earthquakes, and immense boulders and + stones were scattered about at the bottom of the narrow gorge. Four hours' + travelling brought them to Chosica, where the valley widened again near + the foot of the hills. + </p> + <p> + Here they halted for the day. There was an inn here which Dias assured + them was clean and comfortable, and they therefore took a couple of rooms + for the night in preference to unpacking their tents. + </p> + <p> + "It is just as well not to begin that till we get farther away," Harry + said. "We have met any number of laden mules coming down, and if we were + to camp here we should cause general curiosity." + </p> + <p> + He accordingly ordered dinner for himself and his brother, Dias preferring + to take his meal in a large room used by passing muleteers. The fare was + as good as they had had at the hotel at Lima. + </p> + <p> + "I am not sorry that we halted here," Bertie said; "I feel as stiff as a + poker." + </p> + <p> + "I think you got on very well, Bertie, with Mrs. Dias. I did not hear what + you were saying, but you seemed to be doing stunningly." + </p> + <p> + "She did most of the talking. I asked her to speak slowly, as I did not + manage to catch the sense of what she said. She seems full of fun, and a + jolly little woman altogether. She generally understood what I meant, and + though she could not help laughing sometimes, she did it so + good-temperedly that one did not feel put out. Each time I spoke she + corrected me, told me what I ought to have said, and made me say it after + her. I think I shall get on fairly well at the end of a few weeks." + </p> + <p> + "I am sure you will, Bertie; the trouble is only at the beginning, and now + that you have once broken the ice, you will progress like a house on + fire." + </p> + <p> + There were still four hours of daylight after they had finished their + meal, so they went out with Dias to explore one of the numerous + burying-grounds round the village. It consisted of sunken chambers. In + these were bones, with remains of the mats in which the bodies had been + clothed. These wrappings resembled small sacks, and they remarked that the + people must have been of very small size, or they could never have been + packed away in them. With them had been buried many of the implements of + their trade. One or two had apparently not been opened. Here were knitting + utensils, toilet articles, implements for weaving, spools of thread, + needles of bone and bronze. With the body of a girl had been placed a kind + of work-box, containing the articles that she had used, and the mummy of a + parrot, some beads, and fragments of an ornament of silver. Dias told them + that all these tombs were made long before the coming of the Incas. He + said that round the heads of the men and boys were wound the slings they + had used in life, while a piece of cotton flock was wrapped round the + heads of the women. Many of the graves communicated with each other by + very narrow passages; the purpose of these was not clear, but probably + they were made to enable the spirits of the dead to meet and hold + communion with each other. + </p> + <p> + "I don't want to see any more of them," Bertie said after they had spent + three hours in their investigations; "this sort of thing is enough to give + one a fit of the blues." + </p> + <p> + Beyond Chosica civilization almost ceased. The road became little more + than a mule track, and was in many places almost impassable by vehicles of + any kind. Nothing could be wilder than the scenery they passed. At times + rivers ran through perpendicular gorges, and the track wound up and down + steep ravines. Sometimes they would all dismount, though Dias assured them + it was not necessary; still, it made a change from the monotonous pace of + little over two miles an hour at which the mules breasted the steep + incline. + </p> + <p> + José rode on the first of the baggage mules, which was very lightly + loaded; he generally sang the whole time. When on foot, Donna Maria + stepped gaily along and Bertie had hard work to keep pace with her. He was + making rapid progress with the language, though occasionally a peal of + laughter from his companion told of some egregious error. + </p> + <p> + There were villages every few miles, but now when they halted they did so + as a rule a mile before they got to one of these. Dinner was cooked over a + fire of dead sticks, and after the meal Harry's tent was erected and the + bed spread in it. The Indians went on to the village for the night, while + Harry and his brother sat and smoked for a time by the fire and then + turned in. At daybreak Dias rode back leading their riding mules and a + baggage animal; the tent, beds, and the cooking utensils were packed up, + and they rode in to the village and passed on at a trot until they + overtook Maria and José, who had started with the other four mules when + Dias rode away. At last they reached the head of the pass, and two days' + journey took them to Oroya, standing on an elevated plateau some ten + thousand feet above the sea, and five thousand below the highest point of + the road. + </p> + <p> + The scenery had now completely changed. Villages were scattered thickly + over the plain, cultivation was general. The hillsides were lined by + artificial terraces, on which were perched chalets and small hamlets—they + had seen similar terraces on the way up. These were as the Spaniards found + them, and must at one time have been inhabited by a thriving population. + Even now gardens and orchards flourished upon them up to the highest + points on the hills. Oroya was a large place, and, avoiding the busy part + of the town, they hired rooms, as it was necessary to give the mules two + days' rest. On the first evening after their arrival they gathered round a + fire, for the nights were cold, and even in the daytime they did not find + their numerous wraps too hot for them. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Dias," Harry said, "we must talk over our plans. You said that we + would not decide upon anything till we got here." + </p> + <p> + "In the first place, señor, I think it would be well to go to the north to + see the Cerro de Pasco silver mine, they say it is the richest in the + world. It is well that you should see the formation of the rocks and the + nature of the ore; we may in our journeyings come across similar rock." + </p> + <p> + "It is gold rather than silver that one wants to find, Dias. I do not say + that a silver mine would not be worth a very large sum of money, but it + would be necessary to open it and go to a large expense to prove it. Then + one would have to go to England and get up a company to work it, which + would be a long and difficult matter. Still, I am quite ready to go and + see the place." + </p> + <p> + Dias nodded. + </p> + <p> + "What you say is true, señor. I could take you to a dozen places where + there is silver. They may be good or may not, but even if they were as + rich as Potosi the silver would have to be carried to Lima, so great a + distance on mules' backs that it would swallow up the profits. And it + would be almost impossible to convey the necessary machinery there, indeed + to do so would involve the making of roads for a great distance." + </p> + <p> + "At the same time, Dias, should you know of any silver lodes that might + turn out well, I would certainly take some samples, and send two or three + mule-loads of the stuff home. They might be of no good for the purpose for + which I have come out here, but in time I might do something with them; + the law here is that anyone who finds a mine can obtain a concession for + it." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, señor, but he must proceed to work it." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose it would be sufficient to put two or three men on for that + purpose." + </p> + <p> + "But if you were away for a year difficulties might arise. It would be + better for you only to determine the course of the lode, its thickness and + value, to trace it as far as possible, and then hide all signs of the + work, and not to make your claim until you return here." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, I will take your advice, Dias. And now about the real object + of our journey." + </p> + <p> + "I have been thinking it over deeply," Dias said. "First as to mines; at + present almost all the gold that is obtained is acquired by washing the + sands of rivers. Here and there gold has been found in rocks, but not in + sufficient quantities to make mining pay. The rivers whose sands are + richest in gold are in the mountains that lie behind Lake Titicaca, which + lies to the south of Cuzco and on the border of Bolivia. No one doubts + that in the time of the Incas there existed gold mines, and very rich + ones; for if it had not been so it is impossible to account for the + enormous amount of gold obtained by the Spanish conquerors, and no one + doubts that they got but a small portion of the gold in existence when + they arrived. It is of no use whatever for us to search the old ruins of + the Incas in Cuzco, or their other great towns; all that can be found + there has already been carried away. + </p> + <p> + "Now you see, señor, Huanuco, Jauja, Cuzco, and Puno all lie near the + eastern range of the Andes, and when the alarm caused by the arrogant + conduct of the Spaniards began, it was natural that the treasures should + be sent away into the heart of those mountains. The towns on the western + sides of this plateau, Challhuanca, Tanibobamba, Huancavelica, would as + naturally send theirs for safety into the gorges of the western Andes, but + all traditions point to the fact that this was not done by the Incas. As + soon as the Spaniards arrived and struck the first blow, the great chiefs + would naturally call together a band of their followers on whose fidelity + they could rely, load the treasures on llamas, of which they possessed + great numbers, and hurry them off to the mountains. + </p> + <p> + "It is among the mountains, therefore, that our search must be made. All + our traditions point to the fact that it was along the eastern range of + the Cordilleras, and the country beyond, that by far the greater portion + of the treasures were taken for concealment. At any rate, as we have but + eighteen months for the search it is on that side that we must try, and + ten times that length of time would be insufficient for us to do it + thoroughly. As to the gold mines, it is certain that they lie in that + portion of the range between Cuzco and Lake Titicaca. It was near Puno, a + short distance from the lake, that the Spaniards, owing to the folly of an + Indian, found great treasures in a cave. They would probably have found + much more had not a stream suddenly burst out which flooded the whole + valley and converted it into a lake. Which do you think we had better look + for first, gold mines or hidden treasures?" + </p> + <p> + "Of course that must depend on you, Dias, and how much you know about + these matters. I need not say that a hidden treasure would be of vastly + more use to me than the richest gold mine in the world. To obtain the gold + from a mine an abundance of labour is required, besides machinery for + crushing quartz and separating the gold from it. In the bed of a river, if + it is rich and abounding in nuggets, three or four men, with rough + machinery, could wash out a large quantity of gold in a short time, and a + place of that sort would be far better than a rich mine, which could not + be worked without a large amount of capital." + </p> + <p> + "I have heard tales of such places on the other side of the mountains to + the south. From time to time gold-seekers have returned with as much as + they could carry, but not one in a hundred of those that go ever come + back; some doubtless die from hunger and hardship, but more are killed by + the Indians. Most of the tribes there are extremely savage, and are + constantly at war with each other, and they slay every white man who + ventures into their country." + </p> + <p> + "Then is it not probable, Dias, that the gold could have come from their + country?" + </p> + <p> + "Not from the plains, but from the streams running down into them; and + although the Incas never attempted to subdue the tribes beyond the + mountains, they may have had bodies of troops to protect the workers from + incursions by these savages." + </p> + <p> + "Are there many wild beasts there?" + </p> + <p> + "In some parts of the mountains pumas and jaguars abound." + </p> + <p> + "That is not altogether satisfactory, though I should not mind if we fell + in with one occasionally. But how about game, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "The chief game are the wild vicuñas, which are very numerous in some + parts; but they are very shy and difficult to hunt. Deer are plentiful, + and there are foxes, bears, and hogs; but the great article of food is + fish. On the plains the manatee, which is very like the seal, is caught; + turtles are found in great numbers, and the people make oil from their + eggs; and the buffo, a sort of porpoise, also abounds. The natives do not + eat these, except when very pressed for food; they catch them for the sake + of their oil. There are many kinds of fish: the sunaro, which I heard an + English traveller say are like the fish the English call the pike; these + grow to the length of seven or eight feet. And many smaller kinds of fish + are caught by throwing the juice of the root of the barbasto into small + streams. This makes the fish stupid, and they float on the surface so that + they may easily be caught by hand. There are also many sorts of fruit." + </p> + <p> + "Well, then, we ought to do fairly well, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor; but many of these creatures are only found in the forests and + in the rivers of the plains, and they are so much hunted by the savages + there that they are very shy. But there are some creatures with which we + certainly do not wish to meet, and unfortunately these are not uncommon. I + mean the alligators and the great serpents. The natives fear the + alligators much, for their weapons are of no avail against them, and they + would never venture to attack a great snake." + </p> + <p> + "And besides these, what other disagreeables are there, Dias?" Bertie + asked cheerfully. + </p> + <p> + "There is one other disagreeable," Dias replied, "and it is a serious one. + There are in the mountains many desperate men. Some have slain an enemy + who had friends influential enough to set the law in motion against them, + or have escaped from prison; some have resisted the tax-collectors; many + have been suspected of plotting against the government; and others are too + lazy to work." + </p> + <p> + "And how do they live?" Harry asked. + </p> + <p> + "They live partly on game and partly on plunder. They steal from + cultivators; they are paid a small sum by all muleteers passing through + the mountains; they rob travellers who are worth robbing; and sometimes + they carry off a proprietor of land, and get a ransom for him. + Occasionally they will wash the sand, and get gold enough to send one of + their number into a town to buy articles they require." + </p> + <p> + "And do they go in large bands?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; as a rule some ten or twelve keep together under the one they + have chosen as their chief. Sometimes, if people make complaints and + troops are sent against them, they will join to resist them; but this is + not often. The authorities know well enough that they have no chance of + catching these men among the mountains they are so well acquainted with, + and content themselves with stationing a few troops in the villages." + </p> + <p> + "And is it through the robbers or the savages that so few of the gold + explorers ever return?" + </p> + <p> + "It is chiefly, I think, from hardship," Dias said; "but undoubtedly many + who venture down near the Indians' country are killed by them. Some who + have done well, and are returning with the gold they have accumulated, + fall victims to these robbers. You must not, of course, suppose that there + are great numbers of them, señor. There may be some hundreds, but from + Huancabamba—the northern frontier of the western Cordilleras, where + the Maranon crosses the eastern range—down to Lake Titicaca on the + one side, and Tacna on the other, is nigh a thousand miles, and the two + ranges cover more square leagues than can be reckoned, and even a thousand + men scattered over these would be but so many grains of sand on a stretch + of the sea-shore." + </p> + <p> + "It certainly sounds like it, Dias; but perhaps those worthy people + congregate chiefly in the neighbourhood of the passes." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, señor; but even through these a traveller might pass many + times without being troubled by them." + </p> + <p> + "Have you fallen in with them often, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes; but, as you see, they have done me no harm. Sometimes, when I get to + the end of my journey, the mules are not so heavily laden as when I + started; but generally the people for whom I work say to me, 'Here are so + many dollars, Dias; they are for toll.' There are places in the villages + at the foot of the most-frequented passes where it is understood that a + payment of so many dollars per mule will enable you to pass without + molestation. In return for your money, you receive a ribbon, or a rosette, + or a feather, and this you place in your hat as a passport. You may meet a + few men with guns as you pass along, but when they see the sign they + salute you civilly, ask for a drink of wine if you are carrying it, then + wish you good-day. It is only in little-frequented passes that you have to + take your chance. I may say that though these men may plunder, they never + kill a muleteer. They know that if they did, all traffic on that road + would cease, and the soldiers would find guides who knew every path and + hiding-place in the mountains." + </p> + <p> + "Anyhow, I think it is well, Dias, that I took your advice, and handed + over my gold to Señor Pasquez, for if we do fall into the hands of any of + these gentry, we can lose practically nothing." + </p> + <p> + "No money, señor, but we might lose everything else, except perhaps the + mules, which they could not use in the mountains. But if they were to take + our blankets, and tents, and provisions, and your firearms, we should be + in a bad way if we happened to be a couple of hundred miles in the heart + of the mountains." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I don't think they will take them," Harry said grimly, "without + paying pretty dearly for them. With your gun and our rifles, and that old + fowling-piece which you got for José, which will throw a fairly heavy + charge of buck-shot, I think we can make a very good fight against any + band of eight men, or even one or two more." + </p> + <p> + "I think so," Dias said gravely. "It is seldom I miss my mark. Still, I + hope we shall not be troubled with them, or with the Indians. You see, it + is not so much an attack by day that we have to fear, as a surprise at + night. Of course, when we are once on the hills, José and I will keep + watch by turns. He is as sharp as a needle. I should have no fear of any + of these robbers creeping up to us without his hearing them. But I can't + say so much for him in the case of the Indians, who can move so + noiselessly that even a vicuña would not hear them until they were within + a spear's-throw." + </p> + <p> + "The spear is their weapon then, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Some tribes carry bows and arrows, others only spears, and sometimes they + poison the points of both these weapons." + </p> + <p> + "That is unpleasant. Are there remedies for the poisons?" + </p> + <p> + "None that I know of, nor do I think the savages themselves know of any. + The only chance is to pour ammonia at once into the hole that is made by + an arrow, and to cut out all the flesh round a spear-wound, and then to + pour in ammonia or sear it with a hot iron." + </p> + <p> + "That accounts for your buying that large bottle of ammonia at Lima. I + wondered what you wanted it for. When we get into the country these + unpleasant people inhabit, I will fill my spirit-flask with it, so that it + will always be handy if required. Now we understand things generally, + Dias. It only remains for you to decide where we had best leave the plain + and take to the mountains." + </p> + <p> + Dias was silent for a minute. "I should say, señor, that first we had + better journey down to Cuzco and then down to Sicuani, where the western + Cordilleras, after making a bend, join the eastern branch, and there cross + the Tinta volcano. On the other side are many gorges. In one of these I + know there is some very rich gold sand. Explorers have sought for this + spot in vain, but the secret has been well kept by the few who know it. It + has been handed down in my father's family from father to son ever since + the Spaniards came. He told it to me, and I swore to reveal it to none but + my son. I have no son, and the secret therefore will die with me. Whether + it has been passed down in any other family I cannot say. It may be, or it + may not be; but as I owe you my life, and also the debt of gratitude to + Señor Barnett, I feel that you are more to me than a son. Moreover, the + secret was to be kept lest it should come to the knowledge of the + Spaniards. The Spaniards have gone, and with them the reason for + concealment, so I feel now that I am justified in taking you there." + </p> + <p> + "I am glad of that, Dias. Assuredly the gold can be of service to no man + as long as it lies there, and it would be better to utilize it than allow + it to waste. I need not say how grateful I shall feel if you can put me in + the way of obtaining it." + </p> + <p> + "That I cannot absolutely promise," he said. "I have the indications, but + they will be difficult to find. Three hundred years bring great changes—rocks + on which there are marks may be carried away by torrents, figures cut in + the cliffs may be overgrown by mosses or creepers. However, if but a few + remain, I hope to be able to find my way. If I fail we must try elsewhere; + but this is the only one of which I have been told all the marks. I know + generally several places where great treasure was hidden, but not the + marks by which they could be discovered, and as we may be sure that every + measure was taken to hide the entrances to the caves, the chances would be + all against our lighting upon them. I may say, señor, that, great as was + the treasure of the Incas, that of the Chimoos or Chincas, a powerful + people who inhabited part of this country, was fully as large; and + traditions say that most of the treasures hidden were not those of the + Incas, but of the Chimoos, who buried them when their country was invaded + by the Incas. + </p> + <p> + "This is certainly the case with most of the treasures hidden to the west + of the mountains. It was so at Pachacamac; it was so at Truxillo, where + the Spaniards found three million and a half dollars of gold; and it is + known that this was but a small hoard, and that the great one, many times + larger, has never been discovered. Probably the secret has long been lost; + for if there are but few who know where the Incas buried their gold, it + may well be believed that the exact locality of the Chimoo treasures, + which were buried more than eight hundred years ago, is now unknown, and + that nothing but vague traditions have been handed down." + </p> + <p> + "That one can quite understand," Harry agreed, "when we consider how many + of the Chimoos must have fallen in the struggle with the Incas, and how + more than half the population were swept away by the Spaniards, to say + nothing of those who have died in the wars of the last thirty years. It + seems strange, however, that the treasures in the temple of Pachacamac + were left untouched by the Incas and allowed to accumulate afterwards." + </p> + <p> + "It was so generally regarded as the sacred city," Dias said, "that, + powerful as they were, the Incas did not attempt to interfere with it, as + to do so would certainly have stirred up a formidable insurrection of the + natives throughout the whole of their territory; and instead, therefore, + of taking possession of the temple and dedicating it to their own god, + they allowed it to remain untouched and the worship of the old gods to be + carried on there, contenting themselves with building a temple of their + own to the Sun-god close at hand." + </p> + <p> + "Whether any treasure we find belonged to the Incas or to the Chimoos is + of no consequence whatever. I certainly think that before entering upon + what would seem to be almost a hopeless search for such stores, we should + try this place that you know of. In that case it seems to me, Dias, that + if we had gone down the coast to Islay, and up through Arequipa to Cuzco, + our journey would have been considerably shorter." + </p> + <p> + "That is true, señor, but we should have found it difficult to take a + passage for our mules; the steamers are but small craft, with poor + accommodation even for passengers. And besides, until we had made all our + arrangements for the journey from Lima, I could hardly say that I had made + up my mind to bring you to this place. Only when you and your brother + saved my life did I feel that I was bound to aid you, even to the point of + divulging the secret. It is different now from what it was when it was + first handed down. At that time the Spaniards were mercilessly slaying all + known to be in the possession of any secret connected with gold, and every + discovery of gold entailed the forced labour of thousands more of the + natives. Well, señor, all that is changed; we are our own masters, and + those who find mines are allowed to work them on payment of certain + royalties. There is, therefore, no good in keeping a secret that has been + useless for hundreds of years." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly, Dias, you will have the satisfaction of knowing that you are + injuring no one by the act, and are besides doing a very good action to my + brother and myself. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Bertie," Harry said when Dias had left the room, "I think we may + congratulate ourselves. For the first time I really think there is a + chance of the expedition turning out a success." + </p> + <p> + "It certainly looks like it," Bertie agreed. "For your sake I hope it will + be so. As for me, I am quite content; what with Indians and brigands, wild + beasts, alligators, and snakes, the journey is likely to be an exciting + one." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VI — A TROPICAL FOREST + </h2> + <p> + It took them over three weeks to reach Cuzco. They did not hurry, for they + wished to keep the mules in good condition for the serious work before + them. They were travelling across a plateau thickly dotted with villages + and small towns, and everywhere richly cultivated. Near the summit of the + mountains large flocks of alpacas were grazing, and lower down herds of + cattle and sheep, while near the plain were patches of wheat, barley, and + potatoes, which in turn were succeeded by fields of maize, apple and peach + trees, and prickly-pears. At the foot were fields of sugar-cane, oranges, + citron, pine-apples, cacao, and many other tropical fruits; while in the + deeper ravines cotton was grown in abundance for the wants of the + population. Here, in fact, were all varieties of climate, from the + perpetual snow on the summits of the lofty mountains to a tropical heat in + the valleys. + </p> + <p> + "If the Incas had been contented with this glorious plateau, which for + centuries constituted their kingdom, and had passed a law against the + gathering of gold and the mining for silver, they might still have been + lords here," Harry said one day. "There would have been nothing to tempt + the avarice of the Spaniards, for owing to the distance of the mines from + the coast, the cost of carriage would have been immense, and the long sea + journey would have rendered the exportation of the natural products of the + country impossible. Some of the more sober-minded of the Dons might have + settled down here and taken wives from among the daughters of the nobles, + and, bringing with them the civilization of Spain, become valuable + colonists. The Incas, before they extended their conquest over the whole + of the west of South America, must have been a comparatively simple + people, and would have had none of the habits of luxury and magnificence + that tempted the Spaniards. The gold of South America was the ruin of the + Incas, as it was afterwards the chief cause of the ruin of Spain." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry, then I should very strongly advise you to give up + treasure-hunting and to remain poor, for the curse of the gold may not + have worked itself out yet." + </p> + <p> + "I must risk that, Bertie. I have no desire for luxury or magnificence; it + is for a laudable purpose that I seek the gold. However, if you have any + scruples on the subject there is no occasion for you to have any share in + what I may discover." + </p> + <p> + "No, I think I will agree with you and risk it; though certainly at + present I don't see what advantage any amount of money would be to me." + </p> + <p> + The houses of the peasants were for the most part comfortable, although + small, for since the expulsion of the Spaniards, the people had had no + reason to make a pretence of poverty. During the Spanish rule no one + dared, by the size of his house or by his mode of living, to show signs of + wealth above his fellows, for to do so would be to expose himself to the + cruel exactions of the tax-collectors and local officials; and even now + they had hardly recognized the change that had taken place, and remained + wedded to the habits that had become rooted in them by centuries of + oppression. + </p> + <p> + The travellers had no difficulty whatever in purchasing food and forage on + the way. They always slept in their tents now, and preferred Donna Maria's + cooking to that which they could obtain in the small and generally dirty + inns in the towns. + </p> + <p> + By the time they reached Cuzco, Bertie was able to converse in Spanish + with some fluency. On the way he rode either beside Dias and his wife, or + with José; in either case an animated conversation was kept up, sometimes + on the stirring events of the war of independence and the subsequent + struggles, sometimes about life in England, its ways and customs, + concerning which neither Maria nor José had any knowledge whatever. Bertie + also endeavoured to gain some information concerning the history of Peru + prior to the rising against Spain; but neither the woman nor boy knew + anything of the subject beyond the fact that the Incas were great people, + and that the natives still mourned for them. + </p> + <p> + "You see that black apron most of the women wear over one hip, as a sign + of mourning; it is still worn for the Incas. They must have been good + people, and not cruel like the Spanish, or they would not be so much + regretted," Maria said. "I don't wear the apron, because both Dias and I + are of mixed blood, descendants on one side of natives, and on the other + of Creoles, that is of Spaniards whose families were settled here, and who + hated their countrymen just as much as we do. Well, there is Cuzco in + sight. I have never seen it, and am glad that we shall stay there for a + few days." + </p> + <p> + The old capital of the Incas lay at the end of a valley about two miles in + length, and about a mile in width. To the north of the city rose an abrupt + hill, crowned by the great citadel with its three lines of walls, the hill + being divided from those forming the side of the valley by two deep + ravines, in which flowed little streams that ran through the city. The + appearance of the town was striking. There were numerous churches, its + streets ran at right angles to each other, and the massive stone houses + dated from the early Spanish days, though they were surmounted for the + most part by modern brickwork additions. Where the great Temple of the Sun + once stood, the church of Santo Domingo had been built, a portion of the + splendid building of the old faith being incorporated in it. + </p> + <p> + "What is the use of staying here?" Bertie asked his brother impatiently, + two days after they had arrived at Cuzco. "I dare say these old ruins and + fortresses, and so on, are very interesting to people who understand all + about the Incas; but as I know nothing about them, I don't see how you can + expect me to get up any interest in an old wall because you tell me that + it is one of the remains of a palace belonging to some old chap I never + heard of. I shall be very glad when Dias says that the mules have had + enough rest and that we can set out on our business." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid you are a Goth, Bert," Harry said, looking at him with an + expression of pity. "Here you are in one of the most interesting cities of + the world, a place that thousands and thousands of people would travel any + distance to investigate, and in forty-eight hours you are tired of it. You + have no romance in your nature, no respect for the past; you are a Goth + and a Philistine." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid you are mixing up localities, Harry. I may be a Goth or a + Philistine, but perhaps you are not aware that these peoples or tribes had + no connection with each other. Your education in matters unconnected with + the Royal Navy seems to have been even more deplorably neglected than my + own." + </p> + <p> + "Shut up, youngster!" + </p> + <p> + "No, Lieutenant Prendergast, you are not on the quarter-deck of one of Her + Majesty's ships at present. You are not even the leader of a small caravan + on the march. We are in this locanda on terms of perfect equality, save + and except in any small advantage that you may possess in the matter of + years." + </p> + <p> + Harry laughed. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Bertie, I do not altogether disagree with what you say. If I had + come here to get up the history of the Incas, and investigate the ruins of + their palaces, I should be content to stay here for some weeks; but as it + is, I am really just as anxious as you are to be on the move. I was + speaking to Dias half an hour ago, and he says that in two more days we + shall be able to start again. We have been discussing how much flour and + other things it is absolutely necessary to take. Of course the better + provided we are the more comfortable we shall be; but on the other hand, + as Dias says, it is of great importance that the mules should carry as + little weight as possible. + </p> + <p> + "In crossing the passes we shall have the benefit of the old roads of the + Incas, but once we leave these the difficulties will be enormous. Dias + said that it might be better to dispose of our mules altogether and get + trained llamas in their place, as these can climb over rocks where no mule + could obtain a foothold. But then it would be necessary to take with us + one or two natives accustomed to their ways, and this would not suit us at + all. However, I do think that it would be worth while to take two or three + of these animals with us. They can carry a hundred pounds apiece; but as + we may be going over extraordinarily rough country, fifty pounds would be + sufficient. The advantage would be that we could establish a sort of + central camp at the farthest spot to which the mules could go, and then + make exploring expeditions with the llamas to carry provisions and tools. + The llamas are not bad eating, so that if we found no other use for them + they would assist our commissariat." + </p> + <p> + "How far can they go in a day, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Ten or twelve miles, and you may be sure that that is as much as we can + do when we are among the mountains." + </p> + <p> + "Then I should think they would be very useful. I suppose there will be no + difficulty in buying them?" + </p> + <p> + "None at all. A good many are brought in for sale to the market every day. + Of course it would be necessary to get strong animals accustomed to + burdens." + </p> + <p> + Before starting there was another long consultation between Harry and Dias + as to which course it would be better to adopt. The most-frequented pass + through the mountains was that to Paucartambo, forty miles north-east from + Cuzco, at the mouth of the pass that leads down into the plains. Between + this town and the Carabaya range, a hundred and fifty miles to the south, + was to be found the rich gold deposit to which Dias had referred. So far, + however, as the traditions he had received informed him, it was situated + near the slopes of the Tinta volcano, and between that and Ayapata. The + direct road to this spot was extremely difficult, and he was of opinion + that the journey could be more easily performed by going to Paucartambo + and then skirting the foot of the mountains. + </p> + <p> + "You will find no difficulty in obtaining food as you go along," he said; + "wild turkeys, pheasants, and other birds are to be met with in that + district. Moreover, there are many plantations which have been deserted + owing to the depredations of the Chincas, a tribe who live on the + tributaries of the Pueros, or as it used to be called, Rio Madre de Dios. + Here you will find fields of maize still growing, sugar-cane, cacao, and + rice. One after another the estates have been abandoned; at some of them + the whole of the people on the farms were massacred, and in all the danger + was so great that the proprietors found it impossible to work them. The + one drawback to that road is that we may fall in with the Chincas, in + which case they will certainly attack us. However, they are widely + scattered through the forests, and we may not fall in with them. On the + other hand, the track by the Tinta mountain from Sicuani is extremely + difficult and dangerous, We might lose several of our animals in + traversing it, and should have to depend entirely on what we carried for + food." + </p> + <p> + "Then by all means let us go the other way, Dias. Were we to lose some of + our mules it would be impossible to replace them, and it would be useless + to find gold if we could not carry it away." + </p> + <p> + Two days later they started, four llamas having been added to the caravan. + Dias explained that it would not be necessary to take any natives to + attend to these animals, as, once started, they would follow the mules + without difficulty, especially if they were fed with them before starting. + Three days' travelling brought them to the little town, which lay very + high up in the hills. The cold here was bitter, and the party needed all + their wraps, and were glad to get in motion as soon as it was light. + Passing over a range of mountains above Paucartambo, where a thin layer of + snow crunched under their feet, they began the tremendous descent into the + plain. In a short time the morning mist cleared away. The road led through + a tropical forest. It took them over three hours to reach the river + Chirimayu, a descent of eleven thousand feet in the course of eight miles. + </p> + <p> + Here they halted by the side of a splendid waterfall. The hills rose up + perpendicularly on every side except where the little river made its way + through the gorge; they were covered with brushwood, ferns, and creepers, + thick with flowers of many colours, while lofty palms and forest trees + grew wherever their roots could find a hold. Splendid butterflies of + immense size flitted about; birds of many kinds and beautiful plumage flew + hither and thither among the trees; humming-birds sucked the honey from + the bright flowers; parrots chattered and screamed in the upper branches + of the trees, and the foam and spray of the torrent sparkled in the sun. + Harry and his brother stood struck with admiration at the loveliness of + the scene, even Donna Maria and José ceased their chatter as they looked + at a scene such as they had never before witnessed. + </p> + <p> + "It is worth coming all the way from England to see this, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + "It is, indeed. If it is all like this I sha'n't mind how long Dias takes + to find the place he is in search of." + </p> + <p> + At a word from Dias they all set to work to take the burdens off the + animals. A place was cleared for the tents. When these had been erected + José collected dried sticks. A fire was soon lighted, and Maria began to + prepare breakfast. + </p> + <p> + "Is it unhealthy here, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Not here, señors; we are still many hundred feet above the plain. In the + forest there it is unhealthy for whites, the trees grow so thickly that it + is difficult to penetrate them, swamps and morasses lie in many places, + and the air is thick and heavy. We shall not go down there until we need. + When we must descend we shall find an abundance of maize, and fruits of + all sorts. The savages kill the people they find on the estates, but do + not destroy the crops or devastate the fields. They are wise enough to + know that these are useful to them, and though they are too lazy to work + themselves they appreciate the good things that others have planted." + </p> + <p> + "It is rather early to make a halt, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "We have work to do, señor. In the first place we must find a spot where + large trees stand on the bank of the torrent. Two or three of these must + be felled so that they fall across it; then we shall have to chop off the + branches, lay them flat side by side, and make a bridge over which to take + animals. After breakfast we must set about this work, and it will be too + late before we finish to think of going farther to-day." + </p> + <p> + "It is well that we bought four good axes and plenty of rope at Cuzco," + Harry said. + </p> + <p> + "We shall want them very often, señor. Three large torrents come down + between this and the Tinta volcano, besides many smaller ones. Some rise + from the hills to the north of us. These fall into others, which + eventually combine to make the Madre de Dios. So far as is known boats can + descend the river to the Amazon without meeting with any obstacle, from a + point only a few miles from the head of the Pueros, which we shall + presently cross. The fact that there are no cataracts during the whole + course from the hills to the junction of the rivers, shows how perfectly + flat the great plain is." + </p> + <p> + "And did either the Incas or the Spaniards ever conquer the Chincas and + cultivate these splendid plains?" + </p> + <p> + "The Incas drove them back some distance, señor, and forced them to pay a + tribute, but they never conquered them. Doubtless they cultivated the land + for some leagues from the foot of the mountains, as did the Spaniards, and + it was considered the most fertile part of the Montaña, as their + possessions this side of the Cordilleras were called. The Spaniards tried + to push farther, but met with such stout opposition by the savages that + they were forced to desist." + </p> + <p> + All were ready when Maria announced breakfast. After the meal they sat + smoking for half an hour, reluctant to commence the heavy work before + them. + </p> + <p> + "We had better be moving, señor," Dias said as he rose to his feet, "or we + shall not get the bridge made before dark." + </p> + <p> + A hundred yards from the camp they found three large trees growing close + to each other near the edge of the stream. Bertie looked at them with an + air of disgust. + </p> + <p> + "This will be worse for the hands than rowing for twelve hours in a heavy + boat." + </p> + <p> + "I dare say it will," Harry agreed; "but it has got to be done, and the + sooner we set about it the better." + </p> + <p> + "I shall take off my flannel shirt," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "You had better not, señor," Dias said, as he saw what the lad was about + to do. "There are many insects here that will sting you, and the bites of + some of them swell up and turn into sores. Now, señor, I will take this + tree. The next is not quite so large, will you take that? I will help you + when I am finished with my own. Your brother and José can work by turns at + the other." + </p> + <p> + It was hard work, for the trees were over two feet across near the foot. + Dias had felled his before the others had cut half-way through, and he + then lent his aid to Harry, who was streaming with perspiration. + </p> + <p> + "You are not accustomed to it, señor. You will manage better when you have + had two or three months' practice at the work." + </p> + <p> + "I did not bargain for this, Harry," Bertie said as he rested for the + twentieth time from his work. "Jaguars and alligators, Indians and + bandits, and hard climbing I was prepared for, but I certainly never + expected that we should have to turn ourselves into wood-cutters." + </p> + <p> + "It is hard work, Bertie, but it is useless to grumble, and, as Dias says, + we shall become accustomed to it in two or three months." + </p> + <p> + "Two or three months!" Bertie repeated with a groan; "my hands are + regularly blistered already, and my arms and back ache dreadfully." + </p> + <p> + "Well, fire away! Why, José has done twice as much as you have, and he has + hardly turned a hair. I don't suppose that he has had much more practice + than you have had, and he is nothing like so strong." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, I dare say! if he has never cut, his ancestors have, and I suppose it + is hereditary. Anyhow, I have been doing my best. Well, here goes!" + </p> + <p> + Harry laughed at his brother's theory for explaining why José had done + more work than he had. He was himself by no means sorry that Dias had come + to his assistance, and that his tree was nearly ready to fall. José + climbed it with the end of a long rope, which he secured to an upper + bough. Dias then took the other end of the rope, crossed the torrent by + the tree he had felled, and when José had come down and Harry had given a + few more cuts with the axe, he was able to guide the tree in its fall + almost directly across the stream. Then he took Bertie's tree in hand. In + ten minutes this was lying beside the others. It took three hours' more + work to cut off the branches and to lay the trees side by side, which was + done with the aid of one of the mules. The smaller logs were packed in + between them to make a level road, and when this was done the workers went + back to the little camp. The sun was already setting, and Donna Maria had + the cooking-pots simmering over the fire. + </p> + <p> + "That has been a hard day's work," Harry said, when he and his brother + threw themselves down on the grass near the fire. + </p> + <p> + "Hard is no name for it, Harry. I have never been sentenced to work on a + tread-mill, but I would cheerfully chance it for a month rather than do + another day's work like this. The palms of my hands feel as if they had + been handling a red-hot iron, my arms and shoulders ache as if I had been + on a rack. I seem to be in pain from the tips of my toes to the top of my + head." + </p> + <p> + Harry laughed. + </p> + <p> + "It is only what every settler who builds himself a hut in the backwoods + must feel, Bert. It is the work of every wood-cutter and charcoal-burner; + it is a good deal like the work of every miner. You have been brought up + too soft, my boy." + </p> + <p> + "Soft be hanged!" the lad said indignantly; "it is the first time I have + heard that the life of an apprentice on board a ship was a soft one. I + have no doubt you feel just as bad as I do." + </p> + <p> + "But you don't hear me grumbling, Bert; that is all the difference. I + expect that, of the two, I am rather the worse, for my bones and muscles + are more set than yours, and it is some years now since I pulled at either + a rope or an oar." + </p> + <p> + Bertie was silent for a minute or two, and then said rather + apologetically: + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry, perhaps I need not have grumbled so much, but you see it is + a pretty rough beginning when one is not accustomed to it. We ought to + have had a short job to begin with, and got into it gradually, instead of + having six hours on end; and I expect that the backwoods settler you were + talking about does not work for very long when he first begins. If he did + he would be a fool, for he certainly would not be fit for work for a week + if he kept on till he had nearly broken his back and taken the whole skin + off his hands by working all day the first time he tried it." + </p> + <p> + "There is something in that, Bertie; and as we are in no extraordinary + hurry I do think we might have been satisfied with felling the trees + to-day, and cutting off the branches and getting them into place + to-morrow. Still, as Dias seemed to make nothing of it, I did not like to + knock off at the very start." + </p> + <p> + "The meal is ready, señor," Maria said, "and I think we had better eat it + at once, for the sky looks as if we were going to have rain." + </p> + <p> + "And thunder too," Dias said. "You had better begin; José and I will + picket the mules and hobble the llamas. If they were to make off, we + should have a lot of trouble in the morning." + </p> + <p> + The aspect of the sky had indeed changed. Masses of cloud hung on the tops + of the hills, and scud was flying overhead. + </p> + <p> + Maria placed one of the cooking-pots and two tin plates, knives, and forks + beside Harry and his brother, with two flat cakes of ground maize. + </p> + <p> + "Sit down and have your food at once," Harry said to her. "The rain will + be down in bucketfuls before many minutes." + </p> + <p> + They were soon joined by Dias and José, the latter bringing up a large can + of water from the stream. They had just finished when large drops of rain + began to patter on the ground. + </p> + <p> + "Never mind the things," Harry said as he leapt to his feet. "Crawl under + shelter at once; it is no use getting a wetting." + </p> + <p> + All at once made for the tents; and they were but just in time, for the + rain began to fall in torrents, and a peal of thunder crashed out overhead + as they got under the canvas. + </p> + <p> + "This is our first experience of this sort of thing," Harry said, as he + and his brother lit their pipes half-sitting and half-reclining on their + beds. "I rather wondered why Dias put the tents on this little bit of + rising ground, which did not look so soft or tempting as the level; but I + see now that he acted very wisely, for we should have been flooded in no + time if we had been lower down. As it is, I am by no means sure that we + shan't have the water in. Another time we will take the precaution to make + trenches round the tents when we pitch them. However, we have got a + waterproof sheet underneath the beds, so I expect it will be all right." + </p> + <p> + "I hope so. Anyhow, we had better see that the edges are turned up all + round, so that the water cannot run over them. By Jove! it does come down. + We can hardly hear each other speak." + </p> + <p> + Suddenly the entrance to the tent was thrust aside. + </p> + <p> + "Here is a candle, señors." + </p> + <p> + It was thrown in, and Dias ran back into his own tent, which was but a few + yards away, before Harry could remonstrate at his coming out. + </p> + <p> + "The candle will be useful, anyhow," Bertie said. "It is almost pitch-dark + now. What with the sun going down and the clouds overhead, it has turned + from day into night in the past five minutes." + </p> + <p> + Striking a match he lit the candle, and stuck it in between his shoes, + which he took off for the purpose. + </p> + <p> + "That is more cheerful, Harry." + </p> + <p> + "Hullo! what is that?" + </p> + <p> + A deep sound, which was certainly not thunder, rose from the woods. It was + answered again and again from different directions. + </p> + <p> + "They must be either pumas or jaguars, which are always called here lions + and tigers, and I have no doubt Dias will know by the roar which it is. I + should not mind if it were daylight, for it is not pleasant to know that + there are at least half a dozen of these beasts in the neighbourhood. We + may as well drop the cartridges into our rifles and pistols. I believe + neither of these beasts often attacks men, but they might certainly attack + our mules." + </p> + <p> + The storm continued, and each clap of thunder was succeeded by roars, + snarls, and hissing, and with strange cries and shrieks. During a + momentary lull Harry shouted: + </p> + <p> + "Is there any fear of these beasts attacking us or the mules, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, they are too frightened by the thunder and lightning to think + of doing so." + </p> + <p> + "What are all those cries we hear?" + </p> + <p> + "Those are monkeys, señor. They are frightened both by the storm and by + the roaring of the lions and tigers." + </p> + <p> + "Which is the bigger, Harry, the puma or the jaguar?" + </p> + <p> + "I believe the jaguar is the bigger, but the puma is the more formidable + and fiercer. The latter belongs to the same family as the lion, and the + former to that of the leopards. The jaguar is more heavily built than the + leopard, and stronger, with shorter legs, but it is spotted just as the + leopard is. The puma is in build like the lion, but has no mane. Both prey + on animals of all kinds. The natives say they catch turtles, turn them + over on their backs as a man would do, and tear the shells apart. They + will also eat fish; but they are both scourges to the Indians and white + planters, as they will kill sheep, horses, and cattle. Of course, if they + are attacked by men and wounded, they will fight desperately, as most wild + creatures will; but if man does not molest them, they are quite content to + leave him alone, unless he chances to pass under a tree among the branches + of which they are lying in wait for prey. Both of them can climb trees." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I thought I should have slept like a log, Harry, after the work + that I have done, but what with the thunder and the patter of the rain, + and all those noises of beasts, I don't think I am likely to close my + eyes." + </p> + <p> + "We shall get accustomed to the noises after a time, Bert; but at present + I feel as if I were in the middle of a travelling menagerie which had been + caught in a thunderstorm. It is curious that all animals should be + frightened at lightning, for they cannot know that it is really + dangerous." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I know. We had two dogs on the last ship I was in. A clap of thunder + would send them flying down the companion into the cabin, and they would + crouch in some dark corner in a state of absolute terror. They would do + just the same if cannon were fired in salute, or anything of that sort. I + suppose they thought that was thunder." + </p> + <p> + In spite, however, of the noises, Harry and his brother both dropped off + to sleep before long, being thoroughly worn out by the day's work. They + were awakened by Dias opening the front of their little tent. + </p> + <p> + "The sun is up, señors, and it is a fine morning after the storm. Maria + has got coffee ready, baked some cakes, and fried some slices of meat." + </p> + <p> + "All right, Dias! we will be out directly. We will first run up the bank a + short distance, and have a dip." + </p> + <p> + "You won't be able to swim, señor. The bed of the torrent is full, and no + swimmer could breast the water." + </p> + <p> + "All right! we will be careful." + </p> + <p> + Throwing on their ponchos, they went down to the stream and ran along the + bank. + </p> + <p> + "The water is coming down like a race-horse, Bert, but just ahead it has + overflowed its banks. We can have a bath there safely, though it is not + deep enough for swimming." + </p> + <p> + After ten minutes' absence they returned to the camp, completed their + dressing, and sat down to breakfast. + </p> + <p> + "What were all those frightful noises, Dias? Were they pumas or jaguars?" + </p> + <p> + "They were both, señor. You can easily tell the difference in the sounds + they make. The jaguar's is between a roar and a snarl, while the puma's is + a sort of a hissing roar." + </p> + <p> + As soon as breakfast was over, the tents were packed up and the mules and + llamas laden. Dias had given them a feed all round an hour before. The + course they should take had been already agreed upon; they must descend to + the plain, for it would be next to impossible to cross the ravines on the + mountain-side. + </p> + <p> + "Each stream coming down from the hills," Dias said, "must be followed + nearly up to its source, but for the next seventy or eighty miles the + search need not be so careful as it must be afterwards. The place cannot + be far from Tinta, but somewhere this side of it. We need not hurry, for + there are two months to spare." + </p> + <p> + "How do you mean, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "On a day that answers to the 21st of March, Coyllur—that is a star—will + rise at midnight in a cleft in a peak. It can be seen only in the valley + in which the stream that contains the gold runs down. This is what my + father taught me; therefore there must be mountains to the south-east, and + this can only be where the Cordilleras run east, which is the case at + Tinta." + </p> + <p> + "That is excellent as far as it goes, if we happen to be in the right + valley at the time, Dias, but it would not help us in the slightest if we + were in any other valley. And we should have to wait a year before trying + in another place." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, but there are marks on the rocks of a particular kind. There + are marks on rocks in other valleys, so that these should not be + distinguished by Spaniards searching for the place. I should know the + marks when I saw them." + </p> + <p> + "Then in that case, Dias, the star would not be of much use to us." + </p> + <p> + "I know not how that might be, señor, but as these instructions have been + handed down from the time when the Spaniards arrived, it must surely in + some way be useful, but in what way I cannot say." + </p> + <p> + "At any rate, Dias, what with those marks you speak of, and the star, it + will be hard if we cannot find it. I suppose you are sure that the place + is rich if we do light upon it?" + </p> + <p> + "Of that there can be no doubt, señor. Tradition says that it was the + richest spot in the mountains, and was only worked when the king had need + of gold, either for equipping an army or on some special occasion. At such + a time it would be worked for one month, and then closed until gold was + again required. However, as we go that way we shall explore other valleys. + Gold is found more or less in all of them. Possibly we may find some rich + spot which we can fall back upon if we fail in our search." + </p> + <p> + "But I hardly see how we can fail, with the star and those marks on the + rocks to aid us." + </p> + <p> + "The marks may have disappeared, señor, and in that case we may not be in + the right spot when the star rises; or again, the Incas may have closed + the approach in some way to make the matter sure. I cannot promise that we + shall find the gold; but I shall do my best with the knowledge that has + come down to me. If I fail, we must try in other directions. When the + Spaniards came, forty thousand of the Incas' people left Cuzco and the + neighbouring towns, and journeyed away down the mountains and out to the + west. Since then no reliable news concerning them has been heard, but + rumours have from time to time come from that direction to the effect that + there is a great and wealthy city there. I say not that if we failed here + we should attempt to find it. The dangers from the savages would be too + great. There would be great forests to traverse, many rivers to be + crossed. We might travel for years without ever finding their city. When + we got there, we might be seized and put to death, and if we were spared + we might not be able to make off with the treasure. I mention it to show + that gold may be found in many other places besides this valley we are + seeking." + </p> + <p> + "I quite agree with you, Dias, that unless we could get some indication of + the position of this city, if it now exists, it would be madness to + attempt to search for it. I want gold badly, but I do not propose that we + should all throw away our lives in what would be almost a hopeless + adventure. Even if I were ready to risk my own life on such a mad + enterprise, I would not ask others to do the same." + </p> + <p> + Crossing the stream, they made their way down through the forest. It was + toilsome work, as they often had to clear a way with axes through the + undergrowth and tangle of creepers. But at noon they reached level ground. + The heat was now intense, even under the trees, and the air close and + oppressive. On the way down Harry shot a wild turkey. When they halted, + this was cut up and broiled over a fire, and after it had been eaten all + lay down and slept for two or three hours. + </p> + <p> + "Ought we not to set a guard?" Harry had asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, I do not think it necessary. José will lie down by the side of + the llamas, and even if the mules should not give us a warning of any man + or beast approaching, the llamas will do so. They are the shyest and most + timid of creatures, and would detect the slightest movement." + </p> + <p> + For the next three weeks they continued their way. During this time five + or six ravines were investigated as far as they could be ascended. Samples + were frequently taken from sand and gravel and washed, but though + particles of gold were frequently found, they were not in sufficient + quantity to promise good results from washing. + </p> + <p> + "If we had a band of natives with us," Dias said, "we should no doubt get + enough to pay well—that is to say, to cover all expenses and leave + an ounce or two of profit to every eight or ten men engaged—but as + matters stand we should only be wasting time by remaining here." + </p> + <p> + They had no difficulty in obtaining sufficient food; turkeys and pheasants + were occasionally shot; a tapir was once killed, and, as they had brought + hooks and lines with them, fish were frequently caught in the streams. + These were of small size, but very good eating. But, as Dias said, they + could not hope to find larger species, except far out in the plains, where + the rivers were deep and sluggish. + </p> + <p> + The work was hard, but they were now accustomed to it. They often had to + go a considerable distance before they could find trees available for + bridging the torrents, but, on the other hand, they sometimes came upon + some of much smaller girth than those they had first tackled. The labour + in getting these down was comparatively slight. Sometimes these stood a + little way from the stream, but after they were felled two mules could + easily drag them to the site of the bridge. When on the march, Harry and + his brother carried their double-barrelled guns, each with one barrel + charged with shot suitable for pheasants or other birds, the other with + buck-shot. Dias carried a rifle. Very seldom did they mount their mules, + the ground being so rough and broken, and the boughs of the trees so + thick, that it was less trouble to walk at the heads of their animals than + to ride. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VII — AN INDIAN ATTACK + </h2> + <p> + One day when they returned from exploring a valley, Harry and his brother, + taking their rifles, strolled down an open glade, while Dias and José + unpacked the animals. They had gone but a hundred yards when they heard a + sound that was new to them. It sounded like the grunting of a number of + pigs. Dias was attending to the mules. Harry and Bertie caught up their + guns. Presently a small pig made its appearance from among some trees. + Harry was on the point of raising his gun to his shoulder when Dias + shouted, "Stop, do not shoot!" + </p> + <p> + "What is the matter, Dias?" he asked in surprise, as the latter ran up. + </p> + <p> + "That is a peccary." + </p> + <p> + "Well, it is a sort of pig, isn't it?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor. But if you were to kill it, we might all be torn in pieces. + They travel through the forests in great herds, and if one is injured or + wounded, the rest will rush upon its assailants. You may shoot down dozens + of them, but that only redoubles their fury. The only hope of escape is to + climb a tree; but they will keep watch there, regardless of how many are + shot, until hunger obliges them to retire. They are the bravest beasts of + the forests, and will attack and kill even a lion or a tiger if it has + seized one of their number. I beg you to stroll back quietly, and then sit + down. I will go to the head of the mules. If the herd see that we pay no + attention to them, they may go on without interfering with us. If we see + them approaching us, and evidently intending to attack, we must take to + the trees and try to keep them from attacking the mules; but there would + be small chance of our succeeding in doing so." + </p> + <p> + He and José at once went up to the mules, and stood perfectly quiet at + their head. Harry and Bertie moved closely up, laid their double-barrelled + guns beside them, and then sat down. By this time forty or fifty of the + peccaries had issued from the trees; some were rooting among the herbage, + others stood perfectly quiet, staring at the group on the rise above them. + Seeing no movement among them nor any sign of hostility, they joined the + others in their search for food, and in a quarter of an hour the whole + herd had moved off along the edge of the forest. + </p> + <p> + "Praise be to the saints!" Dias said, taking off his hat and crossing + himself. "We have escaped a great danger. A hunter would rather meet a + couple of lions or tigers than a herd of peccaries. These little animals + are always ready to give battle, and once they begin, fight till they die. + The more that are killed the more furious do the others become. Even in a + tree there is no safety. Many a hunter has been besieged in a tree until, + overpowered by thirst, he fell to the ground and was torn to pieces." + </p> + <p> + "What do they eat?" Harry asked. + </p> + <p> + "They will eat anything they kill, but their chief food is roots. They + kill great numbers of snakes. Even the largest python is no match for a + herd of peccaries if they catch him before he can take refuge in a tree." + </p> + <p> + "Well, then, it is very lucky that you stopped us before we fired." + </p> + <p> + "Fortunate indeed, señor. By taking to the trees we might have saved our + lives, but we should certainly have lost our mules. Both pumas and tigers + kill the little beasts when they come across stragglers. And it is well + that they do, for otherwise the woods would be full of them, though + fortunately they do not multiply as fast as our pigs, having only two or + three in a litter. They are good eating, but it is seldom that a hunter + can shoot one, for if he only wounds it, its shrieks will call together + all its companions within a mile round." + </p> + <p> + "Then we must give up the idea of having pork while we are among the + mountains." + </p> + <p> + "Now, are you going to keep me here all day, Dias?" Maria called suddenly. + "It seems to me that you have forgotten me altogether." + </p> + <p> + Harry and Bertie could not help laughing. + </p> + <p> + Dias had, on returning to the mules, taken his wife and seated her on a + branch six feet from the ground, in order that, should the peccaries + attack them, he might be ready at once to snatch up his rifle and join in + the fight without having first to think of the safety of his wife. He now + lifted her down. + </p> + <p> + The action did even more than what Dias had said to convince Harry of the + seriousness of the danger to which they had been exposed, for as a rule + Donna Maria had scoffed at any offers of aid, even in the most difficult + places, and with her light springy step had taxed the power of the others + to keep up with her. These offers had not come from Dias, who showed his + confidence in his wife's powers by paying no attention whatever, and a + grim smile had often played on his lips when Harry or his brother had + offered her a hand. That his first thought had been of her now showed that + he considered the crisis a serious one. + </p> + <p> + "I thought Dias had gone mad," she said, as she regained her feet. "I + could not think what was the matter when he began to shout and ran towards + you. I saw nothing but a little pig. Then, when he came slowly back with + you and suddenly seized me and jerked me up on to that bough, I felt quite + sure of it, especially when he told me to hold my tongue and not say a + word. Was it that little pig? I saw lots more of them afterwards." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; and if they had taken it into their heads to come this way you would + have seen a good deal more of them than would be pleasant," Dias said. + "With our rifles we could have faced four lions or tigers with a better + hope of success than those little pigs you saw. They were peccaries, a + sort of wild pig, and the most savage little beasts in the forest. They + would have chased us all up into the trees and killed all the mules." + </p> + <p> + "Who would have thought it!" she said. "Why, when I was a girl I have + often gone in among a herd of little pigs quite as big as those things, + and never felt the least afraid of them. I must have been braver than I + thought I was." + </p> + <p> + "You are a good deal sillier than you think you are, Maria," Dias said + shortly. "There is as much difference between our pig and a peccary as + there is between a quiet Indian cultivator on the Sierra and one of those + savage Indians of the woods." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose I can light a fire now, Dias. There is no fear of those + creatures coming back again, is there?" + </p> + <p> + "No, I should think not. Fortunately they are going in the opposite + direction, otherwise I should have said that we had better stop here for a + day or two in case they should attack us if we came upon them again." + </p> + <p> + The next day, as they were journeying through the forest, at the foot of + the slopes José gave a sudden exclamation. + </p> + <p> + "What is it?" Dias asked. + </p> + <p> + "I saw a naked Indian standing in front of that tree; he has gone now." + </p> + <p> + "Are you sure, José?" + </p> + <p> + "Quite sure. He was standing perfectly still, looking at us, but when I + called to you he must have slipped round the tree. I only took my eyes off + him for a moment; when I looked again he was gone." + </p> + <p> + "Then we are in for trouble," Dias said gravely. "Of course it was one of + the Chincas. No doubt he was alone, but you may be sure that he has made + off to tell his companions he has seen us. He will know exactly how many + we are, and how many animals we have. It may be twenty-four hours, it may + be three or four days, before he makes his appearance again; but it is + certain that, sooner or later, we shall hear of him. Hunters as they are, + they can follow a track where I should see nothing; and so crafty are + they, that they can traverse the country without leaving the slightest + sign of their passage. The forest might be full of them, and yet the + keenest white hunter would see no footprint or other mark that would + indicate their presence." + </p> + <p> + "What had we better do, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "We shall probably come to another stream before nightfall, señor. This we + will follow up until we get to some ravine bare of trees. There we can + fight them; in the forest we should have no chance. They would lie in + ambush for us, climb into the trees and hide among the foliage, and the + first we should know of their presence would be a shower of arrows; and as + they are excellent marksmen, we should probably be all riddled at the + first volley. There can be no sauntering now, we must push the animals + forward at their best speed. I will lead the way. Do you, señor, bring up + the rear and urge the mules forward. I shall try and pick the ground where + the trees are thinnest, and the mules can then go at a trot. They cannot + do so here, for they would always be knocking their loads off." + </p> + <p> + It was evening before they arrived at a stream. Here they made a short + halt while they gave a double handful of grain to each of the animals, + then they pushed on again until it was too dark to go farther. + </p> + <p> + "Will it be safe to light a fire, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, that will make no difference. They are not likely to attack us at + night. Savages seldom travel after dark, partly because they are afraid of + demons, partly because they would be liable to be pounced upon by wild + beasts. But I do not think there is any chance of their overtaking us + until tomorrow. The man José saw may have had companions close at hand, + but they will know that we are well armed, and will do nothing until they + have gathered a large number and feel sure that they can overpower us. + They will probably take up the track to-morrow at daylight; but we have + made a long march, and can calculate that we shall find some defensible + position before they overtake us. José and I will keep watch to-night." + </p> + <p> + "We will take turns with you, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; my ears are accustomed to the sounds of the forests, yours are + not. If you were watching I should still have no sleep." + </p> + <p> + The night passed without an alarm. + </p> + <p> + An hour before daylight Dias gave all the animals a good feed of corn, and + as soon as it was light they again started. They were already some + distance up the mountain, and after eight hours' travelling they arrived + at a gorge that suited their purpose. For two hundred yards the rocks rose + perpendicularly on each side of the stream, which was but some thirty feet + wide. No rain had fallen for some days, and the water was shallow enough + at the foot of the cliff for the mules to make their way among the fallen + rocks, through which it rushed impetuously. At the upper end the cliffs + widened out into a basin some fifty yards across. + </p> + <p> + "We cannot do better than halt here," Dias said. "In two or three hours we + can form a strong breast-work on the rocks nearly out to the middle of the + stream, where the current is too swift for anyone to make his way up + against it." + </p> + <p> + "Are they likely to besiege us long, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "That I cannot say; but I do not think they will give it up easily. + Savages learn to be patient when roaming the forest in search of game. + Their time is of no value to them; besides, they are sure to lose many if + they attack, and will therefore try to get their revenge." + </p> + <p> + "They may have to give it up from want of food." + </p> + <p> + Dias shook his head. + </p> + <p> + "There are sure to be plenty of fish in the river, and they will poison + some pool and get an abundance. With their bows and arrows they can bring + down monkeys from the trees, and can snare small animals. However, señor, + we can talk over these things to-morrow. We had best begin the breast-work + at once while Maria is cooking dinner, which we need badly enough, for we + have had nothing but the maize cakes we ate before starting." + </p> + <p> + Working hard till it was dark, they piled up rocks and stones till they + formed a breast-work four feet high on both sides. Some twelve feet in the + centre were open. They had chosen a spot where so many fallen rocks lay in + the stream that it needed comparatively little labour to fill up the gaps + between them. + </p> + <p> + "I thought wood-chopping bad enough," Bertie said as they threw themselves + down on the ground after completing their labour, "but it is a joke to + this. My back is fairly broken, my arms feel as if they were pulled out of + the sockets, my hands are cut, I have nearly squeezed two nails off." + </p> + <p> + "It has been hard work," Harry agreed; "still, we have made ourselves + fairly safe, and we will get the walls a couple of feet higher in the + morning. We shall only want to add to them on the lower face in order to + form a sort of parapet that will shelter us as we lie down to fire, so it + won't be anything like such hard work. Then we will fill in the rocks + behind with small stones and sand to lie down upon." + </p> + <p> + "They will never be able to fight their way up to it," Dias said. + </p> + <p> + "We need have no fear on that score. The question is, can they get down + into this valley behind us; the rocks look very steep and in most places + almost perpendicular." + </p> + <p> + "They are steep, señor; but trees grow on them in many places, and these + savages are like monkeys. We shall have to examine them very carefully + when we have finished the wall. If we find that it is possible for anyone + to get down, we must go up the next gorge and see if we can find a better + position." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose you think we are safe for to-night, Dias?' + </p> + <p> + "I don't think they will try to come up through the stream. They have keen + eyes, but it would be so dark down there that even a cat could not see. + They will guess that we have stopped here, and will certainly want to find + out our position before they attack. One or two may come up as scouts, and + in that case they may attack at daybreak. Of course two of us will keep + watch; we can change every three hours. I will take the first watch with + your brother, and you and José can take the next." + </p> + <p> + "José had better sleep," Maria put in; "he watched all last night. My eyes + are as good as his, and I will watch with Don Harry." + </p> + <p> + Harry would have protested, but Dias said quietly: + </p> + <p> + "That will be well, Maria, but you will have to keep your tongue quiet. + These savages have ears like those of wild animals, and if you were to + raise your voice you might get an arrow in the brain." + </p> + <p> + "I can be silent when I like, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "It is possible," Dias said dryly; "but I don't remember in all these + years we have been married that I have known you like to do so." + </p> + <p> + "I take that as a compliment," she said quietly, "for it shows at least + that I am never sulky. Well, Don Harry, do you accept me as a fellow + watcher?" + </p> + <p> + "Certainly I shall be very glad to have you with me; and I don't think + that you need be forbidden to talk in a low tone, for the roar of the + water among the rocks would prevent the sound of voices from being heard + two or three yards away." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, as soon as it became dark Dias went to the wall with Bertie. + José, after a last look at the mules, wrapped himself in a blanket and lay + down. + </p> + <p> + "I think I had better turn in to the tent," Harry said; "we have had two + days' hard work, and the building of that wall has pretty nearly finished + me, so if I don't get two or three hours' sleep to-night I am afraid I + shall not be a very useful sentinel." + </p> + <p> + Five minutes later he was sound asleep, and when his brother roused him he + could hardly believe that it was time for him to go on duty. + </p> + <p> + "Dias is waiting there. Will you come down?" the latter said. "You were + sleeping like a top; I had to pull at your leg three times before you + woke." + </p> + <p> + "I am coming," Harry said as he crawled out. "I feel more sleepy than when + I lay down, and will just run down to the stream and sluice my head, that + will wake me up in earnest, for the water is almost as cold as ice." + </p> + <p> + When he came back he was joined by Donna Maria, and, taking both his + shot-gun and rifle, he went forward with her to the barricade. + </p> + <p> + "So you have neither seen nor heard anything, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Nothing whatever, señor." + </p> + <p> + "I have had a good sleep, Dias; we will watch for the next four hours. It + is eleven o'clock now, so you will be able at three to take it on till + daylight." + </p> + <p> + "I will send and call you again an hour before that," Dias said. "If they + attack, as I expect they will as soon as the dawn breaks, we had better + have our whole force ready to meet them." + </p> + <p> + So saying Dias went off. + </p> + <p> + "This is scarcely woman's work, Donna Maria." + </p> + <p> + "It is woman's work to help defend her life, señor, as long as she can. If + I found that the savages were beating us I should stab myself. They would + kill you, but they might carry me away with them, which would be a + thousand times worse than death." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think there is any fear of their beating us," Harry said; + "certainly not here. We ought properly to be one on each side, but really + I shirk the thought of wading through the river waist-deep at that shallow + place we found a hundred yards up; it would be bad enough to go through + it, worse still to lie for four hours in wet clothes." + </p> + <p> + "Besides, we could not talk then, señor," Maria said with a little laugh, + "and that would be very dull." + </p> + <p> + "Very dull. Even now we must only talk occasionally; we shall have to keep + our eyes and ears open." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think either of them will be much good," she said; "I can see the + white water but nothing else, and I am sure I could not hear a naked + footstep on the rocks." + </p> + <p> + "It is a good thing the water is white, because we can make out the rocks + that rise above the surface. When our eyes get quite accustomed to the + dark we should certainly be able to see any figures stepping upon them or + wading in the water." + </p> + <p> + "I could see that now, señor. I think it will be of advantage to talk, for + I am sure if I were to lie with my eyes straining, and thinking of nothing + else, they would soon begin to close." + </p> + <p> + Talking occasionally in low tones, but keeping up a vigilant watch, they + were altogether hidden from the view of anyone coming up the stream, for + they exposed only their eyes and the top of their heads above the rough + parapet. No attempt had been made to fill up the spaces between the + stones, so that, except for the rounded shape, it would be next to + impossible to make them out between the rough rocks of the crest. Harry + had laid his double-barrelled gun on the parapet in front of him. He had + loaded both barrels with buck-shot, feeling that in the darkness he was + far more likely to do execution with that weapon than with a rifle. + </p> + <p> + They had been some two hours on watch when Donna Maria touched his arm + significantly. He gazed earnestly but could see nothing. A minute later, + however, a rock about fifteen yards away seemed to change its shape. + Before, it had been pointed, but just on one side of the top there was now + a bulge. + </p> + <p> + "Do you see them?" Maria whispered. "I can make out one above the rocks; + the other is standing against the wall." + </p> + <p> + [Image: AN INDIAN SPIES THE EXPEDITION.] + </p> + <p> + There was no movement for two or three minutes, and Harry had no doubt + that they were examining the two black lines of stones between which the + water was rushing. + </p> + <p> + "There are two others on this side, señor," Maria whispered. + </p> + <p> + The pause was broken by the sharp tap of two arrows striking on the stones + a few inches below their heads. + </p> + <p> + "Well, you have begun it," Harry muttered. + </p> + <p> + He had already sighted his gun at the head half-hidden by the rock. He now + pulled the trigger, and then, turning, he fired the other barrel, aiming + along the side of the canyon where the two men seen by his companion must + be standing. The head disappeared, and loud cries broke from the other + side. The stillness that had reigned in the valley was broken by a chorus + of shrieks and roars, and the air overhead thrilled with the sound of + innumerable wings. Harry on firing had laid down the fowling-piece and + snatched up his rifle. + </p> + <p> + "Do you see any others?" + </p> + <p> + "Two have run away; the one against the rocks on the other side was + wounded, for I saw him throw up his arms, and it was he who screamed. The + man by him dropped where he stood; the one behind the rock is killed, I + saw his body carried away in the white water." + </p> + <p> + Half a minute later Dias and Bertie came up. + </p> + <p> + "So they have come, señor?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, there were four of them. Your wife saw them, though I could only + make out one. They shot two arrows at us, and I answered them. The man I + saw was killed, and Donna Maria said that one on the other side also fell, + and another was wounded." + </p> + <p> + "That was a good beginning," Dias said. "After such a lesson they will + attempt nothing more to-night, and I doubt whether they will come down in + the morning. They can get sight of the barricades from that bend a hundred + yards down, and I don't think they will dare come up when they see how + ready we are for them." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will work out our watch anyhow, Dias. Now that I see how sharp + Donna Maria's eyes are I have not the least fear of being surprised." + </p> + <p> + "I will stop with you," Bertie said; "I shall have no chance of going off + to sleep again after being wakened up like that." + </p> + <p> + "If you are going to stop, Bertie, you had better go back and fetch a + blanket, it is chilly here; then if you like you can doze off again till + your watch comes." + </p> + <p> + "There is no fear of that, Harry. I have been eight-and-forty hours on + deck more than once. I will warrant myself not to go to sleep." + </p> + <p> + In spite of this, however, in less than ten minutes after his return + Bertie's regular breathing showed that he was sound asleep. Harry and + Maria continued their watch, but no longer with the same intentness as + before. They were sure that Dias would not have lain down unless he felt + perfectly certain that the Chincas would make no fresh move until the + morning, and they chatted gaily until, at two o'clock, Dias came up. + </p> + <p> + "Everything is quiet here, Dias. My brother is fast asleep, but I will + wake him now that you have come up." + </p> + <p> + "Do not do so, señor; he worked very hard building the walls today. If I + see anything suspicious I will rouse him. We may have work tomorrow, and + it is much better that he should sleep on." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Dias! the fatigue has told on him more than on us; his figure + is not set yet, and he feels it more." + </p> + <p> + He walked back to the tents with Maria. + </p> + <p> + "If you wake just as daylight breaks please rouse me," he said. + </p> + <p> + "I shall wake, señor; I generally get up at daybreak. That is the best + time for work down in the plain, and I generally contrive to get + everything done before breakfast at seven." + </p> + <p> + Harry slept soundly until he was called. + </p> + <p> + "The sky is just beginning to get light, señor." + </p> + <p> + He turned out at once. José was already feeding the mules. + </p> + <p> + "You had better come along with me, José, and bring that gun of yours with + you. If the savages do attack, it will be well to make a forcible + impression on them." + </p> + <p> + Greatly pleased with the permission, José took up the old musket he + carried and accompanied Harry. + </p> + <p> + "What have you got in that gun, José?" + </p> + <p> + "The charge of buck-shot that you gave me the other day, señor." + </p> + <p> + "All right! but don't fire unless they get close. The shot will not carry + far like a bullet; but if fired when they are close it is better than any + bullet, for you might hit half a dozen of them at once." + </p> + <p> + José had been allowed to practise at their halting-places, and though he + could not be called a good shot, he could shoot well enough to do good + execution at thirty or forty yards. + </p> + <p> + Bertie was still asleep. + </p> + <p> + "Everything quiet, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I have seen nothing moving since I came out." + </p> + <p> + "Now, Bertie," Harry said, stirring his brother up with his foot. "All + hands on deck!" + </p> + <p> + Bertie sat up and opened his eyes. "What is up now?" he said. "Ay, what, + is it you, Harry, and José too? I must have been asleep!" + </p> + <p> + "Been asleep! Why, you went off in the middle of my watch, and Dias has + been on the look-out for over three hours." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, confound it! You don't mean to say that I have slept for over five + hours? Why didn't you wake me, Dias?" he asked angrily. + </p> + <p> + "Two eyes were quite enough to keep watch," Dias said. "I should have + waked you if I had seen anything of the savages. Besides, Don Harry said + you might as well go on sleeping if nothing happened, and I thought so + too." + </p> + <p> + "I feel beastly ashamed of myself," Bertie said. "I don't want to be + treated like a child, Harry." + </p> + <p> + "No, Bertie, and I should not think of treating you so; but you had had + very hard work, and were completely knocked up, which was not wonderful; + and you may want all your strength to-day. Besides, you know, you would + have been of no use had you been awake, for you could have seen nothing. + Donna Maria's eyes were a good deal sharper than mine, and I am quite sure + that, tired as you were, Dias would have seen them coming long before you + would. We had better lie down again, for it will be light enough soon for + them to make us out. How far do their arrows fly, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "They can shoot very straight up to forty or fifty yards, but beyond that + their arrows are of very little use." + </p> + <p> + "Well, then, we shall be able to stop them before they get to that + ravine." + </p> + <p> + Presently, as it became light, a figure showed itself at the turn of the + ravine. + </p> + <p> + "Don't fire at him," Harry said; "it is better that they should think that + our guns won't reach them. Besides, if the beggars will leave us alone, I + have no wish to harm them." + </p> + <p> + In a minute or two the figure disappeared behind the bend and two or three + others came out. "They think that our guns won't carry so far, or we + should have shot the first man." + </p> + <p> + For a quarter of an hour there were frequent changes, until at least fifty + men had taken a look at them. + </p> + <p> + "Now there will be a council," Harry said as the last disappeared. "They + see what they have got before them, and I have no doubt they don't like + it." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think they will try it, señor," Dias said. "At any rate they will + not do so until they have tried every other means of getting at us." + </p> + <p> + Half an hour passed, and then Harry said. "I will stop here with my + brother, Dias, and you and José had better examine the hillsides and + ascertain whether there is any place where they can come down. You know a + great deal better than I where active naked-footed men could clamber down. + They might be able to descend with ease at a place that would look quite + impossible to me." + </p> + <p> + Without a word Dias shouldered his rifle and walked away, followed by + José. He returned in two hours. + </p> + <p> + "There are several places where I am sure the savages could come down. + Now, señors, breakfast is ready; I will leave José here, and we will go + and talk matters over while we eat. The tents are only a hundred yards + away, so that if José shouts, we can be back here long before the savages + get up, for they could not come fast through that torrent." + </p> + <p> + "It seems to me," Harry said after they had finished the meal, "that if + there are only one or two points by which they could climb down we could + prevent their doing so by picking them off; but if there are more, and + they really come on in earnest, we could not stop them." + </p> + <p> + "There are many more than that," Dias replied. "I made out certainly four + points on the right-hand side and three on the left where I could make my + way down; there are probably twice as many where they could descend." + </p> + <p> + "Then I should say that the first thing to do is to go up through the + gorge above and see whether there is any place that could be better + defended than this. If we find such a spot, of course we could move to it; + if not, we shall have to settle whether to go up the gorge till we get to + some place where the mules can climb out of it, or stay here and fight it + out. By camping on the stream at a point where it could not be forded, and + making a breast-work with the bales, stones, and so on, I think we could + certainly beat off any attack by daylight, but I admit that we should have + no chance if they should make a rush during the night." + </p> + <p> + "I will go at once," said Dias, "and examine the river higher up. If I can + find no place where the mules can climb, I am sure to be able to find some + spot where we could do so. But that would mean the failure of our + expedition, for we certainly could not go up the mountains, purchase fresh + animals, food, and tools, and get down to the place we are looking for + until too late." + </p> + <p> + "That would be serious, Dias, but cannot be counted against our lives. If + there is no other way of escape from these savages, we must certainly + abandon the animals and make our way back as best we can. In that case we + must give up all idea of finding this gold stream. The star would not be + in the same place again for another year, and even then we might not find + it; so we must make up our minds to do our best in some other direction. + That point we must consider as settled. I should not feel justified in + risking my brother's life, yours, your wife's, and your nephew's, by + remaining here to fight we know not how many savages—for there may + be many more than the fifty we saw this morning, and they may in a day or + two be joined by many others of their tribe." + </p> + <p> + "I should not like to lose all the animals and go back empty-handed," Dias + said after a silence of two or three minutes, "unless it were a last + resource." + </p> + <p> + "Nor should I, Dias; but you see, if we linger too long we may find it + impossible to retire, we may be so hemmed in that there would be no chance + of our getting through. For the day of course we are safe. The savages + will have to decide among themselves whether to give the matter up, seeing + that they are sure to lose many lives before they overpower us. Then, if + they determine to attack us, they will have to settle how it is to be + done. Numbers of them will go up to the top of the hills on both sides and + try to find a point at which they can make their way down; others, perhaps—which + would be still more serious—may go farther up into the hills to find + a spot where they could come down and issue out by the upper gorge, and + then our retreat would be altogether cut off. All this will take time, so + we may feel sure that no attack will be made to-day." + </p> + <p> + "I will start up the river at once, señor. Certainly the first point to be + settled is whether we can find a more defensible spot than this, the + second whether there is any way by which the animals can be taken up." + </p> + <p> + "There must surely be many points higher up where this can be done." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, if we could get to them. But you saw we had difficulty in + making our way through this gorge; there may be others higher up where it + would be impossible either for us or the animals to pass." + </p> + <p> + "I did not think of that. Yes, that must be so. Well, you had certainly + better go at once. My brother will relieve José, and after the boy has + breakfasted he can return to his post, and Bertie can join me. I think if + I see the savages trying to find a path I will open fire upon them. I + don't say I should be able to hit them, for the top of those hills must be + eight or nine hundred yards' range, and it is not easy to hit an object + very much above or very much below you; but it is important that they + should know that our weapons carry as far as that; when they hear bullets + strike close to them they will hesitate about coming lower down, and + unless they do come within two or three hundred feet from the bottom they + cannot be sure of getting down." + </p> + <p> + Dias nodded. "That is a very good idea. Another cause of delay will be + that those at the top cannot see far down the rock on their own side, so + they will have to start by guess-work. Each party must fix upon the + easiest places on the opposite side, and then go back again and change + sides. I don't suppose they know any more of this place than we do. They + always keep down in the plains, and it is only because they met us down + there that they have followed us so far. I believe they will follow on as + long as they think there is a chance of destroying us, for they are so + jealous of any white man coming into what they regard as their country + that they would spare no pains to kill anyone who ventured there. Now I + will go, señor. You will keep near this end of the valley, in case there + should be an alarm that they are coming up the stream." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly; and my brother shall remain with José. With his rifle and the + two double-barrelled guns and José's musket they could hold the ravine + against anything but a rush of the whole tribe." + </p> + <p> + An hour later Harry saw a number of figures appear against the sky-line on + both sides. As they were clustered together, and would afford a far better + mark than a single Indian, he took a steady aim at the party on the + southern hill and fired. He had aimed above rather than below them, as, + had the ball struck much below, they might not hear it, whereas, if it + went over their heads, they would certainly do so. A couple of seconds + after firing he saw a sudden movement among the savages, and a moment + later not one was to be seen. Donna Maria, who was standing close by him + watching them, clapped her hands. "Your ball must have gone close to + them," she said, "but I don't think you hit anyone." + </p> + <p> + "I did not try to do so," he said. "I wanted the ball to go just over + their heads, so that they should know that even at that distance they were + not safe. I have no doubt that astonishment as much as fear made them + bolt. They'll be very careful how far they come down the side of the hill + after that. Now for the fellows on the other side." + </p> + <p> + But these too had disappeared, having evidently noticed the effect + produced upon the others. After a pause heads appeared here and there at + the edge of the crests. Evidently the lesson had impressed them with the + necessity for precaution, as they no longer kept together, and they had + apparently crawled up to continue their investigations. Beyond keeping a + watch to see that none had attempted to descend the slope Harry did not + interfere with them. At times he strolled to the breast-work, but no + movement had been seen in that direction. In two hours Dias returned. + </p> + <p> + "The gorge above is a quarter of a mile through, and very difficult to + pass. It is half-blocked with great rocks in two or three places, and + there would be immense difficulty in getting the mules over. Beyond that + it widens again, but the extent is not more than half what it is here. The + walls are almost perpendicular, and I do not think that it would be + possible to climb them at any point. Farther up there is another ravine. + It is very narrow—not half so wide as this—and the stream + rushes with great velocity along it. Two hundred yards from the entrance + the rocks close in completely, and there is a fall of water sixty or + seventy feet high." + </p> + <p> + "Well, that settles the point, Dias. We cannot get the animals out except + by the way they came in. As for ourselves, we might climb up at some point + in this ravine, but not in the others." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, señor," Dias said. "The outlook is a bad one—that is to + say, we may now be unable to reach the gold river in time—but so + long as we stay here we may be safe. We have plenty of provisions, we can + catch fish in the stream, and no doubt shall find birds in the bushes at + the lower part of the slopes. I doubt whether the natives will dare come + down those precipices at night. If they try to descend by day, we can very + well defend ourselves." + </p> + <p> + "The only question is, How long will it take to tire them out?" + </p> + <p> + "That I cannot tell. We know so little of the Chincas that we have nothing + to go upon. Some savages have patience enough to wait for any time to + carry out their revenge or slay an enemy; others are fickle, and though + they may be fierce in attack, soon tire of waiting, and are eager to + return to their homes again. I cannot think that they will speedily leave. + They have assembled, many of them perhaps from considerable distances; + they have had two days' march up here, and have lost at least two of their + comrades. I think they will certainly not leave until absolutely convinced + that they cannot get at us, but whether they may come to that decision in + two days or a month I cannot say." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER VIII — DEFEAT OF THE NATIVES + </h2> + <p> + Bertie, who had joined Harry when he saw Dias approaching, had listened + silently to their talk, then said: + </p> + <p> + "Don't you think that, by loading the mules and moving towards the mouth + of the next gorge just as it is getting dark, we might induce the Chincas + to think that we are going that way, and so to follow along the top of the + hills. We might, as soon as night has fallen, come back again and go down + the stream. Of course there may be some of them left to watch the mouth of + the ravine, but we could drive them off easily enough, and get a long + start before the fellows on the hills know what has happened." + </p> + <p> + None of the others spoke immediately; then Harry said: + </p> + <p> + "The idea is a good one as far as it goes. But you see at present we are + in a very strong position. If we leave this and they overtake us in the + woods, we shall not have the advantages that we have here." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I see that, Harry; but almost anything is better than having to wait + here and lose our chance of finding that gold." + </p> + <p> + "We can't help that, Bertie. You know how much that gold would be to me, + but, as I said this morning, I will run no desperate risks to obtain it. + When I started upon this expedition I knew that the chances of success + were extremely slight, and that there might be a certain amount of danger + to encounter from wild beasts and perhaps brigands; but I had never + calculated upon such a risk as this, and certainly I am not prepared to + accept the responsibility of leading others into it." + </p> + <p> + There was again silence, which was broken at last by Dias. + </p> + <p> + "The proposal of the young señor is a very bold one; but, as you say, Don + Harry, after leaving our position we should be followed and surrounded. In + the forest that would be very bad. I should say let us wait for at least a + week; that will still give us time to reach the gold valley. By then the + savages may have left, and some other plan may have occurred to us; at any + rate, at the end of a week we shall see how things go. The Indians may + have made an attack, and may lose heart after they are repulsed. They may + find difficulty in procuring food, though I hardly think that is probable. + Still, many things may occur in a week. If at the end of that time they + are still here, we can decide whether to try some such plan as the young + señor has thought of, or whether to wait until the Indians leave, and then + return to Cuzco; for I feel certain that the place cannot be found except + by the help of the star." + </p> + <p> + "Well, then," Bertie said, "could we not hit upon some plan to frighten + them?" + </p> + <p> + "What sort of plan, Bertie?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, of course we could not make a balloon—I mean a fire-balloon—because + we have no paper to make it with. If we could, and could let it up at + night, with some red and blue fires to go off when it got up high, I + should think it would scare them horribly." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; but it would be still better, Bertie, if we could make a balloon big + enough to carry us and the mules and everything else out of this place, + and drop us somewhere about the spot we want to get to." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, it is all very well to laugh, Harry! I said, I knew we could not make + a fire-balloon; I only gave that as an example. If we had powder enough we + might make some rockets, and I should think that would scare them pretty + badly." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, but we haven't got powder, Bertie. We have plenty of cartridges for + sporting purposes, or for fighting; but a rocket is a thing that wants a + lot of powder, besides saltpetre and charcoal, and so on." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, yes, I know that," Bertie said testily. "My suggestion was that we + might frighten them somehow, and I still don't see why we shouldn't be + able to do it. Let us try to hit upon something else." + </p> + <p> + "There is a good deal in what the young señor says," Dias said gravely. + "All the Indians are very superstitious, and think anything they don't + understand is magic. It is worth thinking over: but before we do anything + else we might find out how many of them there are at the other end of the + ravine. Only a few may be left, or possibly the whole tribe may be + gathered there at nightfall. To-night nothing will be settled, but + to-morrow night I will go down the torrent with José. I will carry your + double-barrelled guns with me, señor, if you will let me have them. When + we get to the other end I will take up my station there. José is small and + active. He could crawl forward and ascertain how many of them there are. + If he should be discovered, which is not likely, he would run back to me. + I should have four barrels ready to pour into them. That would stop them, + for they would think we were all there and were going to attack them, and + before they could recover from their alarm we should be back here again." + </p> + <p> + "That seems a good plan, Dias; but I do not see why Bertie and I should + not go down with you." + </p> + <p> + "It would be better not, señor. In the first place, they may have men + posted at their end of the ravine, and though two of us might crawl down + without being seen, just as they crawled up here, they would be more + likely to see four; in the next place, they might chance to crawl down the + hillside above just as we were going down the ravine, and Maria and the + animals would be at their mercy." + </p> + <p> + "They are hardly likely to choose the exact moment when we are to be away, + but I quite agree with you that the risk must not be run." + </p> + <p> + "Well," Bertie said, returning to his former idea, "if Dias can go down + there, I still think that somehow we might get up a scare." + </p> + <p> + Harry laughed. + </p> + <p> + "Well, you think it over, Bertie. If you can suggest anything, I promise + you that Dias and I will do our best to carry it out." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," Bertie replied gravely, "I will think it over." + </p> + <p> + "Now," Harry said, "we had better sleep in watches at night; one must be + at the breast-work, and one must listen for noises on the cliffs. It would + be hardly possible for a number of men to crawl down without exciting + suspicion or putting in motion some small stones." + </p> + <p> + "I do not think, señor," Dias said, "that it will be necessary to keep + that watch, for, as we knew from the noise when you fired last night, + there are numbers of birds and at least one beast—I fancy it is a + bear from the sound of its roar—up there, and it would be strange if + a number of men making their way down did not disturb some of them; + indeed, if one bird gave the alarm, it would put them all in motion; + besides, there are certainly monkeys, for I heard their cries and + chattering when the birds flew up. Still, it is perhaps as well that one + of us should watch. Shall we divide, as we did last night? only, of + course, José takes his place with you." + </p> + <p> + "I quite agree with you, Dias. Bertie, you had better get three hours' + sleep at once, and then after dinner we will sit by the fire here, smoke, + and listen, and Dias will watch the gorge and keep one ear open in this + direction too. It is a comfort to know that if we cannot get away by going + up the stream, the Indians cannot get down to attack us from that + direction." + </p> + <p> + Two nights and days passed. The Indians were still on the hills, and once + or twice men came down some distance, but a shot from Harry's rifle sent + them speedily back again. The third night Bertie was on watch; he saw + nothing, but suddenly there came three sharp taps. He discharged one + barrel of his gun at random down the ravine, and then held himself ready + to fire the other as soon as he saw anyone approaching. It was an anxious + minute for him before the other three ran up. + </p> + <p> + "What is it, Bertie; have you seen anything?" + </p> + <p> + "No, but three arrows tapped against the wall, so I fired one barrel to + call you up, and have been looking out for someone to take a shot at with + the other; but I have not seen anyone, though, as you may imagine, I + looked out sharply." + </p> + <p> + "It is probable that after the lesson they got the other night they did + not come so near, and that they merely shot their arrows to see if we were + still on guard. However, we may as well stay here for a bit to see if + anything comes of it." + </p> + <p> + Nothing happened, however, and they returned to the tents. Next morning + Bertie said to his brother: + </p> + <p> + "Look here, Harry, I have been thinking over that plan of mine. I really + think there is something to be done with it." + </p> + <p> + "Well, tell us your plan." + </p> + <p> + "In the first place, how much powder can you spare?" + </p> + <p> + "There is that great powder-horn José drags about with him to charge his + musket with. It will contain about a couple of pounds, I should say." + </p> + <p> + "That ought to do, I think." + </p> + <p> + "Well, what is your plan, Bertie?" + </p> + <p> + "In the first place, do you think that burned wood would do for charcoal?" + </p> + <p> + "It depends on what purpose you want it for." + </p> + <p> + "I want it to prevent the powder from going off with a bang." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, well, I should think that burned wood ground to a powder would be + just as good as charcoal. So you are still thinking of rockets? Your two + pounds of powder won't make many of them—not above two fair-sized + ones, and the betting is they would not go up." + </p> + <p> + "No, I am not thinking of rockets, but of squibs and crackers. I know when + I was at school I made a lot of these, and they worked very well. My idea + is that if we could crawl up close to where the Indians are assembled, + each carrying a dozen squibs and as many crackers, we could light a lot of + the crackers first and chuck them among them, and then send the squibs + whirling about over their heads, with a good bang at the end. It would set + them off running, and they would never stop till they were back in their + own forests." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I really do think that that is a fine idea—a splendid idea! + The only drawback is, that in order to carry it out we should want a lot + of strong cartridge-paper, and we have no paper except our note-books." + </p> + <p> + "I have thought of that, Harry, though it bothered me for a good long + time. You see, the cases are only to hold the powder and to burn regularly + as the powder does. At first I thought we might find some wood like elder + and get the pith out, just as we used to do for pop-guns, but that + unfortunately would not burn. We might, however, make them of linen." + </p> + <p> + "But we have no linen." + </p> + <p> + "No, but our leather bed-bags are lined with that coarse sort of stuff + they cover mattresses with." + </p> + <p> + "Tick, you mean?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, tick. Now, it struck me that this would do for the crackers. We + should have to cut it in strips three or four times the width of the + cracker. Then we could get Maria to make us some stiff paste; starch would + be better, but of course we have none. Then, taking a strip of the cloth, + we would turn over one side of it an inch from the edge to make a sort of + trough, pour in the gunpowder, carefully paste all the rest of it and fold + it over and over, and then, when it begins to dry, double it up and tie it + with string. We should then only have to add touch-paper, which, of + course, we could make out of anything, and put into the end fold. We could + break up a few of the cartridges, soak them in wetted powder, and then cut + them up into small pieces and stick them into the ends of the crackers. I + think that would do first-rate. I have made dozens of crackers, and feel + sure that I could turn out a good lot of them now. The squibs will be + easier; we should only have to paste one side of the strips and roll them + up so as to form suitable cases. When these are dry we should put a + thimbleful of powder into each, and then fill them up with powder and + charcoal. In order to make sure of a loud bang we could undo a piece of + rope and wind the strands round each case for an inch and a half from the + bottom. Of course, when we had ground down the burned wood we would mix it + with powder and try one or two of the squibs, so as to find the + proportions of charcoal to be used." + </p> + <p> + "You have evidently thought it all out well, and I think it does you no + end of credit. I authorize you to begin the experiment at once. The first + thing, of course, will be to get some wood and char it. I should think + that you would require at least two pounds of that to two pounds of + powder; but you had better only do a little at first—just enough to + make an experiment. You know it will require ramming down well." + </p> + <p> + When Dias, who was on watch, returned he found Bertie at work burning + pieces of wood and scraping off the charred surface. Harry explained the + plan to him. As he had frequently seen fireworks at Lima, Dias quickly + grasped the idea. + </p> + <p> + "It is splendid, señor; those things will frighten them far more than + guns. They will think so many devils have got among them, and we will + heighten the effect by discharging every piece that we can among them. In + their confusion they will think it is the fireworks that are killing them. + That would be necessary, for otherwise when they recovered from the panic + and found that no one had been hurt, they might summon up courage to + return." + </p> + <p> + At noon the next day Bertie with assistance had four squibs and two + crackers ready for trial. The squibs contained respectively one, two, + three, and four parts of charcoal to one of powder. + </p> + <p> + "Don't hold them in your hand while you are trying the experiment, Bertie. + Lay them down on that stone one by one and touch them off with a burning + brand from the fire, and take care that you have a good long one." + </p> + <p> + All, with the exception of José who was on watch, gathered round. The + first squib exploded with a bang, the second did the same, but with less + violence, the third went off in an explosive spurt, the fourth burned as a + squib should do, though a little fiercely, and gave a good bang at the + end. + </p> + <p> + "They go off rather too rapidly, Bertie," Harry said; "we should want them + to whiz about in a lively way as long as possible. I should put in five + parts of that burned wood next time." + </p> + <p> + "I will try at once," Bertie said. "I have got lots of cases made, and + enough burned stuff to make eight or ten more." + </p> + <p> + The mixture was soon made and another case charged, Bertie ramming down + the mixture with a stick which he had cut to fit exactly, and a heavy + stone as a hammer. This was done after each half-spoonful of the mixture + was poured in. Then he inserted a strip of his touch-paper. + </p> + <p> + "I will take this in my hand," he said, "there is no fear of its + exploding. I want to throw it into the air and see how it burns there." + </p> + <p> + The touch-paper was lit, and when the mixture started burning Bertie waved + the squib high above his head and threw it into the air. It flew along + some fifteen yards and then exploded. + </p> + <p> + "I don't think you can better that, Bertie. But you might make the cases a + bit stronger; it burned out a little too quickly. We shall probably not be + able to get very close to them." + </p> + <p> + The cracker was equally satisfactory, except that they agreed that a + somewhat larger charge of powder should be used to increase the noise of + the explosion. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Bertie," Harry said, "we will put all hands on to the business. + Donna Maria shall make a good stock of paste, and cut the tick into strips + for both widths. You shall make the cases for the squibs. Dias and I will + take charge of the manufacture of charcoal. That will be a long job, for + as you have two pounds of gunpowder we shall want ten of this charred + wood." + </p> + <p> + "Not quite as much as that, Harry, because we shall want the powder alone + for the crackers and the bangs of the squibs, and also for making the + touch-paper for all of them." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will say ten pounds, anyhow. We have a big stock of cartridges, + and can spare a few of them for so good a purpose." + </p> + <p> + They were soon at work. By night the cases were all made and drying, and + were left near the fire so as to be ready for filling in the morning. + </p> + <p> + Dias then said: "José will go down to-night, señor. Of course I shall go + with him. We must find out, in the first place, how near the mouth of the + ravine the savages are gathered, whether they keep any watch, and what + force they have. It will be well not to make ourselves known to them until + at least the greater part are gathered there. If we were only to scare a + small party, the others, when they came down, would know nothing of the + panic, and might take up the pursuit." + </p> + <p> + "I wish we had some means of driving them off the top of the hill, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "I don't see how that can be done, señor. But probably in another day or + two they will all go down of their own accord. They must by this time have + satisfied themselves that there is no getting at us from above, and that + it would be too dangerous to attempt a descent here under the fire of our + guns. They will be very likely, instead, to go down to-morrow or next day + to hold a general council, and in that case they may decide either to risk + climbing down at night, or to make a grand assault on the breast-work. Or, + if they cannot bring themselves to that, they may decide to leave half a + dozen men to watch the entrance, while the rest scatter themselves over + the forests. In that case the watchers would only have to go off and + summon them when we started again. As they might well imagine that we + should not find another position like this again, I expect that is what + they will do. If there are a hundred of them, they will find it difficult + to feed themselves long. Certainly the men on the hills will get little to + eat up there." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, be sure you warn José to be careful. They may be posting + sentries at the mouth of the ravine, just as they are keeping them at this + end." + </p> + <p> + "They may be, but I do not think it is likely; they will know that we + could not abandon our animals, and that if we passed through they would + have no difficulty in over-taking us, and would then have us at their + mercy. The last thing they would want is to prevent us from leaving this + position. They certainly would not fear an attack from us, knowing that + there are but four of us and a woman. Therefore, I think it probable that + they will keep at some little distance from the entrance, so as to tempt + us to come out." + </p> + <p> + "I hope it is so, Dias. Still, José will have to be very careful." + </p> + <p> + "He will be careful, señor. He knows his own life will depend upon his + crawling along as noiselessly as a snake. If he is seen, of course he will + come at all speed back to me; and, unless he is hit by a chance arrow, he + will not run much risk, for by the time they are ready to shoot he will be + out of sight on such dark nights as these, and in the shade of the + mountains and trees. I shall be ready to send four barrels of buck-shot + among them when they come up. That is sure to stop them long enough to + allow us to get under the cover of your rifles before they can overtake + us. + </p> + <p> + "I don't think that you need be at all uneasy about him, señor. We will + start in an hour's time, so that José can get near them before they go to + sleep. They will probably have a fire burning, but if not the only guide + to their position will be the sound of their talking. He will strip before + he leaves me, so that if they catch sight of him, they will suppose that + he is one of themselves." + </p> + <p> + Bertie now relieved José, who came back and had a long talk with Dias. + </p> + <p> + "We are ready now, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Here is my fowling-piece. It is already loaded with buck-shot. Bertie has + taken down his rifle and gun, and will give you the latter as you pass. I + suppose José will take no weapons?" + </p> + <p> + "Only a long knife, señor, that may be useful if he comes upon one of them + suddenly." + </p> + <p> + At the barricade José stripped, retaining only a pair of sandals. These + were as noiseless as his bare feet, and would be needed, as in the dark he + might tread upon a thorny creeper, or strike against a projecting rock. + </p> + <p> + "Good-bye, José!" Harry said. "Now, be careful. It would be a great grief + to us if anything happened to you." + </p> + <p> + "I will be careful, señor. The Indians won't catch me, never fear." + </p> + <p> + Harry and Bertie both shook hands with him, and then he and Dias stepped + into the water, and, keeping close along by the wall of rock, started on + their perilous expedition. + </p> + <p> + "I don't like it, Bert," Harry said as they lost sight of them. "It seems + a cowardly thing to let that lad go into danger while we are doing + nothing." + </p> + <p> + "That is just what I feel, Harry. I would have volunteered willingly, but + he will do it a great deal better than either you or I could." + </p> + <p> + "There is no doubt about that," Harry agreed. "Of course when he is out + with the mules he often travels at night, and certainly both he and Dias + can see in the dark a good deal better than we can." + </p> + <p> + There was suddenly a slight movement behind them, and they turned sharply + round. "It is I, señor. I am anxious about Dias, and I didn't like staying + there by myself. I thought you would not mind if I came up and sat by + you." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly not," Harry said. "Sit down and make yourself comfortable. I do + not think there is any fear for Dias. He cannot be taken by surprise, for + he will hear by their shouting if they discover José, and you may be quite + sure that he will bring them to a stand with the four shots he will fire + among them as they come near, and so will get a good start. They might run + faster than he can in the forest, but will scarcely be better able to make + their way up the torrent." + </p> + <p> + When Dias had been gone twenty minutes their conversation ceased, and they + sat listening intently. In another ten minutes, which seemed an hour to + them, Harry said, "The savages can keep no watch at their end of the + torrent, and José must have got safely away." + </p> + <p> + Very slowly the time passed. + </p> + <p> + "They must have been gone an hour," Bertie said at last. + </p> + <p> + "Quite that, I should think, Bertie. At any rate, we may feel assured that + all has gone well so far. For, though we might not hear the yells of the + savages over the rustle and roar of the torrent, we should certainly hear + gunshots." + </p> + <p> + Another half-hour passed, and then to their relief they heard Dias call + out, "All is well!" some little distance down. In three or four minutes + they could see the two figures approaching. "Give me your guns, Dias," + Harry said, "and then I will help you up the rocks. They might go off if + you were to make a slip. Now, while José is putting on his clothes, tell + me what he has found out." + </p> + <p> + "I have not heard much, señor. As soon as he rejoined me we started off, + and, coming up the torrent, we had not much chance of talking. He told me + that there were many of them, and that they were camped at some little + distance from the stream, just as I thought they would be." + </p> + <p> + "I will stay here, Harry," Bertie said. "You can hear the news and then + come and tell me." + </p> + <p> + "Very well. I will be back before long." + </p> + <p> + Dias, his wife, and Harry walked down towards the tent, and Bertie chatted + with José while the latter was dressing. + </p> + <p> + "You must feel horribly cold, José," he said. + </p> + <p> + "I am cold, now I think of it. I did not notice it while I was watching + the savages. When I took to the water again I did feel it. Maria will make + me a cup of hot coffee, and then I shall be all right again. It was good + fun to look at them, and know that they had no idea that I was so close. + If I could have understood their language, I should have learned something + worth telling. I felt inclined to scare them by giving a tremendous yell, + and I know I could have got away all right. They were sitting round a big + fire and would not have been able to see in the dark. I should have done + it, only I thought Dias would have blamed me for letting them know that + one of us had come down the cañon." + </p> + <p> + "He would have been angry, José, and so would my brother, for they would + certainly have set a watch afterwards, which would have spoilt all our + plans. Now run along, your teeth are chattering, and the sooner you get + something warm and wrap yourself up in your blankets the better." + </p> + <p> + The fire had burnt low when the others returned, but an armful of sticks + was thrown upon it at once. The kettle had been left in the embers at its + edge by Maria when she started, so that after it had hung in the blaze for + two or three minutes it began to boil, and coffee was soon ready. At this + point José ran in, and after he had drunk a large mugful he told them what + he had learned. + </p> + <p> + "When I left Dias at the mouth of the ravine," he said, "everything seemed + quiet. I walked along the edge of the stream for fifty yards, keeping my + ears open, you may be sure, and I saw a light glow close under the rocks + some distance on the other side of the river. I followed the stream down + till I came to a place where there was a quiet pool, and there I swam + across, then very carefully I made my way to where I could see the light. + It was quite three hundred yards from the river. As I got near I could + hear talking; I crawled along like a cat, and took good care not to + disturb a leaf, or to put a hand or a knee upon a dried stick, for I could + not tell whether they had anyone on watch near the fire. I perceived no + one, and at last came to a point where I could see the flame. It was in an + opening running a hundred feet into the mountains, and perhaps forty feet + across at the mouth. + </p> + <p> + "In this were sixty or seventy savages sitting or standing round a fire, + which had evidently been made there so that anyone coming down to the + mouth of the ravine should not see it. The fire was not a very large one, + and a good many of the men were gathered outside the little hollow. Some + of them were talking loudly, and it seemed to me that they were + quarrelling over something. Sometimes they pointed up to the top of the + hills, sometimes towards the mouth of our ravine. I would have got close + if I had understood their language. Presently I saw some of them lying + down, so that I could see that the quarrel, whatever it was about, was + coming to an end, and that they were going to lie down for the night. As I + could learn nothing further I crawled away and went down to the place + where I had swum the river before, and then crept quietly up to Dias, who + was on the look-out; for although I had seen no one as I had passed + before, there might still have been some of them on the watch." + </p> + <p> + "You have done very well, José," Harry said. "We have learned two things. + First, that they are not keeping watch at the mouth of the ravine, either + because they feel sure that we will not try to escape, or because they + wish us to leave and are giving us the opportunity of doing so. In the + second place, you have learned what force they have got down there, their + exact position, and the fact that they were evidently arguing how they had + best attack us. Well, from what you say there is every chance that we + shall be able to come upon them without being noticed till we are close + enough to throw our fireworks among them. Really the only thing for us to + learn is whether many of them are still at the top of the hill." + </p> + <p> + "I hardly think there can be many; only a few have shown themselves + to-day. They must know very well that we would not venture to climb up + during the day, and that it would be next to impossible for us to do so in + the dark, even if we made up our minds to abandon the animals and all our + stores." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I should say, Dias, there is no reason why we should put the matter + off. It will not take us long to load all the squibs to-morrow. My opinion + is that at dusk we had better saddle the mules and pack everything on them + in readiness for a start; then at ten o'clock we can go down and attack + the savages. The best moment for doing so will be when they are just lying + down. When we have sent them flying we will come up the torrent again, and + start with the mules as soon as it is daylight. It would be next to + impossible to get them down in the dark, as they might very easily break + their legs, or by rubbing against the wall shift their packs and tumble + them into the water." + </p> + <p> + "It would be a pity to waste time, señor. I will get some torches made + to-morrow. Some of the trees have resin, and by melting this I can make + torches that would do very well. By their aid we could get the mules down + without waiting for daylight. As they have already come up the torrent, + they will have less fear in going down, for the stream will help them + instead of keeping them back. I will go first with José and his mule; she + is as steady as a rock, and where she goes the others will follow; and + with five torches along the line they will be able to see well enough." + </p> + <p> + "Four torches, Dias. Your wife rode coming up, and she had better ride + going down." + </p> + <p> + "She can hold a torch as she sits; it does not matter to us if we get wet + to the waist, but it would be very uncomfortable for her. We shall have to + put the largest burdens on to the mules. One of the riding mules could + carry the two llamas, or if you think that that is too much, we can tie + each across a separate mule. They were more trouble coming up than all the + mules put together. We had pretty nearly to carry them through the deep + places, though at other points they leapt from rock to rock cleverly + enough." + </p> + <p> + "I am not going to be left behind if you are going to the fight, señor," + Donna Maria said, "if you will give me one of your pistols." + </p> + <p> + "We could manage that, I should think," Harry said. "We can put you on one + of the steadiest mules when we first go down, and with one at each side of + you we can manage it very well. José must go on a hundred yards ahead to + see whether any of the savages are on the watch at their end, and if so, + you must wait till we have cleared them out. You see, we shall have no + hesitation in shooting any of them if necessary, and though that would + bring the rest of them down on us, yet when our squibs and crackers begin + to fly among them, you may be sure they won't face us for an instant." + </p> + <p> + Dias grumbled that his wife had better stay where she was till they went + back for the mules; but Harry said: "I do think, Dias, that she had better + go with us. It would be cruel to leave her now that we are going into a + fight—leave her all alone to tremble for our lives, with a knowledge + that if things should go wrong with us the savages will soon be up here." + </p> + <p> + "Well, señor, if you think so, there is no more to be said." + </p> + <p> + "I am not going to be made a trouble of," Maria said. "I shall go down on + foot like the rest of you. I will take some other clothes with me, so that + when you all come back for the mules I can change into them." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps that would be the best plan," Harry agreed. "Now I will go back + and take Bertie's place. It is my turn to be on watch, and he will be + wanting to hear the news." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry, is it all right?" Bertie asked as he heard his brother + coming up to him. + </p> + <p> + "It couldn't be better! There are sixty or seventy of them in a sort of + little ravine three hundred yards away, on the left-hand side of the + river. They don't seem to be keeping guard at all, and if they are not + more careful to-morrow night we shall take them completely by surprise. We + are going to saddle all the mules directly it gets too dark for any of the + fellows on the hills to see us, then we must set to work and pull down + enough of the barricade here to allow them to pass. We ourselves, when we + go down, will cross at that shallow place above here, and go down the + river at that side, otherwise we sha'n't be able to cross it except at + some distance beyond the other end of the torrent. Of course the mules + must go down this side, as we shall want to turn to the right when we get + off. We shall make our attack about ten o'clock." + </p> + <p> + Bertie went off, and three hours later Dias relieved Harry. As soon as it + was light the next morning Bertie and José set to work to fill the cases—there + were a hundred squibs and fifty large crackers. + </p> + <p> + Donna Maria after breakfast went out and returned with a number of + flexible sticks of about half an inch in diameter; these she carried into + her tent, where she shut herself up for the forenoon. When, at one + o'clock, she came out with the result of her work, it resembled a chair + without legs and with a back about a foot wide and three feet high. + </p> + <p> + "What in the world have you got there, Donna Maria?" Bertie asked. + </p> + <p> + "Don't you know?" + </p> + <p> + "No, I have never seen a thing like it before." + </p> + <p> + "This is the thing the porters use for carrying weights, and sometimes + people, over the Cordilleras. You see that strap near the top goes round + the man's forehead, and when there is a weight in the chair these other + straps pass over his shoulders and under his arms, and then round whatever + is on the seat." + </p> + <p> + "But what is going to be on the seat?" + </p> + <p> + "I am," she laughed. "Dias is so overbearing. It had all been arranged + nicely, as you know; and then when he spoke to me afterwards he said, 'The + first thing to-morrow morning, Maria, you will set to work to make a + porter's chair, and I shall carry you down the stream. No words about it, + but do as you are told.' Generally Dias lets me have my own way, señor, + but when he talks like that, I know that it is useless to argue with him. + And perhaps it is best after all, for, as he said to me afterwards, it is + a nasty place for men to get along, but for a woman, with her petticoats + dragging and trailing round her, it would be almost impossible for her to + keep her footing." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I thought the same thing myself when we were talking about it + yesterday," Bertie said. "Of course I did not say anything, but I am sure + Dias is right. I found it very hard work to keep my footing, and I really + don't believe that I could have done it if I had been dressed as a woman. + And Dias can carry you like that?" + </p> + <p> + "Carry me, señor! he could carry three times that weight. He has cut + himself a staff seven or eight feet long this morning to steady himself, + but I don't think there was any need for it. Why, it is a common thing for + people to be carried over the Cordilleras so, and Dias is stronger a great + deal than many of the men who do it. As he said, if I had been going + through on foot you would all have been bothering about me. And it is not + as if two people could go abreast, and one help the other. There is often + only room between the rocks for one to pass through, and it is just there + where the rush of the water is strongest." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER IX — THE SIGNAL STAR + </h2> + <p> + During the afternoon Dias, who had been keeping a careful look-out at the + cliffs, said to Harry: "I think, señor, that the savages are leaving the + hills. An hour ago I saw a man walking along where we generally see them; + he was going straight along as if for some fixed purpose, and I thought at + once that he might be bringing them some message from the people below us. + I lost sight of him after a bit, but presently I could make out some men + moving in the other direction. They were keeping back from the edge, but I + several times caught sight of their heads against the sky-line when there + happened to be some little irregularity in the ground. They were not + running, but seemed to me to be going at a steady pace. Since then I have + been watching carefully, and have seen no one on the other side. I think + they have all been sent for, and will be assembled this afternoon at the + mouth of the torrent." + </p> + <p> + "I am very glad to hear it, Dias; that is just what we wanted." + </p> + <p> + "In one way—yes," Dias said. "It would be a great thing for us to + catch them all together, for I have no fear that they will stand when + these fireworks begin to go off among them." + </p> + <p> + "What is the drawback, then?" + </p> + <p> + "It is, señor, that they have either been collected because they have + given up the hope of catching us at present, and are going to scatter and + hunt till we venture out, which would be the worst thing possible; or they + have made up their minds to make a rush upon us." + </p> + <p> + "Don't you think that we can beat them back?" + </p> + <p> + "Not if they are determined, señor. You see, we can't make them out till + they are within twenty or thirty yards of us. At most you and your brother + could fire four shots, then you would take up your rifles. We shall have + then only four shots left. If they continue their rush where shall we be? + There would be two of us on one wall and two on the other. There would be + four shots to fire from one side and four from the other. Then the end + would come. Two on each side would not be able to keep back the rush of + two or three score. In two minutes it would be all over." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, Dias, I see that if they were determined to storm the place and take + us alive they could do it; but we have the fireworks." + </p> + <p> + "I did not think of that. Yes; but having once worked themselves up and + being mad with excitement, even that might not stop them, though I should + think it would. Yes, I believe we might feel assured that we should beat + them back, and if so, we should hear no more of them." + </p> + <p> + "If I knew that they would come," Harry said, "I would certainly say we + had best stay and defend ourselves; but we can't be sure that that is + their motive for assembling. They may, as you say, be going to move off, + leaving perhaps half a dozen men to watch the entrance and report if we + attempt to escape. That would be fatal, and our only chance would be to + leave everything behind and endeavour to climb up one side or the other; + and even that might not avail us, as there may be one or two men up there + to see if we make off that way. I am more inclined to think that this is + the course that they will take rather than risk a heavy loss of life. They + must have a good idea of what it would cost them to take the place." + </p> + <p> + "What do you think we had better do, then, señor?" + </p> + <p> + "I think we had better attack them as soon as possible after nightfall. It + is likely that they will do nothing before morning; as you say, they do + not like moving at night, and if they attack it will not be until shortly + before daybreak. There is sure to be a palaver when the men who have been + on the hills come down. It will be too late then for them to go back + before night, so that I think we are pretty sure to find them all in the + ravine this evening. If, when we get there, we find the place empty, we + must come to a decision as to what our best course will be. In that case I + think we ought to climb the hills and make our way up the mountains as + rapidly as possible. We could calculate on eight or ten hours' start, and + by keeping as much as possible on the rocks, might hope to get so high + among the mountains that they would not be able to follow our traces and + overtake us before we reach a point where they would not dare follow us. + In that case, of course we should have to give up all hope of finding the + gold valley, and lose the mules with all our belongings, which would + cripple us terribly." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, señor; I think that is the best plan." + </p> + <p> + "Then we will settle to start at nine o'clock, Dias." + </p> + <p> + They then discussed the arrangements for the attack. Each was to carry a + glowing brand, and when he got there, was to sling his gun behind him and + hold twelve squibs in one hand and the brand in the other. When they + approached within throwing distance of the savages, they were to lay their + guns down beside them, and then Harry was to put the ends of his squibs + against his brand, and hurl the whole of them among the Indians. A few + seconds later Bertie was to do the same, while Harry fired one barrel of + buck-shot. Bertie was to fire as Dias threw a dozen crackers, and then + José was to throw his squibs. Then all were to throw squibs and crackers + as far as they could go; and the other two barrels of buck-shot and José's + musket were to be poured in. By this time they calculated the savages + would be in full flight, and the three rifles could then be used. + </p> + <p> + Harry was to hand his rifle to Dias before the firing began, and he and + Bertie were to slip fresh cartridges into these guns and recap them before + sending off the last batch of their fireworks, so as to have them in + readiness either to empty their contents into the flying Indians, or to + cover their retreat should the fireworks fail to effect the panic they + hoped for. Their pistols were also to be reserved until the Indians fled. + Donna Maria was to stay by the water, and start at once on her way back if + Dias shouted to her to do so. Every step of the plan settled upon was + repeated again and again, until there was no possibility of any mistake + being made. Maria had not attended the council; her confidence in her two + white friends was unbounded, and Bertie's invention of the fireworks had + placed him on a level with his brother in her estimation. She therefore + quietly went on with her preparations for dinner without concerning + herself as to the details of the affair. + </p> + <p> + As soon as it was dark and the meal eaten, the tents were struck, the + baggage all rolled up and packed on the animals, and the fireworks + divided. When everything was in readiness they went together and made a + breach in the breast-work wide enough for the mules to pass. At nine + o'clock Maria was seated in the carrying-chair, and strapped on to her + husband's back; then four brands were taken from the fire and the party + started. When within fifty yards of the lower end of the ravine José went + forward, and, returning in a few minutes, reported that no savages were on + guard. A fire was burning outside the mouth of the ravine where he had + seen them on the evening before, and from the reflection on the rock he + believed that another fire was alight inside. His report caused a general + feeling of relief, for their great fear had been that the natives might + have made off before their arrival. + </p> + <p> + When they stepped out from the water Dias set Maria down. "You understand, + Maria," he said: "the moment I call, you are to start up the river." + </p> + <p> + "I understand," she said. "I have my knife, and if you do not rejoin me I + shall know how to use it." + </p> + <p> + "We shall rejoin you, Maria," Dias said confidently. "I believe that at + the first volley of fireworks they will be off. They must be more than + human if they are not scared, as they never can have heard of such things + before." + </p> + <p> + Keeping close to the rock wall, they went along in single file until + within forty or fifty yards of the fire; then, going down on their hands + and knees, they crawled up a slight rise, from the top of which they could + see a hundred or more natives gathered round a fire. One was addressing + the others, who were seated listening attentively. Laying the guns down to + be ready for instant action, and keeping themselves concealed in the + herbage, Harry took his bundle of squibs from his pocket. They were but + lightly tied together; slipping off the string he applied the ends to the + brand. There was a sudden roar of fire, and waving them once round his + head he hurled them into the midst of the assembly. There was a yell of + astonishment as the missiles flew hither and thither, exploding with loud + reports. The last had not exploded when Bertie's handful flew among them; + then came the parcel from Dias, and at the same moment Harry poured a + barrel of buck-shot among them, followed by a volley of crackers, while + almost simultaneously Harry threw his squibs and Bertie fired a volley of + buck-shot. For a moment the savages were paralysed, then many of them + threw themselves on their faces in terror of these fiery demons, while + others started in headlong flight. + </p> + <p> + "Send them off as quick as you can!" Harry shouted, as he discharged his + second barrel into the flying natives. Bertie followed suit, and then both + paused to reload while Dias and José hurled their remaining fireworks. By + this time the last of the natives had leapt up and fled. José's musket and + the three rifles cracked out, and then the little party rose to their feet + and joined in a wild "Hip, hip, hurrah!" + </p> + <p> + "You can come up, Maria; they have all gone!" Dias cried out; and Maria + joined them a minute later. More than a score of natives lay dead or badly + wounded round their fire. + </p> + <p> + "What are we to do with the wounded?" Bertie asked. + </p> + <p> + "We can only leave them where they are," Harry said. "Some of the savages + may have wandered away, or not have come down from the hills, and will + return here unaware of what has happened, or one or two of the boldest may + venture back again to look after their comrades. At any rate, we can do + nothing for them." + </p> + <p> + "It would be better to shoot them, señor," Dias said. + </p> + <p> + "No, I could not bring myself to do that," Harry said. "Buck-shot, unless + they strike in a body, are not likely to kill. I expect they are more + frightened than hurt. After we have gone many of them will be able to + crawl down to the river. Savages frequently recover from wounds that would + kill white men; and even if no others come down, those who are but + slightly wounded will help the more incapable. We have cleared the way for + ourselves, which was all we wanted, and have taught them a lesson they are + not likely to forget for many years to come. Let us go back at once and + bring down the mules. I suppose you will sit down by the stream, and wait + till we come back, Maria?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes," she said, "there is nothing to be afraid of now; but you can leave + me one of your pistols in case one of these savages may be shamming dead." + </p> + <p> + "José will wait with her," Dias said. "Now, José, you strike up a song. + You are generally at it, and as long as they hear you they will know that + some of us are still here, and will not venture to move." + </p> + <p> + "You take my gun, José; it is loaded," Harry said. "If any of them should + move and try to crawl away, don't fire at them; but if they look about and + seem inclined to make mischief, shoot at once." + </p> + <p> + Coming down with the animals the three men carried torches in each hand. + The mules reached the mouth of the torrent without accident, and the + llamas were then lifted off the baggage mules which had carried them, and + all were turned loose to graze on the rich grass near the edge of the + river. José and Dias went to the fire in the ravine, and returned laden + with burning brands, and a fire was soon blazing near the water. Two of + them kept watch by turns at the spot from which they had fired, lest any + of the wounded Indians should, on recovering, try to avenge their loss by + sending arrows down amongst the party. During the night four of the fallen + Indians, after first looking round cautiously, crawled away, and the + watchers could hear them running fast through the bushes till they were + beyond the light of the fire. + </p> + <p> + At dawn a start was made. The river was crossed at the pool where José had + swum over. Dias, on examination, found that the water, even in the deepest + part, was not more than breast-high. Accordingly he returned; Maria, + kneeling on one of his shoulders and one of Harry's, was carried across + without being wetted. Then they joined the animals, which were grazing a + short distance away, and set off without delay. Although they kept a sharp + look-out they saw no more of the Indians. They ascended several more + streams unobserved. Rough carvings on the face of several of the rocks led + them to carry their excursions farther than usual, but beyond a few ounces + of gold, washed from the stream, they found nothing. + </p> + <p> + "They must have been put here for some purpose," said Dias. + </p> + <p> + "I have been thinking it over, Dias, and I should not be surprised if, as + you thought, they were done to deceive searchers. You told me there were + some marks by which you would be directed in the gold valley; it is quite + likely that other marks might have been placed in the valleys so that the + real ones would not be particularly noticed." + </p> + <p> + "That is possible, señor; they would certainly do everything they could to + prevent anyone not in the secret from knowing. The mark I have to look for + first is a serpent. It is carved on a rock at the end of a valley." + </p> + <p> + "In that case the indication of the star would not be necessary, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "That may be, señor; but the valley may be a large one, and the + hiding-place very difficult to find, so that even when the valley was + known, it would need the guidance of the star to take us to the right + place." + </p> + <p> + "That might be so, Dias, if it were a hidden treasure that we were looking + for; but as, according to your account, it is simply an extraordinarily + rich deposit in the river, I hardly see why the guidance of the star + should be necessary when once the valley was known." + </p> + <p> + "That I cannot tell you, señor; but I am sure that it must be difficult to + find, for the Spaniards searched everywhere for gold, and although the + records of most of their discoveries still exist, there is no mention of + such a find, nor is there is any word of it among the Indian traditions." + </p> + <p> + A week before the appointed date they found themselves in the + neighbourhood where they felt sure the cleft must lie. Mount Tinta was + twenty miles in front of them, and from that point a range of mountains + trended off almost at right angles to that which they were following. One + lofty peak some thirty miles to the south-east rose above another. + </p> + <p> + "I believe that that is the peak," Dias said. + </p> + <p> + "I don't see any signs of a cleft in it, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; it is a very narrow one." + </p> + <p> + The next day they halted at the mouth of another valley, and as they + unloaded the mules, Harry exclaimed: "See, Dias, there is a cleft in that + peak! From here it looks as if it were a mere thread, and as if some giant + had struck a mighty sword-cut into it." + </p> + <p> + "That is right. Sure enough, señor, this must be the valley. Now, let us + look about for the serpent." + </p> + <p> + The search did not take them long. An isolated rock rose a quarter of a + mile from the mouth, and on this was a rude representation of a serpent. + The next morning they explored the valley thoroughly to a point where, + five miles higher, it ceased abruptly, the rocks closing in on either + side, and the stream coming down in a perpendicular fall from a point some + eighty feet above them. Going down the river, they washed the gravel again + and again, but without obtaining even as much gold as they had found + several times before. + </p> + <p> + "I cannot understand it," Harry said, as they sat down to their meal at + dusk. "Your tradition says nothing about hidden treasure, and yet there + does not seem to be gold in the stream." + </p> + <p> + "It may be higher up, señor. We must ascend the hills on each side of the + valley, and come down upon the river higher up." + </p> + <p> + Harry was on watch that night, and at one o'clock he roused the others up. + "See!" he exclaimed later on; "there is a bright star apparently about a + foot above the peak. I should think that must be the star. No doubt that + will rise in exact line behind the cleft on the 21st, that is four days + from now; probably it can only be seen when we are exactly in the line + with the cleft and the position of the gold. This cleft is undoubtedly + very narrow—no doubt the result of an earthquake. It certainly goes + straight through, and very likely it is some hundred yards across, so that + unless we are exactly in the line we sha'n't see it. As soon as it is dark + on the 21st we will all go some distance up the valley, where it is only + about four or five hundred yards across. We will station ourselves fifty + yards apart across it, then one of us is sure to see the star through the + cleft. We had each better take two sticks with us. Whoever sees the star + will fix one in the ground and then go backwards for a hundred yards, + keeping the star in sight, and plant the other; then the line between + those two sticks ought to lead us to the spot." + </p> + <p> + Each night the star rose nearer to the cleft. "There is no doubt we shall + see it in the proper position to-morrow night," Harry said on the 20th of + the month. "That certainly is strong proof that the tradition handed down + to you, Dias, is correct." + </p> + <p> + They employed the next day in again searching for some indication that + might assist them, but in vain. Dias and José both asserted that the tiny + rift in the rocky peak looked wider from the middle of the valley than at + any other point, and even Harry and his brother admitted that it could + scarcely be seen from the foot of the hills on either side, and therefore + it was agreed that Dias, Harry, and José should take their places only + some forty yards apart across the centre; Maria and Bertie going farther, + near the sides of the hills. When midnight approached they took their + stations. Suddenly Harry, who was standing by the side of the rivulet, + exclaimed, "I see it!" It was more than a minute later before Dias saw it, + while it was three or four minutes before José spoke, by which time Harry + had crossed the streamlet and fixed his second rod some distance on the + other side. Dias and José did the same. Bertie did not catch sight of it + for some time after José, and Maria did not see it at all. Then they went + back to their camping place. + </p> + <p> + "It is curious that I should have seen it before either of you, when you + were standing so close to me," Harry said. "It was lower than I expected, + and it is evident that the cleft must continue much farther down than we + thought, and that it must be extremely narrow at the bottom. It is + certainly a splendid guide, and there can be no mistaking it. Unless I had + been standing on the exact line, I should not have noticed the star till + later, and the crack is so much wider towards the top that it could + probably be seen on a line half a mile across. It will be strange if we + cannot find the place in the morning. Certainly we searched in the stream + just where I was standing, and found nothing. But, of course, it is + possible that in all this time it may have changed its course + considerably." + </p> + <p> + Dias shook his head. "It can hardly be that, señor, because, in that case, + anyone who had examined the valley could have found it. I begin to think + that it must have been a mistake about its being merely a rich place in + the river, and that it must be some vast treasure, perhaps hidden by the + people before the Incas, and kept by them as a certain resource when + needed. We shall have to search, I think, for some walled-up cave in the + rocks. We have already looked for it, but not seriously; and besides, + there are many boulders that have fallen, and formed a bank at the foot of + the cliff." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we shall know in a few hours. I feel absolutely certain that the + line between those two sticks will lead us to it." + </p> + <p> + None attempted to sleep, and as soon as it became light they took picks + and shovels and started up the valley. Harry gave an exclamation of + surprise as, standing behind the first stick, he looked towards the + second. "The line goes to the middle of that waterfall," he said. + </p> + <p> + This was so; for the stream made two or three sharp bends between the spot + where he had crossed it and the foot of the falls. + </p> + <p> + "'Tis strange!" Dias said; "we have examined that spot more than once. + There are great stones and boulders at the foot of the fall, and a large + deep pool. Can a treasure be buried in that? If so, it will be hard indeed + to get it." + </p> + <p> + Harry did not reply; his face was white with excitement. He walked forward + slowly till he reached the edge of the pool. It was some fifteen yards + across, and the colour of the water showed that it was very deep. + </p> + <p> + "I will dive, Harry," Bertie said; "I have gone down more than once in + five fathoms of water to pick up an egg that has been thrown overboard." + He stripped and swam out to the middle of the pool and dived. He was down + about a minute, and on coming up swam to the shore. "I could find no + bottom, Harry," he panted. "I am sure I must have gone down seven + fathoms." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Bertie," Harry said quietly; "we will make up our minds that + if it is there, we sha'n't get it at present. The foot of the valley is so + flat that it would need a cut at least a mile long to let the water off, + and we should therefore require either an army of men or a regular diving + apparatus, which there would be no getting this side of England. However, + it may not be there. Let us search now behind the fall." + </p> + <p> + There were some four or five feet clear between the sheet of water and the + rock. At times, as Harry pointed out, there would be an even wider space, + for the weather had been dry for the past two months, and the quantity of + water coming down was but small, while in the wet season a mighty flood + would shoot far out from the rock. The width of the stream in the wet + season was shown by the broad bed of what was now but a rivulet. Looking + upwards as they stood, the wall actually overhung them, and they could see + the edge where the water poured over unbroken. + </p> + <p> + "There may be a cave here," Harry went on, "and it may be covered by these + rocks piled up for the purpose. On the other hand, they may have fallen. I + think that is the most likely explanation, for as the top projects beyond + the bottom it is possible that some time or other there was a big fall." + </p> + <p> + They searched every foot of the rock within reach, but there were no signs + of any man's handiwork. The rock was solid, thickly covered with dripping + moss and ferns which had flourished in the mist and spray that rose from + the foot of the fall. This they had ruthlessly scraped off with their + picks. Silently they went out again at the end, and stood hopelessly + looking at the fall. It was some time before Harry said, "We must move + some of those stones now. Let us go at once and cut down some young trees, + for we can do nothing with our hands alone, but must use levers. For that + purpose we shall want straight wood, and strong. We had better get half a + dozen, in case some of them break; make them about ten feet long, and from + four to six inches thick, and sharpened slightly at the lower end." + </p> + <p> + In an hour the levers were ready. + </p> + <p> + "We had better breakfast before we begin, Dias. Your wife went off to + prepare it when we came out from the waterfall. I dare say it is ready by + this time." + </p> + <p> + In half an hour they were back again. They chose the central spot behind + the fall, and then set to work. Some of the rocks were dislodged without + much difficulty, but to move others, it was necessary to first get out the + smaller ones, on which they rested. So they toiled on, stopping for half + an hour in the middle of the day for food, and then renewing their work. + By evening they had made an opening four or five feet wide at the top, and + six feet deep, close to the wall. It was now getting dark, and all were + fagged and weary with their work, the light was fading, and they were glad + to return to camp. Maria came out to meet them. She asked no questions, + but said cheerfully, "I have a good olla ready, I am sure you must want + it." + </p> + <p> + "I feel almost too tired to eat," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "You will feel better when you have had some coffee. I have fed the mules, + José, and taken them down to water." + </p> + <p> + "I think," Bertie said, when they had finished their meal, "that we might + splice the main brace." + </p> + <p> + "I do think we might," Harry laughed. "We have not opened a bottle since + we started, and certainly we have worked like niggers since seven o'clock + this morning. I will open the case; it is screwed down, and I have a + screwdriver in the handle of my knife;" and he rose to his feet. + </p> + <p> + "What does Don Bertie want?" Dias said. "I will get it, señor. I do not + understand what he said." + </p> + <p> + "It is a sea expression, Dias. After a hard day's work the captain orders + that the main brace shall be spliced, which means that the crew shall have + a glass of grog—that is, a glass of spirits and water—to cheer + and warm them after their exertions. José, will you bring a blazing brand + with you? I shall want it to see the screws." + </p> + <p> + In a few minutes he returned. + </p> + <p> + "This is brandy, Dias. I don't suppose you have ever tasted a glass of + good brandy. Is your kettle boiling still, señora? We shall want hot + water, sugar, and five of the tin mugs. Have you any of those limes we + picked the other day?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor." + </p> + <p> + "That is good. Just a slice each will be an improvement." Harry mixed four + mugs, and a half one for Maria. "There, Dias!" he said. "You will allow + that that is a considerable improvement on pulque." + </p> + <p> + He and his brother had already lighted their pipes. The other three had + made cigarettes. Dias and José were loud in their commendations of the new + beverage. Donna Maria had at first protested that she never touched + pulque, and this must be the same sort of thing. However, after sipping + daintily, she finished her portion with evident satisfaction. They did not + sit up long, and as soon as they had finished their first smoke all + retired to bed, leaving for once the llamas and mules to act as sentries. + As soon as it was fairly daylight, they drank a cup of coffee and started + again to work. Harry went first into the hole they had made, and, kneeling + down, struck a match to enable him to see the rock more thoroughly. He + gave a slight exclamation, then said: "Open your knife, Bertie, and come + in here and strike another match. I want both my hands." + </p> + <p> + "I have a torch here, señor," + </p> + <p> + "That is best; then light it, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + There was just room at the bottom for Bertie to stand by the side of his + brother, who was lying down. + </p> + <p> + "Hold the torches as low as you can, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + Harry picked away with the point of his knife for a minute or two and then + sat up. + </p> + <p> + "That is the top of a cave," he said. "Do you see, this crack along here + is a straight one. That, I fancy, was the top of the entrance to the cave. + That stone under it has a rough face, but on the top and sides it is + straight. It is fitted in with cement, or something of that sort, and is + soft for some distance in, and then becomes quite hard. I can just see + that there are two stones underneath, also regularly cut." + </p> + <p> + He made room for Bertie to lie down, and held the torch for him. "I think + you are right, Harry. Those three stones would never fit together so + closely if they had not been cut by hand, though, looking at the face, no + one could tell them from the rock above them." + </p> + <p> + Dias next examined the stones. + </p> + <p> + "There is no doubt that that is the entrance to a cave, señor," he said as + he joined them; and the three went out beyond the fall, for the noise of + the water was too great for them to converse without difficulty behind the + veil of water. José stayed behind to examine. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, we have found the place where the treasure is hidden, but I + don't think that we are much nearer. Certainly we have not strength + sufficient to clear away those fallen stones, and probably the cave is + blocked by a wall several feet thick. We should want tools and + blasting-powder to get through it. No doubt it is a natural cave, and it + seems to me probable that they altered the course of the stream above, so + that it should fall directly over the entrance. I think before we talk + further about it we will go up there and take a look at it. If we find + that the course has been changed that will settle the matter." + </p> + <p> + It took them an hour to climb the hill and make their way down to the + gorge through which the river ran. They examined it carefully. + </p> + <p> + "It must always have come along here," Dias said. "There is no other + possible channel; but there are marks of tools on the rocks on each side + of the fall, and the water goes over so regularly that I think the rock + must have been cut away at the bottom." + </p> + <p> + "It certainly looks like it, Dias. The rocks widen out too, so that + however strong the rush of water may be it will always go over in a + regular sheet. Let us follow it along a little way." + </p> + <p> + Fifty yards farther on, the gorge widened out suddenly, and they paused + with an exclamation of astonishment. Before them was a wide valley, filled + to the spot where they were standing with a placid sheet of water four or + five hundred yards wide, and extending to another gorge fully a mile away. + Bertie was the first to find his voice. + </p> + <p> + "Here's a go! Who would have thought of finding a lake up in the hills + here?" + </p> + <p> + "I did not know there was one," Dias said. "I have never heard of it. But + that is not strange, for no one who came up the valley would dream that + there was anything beyond that fall." + </p> + <p> + Harry had sat down and thought for some minutes, looking over the lake + without speaking. + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid, Dias," he said at last, "that your tradition was a true one + after all, and that the gold lay in the bed of a stream in the valley we + now see filled up." + </p> + <p> + "But it must always have been a lake, señor," Dias said after thinking for + a minute, "and could not have been shallower, for there is no other escape + than the waterfall; and however heavy the rains it could not have risen + higher, except a few feet, as one can see by the face of the rock." + </p> + <p> + "It may have had some other way out," Harry said. + </p> + <p> + Dias looked carefully round the side of the valley. "There is no break in + the hills that I can see, señor." + </p> + <p> + "No; but my firm conviction is that the top of that cave that we found + behind the fall is really the top of a natural tunnel through which the + stream originally flowed. There are two or three reasons for this. In the + first place, it is certainly remarkable that there should be a cave + immediately behind that fall. I thought at first that the stream above + might have been diverted to hide it, but the ravine is so narrow that that + could not be possible. In the next place, your tradition has proved + absolutely true in the matter of the star, and in the hour of its + appearance in the exact line to the mouth of that cave. How correctly the + details have been handed down from generation to generation! If they are + right on that point it is hardly likely that they can be inaccurate on + other points, and that the tale of an extraordinarily rich treasure could + have been converted into one of an exceptional deposit of gold in the bed + of a river. + </p> + <p> + "I think that the passage was probably closed by the old people when they + were first threatened by the invasion of the Incas. No doubt they would + choose a season when the stream was almost dry. They had, as the remains + of their vast buildings will show, an unlimited supply of labour. They + would first partially block up the tunnel, perhaps for the first fifty + yards in, leaving only a small passage for the water to run through. They + might then close the farther end with sacks of sand, and having the other + stones all cut, and any number of hands, build it up behind the sacks, and + then go on with the work till it was solid; then no doubt they would heap + stones and boulders against the face of the wall. By the time the Incas + had conquered the country the valley would be a lake many feet deep. The + Incas, having gained an abundant supply of treasure elsewhere, would take + no steps towards opening the tunnel, which in any case would have been a + terrible business, for the pressure of water would drive everything before + it. Having plenty of slave labour at their disposal, they knew that it + could be done at any time in case of great necessity, when the loss of the + lives of those concerned in it would be nothing to them. When the valley + became full the water began to pour out through this gap, which perhaps + happened to be immediately over the mouth of the tunnel, or it may have + been altered by a few yards to suit, for they were, as we know from some + of their buildings, such good workmen that they could fit slabs of the + hardest stone so perfectly together that it is hardly possible to see the + joints. Therefore they would only have to widen the mouth of the gorge a + little, and fit rocks in on either side so that they would seem to have + been there for all time; and indeed the natural growth of ferns and mosses + would soon hide the joints, even if they had been roughly done." + </p> + <p> + "And that all means, Harry—?" Bertie asked. + </p> + <p> + "That all means that we have no more chance of getting at the gold than if + it were lying in the deepest soundings in the Pacific." + </p> + <p> + Bertie sat down with a gasp. + </p> + <p> + "There is no way of getting that water out," Harry went on quietly, + "except by either cutting a channel here as deep as the bottom of the + lake, or by blasting the stone in the tunnel. The one would require years + of work, with two or three hundred experienced miners, and ten times as + many labourers. The other would need twenty or thirty miners, and a + hundred or two labourers. There is possibly another way; but as that would + require an immense iron siphon going down to the bottom of the lake, along + one side of this ravine, and down into the bottom of the pool, with a + powerful engine to exhaust the air in the first place and set it going, it + is as impracticable, as far as we are concerned, as the other two. + </p> + <p> + "In the same way I have no doubt that, with a thousand-horse-power engine, + the lake could be pumped dry in time; but to transport the plant for such + an engine and its boiler across the mountains would be an enormous + undertaking; and even were it here, and put up and going, the difficulty + of supplying it with fuel would be enormous. Certainly one could not get + up a company with capital enough to carry out any one of the schemes + merely on the strength of an Indian tradition; and with the uncertainty, + even if they believed the tradition, whether the amount of gold recovered + would be sufficient to repay the cost incurred. + </p> + <p> + "Well, we may as well go down to dinner." + </p> + <p> + He shouldered his pick and led the way back. Scarce a word was spoken on + the way. Bertie tried to follow the example of his brother, and take the + matter coolly. Dias walked with his head down and the air of a criminal + going to execution. The disappointment to him was terrible. He had all + along felt so confident that they should be successful, and that he should + be enabled to enrich those he considered as the preservers of his life, + that he was utterly broken down with the total failure of his hopes. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER X — A FRESH START + </h2> + <p> + Not until he got to the camp did Harry look round. When he caught a + glimpse of the guide's face he went up to him and held out his hand. + </p> + <p> + "You must not take it to heart, Dias; it has been unfortunate, but that + cannot be helped. You have done everything you could in the matter, and + brought us to the right spot, and no one could tell that when we got + within half a mile of the gold river we should find the valley turned into + a deep lake. We can only say, 'Better luck next time'. We would say in + England, 'There are as good fish in the sea as ever came out of it'. I + have never felt very sanguine myself about this; it has all along seemed + too good to be true. Of course we are disappointed, but we may have better + luck next time." + </p> + <p> + "But I don't know, señor, with certainty of any other place. No one was + ever entrusted with more than one secret, so that if the Spanish tortures + wrung it out of him two treasures would not be lost." + </p> + <p> + "We need not talk any more about this place, Dias. I see your wife has got + some of the fish that we caught yesterday fizzling on the fire. Now I + think of it, I am very hungry, for it is six hours since we had our coffee + this morning. After we have had our meal we can discuss what our next move + had better be." + </p> + <p> + While they were speaking, José had been rapidly telling Maria the + misfortune which had befallen them, and the tears were running down the + woman's cheeks. + </p> + <p> + "You must not feel so badly about it, Maria," Harry said cheerfully; "you + see my brother and I are quite cheerful. At any rate, no one is to blame. + It would have been an enormous piece of luck if we had succeeded, but we + never looked on it as a certainty. Anything might have happened between + the time the gold was shut up and now, though we certainly never expected + to find what we did. We only thought it possible that we might have the + luck to find the treasure. Now you had better look to those fish, or we + shall lose our breakfast as we have lost our gold, and this time by our + own fault. We are as hungry as hunters all of us; and in fact we are + hunters, although we have not brought any game with us this time." + </p> + <p> + The woman wiped away her tears hastily, and, taking off the fish which she + had put on when they were coming down the hill, she laid them on plates + with some freshly-baked cakes. The fish were excellent, and Bertie, as + they ate, made several jokes which set them all laughing, so that the meal + passed off cheerfully. + </p> + <p> + "Now for the great consoler," Harry said, as he took out his pipe. "When + we have all lighted up, the council shall begin. Never mind clearing away + the plates now, Maria; just sit down with us, there is wisdom in many + counsellors. Now, Dias, what do you think is the best course for us to + adopt at present?" + </p> + <p> + "Unless you wish to stay here and make further search?" + </p> + <p> + "By no means, Dias," Harry said; "for the present, I have seen enough of + this side of the mountains. We will get back to Cuzco and make a fresh + start from there." + </p> + <p> + "In that case, señor, there is no doubt as to the best route. There is a + pass over the mountains just on the other side of Mount Tinta; it leads to + the town of Ayapata, which lies somewhere at the foot of that peak. I have + never been there, but I know its situation. It is a very steep pass, but + as it is used for mule traffic it cannot be very bad. Once we have passed + over it on to the plateau we shall not be more than seventy or eighty + miles from Cuzco." + </p> + <p> + "That is quite satisfactory. We will set off to-morrow." + </p> + <p> + "We had better catch some more fish, for we have had no time for hunting + lately," Maria said. "The meat we ate yesterday was the last we had with + us. If we cut the fish open and lay them flat on the rocks, which are so + hot one can scarcely hold one's hand on them, they will be sufficiently + dry by sunset to keep for two or three days, and before that you are sure + to shoot something." + </p> + <p> + The river was full of fish, and in half an hour they had caught an + abundance, having fifteen averaging eight pounds apiece. These were at + once cut open, cleaned, and laid down to dry. + </p> + <p> + "The fishing on this river would let for a handsome sum in England," Harry + laughed; "and I think the fish are quite as good as trout of the same + size. The only objection is that they are so tame, and take the bait so + greedily, that, good as the stream is, they would soon be exterminated." + </p> + <p> + That evening there was a slight stir among the animals which had just lain + down. José leapt up and walked towards them. + </p> + <p> + "There is something the matter, Dias," he cried; "the llamas are standing + up with their ears forward. They see or hear something." + </p> + <p> + "It may be pumas or jaguars," Dias said. "Take your gun, señor." + </p> + <p> + He picked up his rifle, and Harry and Bertie followed suit, and further + armed themselves with their shot-guns. + </p> + <p> + "You had best come with us, Maria," her husband said. "There is no saying + where the beasts may be. See! the mules are standing up now and pulling at + their head-ropes. Let us go among them, señors, our presence will pacify + them." + </p> + <p> + They all moved towards the mules, which were standing huddled together. + Dias and José spoke to them and patted them. + </p> + <p> + "You stand at their heads, Maria," the former said, "and keep on talking + to them. We must see if we can discover the beasts. There is one of them!" + he exclaimed, but in a low tone. "Do you see the two bright points of + light? That is the reflection of the fire in his eyes." + </p> + <p> + "Shall I fire?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, not yet. If we were only to wound him he would charge us; let + us wait till he gets closer. Probably there are two of them, male and + female, they generally go about in pairs." + </p> + <p> + Even as he spoke the seeming sparks disappeared. + </p> + <p> + "He has moved," Dias said; "he will probably walk round us two or three + times before he makes up his mind to attack." + </p> + <p> + "If he would go near the fire we could get a fair shot at him, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "He won't do that, señor; he will most likely go backwards and forwards in + a semicircle, getting perhaps a little closer each time." + </p> + <p> + Ten minutes passed and then Maria said: + </p> + <p> + "There are two of them. I can see their outlines distinctly." + </p> + <p> + "Do you think, if we were to fire a gun, they would move off, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "They might for a time, señor, but the probability is that they would come + back again. They have smelt the mules, and are probably hungry. It is + better to let them attack us at once and have done with it." + </p> + <p> + A minute or two later there was a snarling growl. + </p> + <p> + "They are jaguars," Dias said. + </p> + <p> + Again and again the threatening sound was heard, and in spite of Maria's + efforts the mules were almost mad with fright. + </p> + <p> + "We had better lie down beyond them," Dias said. "There is no doubt the + beasts will come from that side. If we posted ourselves behind them the + mules might break loose and knock us over just as we were taking aim." + </p> + <p> + They lay down side by side on the grass with their rifles at their + shoulders. + </p> + <p> + "I can see them now, Dias," Harry whispered, "not more than fifty yards + away. I think we could hardly miss them now." + </p> + <p> + "You could not if it were daylight, señor; but in the dark, when you can't + see the end of your rifle, you can never be certain about shooting." + </p> + <p> + The beasts had now apparently made up their minds to attack. They crouched + low, almost dragging their bellies on the ground, and one was somewhat in + advance of the other. + </p> + <p> + "That is the male ahead," Dias whispered. "Do you and your brother take + aim. I will take the female, and José will hold his fire of buck-shot till + she is within a length of us." + </p> + <p> + "How shall I know when it is going to spring?" + </p> + <p> + "When it stops, señor. It is sure to stop before it springs." + </p> + <p> + "Aim between the eyes, Bertie, and fire when I do," Harry whispered to his + brother, who was lying next to him. + </p> + <p> + When within twelve yards the jaguar halted. + </p> + <p> + "Now!" Harry said, and they discharged their rifles at the same moment, + and, dropping them, grasped the shot-guns. + </p> + <p> + The jaguar fell over on one side, clawing the air, and then recovered + himself. As he did so two charges of buck-shot struck him on the head, and + he rolled over and remained motionless. + </p> + <p> + Dias had fired at the same moment, but he had not stopped the second + jaguar. José, instead of waiting, hastily discharged his gun, and in + another instant a dark body bounded over their heads on to the back of one + of the mules, which it struck to the ground. + </p> + <p> + Harry and Bertie leapt to their feet, and discharged their second barrels + into the jaguar's body. It turned suddenly round and attempted to spring, + but its hindquarters were paralysed; and Bertie, pulling out his pistol, + fired both barrels into its head. The brute at once fell over dead, and + the lad gave a shout of triumph. + </p> + <p> + "Thank goodness that is over without accident!" Harry said. "They are + formidable beasts, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "In the daytime, when one can see to aim, they can be killed easily + enough, señor; at night their presence is to be dreaded." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid we have lost a mule." + </p> + <p> + "I think not, señor. He was knocked down by the shock, but he had his + saddle on, and the brute had no time to carry him off." + </p> + <p> + The mule rose to its feet as they spoke; José ran and brought a flaming + brand from the fire. Blood was streaming from both the animal's shoulders. + </p> + <p> + "It stuck its claws in, señor, but has not made long gashes. I should say + that these wounds were caused by the contraction of the claws when you + finished her with your pistol. The animal will be all right in a day or + two; and as our stores have diminished, we need not put any load on it for + a time." + </p> + <p> + "I hope you were not frightened, Maria?" Bertie said + </p> + <p> + "I was a little frightened," she said, "when the mule came tumbling down + close to me, and I could see the jaguar's eyes within a few yards of me, + but I had my dagger ready." + </p> + <p> + "It would not have been much good," Dias said, "if the beast had attacked + you." + </p> + <p> + "I think you showed no end of pluck," Bertie said. "If he had come close + to me, and I had got nothing but that little dagger in my hand, I should + have bolted like a shot." + </p> + <p> + "I am sure that you would not, señor," she said. "You are a great deal too + brave for that." + </p> + <p> + Bertie laughed. + </p> + <p> + "It is all very well to be brave with a rifle in your hand and another gun + ready, to say nothing of the pistols. By the way, I thought Harry had + given you one of his? + </p> + <p> + "So he did, but I had forgotten all about it. If I had thought of it I + should have used it." + </p> + <p> + "It is just as well that you did not," Harry said. "If you had done so, + the brute would have made for you instead of turning round to attack us." + </p> + <p> + "Now, señor," Dias put in, "we had better drag the jaguars away; the mules + will never get quiet with the bodies so close to them." + </p> + <p> + It needed all his strength and that of his companions to drag each of the + bodies fifty yards away. + </p> + <p> + "Now, José," Dias said when they returned, "you had better give the + animals a feed of maize all round. They will settle down after that. I + shall keep watch to-night, señor. It is not likely that any more of these + beasts are in the neighbourhood; but it is as well to be careful, and I + don't think any of us would sleep if someone were not on the look-out." + </p> + <p> + "I will relieve you at two o'clock," Harry said. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, I have not been on the watch for the past two nights. I would + rather sit up by the fire to-night." + </p> + <p> + Two days later they arrived at the foot of the pass. Just as they gained + it they met two muleteers coming down it. Dias entered into conversation + with them, while the others erected tents, preparing to camp. + </p> + <p> + "What is the news, Dias?" Harry asked as he returned. + </p> + <p> + "The men say, señor, that the pass is very unsafe. Many robberies have + taken place in it, and several men, who endeavoured to defend themselves + against the brigands, have been killed. They were questioned by four armed + men as they came down, and the goods they were carrying down to Ayapata + were taken from them. They say that traffic has almost ceased on the + road." + </p> + <p> + "That is bad, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Very bad, señor. We need not be afraid of brigands if they meet us as we + travel along the foot of the hills, but it would be another thing in the + passes. There are many places where the mules would have to go in single + file, and if we were caught in such a spot by men on the heights, we might + be shot down without any chance of defending ourselves successfully." + </p> + <p> + "That is awkward, Dias. It is a scandal that these brigands are not rooted + out." + </p> + <p> + "People are thinking too much of fighting each other or their neighbours + to care anything about the complaints of a few muleteers, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Is there no other way of crossing the mountains than by this pass?" + </p> + <p> + "There is a pass, señor, between Ayapata and Crucero, but it is a very bad + one." + </p> + <p> + "And where should we be then, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, señor, it would take us along the other side of the mountains to + Macari. From that place there is an easy path to La Raya; there we are on + the plateau again, and have only to travel by the road through Sicuani to + Cuzco." + </p> + <p> + "In fact, it would double the length of our journey to Cuzco?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor; but if you liked, from Crucero you might go down to Lake + Titicaca. There are certainly good mines in the mountains there." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, but is there any chance of our finding them?" + </p> + <p> + "I can't say that, señor, but I fear that the chance would be very small." + </p> + <p> + "Then it is of no use trying, Dias. We saw at the last place what pains + the old people took to hide places where gold could be found, and if there + had been rich mines among these mountains you speak of, no doubt they + would have hidden them just as carefully. The question is, shall we go up + this pass as we intended, and take our chance, or shall we go by this + roundabout way?" + </p> + <p> + By this time José had lit a fire, and they had seated themselves by it. + </p> + <p> + "One hates turning back, but we are not pressed for time. As far as I can + see, my only chance is the feeble one of finding treasure in the place you + spoke of up the coast above Callao. It is now four months since we left + Lima. Travelling straight to that place would take us how long?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, señor, if we go round by Ayapata to Crucero, and then to Macari, it + would be nearly a thousand miles." + </p> + <p> + "Quite a thousand, I should think. That is three months' steady work. By + the time we get there it will be about a year from the time we left + England. I have seen quite enough of the mountains to know that our chance + of finding anything among them is so small that it is not worth thinking + of. It seems to me, therefore, Dias, that we might just as well, instead + of going south over these difficult passes, return by the foot of the + mountains as we have come, going through Paucartambo, crossing the rivers + that flow north and fall somewhere or other into the Amazon, and keeping + along it till we come to Cerro de Pasco. There we should be nearly in a + line with this place you know of, and can keep due west—that is to + say, as nearly due west as the mountains will allow. It would be three or + four hundred miles shorter than by taking the pass at Ayapata. We should + have a good deal of sport by the way, and should certainly have no trouble + with the brigands till we got to Cerro. Of course it is possible that we + might fall in with savages again, but at any rate they are not so + formidable as brigands in the passes. What do you say to that?" + </p> + <p> + "It is certainly shorter, señor; and, as you say, we should have no + trouble with the brigands, and we should also escape the troubles that + have been going on for some years, and are likely, as far as anyone can + see, to go on for ever. We were very fortunate in not meeting any of the + armies that are always marching about." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XI — BRIGANDS + </h2> + <p> + Three months were spent in the journey to the foot of the pass leading up + to Cerro. They had good shooting, and found no difficulty in providing + themselves with food. Fish were plentiful in the streams, and in some of + the long-deserted plantations they found bananas, grapes, and other fruits + in abundance, together with sugar-canes, tomatoes, maize growing wild, and + potatoes which were reverting to the wild type. They met neither with + alligators nor large serpents, for they kept on the lower slopes of the + foot-hills, as much as possible avoiding the low forest lands, where they + might come in contact with the savages. For the same reason, they had no + opportunity of taking any of the great fish found in the sluggish rivers, + but had an abundance of smaller fish in the bright mountain streams. They + killed two tapirs and several pumas and jaguars. Their two llamas, having + one night wandered away from the mules, were killed by these beasts. But + as the stores were a good deal lighter than when they started, this was no + great misfortune. Occasionally they followed streams up into the hills, + and did a little washing for gold when they halted for a day or two there. + </p> + <p> + "We have had a good time of it," Harry said as they sat round the fire, + "and I am almost sorry that it is over, and that this is our last day of + wandering where we like, shooting and fishing, and above all, camping in + pleasant places. We have been very fortunate in not meeting any of the + savages since the fight we had with them four or five months ago. It is a + splendid country for sport, and except that we should like it a bit + cooler, and could have done without some of the thunder-storms, it is a + grand life. For a time now we are going back to a sort of civilization, + filthy inns, swarms of fleas, and fifteenth-rate cooking." + </p> + <p> + "It is not so much the fault of the cooking," Maria said, "as of the meat. + Here we get fish fresh out of the stream, and birds shot an hour or two + before they are eaten. We pick our fruit from the trees, instead of buying + it after it has been carried miles and miles to the market. We have a + capital stock of coffee, tea, and sugar. Among the old plantations we pick + cocoa and pound it fresh, and boil it. As we brought plenty of pepper and + spices, it would be hard indeed if one could not turn out a good meal. And + then, señors, you always come to eat it with a good appetite, which is all + in favour of the cook." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I grant that you have had all those advantages, Maria, but it is not + everybody who makes the best of them. I can safely say that since we + started we have never sat down to a bad breakfast or dinner. Now, for a + bit, we are going to lead a different sort of life. We shall be on beaten + tracks. We shall meet lots of people. It is strange to think that, except + for those peasant muleteers we met at the foot of the pass by the Tinta + volcano, we have not seen a soul except the savages—who have souls, + I suppose—since we left Paucartambo more than six months ago; and + yet somehow we do not seem to have missed them. I wonder what we shall + find when we get up to Cerro, and who will be president then." + </p> + <p> + "I wonder what they are doing in Europe!" Bertie said. "We have heard no + later news than what we had when we went on board a ship sixteen months + ago. There may have been great wars all over Europe." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think there is much chance of that, Bertie. India was the only + place where there was any fighting going on, and it seemed as if, since + Napoleon was crushed, Europe would become permanently pacific. Still, I do + hope that when we are at Lima we shall get hold of a pile of English + newspapers. The consul is sure to have them." + </p> + <p> + "I don't suppose we shall want to stay there many days, Harry, for we + shall be eager to start the search for the enchanted castle Dias has told + us of. We saw quite enough of Lima during the ten days that we were + there." + </p> + <p> + "Is the pass a bad one up to Cerro, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "There are some very bad points, señor. It never was a good one, but as + nothing has been done to the roads for at least a hundred years, it must + have got into a very bad state. I have been down it twice with travellers, + the second time ten years ago, and it was bad enough then. It is likely to + be worse now." + </p> + <p> + "Well, as the road is used so little, Dias," Harry said, "there is no fear + of brigands." + </p> + <p> + "I hope not, señor; but there may be some, though they would not be there + in the hope of plundering travellers. But desperate men are always to be + found in the mountains—men who have committed murders and fled from + justice. They are able to live on what they can shoot, and of course they + can get fish in the streams, and when they are tired of that can come down + here, where they will find plenty of turkeys, and pheasants, and other + game, besides the maize, and fruits, and other things in the old + plantations. Sometimes they will take a little plunder from the small + villages. Anyhow, they do not fare altogether badly. Therefore one can + never feel certain that one is safe from them, even when travelling over + tracks where travellers seldom pass. Still, we may very well hope that we + shall not have the bad luck to fall in with them." + </p> + <p> + "I hope so, Dias. We did not come out here to fight. So far we have been + very fortunate, and have not had to fire a shot, except at those wretched + savages." + </p> + <p> + The next day's journey took them far up into the hills, and they camped + that night at the upper end of a deep ravine. It had been a hard day's + work, for at several points the mules had to be unloaded and taken up + singly, and the loads then carried up. Fortunately, the packs were now + very light, and were carried or hauled up without much difficulty. + </p> + <p> + In the morning they again started. They were just issuing from the ravine + when a party of ten armed men made their appearance from amongst some + rocks, and shouted to them to halt. Dias rode in front. + </p> + <p> + "You speak to them, Dias. Keep them for a minute in talk if you can, and + then take shelter behind that boulder." + </p> + <p> + Then Harry ran back to José, who was walking with a leading mule twenty + paces behind. + </p> + <p> + "Turn them back again, José. Halt a little way down, and then come up; + there are some brigands ahead. Bertie, bring up your rifle and the two + shot-guns. Tell Maria to remain with the mules." + </p> + <p> + Then he ran back again just as a shot rang out, and, dodging among the + fallen rocks, he took shelter behind one abreast with Dias. "Was it you + who fired?" he asked. + </p> + <p> + "No, one of the brigands. The ball went through the brim of my sombrero. I + think they are talking to each other, they know there is no hurry." + </p> + <p> + "Hail them again, Dias, but don't show yourself above the rock." + </p> + <p> + "What do you want? Why did you fire at me?" + </p> + <p> + "We want everything you have got," a voice came back—"your mules and + their burdens, and your arms. If you will give them up without resistance, + we will let you up the pass without hindering you." + </p> + <p> + "Tell them that you must talk it over with the others, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will give you five minutes," the man called back. "If you do not + accept our terms, we will cut your throats." + </p> + <p> + Dias stood up, and walked quietly down the rugged pass. At the point where + the mules stopped, the rock rose almost perpendicularly on each side. + </p> + <p> + "Maria," he said, "do you and José take off the saddles and bags and fill + up the spaces between these rocks on each side. Get the animals in behind + them. You stop with them, Maria. I have got five minutes, and will help + you." + </p> + <p> + "You had better go up at once, señor," he went on to Bertie, "and help + your brother, so that they may not get sight of you. However, I am afraid + they know how many we are. It was foolish to light that fire yesterday + evening, I expect they were somewhere near and caught sight of us, and no + doubt one of them crept quietly down to find out what our force was. + Seeing there were but four of us, they thought they could take us all + easily here in the morning without firing a shot. But as your brother and + I happened to be going on first, they thought they would parley. They + would be sure that if they attacked us, we should kill two or three of + them at least before we had finished with them. And as they reckoned that + we should gladly accept their terms, they would get all they wanted + without trouble, and could shoot us afterwards if they felt inclined." + </p> + <p> + Bertie had by this time got the guns unstrapped, and had filled his + pockets with cartridges. He now went forward, and as he kept among the + rocks he was able to get within four or five yards of his brother without + being seen, as the mouth of the pass was almost blocked with great + boulders. + </p> + <p> + "I cannot get any nearer without running the risk of being seen. I have + loaded the double-barrelled guns." + </p> + <p> + "Stay where you are then, Bertie. I don't think they will make a rush, and + if they do, you can use them as well as your rifle. Of course I have my + pistols and you have yours. I don't believe they will venture to attack in + daylight, our trouble will be after dark." + </p> + <p> + "Now, then, the five minutes are up!" the brigand shouted. + </p> + <p> + "I am coming!" Dias shouted back. + </p> + <p> + As he approached, Harry said: "Stand by the side of a rock, Dias, so as to + be able to shelter as soon as you have given them the answer; they are + likely enough to fire a volley." + </p> + <p> + "We will give you nothing," Dias shouted. "Anything you want you had + better come and take." + </p> + <p> + Three men raised their heads above the rocks and fired. Almost at the same + instant Harry's rifle and Bertie's cracked out, the heads disappeared, and + a fierce yell of rage showed that one, if not both of the shots had found + their mark. + </p> + <p> + "You had better clear off," Harry shouted. "There are four of us, and we + have eight barrels between us, to say nothing of two brace of pistols." + </p> + <p> + A volley of curses was hurled back in reply. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Dias, what do you think is our best move?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't know, señor. I fancy there are only eight of them now. You and + your brother could hardly miss marks like their heads at thirty paces." + "If I were quite sure that there are no more of them I should say that, as + soon as it becomes dark, we had better creep forward and fight them. It + would be better to do that than wait for them to attack us. But there may + be, and very likely are, more of these bands among the hills. Besides, + Dias, we don't want to lose one of our number, and we could hardly hope to + get through unscathed, for if we were to try to push on they would have us + at a tremendous advantage. They would hide among the rocks and shoot us + down before we had time to level a gun at them. Now that we have killed + one, if not two of their number, they will certainly try to get their + revenge, and will harass us all the way up the pass." + </p> + <p> + "It is not only that, señor; it is the booty they expect to take." + </p> + <p> + "They could not expect much booty," Harry said, "for our baggage animals + only carry small loads." + </p> + <p> + "Gold does not take up a large bulk, señor; and I have not the least doubt + that they believe we have been gold-hunting, and have probably a big + amount of gold dust among the baggage." + </p> + <p> + "I did not think of that, Dias. If they believe we have gold we will take + it as granted that they will do their best to get it. Well, do you think + it would be a good thing to make a rush?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, it would be throwing away our lives. They will guess that we + shall probably attempt such a thing, and I have no doubt that they will + move away, if they haven't done so already, and hide themselves among + other rocks. Then if we dashed forward to the place where they had been, + they would pour a volley into us and finish us at once; for if they were + lying twenty yards away they ought certainly to hit every one of us, as + they have eight shots to fire. At present I have no doubt they are + talking, and I think we can safely get back to where we piled up the + saddles and bales. We can defend ourselves better there than here. We can + then talk matters over quietly." + </p> + <p> + "That will be the best plan, Dias, certainly." + </p> + <p> + Keeping under cover as well as they could they retired to the barricade, + thirty yards lower. José, aided by Maria, had completed the defence. They + had not, however, attempted to block the passage between two great rocks. + It was but three feet wide; the rocks lay about six feet from the cliffs + on either side, and these spaces were partly filled by smaller fragments. + Wherever there were open spaces the blankets had been thrust in from + behind. Dias had done the greater part of the work before he went up to + answer the demands of the bandits, but the others had laboured very hard + to finish it. + </p> + <p> + "Well done!" Harry said as they passed through the entrance. + </p> + <p> + "I told them not to close the path," Dias said. "We can do that now we are + all together. Most of the rocks are too heavy for José and Maria to lift. + Shall we build it up now, señor? I am sure they cannot force their way + through while we four are holding the barricade." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly not, Dias, and I have no fear of their attempting it. But I + think it would be as well for us to close it, otherwise we could not cross + from one side to the other without exposing ourselves." + </p> + <p> + It took them two hours' hard work—the harder because the stones had + to be thrown into the passage from the sides, as the brigands might be + crouching among the rocks higher up waiting for an opportunity to get a + shot. At the end of the two hours the gap was filled up to the height of + six feet. + </p> + <p> + "Now we can talk matters over quietly, Dias," Harry said. "We may take it + that, whether they attack by day or by night, we can beat them off. There + is a little rill of water that trickles down along the centre, so we need + not fear being driven out by thirst, and we have food enough to last us a + fortnight. That is settled; but they may stay there for any time, and + without exposing ourselves to sudden death we cannot find out whether they + are still hanging about or not. Of course one very important question is, + are they going to be joined by others?" + </p> + <p> + "I think they certainly will be, señor. As many of these fellows are + hiding among the hills as would make a good-sized regiment, and they have + only to send off two or three of their number with the news that a party + of gold-diggers with five laden mules are shut up in this ravine to gather + any number of them. They would come as quickly as vultures to a dead + horse. It must be a long time since they had any really valuable plunder, + and the fact that we have five baggage mules besides the three riding ones + would show that we had probably been a very long time away, and might + therefore possess a lot of gold." + </p> + <p> + "Are there any other passes near?" + </p> + <p> + "The nearest, señor, is on the other branch of the Palcazu—the river + we followed till we entered the passes—and is about thirty miles to + the north. The pass starts from a spot about fifteen miles above the + junction, and goes up to Huaca, a place that is little more than ten miles + south of Huanuco. From Huaca we could either follow the road to Cerro, or + strike across the Western Cordilleras to Aguamiro." + </p> + <p> + "Then I think, Dias, that our best plan will be to go down again into the + valley we left yesterday morning, and then strike across for the mouth of + this pass you speak of. You know the direction?" + </p> + <p> + "I know the general direction, although I have never been along there." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, you must be the guide. I should say the sooner we start the + better. My idea is this: If you with your wife and José will start at + once, so as to be down the pass before it gets dark, my brother and I will + remain here. You will leave our riding mules at the point where the track + is good enough for us to gallop on." + </p> + <p> + "We should not like to leave you, señor," Maria said. + </p> + <p> + "I have not the least fear of their attacking us, and with our rifles and + double-barrelled guns and pistols we could beat them off if they did. I + can't see any better way of getting out of this scrape, and am quite + willing to adopt this plan." + </p> + <p> + "I don't see any other way, señor," Dias said. "The plan is a good one; + but I wish I could stay here with you." + </p> + <p> + "But that would be impossible, Dias, for there would be no chance of our + finding the mouth of this pass by ourselves." + </p> + <p> + "Why could we not all go together?" Maria asked. + </p> + <p> + "Because if there were no one here the brigands might discover that we had + gone, within an hour or so of our starting. They might fire a shot or two, + and, finding that we did not answer, crawl gradually down till they got + here, for it must seem possible to them that we should return down the + pass; and as there is no getting the baggage mules to go fast, we might + very well be overtaken—I don't mean by those eight men, but by a + considerable number." + </p> + <p> + "But how are you to find your way, señor?" Dias said. + </p> + <p> + "We shall follow the valley down till we come to the spot where you have + struck off. You can fasten a white handkerchief to a stick and put it in + some bare place where we are sure to see it. I want you to halt when you + get to the river somewhere opposite the mouth of the pass. We will ride + nearly due north, and when we strike the river will follow it down till we + reach you." + </p> + <p> + "We can't halt opposite the mouth of the pass, for the river there is + already some size, and we could not cross it. I shall keep along near the + foot of the hills—the water there is shallow enough to ford. Then I + will follow it down until, as you say, near the entrance to the pass, and + there stop on the bank till you come." + </p> + <p> + "That will do very well. In that case it won't matter much where we strike + the stream, as our mules can swim across easily enough—they have had + plenty of practice during the past six months. However, we will turn off + north where we can see your signal." + </p> + <p> + "When will you leave, señor?" + </p> + <p> + "To-morrow morning. I have no fear of their attacking during the night, + for they can hardly bring other bands down here before morning. As soon as + it gets dark we will light two torches and put them down at the foot of + the barricade, so that we shall be in the shadow. These will show them + that we are still here, and they won't care to venture down into the + circle of light. We have let them know what a formidable amount of + firearms we have, and have given them a lesson that we can shoot + straight." + </p> + <p> + "They certainly would not come, señor, as long as your torches are + burning, but three hours are as much as you can reckon upon their + burning." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we have a dozen left now, Dias, and when they burn out we must + light two more and throw them over and trust to their burning as they lie + among the stones. Of course we should not think of going down to stick + them upright, for the scoundrels will probably be watching us as closely + as we are watching them. However, I shall manage to keep the lights going + till daybreak, and shall start a good hour before that. We shall have to + go down cautiously, and I should like to be well away with the mules + before they discover that we have left. Now, the sooner you are off the + better. Breakfast has been ready for the past hour. You had better eat it + and get under weigh as soon as you can. After you have gone one of us will + keep watch while the other eats. I have no doubt there will be plenty left + for our supper." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, and enough cakes to carry you on till you join us." + </p> + <p> + Half an hour later the party started, Dias having muffled the mules' + hoofs, so that the clatter, as they passed over the rocks, might not be + heard above. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Bertie, you go down to breakfast. When you have done come up and + relieve me. You have no occasion to hurry, for it is absolutely certain + that they won't dare to attack till they get reinforcements." + </p> + <p> + When Bertie returned he said, "Here is a lot of food, Harry, they have + hardly eaten anything. There is plenty for us to-day and to-morrow." + </p> + <p> + "That is just like them, Bertie; but I daresay they will camp in five or + six hours. It feels quite lonely without them." + </p> + <p> + "That it does. It is really the first time we have been alone since we + left Lima, except, of course, when we were out shooting together." + </p> + <p> + "Be sure you don't show your head above the barricade, Bertie. You must do + as I have been doing, sit down here and look out through this peep-hole + between these rocks Shove your rifle through it, so that, if you see a + head looking out from between the rocks up there, you can fire at once." + </p> + <p> + In half an hour Harry came back and sat down by his brother, and, lighting + their pipes, they chatted over the events of their journey and the + prospect before them. + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid, Harry, the journey will be a failure, except that we have + had a very jolly time." + </p> + <p> + "Well, so far it has not turned out much; but, somehow or other, I have + great faith in this haunted castle. Of course the demons Dias is so afraid + of are probably Indians, who are placed there to frighten intruders away, + and they would not keep watch unless they had something to guard. I cannot + understand how it has escaped the notice of the Spaniards all these years. + I had not much faith in their stories until we found how true they were in + all particulars as to what they call the golden river. There is one + satisfaction, however: if the place is really a castle, it can hardly have + disappeared under the lake. Of course if it is in ruins we may have a lot + of difficulty in getting at the vaults, or wherever else treasure may have + been buried; but unless it is a very big place, which is hardly probable, + the work would be nothing compared with the draining of the lake." + </p> + <p> + "We have got nearly a year in hand, Harry, and can do a lot of work in + that time, especially if we use powder." + </p> + <p> + "Yes; but, you see, we ought to allow at least five months for getting + home. Still, no doubt if I felt justified in writing to ask for another + three or four months, saying I had great hopes of finding something very + good in a short time, she would stand out against her father a little + longer. I shall write directly we get to Lima to say that, although I have + so far failed, I do not give up hope, and am just starting on another + enterprise that promises well." Bertie held up his finger. "I think I + heard somebody move. It sounded like a stone being turned over." For two + or three minutes he lay motionless, with his finger on the trigger. Then + he fired. + </p> + <p> + "What was it, Bertie?" + </p> + <p> + "It was a man's leg. I suddenly saw it below that rift behind the rock. I + expect he had no idea that his foot showed there. I am pretty sure I hit + it, for I had time to take a steady aim, and the foot disappeared the + instant I fired. If he did not know it was exposed, there was no reason + why he should have moved at all if he hadn't been hit." + </p> + <p> + "It was better to hit his foot than his head, Bertie. It is equally good + as a lesson, if not better, for though we don't mean to let them kill us, + I don't want to take life unless it is absolutely necessary. Well, after + that proof of the sharpness of our watch they are not likely to make any + fresh move." + </p> + <p> + The day passed slowly. They took it by turns to keep watch, and just + before dusk Harry said, "I think, Bertie, that we might pull out the + leaves and bush that Dias shoved into one of these gaps when he took the + blankets and things out. I could push the torch through and fix it there, + that would save having to cross the barricade. It is quite possible that + one of those fellows may be keeping as sharp a look-out as we are doing, + and it is as well not to set one's self up as a mark. If I put it through + now it won't show much, while if I wait till darkness falls it will be an + easy object to fire at. You keep a sharp lookout while I am doing this, + and if you see either a head or a gun try to hit it." + </p> + <p> + Harry accomplished the operation without drawing a shot, and as soon as he + had fixed the torch he again stopped the hole up behind it. + </p> + <p> + "It is evident that they are not watching us very closely," he said. "If + they have not sent for help, they have gone off. With two of their men + killed and two disabled, the fight must have been taken out of them. We + will watch by turns to-night. It is six o'clock now; will you sit up till + eleven, or shall I?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't care a bit. Which would you rather take?" + </p> + <p> + "I don't care;—however, I may as well take the first watch. We will + start at five, so rouse me at four. If they come at all, which is + possible, but not probable, it will be between four and five." + </p> + <p> + At ten o'clock Harry could see a glow of light at some distance from the + mouth of the ravine, and in the stillness could occasionally catch the + sound of voices. When he woke Bertie at twelve the lad looked at his watch + and said, "You are an hour late in calling me, Harry." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I had no inclination for sleep. The fellows have been reinforced. Of + course I don't know to what extent, but I should say pretty strongly. They + have lit a big fire some distance from the ravine. They would not have + dared to light one if they had not felt themselves strong enough to fight + us. No doubt they have half a dozen men on watch where we first saw them, + and these would give notice if we were coming. I think we may as well fire + a couple of shots, it will show them that we are here and on guard. They + will suppose we thought we heard someone coming down to reconnoitre our + position." + </p> + <p> + They both fired over the top of the barricade. + </p> + <p> + "I see you have renewed the torch, Harry," Bertie said as they reloaded. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I have done so twice. I was very careful, however, as I feared they + might be watching. I did not wait for the lighted one to burn out, but + passed the other one out, putting the end of my poncho round my hand and + arm, so that they could hardly be noticed even by anyone within ten yards, + and certainly could not be seen from up there. As I pushed it through I + lighted it at the stump of the old torch and then withdrew my hand like a + shot. I did the same thing again an hour ago with equal success, so it is + evident that they are not keeping a very sharp look-out above, and have no + fear of our making a sortie, hampered as we are by our animals." + </p> + <p> + The torch was changed again at four o'clock, and a little later Bertie + heard a slight noise. + </p> + <p> + "I think they are coming, Harry," he said quietly. + </p> + <p> + Harry was at once on his feet. "Use your rifle first, Bertie, and sling it + over your shoulder before you give them the two barrels of buck-shot, so + that you can start to run at once if we don't stop them." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I am certain they are coming," he said, after listening for two or + three minutes. "We have got two or three torches left, and I will give + them the benefit of them." + </p> + <p> + He went back to the embers of the fire, lighted the torches, and, + returning to the barrier, threw them twenty or thirty yards up the ravine. + There was a hoarse shout of anger, and then a dozen shots were fired. + Bertie's rifle cracked out in return, and Harry's followed almost + immediately. A dark group of some twenty or thirty men were rushing + forward, and had just reached the line where the torches were burning, + when four barrels of buck-shot were poured into them. Three or four fell, + the rest fled at once, and the cries and oaths showed that many of them + were wounded. + </p> + <p> + "They won't venture again for the present," Harry said. "You may be sure + they will hold a council of war, so load again and then we will be off." + </p> + <p> + Two minutes later they were making their way carefully down the rocky + passage, Harry carrying the bundle they had made up of the unconsumed + provisions. As they had to exercise great care in climbing over the rocks, + the day was just breaking when they came upon two mules that had been left + behind for them. They rode cautiously until they were quite out of the + ravine, and then started down the valley at a gallop. In an hour Bertie + exclaimed, "There is the flag!" They rode to it and then turned off to the + north, slackening their pace to a trot. The animals were in good + condition, as they had of late been making short marches, and at eleven + o'clock they came upon the river. Here they waited for an hour, gave a + couple of cakes to each animal, and ate the rest themselves. The river was + some fifty yards across, but the mules only needed to swim about half this + distance. The brothers kept beside them, placing one elbow on the saddles + and holding their rifles and ammunition well above the water. They were + soon across, and, mounting, followed the river down, letting the animals + go their own pace, and sometimes walking beside them, as they wished to + keep them fresh for the next day's work. At five in the afternoon they saw + smoke ahead of them, and, riding faster now, soon joined their companions, + who hailed their arrival with shouts of joy. + </p> + <p> + "We have been terribly anxious about you, señors," Dias said, "and + regretted deeply that we deserted you." + </p> + <p> + "It was not desertion, Dias; you were obeying orders, and were on duty + guarding the baggage. There was really no cause for uneasiness; we were + certain that we could beat them off if they ventured to attack us." + </p> + <p> + "And did they do so?" + </p> + <p> + "They made a feeble attack this morning at four o'clock, but we were ready + for them. They might have carried the barricade had we only had our + rifles, but buck-shot was too much for them. Of course we brought down two + with our rifles; but there must have been over a score of them, and the + four barrels of buck-shot did heavy execution. Some of them fell, and I + fancy most of the others got a dose of shot, as they were all in a close + body. I will tell you all about it after we have had supper." + </p> + <p> + "I have got it ready," Maria said. "We have been expecting you for the + past hour, and I was sure you would have good appetites when you arrived." + </p> + <p> + After the story had been told Dias said: "That was a capital plan of + keeping the torches burning all night, and especially of throwing two of + them up the ravine when you heard the fellows coming. Of course they + calculated on getting within fifteen yards or so before you saw them. + Well, there is no fear of our hearing any more of them. I expect you must + have been gone hours before they found out that you had left." + </p> + <p> + "I should not be surprised if, after they had recovered from their defeat, + half of them made a big circuit over the hills—no doubt they know + every foot of them—and, coming down at the bottom of the ravine, + built a strong barricade, making up their minds to guard both ends until + we were obliged to surrender from want of food. Having suffered so + heavily, they would do everything in their power to prevent any of us from + getting out alive." + </p> + <p> + "In that case they must have been prepared to wait for some time, Dias, + for they knew we had eight animals to eat." + </p> + <p> + "They would not have lasted long, señor, for we have only a few handfuls + of grain left, and there is not enough forage in the ravine to last them a + couple of days." + </p> + <p> + "I expect they would have tried to get us to surrender, by offering to let + us pass if we would give them half of the gold they thought we had with + us. There is no chance of our being followed, I suppose, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Not the slightest. When at last they discover that we have gone, they + will come down the pass and find where the mules were left standing. They + will then see that only two of us had remained at the barricade, and will + guess at once that the rest left hours before. They will therefore + conclude that, being on foot, they have no chance of overtaking us, even + if they could find the track." + </p> + <p> + "No, I expect by this time they are dancing with rage, and as likely as + not quarrelling furiously among themselves. How far do you think we have + ridden to-day?" + </p> + <p> + "Nearer sixty miles than fifty, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I suppose we have. And if we had come straight here?" + </p> + <p> + "It would have been nearly fifteen miles shorter. But if they pursued they + would not come that way, because they would not be able to get across. I + think they would have to go round and ford the river some miles higher + than you did. They could never swim across with their guns and ammunition + to carry." + </p> + <p> + "I should not count on that, Dias. They might come straight here, as they + would guess that we had made for this pass, and they might make bundles of + reeds to carry their guns and ammunition across, and swim over." + </p> + <p> + "That would be possible," Dias admitted reluctantly, "and if they knew + that the five mules were all loaded with gold they might be tempted to + follow; but that they could only guess. I have no doubt, too, that many of + them had been walking for hours across the mountains before the attack, + and as you fired into the thick of them, a fair share must have been too + much wounded to start on a forty-miles' tramp. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor. I do not think there is any chance whatever of their pursuing + us. Besides, I chose a spot where the ground was hard and rocky to plant + that flag. And they would have a good deal of difficulty in ascertaining + in what direction we went from there." + </p> + <p> + "We pulled up the flag-staff and threw it away among the bushes a mile and + a half farther, and of course brought the handkerchief with us." + </p> + <p> + "I don't think we need give another thought to them, señor. At the same + time, it would be as well to keep one on watch all night. José and I will + be on guard by turns. Neither of you slept a wink last night, so you must + not keep watch this time." + </p> + <p> + "I sha'n't be sorry for a good sleep, for the meal we have eaten has made + me drowsy. However, if you hear the least noise, wake us at once." + </p> + <p> + "That I will do, señor. It is a great deal more likely to be made by a + wild beast than by a brigand." + </p> + <p> + The brothers were sound asleep in a few minutes, and did not wake till + Dias called them, and said that Maria had coffee ready. + </p> + <p> + "What sort of a pass is it to-day, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Not a very bad one, señor. The one we tried yesterday hadn't been used + for very many years, there is regular traffic up and down this; not + valuable traffic, for Pozuco is a small place. They send up fruit and + dried fish, and the oil they get from the fish; and bring back cloth, and + such things as are required in the village." + </p> + <p> + "So there is nothing to tempt brigands to infest the pass and rob + travellers!" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor. When I last went through it I heard no talk of them at all. + They are more likely to infest the hills beyond Cerro, for near that place + really valuable captures can be made." + </p> + <p> + "That accounts for their being able to gather so many men to attack us." + </p> + <p> + The journey up the pass occupied two days. They met three or four small + parties of men with donkeys or mules, but all these when questioned said + that the pass was perfectly open, and that it was a very rare thing indeed + for anyone to be robbed on the way. Late in the evening of the second day + they arrived at Huaca, and were advised to go to the priest's house, as + the accommodation at the inn was so bad. The man who directed them there + was the head man of the place, and they gladly accepted his offer to guide + them to the priest's house. + </p> + <p> + "It would be the best way, señor," Dias said. "I know a man here who would + willingly put us up, and who has a yard where the mules could pass the + night." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Dias. Be sure you buy a good stock of grain. They have scarce + had any for the last three days." + </p> + <p> + The priest—a cheery, hearty man—received Harry and Bertie + cordially when they were introduced as English travellers, especially when + he found that they could both speak Spanish fluently. + </p> + <p> + "It is a pleasure to receive British travellers," he said. "Cochrane and + Miller have done more for us than any of our own countrymen. It is not + often that travellers come this way. I have heard of two or three going to + Cuzco, but they never come farther north than Cerro. I shall be delighted + if you will stay two or three days here, señors. We get so little news of + the world that it would be a great pleasure to us to hear what is going on + outside this unfortunate country." + </p> + <p> + "We can give you but little news, for it is more than a year since we left + England, and we have heard nothing of what is doing in Europe, as we have + been travelling and shooting at the foot of the mountains between the + bottom of this pass and Tinta volcano." + </p> + <p> + "And gold seeking?" the priest asked with a twinkle in his eye. + </p> + <p> + "We have occasionally washed the sands in the streams, but have not found + enough to repay our work. The amount we have gathered is only about twenty + ounces." + </p> + <p> + "Well, gentlemen, I shall be delighted to have you as my guests as long as + you are willing to stay." + </p> + <p> + "We are greatly obliged to you," Harry said, "and will gladly be your + guests. To-morrow the animals need a rest, and we shall enjoy one too. + Next morning we must be going on, as we have been away longer than we + ought, and want to get down to Lima quickly." + </p> + <p> + They had great difficulty in getting away from Huaca, where the good + priest made them extremely comfortable, and was very loath to let them go. + However, at dawn on the second day they started for Cerro, and arrived + there forty-eight hours later after a rough journey through the Mils. + </p> + <p> + "We never know in Peru, when we go to bed, who will be president when we + wake," Dias said that evening. "There have been a dozen of them in the + past five years. Lamar, Gamarra, La Fuente, Orbegozo, Bermudes, and + Salaverry succeeded one another; then Santa Cruz became master. Nieto had + the upper hand for a bit, and at that time there was no travelling on the + roads, they were so infested by robbers; one band was master of Lima for + some time. Then the Chilians occupied Lima; Santa Cruz was defeated, and + Gamarra came in again. None of these men was ever supreme over the whole + country. Generals mutinied with the troops under them, other leaders + sprang up, and altogether there has been trouble and civil war ever since + the Spaniards left. That is why the country is so full of robbers. When an + army was defeated, those who escaped took to the hills and lived by + plunder until some other chief revolted, then they would go down and join + him; and so it has gone on." + </p> + <p> + "Who composed those armies? because the fields seem to have been well + cultivated, and the peasants are quiet enough." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, for the most part they take no part in these affairs. The men + who compose the armies were in the first place the remains of those who + fought against the Spaniards. When the Spaniards left the country these + men had nothing to do, and were ready to enlist under anyone who raised a + flag and promised them pay. Of bourse there are many men in the towns who + are too lazy to work, and who help to keep up the supply of armed men. The + good God only knows when these things will come to an end. A few of those + who have come into power really loved their country, and hoped to + establish order and do away with all the abuses caused by the men who were + appointed to offices by one or another of those tyrants; but most of them + were ambitious soldiers, who led mutineers against the chief of the + moment. If Heaven would but destroy or strike with blindness the soldiers—and + above all, every official in Peru—the country might hope for peace + and good government. The best man who has ever fought out here since Lord + Cochrane left the place was General Miller, your countryman, who was + splendidly brave. He was always true to his word, never allowed his + soldiers to plunder, and never ill-treated those captured in battle. Ah! + they should have made him president, but it would never have done. As the + Chilians were jealous of Lord Cochrane, the Peruvians were jealous of + Miller, first because he was a foreigner, secondly because his uprightness + and fidelity were a reproach to their ambition and treachery, their greed, + and their cruelty. Besides, he understood them too well, and if all Peru + had asked him to be president, he knew well enough that conspiracies + against him would begin the next morning. Ah, he was a great man! + </p> + <p> + "Well, señor, I think that before we start it will be well that I at least + should go on to Ayapata and find out what is doing. That would only delay + us two days, and we might be better able to judge as to which route to + take. They may be fighting in the north, and we do not want to get mixed + up in any way in their quarrels." + </p> + <p> + "I think that would be a very good plan, Dias. You start in the morning, + and we will stay quietly here till you come back with the news. If many + brigands are in the pass they might get to hear of us from someone going + over from this side, and take it into their heads to come down. I would + certainly rather not have to fight with you away." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly next morning Dias went on ahead. On the following evening he + rejoined them. + </p> + <p> + "There is fresh trouble in the south, señor. Colonel Vivancohidas has + declared himself Regenerator of Peru, and is now marching against Gamarra, + and General Castilla is advancing against him. The fighting will be + somewhere near Arequipa. Whichever wins will presently cross the mountains + and make for Cuzco." + </p> + <p> + "Then that settles it, Dias. Certainly I have heard nothing in Gamarra's + favour, but a great deal against him, since I landed, and I care nothing + about either side; but I hope the new man will win, because I think that + any change from Gamarra will be an improvement." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XII — PRISONERS + </h2> + <p> + When they arrived at Cerro de Pasco they found that the division of + Gamarra's army stationed in the district had mutinied and had declared for + Vivancohidas, and were killing all those known as adherents of Gamarra. + All traffic was at a stand-still. Numbers of the soldiers who did not + choose to join in the mutiny had taken to the hills, and were pillaging + convoys and peaceful travellers alike. + </p> + <p> + "I think, señor," Dias said, "that instead of crossing the Cordilleras to + the west, as we had intended, it will be better for us to go south, skirt + the lake of Junin, and make for Oroya. That is the route generally taken, + for the passes west are terribly difficult. I have traversed this route + many times, and when going with merchandise I always go through Oroya, + though in returning from Cerro I take the shorter route." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Dias, you are the best judge of that. It is a great nuisance + that this rising should have taken place just as we want to traverse the + country, but it can't be helped. I will go to the head-quarters of Quinda—he + is established at the mayor's house here—and get a pass from him. + </p> + <p> + "It would be well, perhaps, if you were to go with me, Dias, to confirm my + statement that we have been shooting and hunting. I hope he will give us a + pass, so that we shall not be interfered with by his men gathered at + different points on the road to Oroya. I hear that a considerable portion + of his force have already marched forward." + </p> + <p> + The Peruvian colonel questioned Harry closely as to his motives for + travelling there. + </p> + <p> + "I suppose," he said, "you have been searching for gold. We are sorely in + need of funds, and I shall feel myself obliged to borrow any gold that you + may have collected for the use of my army, giving you an order on the + treasury at Lima, which will, of course, be honoured as soon as the + authority of President Vivancohidas is established." + </p> + <p> + "I do not doubt the goodness of the security," Harry said quietly, + "although possibly I might have to wait some time before the order was + cashed; but while hunting I have not come upon any treasure. We have + occasionally, when halting at streams, amused ourselves by doing a little + gold-washing, but when I tell you that during the eight months since we + started from Cuzco we have only collected about twenty ounces of gold, you + may well suppose that no good fortune has attended us." + </p> + <p> + "Is that all, señor?" + </p> + <p> + "I give you my word of honour that is all, señor; and as I shall have to + lay in a store of provisions and so on for my journey down to Lima, you + may well imagine that it would be a serious inconvenience to me to part + with it." + </p> + <p> + "Quite so, señor; so small a sum as that would not go far among the four + thousand men under my command. However, I shall have pleasure in giving + you the pass that you ask. You have had good sport, I hope?" + </p> + <p> + "As good as I expected. We kept ourselves in food, and have seen a + splendid country, which I hope some time will again be cultivated, and add + to the wealth of your country." + </p> + <p> + After a further exchange of compliments Harry returned to the inn where + they had put up. + </p> + <p> + Next morning, after purchasing some coffee and other stores that were + needed, they set out. + </p> + <p> + "Now we are all right, Dias," Harry said as they started. + </p> + <p> + "I hope so, señor; but from what I heard yesterday evening several strong + bands of disaffected soldiers are in the hills between this and Oroya. + Quinda's troops have by no means all joined him, and several companies + that broke off have stationed themselves in the hills along this road. + They have stopped and robbed more than one mule train with silver from the + mines there. They have not meddled, as far as I hear, with Quinda's + troops, but have simply seized the opportunity of perpetrating brigandage + on a large scale." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we must take our chance, Dias. Fortunately we have money enough at + Lima to replace the animals. We have pretty well finished all our stores, + and beyond the tents and the bedding, which would be a matter of a hundred + dollars, there is nothing worth thinking of; still, certainly I do not + want to lose it. I hope we sha'n't fall in with any of those scoundrels." + </p> + <p> + "I hope not, señor. Perhaps we had better put our gold dust and money in + José's boots. They are less likely to examine him than they are us. + </p> + <p> + "You had better put half in his boots, and give the other half to my wife + to hide about her clothes. We shall want some money, if we are robbed, to + take us down to Lima. With the gold dust we could get a couple of mules + and enough provisions to take us down there. We should be in a very + awkward position if we found ourselves penniless." + </p> + <p> + They stopped for the night at a little village close to the lake. There + was but one small room at the inn, but at the other end of the straggling + village there was a yard where the mules could stand, and a loft where + Dias, Maria, and José could sleep. + </p> + <p> + Harry and his brother had lain down but an hour on their blankets when + there was a shouting in the street, and two or three shots were fired. + They leapt up. + </p> + <p> + "We had better hide our rifles and pistols," Harry said, "under that + ragged bed that we did not care about sleeping on. We may possibly get + them again even if we are robbed of everything else." + </p> + <p> + A minute later four or five men with a lantern rushed into the room. They + were all armed with muskets, and one carried a torch. + </p> + <p> + "Who are you?" this man asked. + </p> + <p> + "We are English sportsmen," Harry said. "We have been shooting for some + months at the foot of the hills, and are now returning to Lima. There are + our guns, you see." + </p> + <p> + "We will take you before the captain," the man said. "Bring those guns + along, Pedro and Juan." + </p> + <p> + The village was in an uproar. Some fifty men were occupied in searching + the houses and in appropriating everything they thought useful. One house + had been set on fire, and near this a man in an officer's uniform was + standing. He heard the report of Harry's and Bertie's capture. + </p> + <p> + "English sportsmen, eh! How long have you been shooting?" he asked. + </p> + <p> + "Eight months." + </p> + <p> + "Eight months! Then guard them securely, Montes; they are doubtless rich + Englishmen, and we shall get a good ransom for them. English señors who + come out here to shoot must be men with plenty of money; but likely enough + they are not sportsmen, but gold-seekers. However, it matters little." + </p> + <p> + "I protest against this," Harry said. "Our consul at Lima will demand + satisfaction from the government." + </p> + <p> + The other laughed. + </p> + <p> + "Government!" he said, "there is no government; and if there were, they + would have no power up in the hills." + </p> + <p> + So saying he turned away. + </p> + <p> + Plunder that had been collected was brought in and divided among the + party, four of the men with muskets keeping guard over the prisoners. + </p> + <p> + "I don't see anything of Dias and the mules," Bertie said in English. + </p> + <p> + "No, I have been expecting to see them brought up every minute. Now I am + beginning to hope that they have got safely off. I think the fellows began + their attack at our end of the village. + </p> + <p> + "You know how watchful Dias is. Very likely he or José were up, and you + may be sure that the moment they heard the uproar they would drive the + mules out and be off. You see only two of them are laden, and they could + have thrown the things on to their backs and been off at once. He would + know that it was useless to wait for us. I expect he would turn them off + the road at once and make down towards the lake. If these fellows had + caught him and the mules they would certainly have brought them up here + before this." + </p> + <p> + "I hope he got off—not so much because of the mules, as because I am + sure that, if he gets fairly away, he will do what he can to help us." + </p> + <p> + "I am sure he will, Bertie. We must make the best of it. There is one + thing, we have got a good month before us. It will take them all that time + to go down to Lima about our ransom and return; and it is hard if we don't + give them the slip before that." + </p> + <p> + A quarter of an hour later the band started with their booty and prisoners + for the hills. + </p> + <p> + "I don't suppose they will go far," Harry said. "Quinda has got his hands + full, and will be wanting to start as soon as he can to join Vivancohidas. + He won't lose time in hunting the scoundrel who has caught us, so I expect + the band make their head-quarters in some village at the foot of the + hills." + </p> + <p> + This turned out to be so. After a march of four hours the band halted in a + village in a valley running up into the hills. The prisoners were thrust + into an empty hut, and four men with muskets told off as their guard. Next + morning the captain of the band came in. + </p> + <p> + "I shall require a hundred thousand dollars for your ransom," he said. + </p> + <p> + "We could never pay such a sum," Harry said. "We are not rich men. I am a + lieutenant on half-pay in the English navy, and, having nothing to do at + home, came out with my brother for a year's sport. I could not pay a tenth + of that sum." + </p> + <p> + "That we shall see," the man said. "If you cannot pay, your government + can. You will at once write to your consul at Lima, telling him that if + this hundred thousand dollars are not handed over to my messenger within + four days of his arrival there, you will both have your throats cut." + </p> + <p> + "I will write the letter if you wish," Harry replied quietly, "but you + won't get the money. If you like to say ten thousand dollars, I dare say + the consul will do his best to raise that amount." + </p> + <p> + "One hundred thousand is the smallest sum," the man said angrily. "He can + get it out of the government there. They will not choose to risk having + trouble with your country for the sake of such a sum." + </p> + <p> + "Gamarra is away," Harry said, "and it is pretty certain that he will not + have left a hundred thousand dollars in the treasury; and even if he has, + you maybe sure that his people there would not give it up, for he wants + every penny for his war expenses." + </p> + <p> + The man shrugged his shoulders. + </p> + <p> + "So much the worse for you. Write as I told you; here is paper, pen, and + ink. Do not write in English. I will come back in a quarter of an hour for + it." + </p> + <p> + "This is awkward, Bertie. It is evident that I must write. As to their + paying twenty thousand pounds, the thing is absurd; if he had mentioned + two thousand they might have considered the matter. What I hope is that + they will not send up anything. I feel certain that we shall be able to + get away from here within a month; and if they were to send up one or two + thousand pounds, we should probably miss the fellow on the way. In that + case we should have to repay the money when we got to Lima, which I + certainly should not see my way to do—anyhow, until I got to + England, when I could, of course, sell out some of my stock. There is + nothing here that we could use as invisible ink. If there were, I would + risk writing a message with it; but even then it is fifty to one against + their bringing it to light. Well, here goes!" and he wrote in Spanish the + required message. + </p> + <p> + The robber on his return read it through, turned the paper over to see + that nothing was written on the back, and held it up to the light. + </p> + <p> + "That will do," he said. "Now let me warn you, don't attempt to escape. + You won't succeed if you do, and the sentries have orders to shoot you + down should you attempt it." + </p> + <p> + The time passed slowly. The brigand was evidently determined to give them + no chance of escaping, and four sentries remained round the hut, one at + each corner. In the daytime the prisoners were allowed to sit at the door + of the hut, but they were shut up at nightfall. The guards were not + allowed to speak to them, and there was therefore no chance of offering + them a bribe. On the evening of the fifth day they had, as usual, been + shut up, and were chatting over the situation. + </p> + <p> + "If they continue to guard us like this, Bertie, I really don't see a + shadow of a chance of getting away. We calculated on there being one, or + perhaps two sentries at the door, and thought we could have cut a hole + through that adobe wall at the back and crept out through it; but as there + is a guard at each corner, I don't see a chance of it. The fellows are + evidently afraid of their captain, and each keeps to his corner, and sits + there and smokes and drones out songs, but they never move till they are + relieved. Of course we must make the attempt if we see no other way of + escaping. But I have still great hope that Dias will somehow or other try + to get us out, though how he can do it I don't know." + </p> + <p> + They observed that the sentries were not changed in any military way. Five + minutes before sunset the four men who were to relieve those on guard came + sauntering up. The former guard ordered the captives into the hut and + bolted the door, and then after a short chat with the others went off, the + new sentries having already taken their posts at the corners of the hut. + On the fifth evening after their capture they saw approaching a peasant + woman sitting on a mule. A man was walking beside her. Behind the woman + was a small barrel, and two packs and two small wine-skins hung on each + side. + </p> + <p> + "Harry," Bertie exclaimed, "I believe that is Dias and Maria!" + </p> + <p> + "It is," Harry said. "Thank God they have found us! Twenty to one they + will get us out. What have they got with them, I wonder?" + </p> + <p> + They stopped in the road opposite the house, which was the end one in the + village. + </p> + <p> + "You are not to come nearer," one of the sentries shouted. + </p> + <p> + "I am sure I don't want to come nearer," the woman said pertly. "You don't + think you are so handsome that I want to get a better sight of your face?" + </p> + <p> + "What have you got there?" the man asked. "We shall be coming off duty in + ten minutes." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we have got a little of everything," she said. "As pretty sashes as + there are in the country, beautiful silk neckerchiefs, silver brooches for + your sweethearts, and for those who purchase freely a glass of the best + pisco spirit." + </p> + <p> + "Well, wait, and I dare say we shall lay out a dollar or two." + </p> + <p> + A minute or two later four other men sauntered up, and began to talk to + Maria, who slipped off her mule. The guards, fearful that the best + bargains would be sold before they could get forward, hurried the + prisoners into the hut and bolted the door. The brothers heard a great + deal of talking and arguing, and ten minutes later the sentries came up to + their usual post. + </p> + <p> + "I would not mind betting odds," Bertie said with delight, "that Dias has + drugged that spirit." + </p> + <p> + "I expect so, Bertie. He would be sure that they could not resist it, for + it is the best spirit there is in Peru." + </p> + <p> + For a time the sentries talked, saying that the pedlars' goods were cheap + and the spirit as good as any they had ever tasted. "We had great + difficulty in getting her to sell us a second glass each; and she was + right, for she had not much of it, and it must help her rarely to sell her + goods. The husband seemed a surly sort of chap. I wonder such a pretty + little woman would marry such a fellow." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose he was well-to-do and she was poor," another said; "such is + generally the case when you see a marriage like that. I dare say he makes + a good thing of it; the goods are as cheap, though, as they would be in + Lima." + </p> + <p> + Gradually the talking ceased, and within an hour there was perfect quiet + outside the hut. Half an hour later they heard footsteps coming quietly up + to the door. They held their breath; but instead of, as they expected, + hearing the bolt drawn, they heard the new-comers going round the hut, + pausing a minute at each corner. Then they again stopped at the door; the + two bolts were shot back, and the door opened. + </p> + <p> + "Come, señors," Dias said; "it is quite safe. We have put them all to + sleep. Here are their muskets and pistols. You had better take them, in + case we are pursued, which is not likely. At any rate, should one of them + wake the want of a gun will mean delay in raising the alarm. + </p> + <p> + "Don't speak, señors; it is as well to keep quiet till we are fairly off." + He shut the door and rebolted it, and then led the way down into the road. + </p> + <p> + Not a word was spoken till they had gone a hundred yards, and then Harry + said: "You have done us another good turn, Dias; we did not see any + possible way of getting out; but we both agreed that if you could find us + you would." + </p> + <p> + "Of course, señors, you could not suppose that Maria and I would go + quietly off." + </p> + <p> + "How did you manage to get away, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "It was easy enough. After what we had heard of these brigands I made up + my mind that I would not unsaddle the mules, nor take the packs off the + two loaded ones. The burdens were not heavy, for we have little but our + bedding and the tents left, and I thought they might as well stay where + they were, and in the morning we could shift them on to the others. I told + José to watch about half the night; but I was standing talking to him, and + smoking my last cigarette, when he said suddenly, 'I can hear a noise at + the other end of the village.' + </p> + <p> + "The evening was still, and I could also hear the sound of many footsteps, + so I ran and pulled down the bar at the back of the yard, called Maria, + and told her and José to take the mules straight down to the lake, and + then to follow the bank. Then I ran to warn you; but before I got half-way + I heard shouts and firing, and knew that I was too late, so I ran back to + the lake, where I overtook the mules, and we mounted and went off at a + trot. When I got a quarter of a mile away I told the others to go on to + Junin, which we knew was twenty miles away, and put up there till I joined + them. Then I ran back to the village, and, keeping myself well behind a + house, watched them getting ready to start, and saw you. There was nothing + to do but to follow you. I did so, and observed where they had shut you + up, and I waited about for some hours, so as to see how you were guarded. + </p> + <p> + "I saw their captain go into your hut twice. When he came out the second + time he had a paper in his hand. He went to the house he has taken + possession of, and I kept a good watch over that. Presently two + lieutenants came out, talking together. They entered another house, and + ten minutes afterwards issued out again, dressed in ordinary clothes, such + as a muleteer or a cultivator fairly well off would wear, and returned to + the captain's house, and stayed there for a good half-hour before they + came out again. Two horses had been brought round to the door. The captain + came out with them, and was evidently giving them some last instructions. + Then they rode off, saying good-bye to some of the men as they passed + through the village. + </p> + <p> + "Knowing the ways of these bandits, I had no doubt the paper I saw their + captain bring out of the hut where you were was a letter he had compelled + you to write to request a large sum of money to be sent in exchange for + you; and as I felt certain that we should rescue you somehow, I thought it + was a pity that this letter should go down, so I started at once to follow + them. They had not got more than a quarter of an hour's start of me, and + by the line they had taken I saw that they intended to go to Junin. I did + not think it likely that they would enter the place, because they would be + sure to meet some of Quinda's men there; but would probably sleep at some + small village near it, and then make a circuit to strike the road beyond + the town. + </p> + <p> + "Fortunately I had some money in my pocket, and at the first farm I came + to I bought a mule. You see, señor, I had not lain down the night before, + and had done a fair day's work before I started to follow your captors. I + had walked twenty miles with them, and had been busy all the morning. I + knew it could not be much less than thirty miles to Junin, and that if I + could not find them there I should have to push on after them again the + next morning, so I gave the farmer what he asked for his mule, and started + at once on it barebacked. It turned out to be a good animal, and I rode + hard, for I wanted to get down to Junin before the two men. I reckoned I + should do that, because, as they were going a very long journey, they + would not want to press their horses, and besides would prefer that it + should be dark before they stopped for the night. + </p> + <p> + "When I got to Junin I found Maria and José, who had put up the mules at + the only inn there. I set Maria to watch on the road leading into the + town, and went out with José to a little village a mile back, where I made + sure the fellows would stop. I was not long in finding out that they had + arrived about half an hour after I had ridden through, and had put up at + the priest's. That was good enough for me. We went back to the town. I had + some supper, which I can tell you I wanted badly, for I had been afraid of + going into the brigand's village to buy anything, as, being a stranger, I + might have been asked questions, so I had had nothing since the night + before. I had found that there was a road from the place where they had + stopped, by which they could ride along by the lake without going into the + town; so José and I ambushed there an hour before daylight, thinking that + they would be off early. We were right; for in a quarter of an hour they + came along. Day was just breaking, so we could make out their figures + easily enough, and as they were not five yards away as they passed, we + were not likely to miss them. Well, I found the paper you had written in + the coat-pocket of one of them, together with two hundred dollars, no + doubt for the expenses of his journey. We hid the two bodies under a heap + of stones." + </p> + <p> + "Then you killed them, Dias?" Harry said, in a tone of surprise. + </p> + <p> + "Of course! what else would one do with them? They were brigands, and they + had attacked a peaceable village and killed several people. Even if I had + not wanted to get your paper it would have been a very meritorious + action." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, I am not blaming you, Dias, at all! There was no other way of getting + the paper, and it may be regarded as an act of necessity. And what did you + do with their horses?" + </p> + <p> + "José went on with them, and I returned to the town again and started with + Maria and the mules. We journeyed to a village half-way to Oroya. Of + course we overtook José a mile or two after we had left Junin. There we + put up at a quiet place and talked over the situation. We knew that there + was no particular hurry, for we read your letter, and knew that no harm + would come to you for a long time. It would be a month at least before + they would expect the men back with the money. There was another letter, + addressed to Don Mariano Carratala, whom I know to be a busy politician in + Lima. The money was to be paid to him; at least he was to receive it from + the two men immediately they left the British consul's house, and he was + to hold it for Valdez, which is the name of the brigand." + </p> + <p> + "I thought he would not trust the men to bring up a sum like that." + </p> + <p> + "It would be enough to tempt the most incorruptible Peruvian, and + certainly the men he sent down would have taken good care never to come to + this part of the country again if they had got the money into their + possession. I don't think either it would have been safe in the hands of + Carratala, if he did not know that sooner or later he would get a knife + between his shoulders if he kept it. Next morning Maria and I started + back, bringing with us four mules, the fastest we had. We rode on two and + led the others. I knew some people at Junin, for I have often passed + through the town when I have been bringing down silver from Cerro, and one + managed to get for us that little barrel of pisco. I was sure that no + soldier would refuse a glass; but it was almost a sin to give such liquor + to the dogs. Then we bought peasants' clothes, and a parcel of goods such + as travelling hawkers carry. + </p> + <p> + "You know how we succeeded. Of course we had drugged the pisco heavily, + and knew that two glasses would send any man off to sleep in half an hour. + As soon as it was dark, Maria went on with the mule. We shall find her + half a mile from here at a deserted hut where we left the other three + mules." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, you have assuredly saved our lives. Guarded as we were, there + was not the slightest chance of our getting away by ourselves; and as the + British consul certainly could not have raised the sum they demanded, we + should have had our throats cut when the messengers returned empty-handed. + Valdez is not the man to go back from his word in that respect." + </p> + <p> + "It is a pity you have lost your arms, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, we have certainly lost our double-barrelled guns, but our rifles and + pistols are hidden in the straw of the bed in the room where we slept. We + had just time to hide them before the brigands burst into the room." + </p> + <p> + "Then we can recover them, señor. Of course I intended to ride straight to + Junin, but it won't make very much difference. We will ride to the + village, get the rifles and pistols, and then follow the road by the lake. + It is now only nine o'clock; we can be there by one easily, and reach + Junin by morning. It will be perfectly safe to rest there. I suppose your + guards will be relieved about twelve o'clock?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, that was the time we heard them changed." + </p> + <p> + "They will most likely discover that you have gone then. When they find + the four guards sound asleep, they are sure to unbolt the door and see if + you are there, then of course they will give the alarm at once. But I + hardly think they will even attempt to pursue. They are infantry, and none + of them are mounted but the officers, which means that at present only + Valdez himself has a horse. They would know that you had been assisted, + and that probably horses were waiting for you somewhere. There is the hut, + señors." + </p> + <p> + Maria ran out as they came up. + </p> + <p> + "The saints be praised," she exclaimed, "that you are with us again, + señors!" + </p> + <p> + "The saints are no doubt to be praised," Harry said, "but we feel at + present a good deal more indebted to Dias and yourself than to them. We + are indeed grateful to you both, and you managed it splendidly. My brother + and I felt so confident that you would do something to get us out, that we + were not in the least surprised when we recognized you and Diaz got up as + travelling hawkers." + </p> + <p> + "You did not tell them that we were with you?" + </p> + <p> + "No. Fortunately they asked no questions at all, and took us for + Englishmen travelling by ourselves. They may have thought of it + afterwards, but in the hurry of carrying off their booty they apparently + gave the matter no attention. If they had done so they would probably have + sent a party out in pursuit of the mules. Even if they had not done so, + they would have been sure to look with some suspicion at two hawkers + arriving at such an out-of-the-way village at such a time." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we had better be moving at once," Dias said. "We are going down to + the village where they were captured, Maria. They hid their rifles and + pistols there when they found the place was in the hands of the brigands." + </p> + <p> + Three minutes later they started. There was a full moon, so they were able + to ride fast, and it was just midnight when they arrived at the village. + When they knocked at the house where their rifles had been left, the + proprietor looked out from the upper window in great dismay, fearing that + the brigands might have returned. However, as soon as he recognized the + party he came down and opened the door. The arms were found where they had + been hidden, and in five minutes they were again on their way, and arrived + at Junin at five o'clock. It was necessary to wait here twenty-four hours + to rest the animals. The next morning they started as soon as it was + light, and picked up José and the convoy. The brothers mounted the two + horses, and Dias and Maria rode on one mule, and led three behind them. + José rode another and led four. The horses and the mule Dias had bought + were sold at Oroya, and after purchasing enough provisions for the rest of + their journey they started for Lima, having concluded that it would be + better, now that they were on the main track, to follow it instead of + striking across the hills. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIII — LETTERS FROM HOME + </h2> + <p> + There was some little discussion over the amount of supplies that it would + be necessary to purchase. + </p> + <p> + "Travelling quietly, the journey will not occupy over fourteen days," + Harry said. "Do not get anything more than is absolutely necessary. It is + evident that the whole country is in a disturbed state, and it is as well + to have nothing to lose. We can buy nearly everything we want in the way + of meat and flour at villages we pass through. Therefore, if we have + enough tea, coffee, and sugar there will be really no occasion to buy + anything more. We have still two or three bottles of spirits left, and you + can buy pulque everywhere. There is a proverb two or three thousand years + old, 'The empty traveller can sing before the robber'. We are reduced to + that condition, except for our tents, bedding, and blankets, and they have + done good service and would not cost much to replace. There remain, then, + only the animals. They would certainly be a serious loss to us." + </p> + <p> + "Brigands would not want to take them. They would not be of the least use + to them in the mountains. I would not say the same of parties of disbanded + soldiers making their way down to Lima or Callao, who might prefer riding + to travelling all that distance." + </p> + <p> + "The brigands might take our rifles and pistols, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, they would be sure to do that, señor. But we have had more than our + share of bad luck already, what with the brigands in the Cerro pass, and + these rascals we have just had to do with. I will enquire when the last + silver convoy went down. If one has gone during the past five or six days, + we could overtake it soon, for we can do two days' journey to its one. If + no convoy has gone forward later, and there is one starting shortly, it + might be worth our while to wait for it, for by all accounts the road down + to Lima is infested by discharged soldiers, and ruffians of all kinds from + Callao and Lima." + </p> + <p> + "Have the convoys an escort?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señors. The silver mines have always a considerable force in their + pay. They used to have troops from the division stationed here, but what + with the constant revolutions, and the fact that more than once the + escort, instead of protecting the convoys, mutinied and seized them, they + found it better to raise a force themselves. They do not take Creoles, + preferring pure-bred Indians, who are just as brave as the Creoles, if not + braver, and can be relied upon to be faithful to their trust. The + consequence is that, in spite of the disturbed state of the country, it is + a long time now since one of their escorts has been attacked, especially + as the robbers would find great difficulty in disposing of the silver, as + each ingot is marked with the name of the mine it comes from. + </p> + <p> + "They might, of course, melt it up again; but even then there would be a + difficulty, as the law is very strict as to the sale of silver, and a + certificate has to be obtained from the local authorities in every case, + stating where it was obtained. This is hard upon the natives, for many of + the little mines are worked among the mountains, and the rascals, to whom + all official positions are given in reward for services done to the party + which happens to be in power for the time, take good care to fleece the + Indians heavily before they will give them the necessary documents. + Nothing can be done here, señors, without greasing the palms of two or + three people, and the grease has to be pretty heavily laid on." + </p> + <p> + Dias went out and made enquiries. "There will be no convoy for another + fortnight. One went down ten days ago." + </p> + <p> + "I certainly shall not wait another fortnight, Dias. As to an escort, less + than a dozen men would be useless, and as they would be a fortnight at + least going down, and as much returning, even if you could get twelve men + who could be relied upon, it would be a very expensive job. We might as + well risk losing our baggage, and even our guns. The great thing will be + to reduce the weight as much as possible. Four cotton beds take up a lot + of space, and I think in any case I should have bought new ones at Lima; + at any rate they can go. The blankets and ponchos we could, of course, + carry behind us. So that practically there are only the two tents, cooking + utensils, and the stores, which will not weigh many pounds, to carry, and + with our clothes the whole will make a ridiculously small load even for + one mule. We had better get rid of the pickaxes and shovels, they would + fetch pretty nearly as much here as we should give for new ones at Lima. + </p> + <p> + "Thus, then, with Donna Maria riding one of the mules, there would be our + five selves and three led mules, of which only one would be laden. That + would offer no great temptation to plunderers; and as we shall all have + guns across our shoulders, they would see that it would not be worth while + to interfere on the very slight chance that the one laden mule might be + carrying anything valuable." + </p> + <p> + "I agree with you, señor. Our appearance would be that of a party of + travellers who have been exploring the old ruins, or, as has been done + before, endeavouring to ascertain whether the rivers on the east are + navigable down to the Amazon. Besides, the bulk of the people here do not + forget what they owe to Englishmen, and the fact that you are of that + nation would in itself secure good treatment for you among all except + desperate men." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly they started the next morning. Maria rode, in Amazon fashion, + on a mule between her husband and Harry. Bertie followed with José, to + whose saddle the three baggage mules were attached in single file. They + were undisturbed on their journey. Three or four times they were hailed by + men on the rocks above as they went through difficult points of the pass. + The reply of Dias, that the two gentlemen with him were Englishmen who had + been exploring the ruins and doing a little shooting among the hills, + generally satisfied them. One or two, however, who enquired what the mule + was carrying, were invited by him to come down and see, though at the same + time they were informed that the load contained nothing but blankets and + cooking vessels, and enough provisions to last them on the way. + </p> + <p> + When, within two days' journey from Lima, a party of rough men came down + into the road, Dias rode forward to meet them and repeated his usual + story. "You can examine the mule if you like," he said, "but I warn you + not to interfere with us; the English señors are not men to be meddled + with. They are armed with rifles, and each carries a brace of + double-barrelled pistols. They are dead shots, too, and you may reckon + that it will cost you over a dozen lives were you to interfere with them. + Moreover, the other muleteer and myself could give a fair account of + ourselves. Rather than have trouble, however, two of you can come forward + and see that my statement as to what the mule carries is correct. Its + burden would not fetch fifty dollars at Lima." + </p> + <p> + Two of the men came forward and examined the mule's burden, and felt the + saddles of the others to see that nothing was concealed there. When they + rejoined their party one who appeared to be their leader came forward. + </p> + <p> + "Señors," he said, "I regret that we have stopped you; but we are poor + men, and are obliged to take to the road to live. Perhaps your honours + would not mind giving us ten dollars to buy food at the next village." + </p> + <p> + [Image: THEY SAW APPROACHING A PEASANT WOMAN SITTING ON A MULE.] + </p> + <p> + "I have not many dollars left," Harry said, "but if you really need food + you are welcome to ten of them, for we shall need nothing more than what + we carry till we arrive at Lima." He handed him the ten dollars, and then, + showing him his purse, said, "You see there are but five others." + </p> + <p> + With many thanks the man retired, and he and his companions took off their + hats as Harry and his party rode through them. + </p> + <p> + "Another such stoppage," Harry said with a laugh, "and we shall have to + fall back upon our little stock of gold-dust." + </p> + <p> + However, they met with no more trouble, and on the following evening rode + into Lima and took up their quarters at the hotel. Dias asked that he + might go on with the mules to his home. + </p> + <p> + "In the first place, señor, we want to know how things have gone on in our + absence. We had arranged with neighbours to look after the garden and the + house. They were glad to do so, as the garden was a fruitful one. They + were to take all they could raise and keep it well planted, so that + whenever we might return we should find our usual supply of fruits and + vegetables. In the next place, Maria is nervous about my staying here + after what happened last time. We may take it as certain that the friends + of the men we hurt will take the chance of paying off the score if they + can find an opportunity. I shall come in each day to see if you have any + orders for me." + </p> + <p> + "There will be no occasion for that, Dias. We have quite made up our minds + to wait here for a week before starting on our next expedition, so if you + will come over in four days that will be quite soon enough. You can + overhaul the blankets and bags, and see that those good enough to keep are + put in good repair, and those worn out replaced. We shall want quite as + many stores as those we took last time, for there are very few villages + except on the sea-shore, and we shall find difficulty in replenishing our + stock. We shall have to buy double-barrelled guns in place of those we + lost, but that we shall do ourselves. We have plenty of ammunition and + cartridges for the rifles and pistols, but we had only a few shot + cartridges left when we lost the guns." + </p> + <p> + As soon as Dias had gone on with the mules Harry went to the British + consul's and found three letters waiting there for him, two from Miss + Fortescue and one from Mr. Barnett. He put the former into his pocket to + be read and enjoyed privately, but opened that of Mr. Barnett at once. It + was in answer to that Harry had written at Cuzco. + </p> + <p> + "My dear Harry," he said, + </p> + <p> + "Your first letter was quite satisfactory. I was glad to find that you had + reached Lima without encountering more than a stiffish gale, which was as + well as you could have expected. I was still more glad that you had found + Dias alive and willing to accompany you. Your letter from Cuzco has now + reached me. I think you were extremely lucky to get through that street + broil without any damage to either of you. It was certainly a hazardous + business to interfere in an affair of that kind without having any weapons + except the sticks you carried. Still, I can well understand that, as you + would certainly have lost the services of Dias had you not done so, it was + worth running a good deal of risk; and, as you say, it had the natural + effect of binding him to you heart and soul. + </p> + <p> + "I feel very uneasy about you both, and have blamed myself many a time for + suggesting this scheme to you. I can only say that it is really the only + possible way in which it seemed to me you could carry out the task set + you. In fairy stories it is, so far as I can remember, a not uncommon + thing for a king to set some task, that appears absolutely hopeless, to + the suitors for his daughter's hand, and the hero always accomplishes the + impossible. But this is always done with the assistance of some good + fairy, and unfortunately good fairies are not to be met with in the + present day. I have great faith in Dias, but fear that he is a very poor + substitute for a fairy godmother. Still, I am convinced that he will do + all in his power, and will even strain his conscience severely, by + conducting you to places where his traditions lead him to believe that + gold, either in the shape of mines or hidden treasure, is to be found. + </p> + <p> + "Your search will not improbably lead you into places where the Indians + have won back their own from the civilization introduced by the Spaniards, + and I have always heard that on the eastern side of the Cordilleras the + natives entertain a deadly hatred for whites, and attack all who endeavour + to penetrate into the forest. Don't be too rash, lad. Remember that it + will not add to your lady-love's happiness to learn that you have been + massacred in your attempt to carry out your knight-errant adventure, and + if you are careless about your own life, don't forget that its loss will + probably entail the loss of your brother's also. Dangers, of course, you + must meet and face, but remember that prudence is a valuable aid to + bravery. + </p> + <p> + "I am glad to know that Dias has taken his wife with him. A woman is a + very useful adjunct to an expedition such as yours. Of course in some ways + she is necessarily a trouble, and always a responsibility. Still, if, as + you say is the case with her, she is a good cook, this makes a wonderful + difference in your comfort, and certainly adds to the chance of your + preserving your health. And in the next place, should you fall ill, or be + mauled by a tiger or puma, she will make a far better nurse than Dias + himself would be. Now that you are cutting yourself adrift from + civilization, I shall not expect to hear from you again for a long time. I + shall try and not be uneasy; but really, Harry, I do feel that I have + incurred a very heavy responsibility, and may, with the best intentions in + the world, have sent you and Bertie to your death. I have, as you directed + me, addressed this to the care of our consul, and it must be many months + before you receive it, many months more before I again hear from you. + Should you require more money, draw upon me. I have always a good balance + standing at the bank, therefore do not hesitate to draw, in case the + amount sent out to you quarterly does not prove sufficient to carry out + any scheme you may have in hand. + </p> + <p> + "With all good wishes for your own and Bertie's welfare, + </p> + <p> + "I remain, + </p> + <p> + "Your affectionate guardian, + </p> + <h3> + "JAMES BARNETT." + </h3> + <p> + When he returned to the hotel he handed Mr. Barnett's letter to Bertie to + read, and said: + </p> + <p> + "Stop down here in the patio, Bertie; I have two letters that I want to + read quietly." + </p> + <p> + Bertie laughed. + </p> + <p> + "All right, Harry; take your time over them; I won't disturb you." + </p> + <p> + It was dusk now, and when Harry went to his room he lit a couple of + candles and seated himself in a large cane arm-chair and opened his + letters. + </p> + <p> + The first one consisted chiefly of expressions of pleasure at his arrival + at Callao, of remarks upon the voyage, of complaints as to the long time + that had passed without news of him, and of assurances of affection. + </p> + <p> + The second was, like Mr. Barnett's, in reply to his letter from Cuzco. + </p> + <p> + "My dearest Harry, + </p> + <p> + "After reading your letter I have been more and more impressed with my + heartlessness in allowing you to undertake such a journey as you have + before you. I ought to have been braver. I ought to have refused + absolutely to allow you to go. The prospect of your being able to overcome + my father's objections really amounts to nothing, and I ought to have said + that I would not accept the sacrifice, and would not allow you to run such + risks; that it would be better and kinder for both of us to accept the + inevitable, and not enter upon such a struggle with fate. + </p> + <p> + "Do not think that I am already growing weary of waiting, and that my + heart is in any way changed. It is not that. It is anxiety about you, and + the feeling how wrong I was to let you go. Were there even a shadow of + chance of your success I would wait patiently for years. I do not say that + my life is a pleasant one. It is not. My father is still bitterly angry + with me for, as he says, throwing away my chances; that is to say, of + marrying a man I do not care for, simply because he is rich. But I can + bear that. Mother is very very good, and does all in her power to cheer + me; but, as you know, she has never been much more than a cipher, + accustomed always to submit to my father's will, and it is wonderful to me + that in our matter she has ventured, not openly to oppose him, but to give + me what strength and comfort she can. + </p> + <p> + "I hardly know how I should have got on without her comfort. My father + hardly speaks to me. He treats me as if I had been convicted of some + deadly sin, and is only restrained from punishing me in some way because, + by some blunder or other, contumacy against the will of a father has been + omitted from the penal code. Seriously, Harry, it makes me unhappy, not + only for myself but for him. Until I was unable to give in to him in this + question he has always been the kindest of fathers. I am sure he feels + this estrangement between us almost as much as I do, but believes that he + is acting for my good; and it is a great pain to him that I cannot see the + matter in the same light as he does. Of course to me it is most ridiculous + that he should suppose that my happiness depends upon having a title, and + cutting a figure at court, and that sort of thing; but there is no arguing + over it, and I am as thoroughly convinced that my view is the correct one + as he is that it is utter folly. + </p> + <p> + "However, I am almost as sorry for him as for myself, and would do almost + anything short of giving you up to make him happy. However, do not think + that I am very miserable, because I am not. Somehow, though I can't give + any good reason for my belief, I do think you will succeed. I do not say + that I think for a moment you are likely to come home with the sum my + father named as necessary; that seems to be quite hopeless. But I think + somehow you may succeed in doing well; and though some people might + consider that he was justified in refusing his consent to what he might + think was a bad match, he could not do so with any justice were I to + determine upon marrying a gentleman with some fortune. He thinks a great + deal of public opinion, and would know that even chat would be against + him. But Indeed, Harry, I am beginning to doubt whether in the end I shall + be able to sacrifice my life to his unfortunate mania, that I must marry + what he calls well. I love you, and told him that if at the end of two + years you were not in a position to claim my hand, I would give in to my + father's wishes. I will keep my promise so far, that I will not run away + with you or marry you in defiance of his command. But as I have agreed to + wait for two years for you, I may ask you to wait another two years for + me. + </p> + <p> + "When I think of you going through all sorts of dangers and hardships for + my sake, I feel that it would be downright wickedness to turn against you + if you find that you cannot perform an impossible task. Instead of this + separation making you less dear to me, it is affecting me in quite the + other way. My thoughts are always with you. How could it be otherwise? I + have worked myself up to such a pitch that I have almost resolved that, + when the two years are up, I will say to my father: 'I shall ask Harry to + release me from my promise to him, and for two years, Father, I will go + about and allow men a fair chance of winning my love. If at the end of + that time I have met no one to whom I can give my heart, I will then go my + own way, and if Harry will take me I will marry him.' It will require a + great deal of courage to say so; but you are doing so much to try and win + me, that it would be hard indeed if I were to shrink from doing a little + on my part. + </p> + <p> + "Still, it would make it easier for me if you should have the good fortune + to bring home something; not because, as I have told you many times, I + should shrink for a moment from renouncing all the luxuries in which I + have been brought up, and for which I care so little, but because it + would, in his eyes, be a proof of how earnestly you have striven to do + what you could to meet his requirements. I did not mean to say this when I + began my letter, but it seems to me that it will give you heart and + strength in your work, and that you will see from it that I, too, have + taken my courage in my hand, and show you that your love and faithfulness + shall some day have the reward they deserve. + </p> + <p> + "God bless you and keep you, dearest, + </p> + <p> + "Your loving HILDA." + </p> + <p> + Harry read the letter through again and again, and at last Bertie came in. + </p> + <p> + "What! at it still, Harry?" he said with a laugh. "You must have got your + letters by heart by this time. I have been sitting in the patio by myself + for two mortal hours expecting you to come down. At last I said to myself, + 'This sort of thing will bring on madness. When a healthy sailor forgets + that his brother is waiting for supper, to say nothing of himself, it is + clear that there is something radically wrong.'" + </p> + <p> + "It is evident, Bertie, that at present you know nothing of human nature. + If there had been anything radically wrong in this letter I should + probably have been down long ago. It is just the contrary. Hilda says that + if I don't succeed here, she will give herself, or rather her father, two + years, and at the end of that time, if she doesn't find someone she likes + better, she will marry me, whether he likes it or not—at least, that + is what it comes to." + </p> + <p> + "I congratulate you, old boy. At the same time, it is evident that she + would not have been worth her salt if she had arrived at any other + conclusion. Now, having settled that comfortably, let us go and have + something to eat. You appear to forget altogether that you have had + nothing since breakfast, and it is now past eight o'clock." + </p> + <p> + "You boys think of nothing but eating," Harry grumbled. + </p> + <p> + "Well, up till now, Harry, from the time we started, I have observed that + you have a very healthy appetite yourself, and I can tell you it has cost + me half a dollar in bribing the cook to stay on beyond his usual hour. I + did not like to tell him that you were engaged in reading a love-letter + fifty times, so I put it delicately and said that you were engaged in + business of importance. It went against my conscience to tell such a + buster." + </p> + <p> + "There, come on, Bertie. I had begun to hope that you were growing into a + sensible fellow, but I am afraid that there is no chance of that now, and + that you will continue to be a donkey to the end of your life." + </p> + <p> + Harry had told Dias that they had better take two or three days at home + before they came into Lima again, but to his surprise the muleteer came in + at ten o'clock next morning. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, I did not expect to see you again so soon. You have found + everything right at home, I hope?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, I am sorry to say I did not. Three days after we left here our + house was burnt down." + </p> + <p> + "Burnt down, Dias! I am sorry indeed to hear that. How did it happen? I + thought you said that you had locked it up, and left no one there." + </p> + <p> + "That was so, señor. The people who took over the garden were to go into + the house once a week to see that everything was in order; but as this + fire broke out only three days after I left, they had not entered it. + Everyone says that it must have been fired on purpose, for the flames seem + to have burst out in all parts at once. No one in the town thought that I + had an enemy in the world, and all have been wondering who could have had + a grudge against me. Of course we need not go very far to guess who was at + the bottom of it." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose not, Dias. It must have been those scoundrels we gave such a + thrashing to." + </p> + <p> + "There is no doubt of that, señor. But this time they have got the best of + me, for they know very well that I have no proof against them, and that it + would be useless to lodge any complaint." + </p> + <p> + "I am afraid it would, Dias. Is it quite burnt down?" + </p> + <p> + "The walls are standing, señor. It takes a good deal to burn adobe." + </p> + <p> + "What do you suppose it would cost to put it in the same condition as + before, with the furniture and everything?" + </p> + <p> + "No great thing, señor; two hundred or two hundred and fifty dollars. It + would not be as much as that if it hadn't been that Maria had left her + festa dresses and her silver trinkets behind. There was not much furniture + in the house; but I think I could replace everything for about two hundred + dollars, and I have a good deal more than that laid by." + </p> + <p> + "I shall certainly make that up to you, Dias. It was entirely your + kindness in deciding to take us on Mr. Barnett's recommendation, and to + undertake this journey, that brought the ill-will of these scoundrels upon + you. Of course it is of no use doing anything now, but when our search is + over I shall certainly see that you are not in any way the loser." + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; if I could not replace it myself I might accept your kind + offer, but I can do it without breaking very heavily into my savings. And + indeed their attack on me was the outcome of an old grudge. I have been + long regarded as a fortunate man, and truly I have been so. If there was a + job for five mules, and I was disengaged, I always had the first offer." + </p> + <p> + "But that was not fortune, Dias; that was because you were known to be + wholly trustworthy." + </p> + <p> + "There are few muleteers who are not so, señor; it is rarely indeed that + muleteers are false to their trust. I can scarce remember an instance. We + Indians have our faults, but we are honest." + </p> + <p> + "Well, perhaps your getting the first job to go with foreign travellers + may have been a piece of good fortune, but it is because these were so + well satisfied with you that others engaged you. Trustworthiness is not + the only thing wanted in a muleteer; willingness, cheerfulness, and a + readiness to oblige are almost as important for the comfort of travellers. + Well, do you think these fellows will try and play you another trick, + Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I hope they will," Dias said savagely, "that is, if they don't have too + much odds against me. I owe them a big score now, for twice they have got + the better of me. I should like to get even with them." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, I hope they won't try anything of the sort. If anything + should happen to you, I should not only be extremely sorry for your sake + and your wife's, but it would destroy the last chance I have of carrying + out my search for treasure. Do you think that if I were to go to the + consul and lay a complaint against them, on the ground, in the first + place, of their attack on you, and now of burning your house, it would + have any effect?" + </p> + <p> + "If you were to make a complaint it might do, señor; it certainly would + not were I to do so. A little bribe would, of course, be necessary; you + cannot do anything without that. The officials here are all Gamarra's men, + and there is not one of them who would not take a bribe. But would it be + worth while, as we are only going to stay here a week? And if you got them + imprisoned they would be out again before I came back, and would be more + anxious than ever to get rid of me." + </p> + <p> + "There is a good deal in that, Dias. As, of course, we shall be away, and + starting for home again as soon as we return here, their spite would be + directed entirely against you." + </p> + <p> + "I hope, señors, that while you stop here you will never go out without + your pistols. It is against you they have a grudge now more than me; it + was owing to you that they failed in killing me." + </p> + <p> + "We will do so; and we won't carry sticks this time, so that if they see + us going along they will think we are unarmed." + </p> + <p> + Whenever they went out after dark, indeed, Harry and Bertie had an idea + that they were followed, and on their way home each invariably carried a + cocked pistol in his pocket, ready for instant use. It was well that they + did so, for on returning late one evening from Señor Pasquez, four men + suddenly sprang out upon them. + </p> + <p> + They were on their guard, and their arms went up in an instant, and two + shots were fired. As the pistols were almost touching the men's heads when + the trigger was pulled, both the assailants dropped dead, and the others + at once took to their heels. + </p> + <p> + "There are two of Dias's enemies wiped out," Harry said quietly. "I hope + the others will give us a chance before we leave. Well, let us walk on + before the watch comes along. It would ruin our plans altogether if we + were kept here for an indefinite time while enquiries are being made." + </p> + <p> + The next morning they heard from their waiter at breakfast that two men + had been found dead in the street. + </p> + <p> + "They are muleteers," he said, "but are known to be bad characters, and + are suspected of having been concerned in several murders. It is evident + that they made a mistake this time, and have got what they deserved. They + are known to be associated with others. There were five of them; one was + killed in a knife fight some months ago, and a search has been made for + the others, but it is not likely that they will be caught. They were + probably concerned in the affair, and knowing that they would be suspected + of having a hand in this, and that their character will go against them, I + expect they went off at once to the foot of the hills, and won't be heard + of again for some time to come." + </p> + <p> + "I think it a pity they were not all shot. It is a shame that in a town + like this people cannot walk in the streets after dark without the risk of + being assassinated." + </p> + <p> + Dias was very pleased when, on coming up that morning, he heard of what + had happened. He quite agreed that the other men would almost certainly + have taken to the mountains. + </p> + <p> + "Even if they have not, señor, you are safe from another attack. Now they + know that you carry pistols, and are prepared for them, they will let you + alone." + </p> + <p> + "When we come back here, Dias, we will give you a brace of our pistols, + and I trust you will carry them in your pocket ready for use after dark, + whether you are in Lima or at Miraflores." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, señor. I do not think they are likely to show their faces here + again for a long time; but at any rate I will be on my guard, and will + gratefully accept your offer of the pistols. Now, señors, I must set to + work to-day to get in our stores for the next journey. I have made a list + of what we shall want." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I have plenty of money, Dias, for I find two remittances from home + awaiting me here. We have already bought two double-barrelled guns and a + stock of ammunition, principally buck-shot, for we shall not be doing much + big game shooting. We can always buy food at the sea-side villages." + </p> + <p> + Three days later all was in readiness. The mules were brought up from + Miraflores by José, accompanied by Maria, and an early start was made on + the following morning. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0014" id="link2HCH0014"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIV — THE CASTLE OF THE DEMONS + </h2> + <p> + "To-morrow, señor," Dias said, "you will see the spot I was telling you + about, where, as the traditions say, the spirits of our ancestors inhabit + the ruins of a building so old, that it was ancient when the Incas first + came here. They are still there, and men who have been rash enough to + approach the spot have been found torn to pieces as if by wild beasts; but + none go near now." + </p> + <p> + "Did the Spaniards never go there?" + </p> + <p> + "I know not, sir; but 'tis likely they never even heard of it. The country + is all dry and barren, and there were no mines to tempt them. The Indians + never speak of it; those who were alive when the Spaniards came had some + reasons for not doing so; and even now you could go to the nearest + village, which lies more than twenty miles away, and ask the people about + it, but they would only say that they had never heard of it, that no such + place existed, for they believe that even to speak of it would bring dire + disaster. We Indians are Christians; the Spaniards made us so. We make the + sign of the cross, and we bow before their images and pictures, and once a + year we go to their churches; but among the tribes east of the mountains + that is all. We believe in the traditions of our fathers and in the demons + of the forest; and though on this side of the hills, where the Spaniards + held a tight grip upon us, the people have well-nigh forgotten their old + faith, they still believe in many of the tales they have learned from + their fathers, and this of the Castle of the Demons, as it is called, is + as strong as ever in these parts." + </p> + <p> + "Have you ever seen the castle, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I have seen it, señor. There is only one point from which it is visible. + We shall go there to-morrow, it is ten miles from here. The castle lies in + a rift of the rock. I should say that in ancient times this opened to the + sea, but the building closed the entrance. Whatever it may have been, it + does not rise above the summit of the cliff, which goes down as straight + as a wall for miles on the sea-face. The rift on the land side of the + castle seems to have a width of about fifty feet, and I could see openings + which were, I suppose, windows. The rocks on each side are higher than the + castle itself, so that anyone coming along would not see it until he + looked down upon it." + </p> + <p> + "But of course it is visible from the sea, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "It would have been visible in the old days without a doubt, señor, but it + cannot be seen now. The stones are the colour of the rocks beside them. + They are stained and broken, and unless a boat went along within a very + short distance none would dream that there was a break in the cliff there. + I heard that from a fisherman whose boat was driven in by a gale and + well-nigh lost. He said that he could see that the stones, which are very + large—much larger than any of those in the remains of the buildings + of the Incas—were not in regular lines." + </p> + <p> + "It is very strange that anyone should have taken the trouble to build a + place in such a singular position. Is there not any legend as to its + construction?" + </p> + <p> + "There is a tradition, señor, that it was built as a prison, by the king + of those times, a thousand years before the Spaniards came, and even + before the people whom the Incas conquered came into the land, and that it + was a place of imprisonment, some say of a wife, others of a son, who had + rebelled against him. Some say that it was built by the demons, but as it + happened long before our people came here, none can know." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, it seems to me that this old place is very likely to have + been used as a hiding-place for treasure. As to these tales about demons, + of course they are ridiculous. I took your advice when we were being + opposed by fierce Indians, but when it is a question of demons, I can + trust to my revolvers and rifles against a legion of them." + </p> + <p> + "Well, señor, you are the master. I have led you here as I promised. There + may be treasure here or there may not. If you will go, you must; but I + pray you not to command me to go with you. I would have followed you to + the death through the swamps and forests on the other side, but I dare not + risk being torn to death by demons and being left without burial." + </p> + <p> + "I do not press you to go, Dias. I respect your convictions, though I do + not share in them. I have had a year of travel with you, and we have had + many adventures together. This will be my last before I return home. Here + at least there seems to me a chance of finding treasure, an infinitely + better chance than any we have had, except in the gold valley. Here is a + mysterious castle, of whose very existence the Spaniards seem never to + have heard. It is just the place where treasure might be hidden. If it has + guardians, they must be human, and also there can be but few. The urgent + necessity for secrecy was so great, that it must, like all the other + secrets, have been confided to a few only. Maybe but one or two old men + are there, of whom certainly I need not be afraid. I have told you why I + came here, and why I feel so anxious to find a valuable mine, or part of + the lost treasures of the Incas. So far I have failed altogether, and I + should be a fool as well as a coward were I not ready to run some slight + risk in searching this mysterious castle." + </p> + <p> + "So be it, señor. I say not that you may not succeed. It may be that the + demons have no power over white men. If you go and return safely I will go + with you, and, should you find treasure, aid you to carry it away. I will + lead you to within two miles of it, and will wait three days for your + return. If you come not then, I will return to my place and mourn for + you." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Dias, you may count upon my return long before the three days + are up. Now, in the first place, take me to the point from which I can + have a view of the castle." + </p> + <p> + "We have had a long journey to-day, señor, and it is two hours' journey + from here. We had better rest and go in the morning." + </p> + <p> + Harry nodded. + </p> + <p> + "We will be off early. You say it is ten miles from the spot where we + shall see it. If we start at daybreak I can be there before noon, which + will give me plenty of time for a first look round the place. We have got + some torches left. I shall want them, for possibly there may be some + chambers underground into which we shall have to penetrate. We may take it + as certain that, whether the old people hid a great treasure from the + Incas, or the Incas hid one from the Spaniards, they did not leave it + about in rooms, but stowed it away in vaults like those we saw at + Pachacamac, and these will certainly want a lot of looking for." + </p> + <p> + "I will help you look, señor, and will work there as long as you like in + the search, if you return and tell me that you have seen and heard nothing + of the demons that are said to be there. I am not afraid of danger when I + know that it is men that we have to do with. But I dread being strangled + and torn, as the legends say that all who have ventured here have been." + </p> + <p> + "But according to your own account, Dias," Bertie laughed, "that was long, + long ago, and the demons may have got tired of guarding a place that no + one came near, and have gone elsewhere in search of victims." + </p> + <p> + Dias shook his head gravely. In spite of his life as a muleteer, and his + acquaintance with Englishmen, he was as superstitious as the rest of his + countrymen. The nominal Christianity enforced by the Spaniards upon the + natives was but skin-deep, and thus they clung with undying fidelity to + the superstitions and traditions that had been handed down from generation + to generation, and had been preserved with a tenacity that even the + tortures of the Spaniards had failed to shake. The failure to obtain the + gold which they confidently expected to find in the valley had still + further strengthened his belief that it was destined that these treasures + should never be discovered; and although when there he had listened + gravely to Harry's explanations of the manner in which the lake had been + formed, his own conviction that all this was the work of demons had been + unshaken. If, then, a spot, which even the tradition handed down to him + had in no way connected with the guardianship of demons, was so firmly + watched, how much more must this be so at a spot which all legends agreed + was inhabited by demons, and had been the scene of so many executions by + them of those who had ventured near. + </p> + <p> + As Bertie and his brother sat together by the fire that evening after the + others had retired to rest, they talked long over the matter; for just as + when they had approached the gold valley, their excitement had increased + with every day's journey. Harry felt that this was his last chance, his + only hope of gaining the object for which he had left England. + </p> + <p> + "It is strange, Harry," Bertie said, "that the natives should believe + these absurd stories about demons. Dias seems, in every other way, as + sensible a fellow as one can want to meet, but in this respect he is as + bad as any of them." + </p> + <p> + "It is not extraordinary, Bertie, if you remember that it is not so very + long ago since people at home believed in witches who sailed through the + air to take part in diabolic ceremonies, and brought about the death of + anyone by sticking pins into a little waxen image, and that even now the + peasantry in out-of-the-way parts of the country still hold that some old + women bewitch cows, and prevent milk turning into butter however long they + may continue churning. Fairy superstitions have not quite disappeared, and + the belief in ghosts is very wide-spread. + </p> + <p> + "When you think of that it is not surprising that these poor ignorant + natives still have implicit faith in the traditions of their ancestors. It + is possible that this old place is still inhabited by Indians, who have + been its guardians for ages, and if not now, may have had charge of it + long after the Spaniards came here, and murdered any who ventured to + approach the place. We know that the tradition of the gold valley has been + faithfully maintained in the family of Dias; this may also be the case in + the family to which the guardianship of this old place was entrusted, but + to my mind it is less likely. In the case of the gold valley there was + nothing for those in the secret to do but to hold their tongues; but to + supply guardians to this place from generation to generation must have + been a much more irksome task, and it may have been abandoned, either from + the dislike of those who had to spend their lives in such a monotonous + business, or by their families dying out. I certainly don't want to have a + fight with men who are only following orders passed down to them for + hundreds of years. If they attack us, we shall have to fight; but I + sincerely trust that we may find the place deserted, for, fight or no + fight, I mean to get the treasure if it is there." + </p> + <p> + "I should think so," Bertie agreed. "The treasure is absolutely of no use + to them, and may be no end of use to you." + </p> + <p> + "To both of us, Bertie. If there is a treasure, you may be sure it is a + large one, ample for both of us, and to spare. Of course we shall have + trouble in getting it away—the gold would be invaluable to any of + these rascally adventurers who are a curse to Peru. I really want to see + the place, even putting aside the question of the treasure, for it must + have been extraordinarily well hidden if the Spaniards never came upon it; + and I think there can be no doubt whatever that in this respect the + traditions must be true. The whole thing would have been upset if the + Spaniards had once paid a visit there, for, from what we saw at Pachacamac + and Cuzco, they spared no exertions whatever to root out likely + hiding-places. The treasure, if there is one, will be difficult to find, + but I have got nearly a year yet, and if necessary I will spend the whole + of it in digging. Dias could go and get provisions for us. Of course he + must not always go to the same place. Sometimes he can go up to Huaura, + sometimes down to Chancay or Ancon. This place, he has told me, lies a + mile or two south of the Salinas promontory, which would partly account + for its escaping notice, for the road from Huaura, as we see on the map, + skirts the foot of the hill, and goes straight on to Chancay and Ancon, + and there is no earthly reason why anyone should go out to the promontory. + People here don't leave the roads and travel eight or ten miles merely to + look at the ocean, especially when by following the straight line they + would see it without trouble. Well, we have both had hard work during the + past year, what with felling trees to make bridges, chopping logs for + fires, making roads practicable by moving rocks out of the way, + occasionally using our picks where Dias thought that there was a lode, and + carrying mules' burdens up and down steep places. + </p> + <p> + "Altogether it has been a sort of backwoodsman's life, and if there are + treasure-vaults in this place I think we shall be able to get at them, + however thick and heavy the stones may be on the top of them." + </p> + <p> + "I am game," Bertie said. "There is a lot more excitement in working when + possibly a treasure lies under your feet than in chopping away at trees, + some of which are so hard as almost to turn the edge of an axe. The place + cannot be very large, so it won't take us very long if we are obliged to + tear up every foot of it. I suppose there cannot be above three feet of + stone over the mouths of any of these vaults." + </p> + <p> + "I think, Bertie, that when we have once investigated the place and + settled on our plans, we had better send Dias and José down to Callao to + get three or four kegs of powder and some boring tools, besides a supply + of provisions. We should get on a lot faster with these than with only + pickaxes. We shall want a couple of strong iron crowbars for lifting slabs + of stone, and of course some fuse for the mines." + </p> + <p> + "We should have to be careful not to put too much powder in, so as not to + bring the whole thing down about our ears." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, we should not want to make a mine of that sort, but only to blast the + stone as they do in quarries and mines. We should have to make a hole to + begin with, by means of our picks and crowbars, in one corner of the room, + two or three feet wide; then we must make a couple of holes the size of + the boring tool, a foot or so away, according to the hardness of the + ground, put in charges and fire them, and in that way blow down the rock + into the hole we had made; and so we should go on until we had done the + whole floor. Of course, the bigger the hole we first make—that is to + say, the wider the face it has—the easier we shall blow the stone + down afterwards. I have watched them blasting stone at Portland, and at + some galleries they were making at Gibraltar, and I know pretty well how + it is done. Of course it is hard work driving the borers down, for that we + shall want two or three sledges of different weights. It will make our + arms ache at first, but after a week or two we shall be able to stick to + it fairly well. Now we had better turn in. We shall start at daybreak + tomorrow. It will take us two hours to reach the spot from which Dias said + we could see the place, and another three hours to get to the castle. That + will give us a long afternoon to take our first look over it." + </p> + <p> + "There, señor," Dias said, when at eight o'clock in the morning they + stopped on a projecting spur of the hill, "that is the castle!" + </p> + <p> + From where they stood they could see that the ground fell away into what + was at first a mere depression, but gradually deepened into a valley half + a mile wide. Still farther down the sides became more precipitous, and in + the distance the valley was closed in by rock walls, and appeared to come + to an end. That it did not do so was evident from a streak of bright green + in the centre of the valley, showing that a small stream must run down it. + From the point at which they stood they could see the level line of the + plateau near the cliff facing the sea, and on the surface of this a dark + zigzag line marked the course of the ravine. Then, when apparently close + to the termination of the flat land by the cliffs, the dark streak widened + out somewhat. Through a small but powerful telescope which Harry carried + he could make out distinctly the upper part of what might be a house. + </p> + <p> + "It is a strange-looking place for a castle to be built," he said, "but it + quite answers to your description, Dias. There are certainly some + openings, which may have been windows. I am sure no one looking from here, + and ignorant that such a place existed, would notice it, and of course + from the valley it could not be seen at all. Even from this height I do + not think I can see more than ten or twelve feet of the upper part. But + surely it must be noticeable to anyone coming along the cliffs?" + </p> + <p> + "It may be, señor, but I cannot say. Certainly no native would go along + there even in the daytime. Still, it does seem likely that in the Spanish + time some must have ridden along the top of the cliffs, and if they had + seen the castle it would certainly have been searched. Assuredly it has + not been so. I have been at Ancon and Salinas many times, and have talked + with the people there. They would never speak on the subject to one of + white blood, but knowing that I was of native blood, and belonged to one + of the families to whom the secret could be strictly trusted, they were + ready enough to talk about the Castle of Demons. Had the Spaniards ever + searched it they would have known, and the place would no longer be + feared; but all say that from the time of the conquest by the Spaniards no + living being has, as far as is known, entered it." + </p> + <p> + "Then the Incas knew of it, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I think so, señor, though I have not heard that any of them ever lived + there; but tradition says that the vessel in which a great store of + treasure was sent away from Pachacamac, and which, as is proved by Spanish + writings, was never heard of afterwards, and doubtless was sunk in a great + storm that came on two or three days after it sailed, was intended to be + landed and hidden in this castle, which they thought might well escape the + observation of the Spaniards." + </p> + <p> + "And even among your traditions there is no allusion to what became of + this treasure ship?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; all traditions say that it was never heard of from the day it + sailed. Had it landed at that castle the secret would have been handed + down to some of the native families, just as that of the golden valley and + of other hidden treasures has been. But there can be no doubt that the + ship was lost with all her treasure." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we need not talk any more about it now, Dias; we shall learn + nothing more, however long we stay here and stare at it." + </p> + <p> + They stopped half an hour for breakfast and then rode down the valley. + When they got near the spot where it closed in Harry saw by the pallor on + the native's face that he was beginning to be greatly alarmed. + </p> + <p> + "You had better stop here, Dias. My brother and I will go on and explore + this ravine and have a look at the place. We will take some ropes with us, + for the ravine may be blocked by falls of rocks, and we may have to let + ourselves down. Evidently the water gets to the sea, or this valley would + be a lake like that in the golden ravine, for although it is but a mere + driblet of water now, you can see by the banks that a considerable amount + comes down in the wet season. How it gets past the castle I don't know; I + can only suppose that there is a passage for it underneath the building. + We will take both our guns, Bertie, and our pistols. That there are no + demons we are quite sure, but the place may have been used as a + hiding-place for outlaws and brigands, who could find no better spot, as + there was no fear whatever of its being discovered. We will take some + bread and meat in our haversacks and a flask of spirits. Perhaps we shall + be away longer than we expect, Dias, but at any rate we will not stop + there after dark." + </p> + <p> + Tears were in the Indian's eyes as Harry and Bertie said good-bye to him + and started, and when he saw them enter the ravine he sat down with his + elbows on his knees and cried unrestrainedly. His wife went up to him and + put her hand on his shoulder. + </p> + <p> + "Do not sorrow, Dias; as for me, I have no fear, though I love them as + well as you do. I do not say that there may not be demons in the castle—everyone + says there are;—but though these may strangle our people who break + the orders that were given that none should go near, I do not believe they + can hurt our white friends. You saw that they had no fear; you know how + brave they are, and how they laughed at the idea of the demons having any + power over them. Do you think I could smile and talk if I thought they + were in danger? Still, as there is no need to prepare dinner yet, I will + tell my beads over and over again. We shall know if any harm comes to them + if we hear them fire their guns, for it is certain that they would do so. + Even if a legion of demons attacked them they would never run away, but + would fight till the last." + </p> + <p> + "I love them," Dias said; "I love them as my own sons. At first, when they + came to me from Señor Barriett, it was for his sake that I consented to + accompany and aid them; but from that night when they saved my life by + rushing, with no weapons save their sticks, into the midst of five men + with drawn knives, I felt how noble they were, and I loved them not only + for the sake of my life, but for their bravery. Since then my feelings + have grown every day. Have they not treated us as equals, as they would do + people of their own race—us who, by every Peruvian with white blood + in his veins, are looked down upon?" + </p> + <p> + "It is true, Dias. They have laughed and joked with us, and have treated + me with as much respect as if I had been of pure Spanish blood, and have + always done everything they could to make things easy for me. I will not + believe God and the Holy Virgin can permit them to be overpowered by the + evil ones. Should it be otherwise, should they never return, I should be + inconsolable. It would be to me as if you yourself had died, and I should + be ready to stab myself to the heart at the thought that we had brought + them here." + </p> + <p> + "I could not live after it either, Maria; but, as you say, I will trust + that God will protect them." + </p> + <p> + He cut down two rods and fastened them together in the form of a cross, + and then he and his wife knelt before it and repeated innumerable + paternosters and Ave Marias, crossing themselves as they did so. + </p> + <p> + José, as soon as he had removed the burdens from the mules and turned them + out to graze at the edge of the streamlet, came and joined them in their + supplications, occasionally breaking off from the repetition of the only + prayers he knew, and in his native language imploring the saints to + protect their friends. + </p> + <p> + "There is no humbug about Dias," Bertie said as they left the others. "He + is really in a blue funk." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, he is quite in earnest; and we know that he is no coward in other + matters." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly not. He showed any amount of pluck in the affair with the + Indians. But he seems such a bright, sensible sort of chap, that it is + quite funny to hear him going on about his demons. I should not be + surprised at anything the ordinary peasant might believe, but it is + different with a man like Dias." + </p> + <p> + "You know, Bertie," Harry said, coming to a sudden stop, "I think we are + making a mistake going on into this ravine. I have no belief that the + place is inhabited; still, there may be desperadoes, and perhaps a few + fanatics. It is quite possible that a certain number of families bound + themselves to keep watch here, and formed a little community that has + lasted to the present day." + </p> + <p> + "But how could they have lived?" + </p> + <p> + "We will talk that over, Bertie, if we find any of them there. Now we must + turn back. It is not more than a mile at the outside to the place where we + can climb the hillside. In that way we shall be able to look down into + this ravine, and take a general view of the place. We shall know what we + are doing then, whereas if we were to go on through the gorge without + knowing anything about it, we might find ourselves caught in a trap. It + won't make half an hour's difference, for the ground up there will be as + good walking as it is here, while we might find all sorts of obstacles in + this ravine, and with two guns apiece, ammunition, pistols, coils of rope, + food, and so on, we should find it awkward work climbing among heaps of + rocks. + </p> + <p> + "You were saying, How could a group of people exist here for centuries + without any communication with the outside world? Well, I don't suppose + they could. They might get water from the stream, and possibly there may + be some way of getting down to the sea-shore; anyhow, this stream must + find a passage when it is in flood. They might have been able to get + enough fish for their wants; but a fish-and-water diet would scarcely be + sufficient. + </p> + <p> + "At the same time we are by no means sure that they could have had no + communication with the outside, for just as some families may have been + ordered to live here, others may have been instructed to supply them with + food. The watchers may have had a store of gold-dust sufficient to last + them all this time, and their friends outside may have brought them a + sheep or two, and corn and other articles of necessity once a week. There + could have been no difficulty in doing so. The stories of demons, and + probably the murder of inquisitive people who tried to pry into what was + going on, created such a dread of the place that those in the secret would + come and go without the slightest difficulty. Conceivably, young men may + from time to time have gone out for a year into the world and brought back + wives with them, or girls may have been sent by the people in league with + them outside, and obtained husbands, which is less likely. I should think + it was more probable that young boys and girls would be kidnapped, and + brought in here from time to time. All this is pure guesswork, of course, + but nevertheless there may be people here, and it is just as well to take + a look round from above before we trust ourselves inside the place." + </p> + <p> + On gaining the plateau they followed the crest of the valley until they + came to a spot where the ravine appeared to end. They found that in fact + it made a sharp turn. It was here only some ten feet wide, but soon + broadened out to thirty. Fifty yards farther there was another sharp bend, + the ravine narrowed to twenty feet, and the sides became absolutely + perpendicular. Twenty yards farther still they saw something like a wall + about thirty or forty feet high stretching across the gorge, which was + here some seventy feet deep. About twenty feet from the foot there was a + steep ascent of rocks, such as might have fallen there by a slip from one + side or the other. Above these a perpendicular wall rose for another + twenty-five feet. Harry and his brother looked at it in surprise from the + height at which they stood. Its appearance was precisely that of the + wall-precipices on each side. It was rough and uneven, and they could see + no signs of any joints. + </p> + <p> + "It looks as if it were natural," Bertie said, "but it can't be." + </p> + <p> + "No, it must certainly be artificial, but it is a wonderful imitation, and + certainly anyone coming up the ravine would suppose that bank of rocks at + the foot had fallen from its face; but we know that it can't be that, for + the water makes its way through. Besides, you see it is only three feet + wide at the top, and then there is a narrow ledge a couple of feet wide, + which was evidently made for the garrison to stand upon and shoot their + arrows at anyone attempting to come up the ravine. Behind the slope is all + rough rocks, except just below our feet, where there is a narrow stone + staircase of regularly-cut steps. It is so narrow that it could not be + noticed by anyone standing here, unless they bent over to look straight + down as I am doing. Well, it is just as well that we made the circuit, for + we certainly could not have climbed over there." + </p> + <p> + Another sharp turn, and the ravine ran straight towards the castle. They + hurried on, and when they had gone fifty yards stood at the edge of a + roughly circular pit. It was seventy or eighty feet across, narrowing at + each end. At one end was the ravine at whose mouth they were standing, and + directly opposite, in what might be called the neck of the bottle, stood + the Castle of the Demons. It was some fifty feet in width, and as it stood + back about forty feet up the neck it could hardly be seen at any point + except that at which they were standing. There was no door or other + opening at less than some twenty-five feet from the ground. At that height + was a broad aperture about four feet high and twelve wide. Above this were + several smaller openings about four feet square. The singular point in the + structure was a rough arch of rock, which extended above it and formed its + roof. This arch projected thirty or forty feet in front of the building, + so that the latter had the appearance of standing in a great cave. + </p> + <p> + "What an extraordinary-looking place!" Bertie said in a low voice. + </p> + <p> + "Extraordinary, but how splendidly chosen for concealment! You see the top + of the rock above it is level with the ground on either side. This would + perfectly well account for people riding along the line of the cliffs, and + passing over without dreaming that there was a house below them. Even if + they went to the edge on this side, they would simply see this deep pit + and the ravine beyond, but could not by any possibility obtain a sight of + the house unless they came round to nearly where we are standing, which + they could have no possible motive for doing. Besides, you see, all the + way we have been passing through a thick bush; and I have no doubt that in + the old time a wood stood here, possibly planted by the builders of the + house. Of course the arch existed before the house was built. The stratum + below was probably softer, and the stream gradually trickled through, and + perhaps in some great flood, when this basin was full, burst its way out, + after which the rock gradually fell until it formed that great natural + arch." + </p> + <p> + "Well, let us go round and have a look at the other side." + </p> + <p> + They found that the width of the arch to the sea cliff was a hundred and + fifty feet. + </p> + <p> + "If the castle extends to this face, Bertie, it is a hundred feet across, + but from here we can't see whether it does so. It is probably built flush, + however, as Dias said that it was not noticeable from the sea, and had the + arch projected beyond it it could certainly have been seen." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry, if you will tie a rope round my waist you can let me down, + and I will have a look at it. You can hold me easily enough if you stand + twenty feet back from the edge, and you won't have to pull me up, because + I can easily climb up the rope by myself. I need not go down more than + thirty or forty feet, and I can do that easily enough." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, I could pull you up, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + "Well, you could do that if by any chance I should get tired; then I could + give a shout, and you could haul on the rope." + </p> + <p> + "There are lots of stumps of trees here, Bertie, and I can take half a + turn round one of them and so let you down easily; then when you shout I + will fasten the rope there and come to the edge, and I can hear whether + you want me to haul or not. Of course it must depend whether there are any + jagged rocks sticking out. If so, it would be better for you to climb, as + the rope might chafe against them if I pulled." + </p> + <p> + "I understand." Bertie laid down his weapons and water-flask, made a loop + at the end of one of the ropes they had brought large enough for him to + sit in, then he looked for a spot where the short grass extended to the + very edge. "This is a good place, and the rope won't chafe as it runs over + that. Now I am ready. If you will go back to that stump fifteen feet away + and let it out gradually, I will be off." + </p> + <p> + He knelt down, and putting the rope over his head took a firm hold of it + just above the loop, and then crawled backwards, his brother keeping the + rope taut. "Slack it out gradually now," Bertie said; "I am just over." + </p> + <p> + Directly afterwards his shoulders disappeared. Harry let the rope slowly + out until he calculated that fifty feet were over the cliff, then he + fastened it very securely round the stump and went forward to the edge. + </p> + <p> + "Are you all right, Bertie?" he shouted. + </p> + <p> + "Quite right." + </p> + <p> + The face of the rock was very even, and there was nothing for the rope to + chafe against. Harry lay down at the edge, keeping a firm hold of the rope + to prevent himself from slipping over, and was able to look down on + Bertie. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Bertie, what is it?" + </p> + <p> + "It is the wall of the house, I have no doubt, but it is so cleverly built + that I can scarcely see where the arch ends and the house begins. Looking + quite close I can see where the stones join, but their face has been left + rough; and as it is just the same colour as the rocks, and lines have been + cut down its face, and cracks made across it answering to the lines in the + rock on both sides, I am sure I should not have known it was built up + unless I had examined it. It is much narrower on this side than on the + other—not more than twenty-five feet, I should say. There seem to be + some irregularly-shaped holes in what looks like a fissure in the middle. + I suppose they are to light the rooms on this side of the house, but they + are certainly too small to be noticed from the sea." + </p> + <p> + "Does the sea come right up to the foot of the cliff?" + </p> + <p> + It was a minute before the answer came. "The water comes to the foot, but + there is a line of rocks running along forty or fifty feet farther out. + Some of them seem to be thirty feet out of the water; at one end they + touch the cliff, and at the other there is a free passage. The water is + very clear, but as far as I can judge I should say there is a depth of a + fathom or a fathom and a half between the rocks and the cliff. Certainly a + boat could row in to a position underneath where I am." + </p> + <p> + "Is there anything more?" + </p> + <p> + "No." + </p> + <p> + "You don't see an entrance down here?" + </p> + <p> + "No." + </p> + <p> + "All right! Then you may as well come up again. Can you climb up?" + </p> + <p> + "Easily." + </p> + <p> + "Well, hail me if you want me to haul." + </p> + <p> + Harry went back to the stump, unwound the rope until it was only half a + turn round it, and then, holding it firmly, stood ready to haul up. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0015" id="link2HCH0015"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XV — INVESTIGATIONS + </h2> + <p> + Harry was relieved when, a few minutes later, Bertie's head appeared above + the edge, and directly afterwards he crawled over. "My arms have + strengthened ever so much with our work. I could have done it before, but + it would have been hard work." + </p> + <p> + "Well, so far so good, Bertie. There is no doubt that it is one of the + best hiding-places in the world, and I am not a bit surprised that the + Spaniards never found it. Now we will go back to the edge of the ravine + and have a good look from that side." + </p> + <p> + As they went along he said, "Let us have a look at these bushes, Bertie. + The soil is very thin about here, and I wonder that the trees grew." + </p> + <p> + "These are pines," Bertie said, "and in the mountains we often saw pines + growing among rocks where there did not seem a handful of soil for them." + </p> + <p> + On examining they found several old stumps, and thrusting a ramrod down + Harry found, to his surprise, that the soil was from three to four feet + deep. He tried again a little farther off, and found that it was two feet; + further still, it was only one. + </p> + <p> + "The tree must have stood in a hole in the rock," he said. "Try another + one, Bertie." The same results were obtained. "That explains it, Bert. + Evidently when they planted the trees to prevent this place from being + seen from the hills, they cut away the rock in circles about twelve feet + across and made cup-shaped holes, which they filled up with earth. When + they planted the young trees I dare say at first they watered them. They + could easily enough fetch water up from the stream. When the trees got + fairly rooted they would be able to leave them alone, perhaps giving them + a good watering once every two or three months. Whenever the rains came + they would be able to give up watering altogether, for in these basins the + earth would keep moist for a very long time. It would be a big job, but no + doubt the king who built the place had all his tribe at work on it. It is + probable that the Incas had established themselves at Cuzco for many years + before they came down to this place, and the trees may not have been + planted till their coming was first heard of. In that case there would be + plenty of time to hide the place before they came down and searched the + shore. We know that the Chimoos resisted them for a considerable time + before they were finally conquered. Well, for whatever purpose this place + was built it is one in which either the Chimoos or the Incas, if they ever + found the place, would be likely to hide treasure, which is satisfactory. + Now we will sit down here for a short time and watch both windows. You + look at the two top lines, Bertie, and I will look at the two lower lines. + I certainly do not see any signs of life. That is how the water gets out," + and he pointed to a roughly-shaped arch about twelve feet wide and as many + high. Through this the little stream disappeared. "I expect there is a + similar passage at the other end." + </p> + <p> + "There may have been," Bertie said. "I was hanging so close to the wall + that there may very well have been one without my being able to see it. + But it looks pitch-dark in there. If there were much of an opening we + ought to see the light, for, as we agreed, it can't be more than a hundred + feet long." + </p> + <p> + [Image: HARRY DROPPED THE BARREL OF HIS RIFLE INTO THE PALM OF HIS LEFT + HAND.] + </p> + <p> + "That is the first place we will investigate, Bertie. The question of how + we are to get into the house wants some thinking over. That lowest window + is a good twenty-five feet above the ground." + </p> + <p> + "Of course if we had a grapnel we could fasten it to the end of a rope and + chuck it in." + </p> + <p> + "We shall have to make something of that sort. If the window had been on + the other side instead of this it would have been easy enough, because I + could have lowered you and slipped down the rope afterwards, but that arch + sticking out so far on this side makes it impossible. All that we can do + now is, as far as I can see, to lower ourselves down on to the top of that + wall in the ravine, then go and examine the tunnel. We have got plenty of + rope to lower ourselves from here on to the wall." + </p> + <p> + They watched the building for another twenty minutes. "I am convinced that + no one is there," Harry said. "I have not seen as much as a shadow pass + any of the windows since. If people did live in it they would naturally be + on this side of the house, because the rooms here are better lighted and + more cheerful, and no doubt they are the principal rooms, as the house + narrows so much at the other end." + </p> + <p> + "Well, let us try it," Bertie said. "If there is a strong force here we + should only have to make a bolt back to that narrow staircase. We could + hold that against a whole tribe." + </p> + <p> + They rose and walked along the edge of the ravine till they were above the + wall, then, fastening the rope to a stump, they slid down on to it. + </p> + <p> + "So far so good," Harry said, as, holding their rifles in their hands, + they went down the steps. Then he suddenly stopped. "Hullo," he exclaimed, + "here are two skeletons!" + </p> + <p> + They were not quite skeletons, for the bones were covered by a + parchment-like skin, and there were still remains of the short skirt each + had worn in life. A spear lay beside each. With difficulty the brothers + passed down without treading upon them. + </p> + <p> + "They must have been here a long time, Harry," Bertie said when they got + to the bottom. + </p> + <p> + "Any time," the other said. "In the dry air of these low lands there is + scarce any decay. You remember those mummies we saw. I believe iron or + steel will lie here for years without rusting. They may have been here for + a couple of hundred years or more." + </p> + <p> + "I wonder what killed them, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "I have no idea. You see, one was lying almost on the other with his arms + round his body, as if he had died trying to lift him up. If they had been + shot by arrows they would still be sticking into them; if they had been + killed by people pursuing them they would probably be lying upon their + backs, for they would naturally have faced round at the last moment to + resist their pursuers, whereas there are no signs of injury. This settles + the point that there is no one in the house. Had it been inhabited, the + bodies would have been removed from the path, for it is by this that + people would go out and return. There may have been a ladder down from the + wall; the only other way they could have got out would have been through + that passage to the sea. A boat may have been kept there; but even if that + had been so, we should scarcely have found those bodies on the steps. + Well, we shall have plenty of time to talk over that." + </p> + <p> + They walked across the open space until they approached the building. For + a height of twenty feet it was constructed of stone, above that it + appeared to be made of the great adobe bricks which had been so largely + used at Pachacamac, and in others of the old ruins they had seen. + </p> + <p> + "There is no question that it must have been built by the Chimoos or some + race before them," Harry said; "the Incas could have had no possible + reason for erecting such a place. Well, now for the tunnel." + </p> + <p> + The little stream only occupied two feet of the passage. They were + therefore enabled to walk down dry-foot. + </p> + <p> + "We ought to have brought a torch with us," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "I don't think we shall want that; there is a sort of thin blue light, the + reflection of the light upon the water outside, though I don't know why it + should be so blue." + </p> + <p> + The reason was soon manifest. The passage sloped downwards, and when they + had gone some fifty feet their progress was arrested by water which + appeared of a deep-blue colour. + </p> + <p> + "That is it," Harry said. "You see the roof comes down into the water + twenty feet off, and the light has come up under it. They sloped this + passage to make the water flow out below the surface of the sea, so that + the opening could not be seen from without. By the light I should not say + that the opening is more than six inches under the water. I don't know how + the tides are, but if it is high tide now, the top of the opening would be + eighteen inches out of water at low tide, for, as you know, the tide only + rises about two feet on this coast. In that case a boat would be able to + come in and out at low tide, but of course a man wanting to come in or go + out could easily dive under at any time. Well, that settles that point for + the present. It was a clever plan; any amount of water could flow out in + flood time, and yet no one who took the trouble to come behind that ledge + of rocks we saw would have any idea that there was an opening. I think now + that we had better go back, Bertie; in the first place because we can do + nothing until we have manufactured a grapnel of some sort, and in the next + place because every moment we delay will add to the anxiety of our friends + in camp. We must have been away three hours, I should say." + </p> + <p> + They ascended the steps, fastened the short rope round a block at the top + of the wall across the ravine, and lowered themselves down. They had to + proceed with great care while making their way down the slope composed of + rough and jagged rocks, Once at the bottom of the ravine, however, they + walked briskly on. They had scarcely issued from the entrance when they + saw a stir in the camp in the distance and heard a shout of delight, and + then Dias dashed off to meet them at the top of his speed. + </p> + <p> + "Thanks to all the saints, señor, that you are safe! You do not know how + we have suffered. We have prayed ever since you started, all of us. Once + or twice I threw myself down in despair, but Maria chided me for having so + little faith in God to keep you from evil, and cheered me by saying that + had harm come to you we should assuredly have heard the sound of your + guns. Have you been in the castle?" + </p> + <p> + "No, Dias, we have not been in—for the good reason that we could not + get in, because the only entrance is fully twenty-five feet from the + ground. We cannot enter until we have made some contrivance by which a + rope can be fixed there, or manufactured a ladder, which would be the best + way and save a lot of trouble, if we could get a couple of poles long + enough. We thought that we would come back when we had seen all there was + to be seen outside the place." + </p> + <p> + The Indian's face fell. "Then you do not know what is in the house, + señor?" + </p> + <p> + "No; but we are certain that there is no one there, and that probably no + one has been there for the past two hundred years, and perhaps a good deal + longer." + </p> + <p> + "And the demons have not interfered with you?" + </p> + <p> + "The demons knew better," Bertie laughed. + </p> + <p> + "They may not be powerful in the daytime," Dias said in an awed tone. "It + is at night that they would be terrible." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias," Bertie said, "everyone knows that the demons cannot + withstand the sign of the cross. All you have to do is to make a small + cross, hold it up in front of you and say, '<i>Vade retro, Satanas!</i>' + and they will fly howling away." + </p> + <p> + "Seriously," Harry said, "you know it is all bosh about demons, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "But the church exorcises evil spirits. I have seen a priest go with + candles and incense to a haunted house, and drive out the evil spirits + there." + </p> + <p> + "That is to say, Dias, no spirits were ever seen there afterwards, and we + may be very certain that no spirits were ever seen there before, though + cowardly people might have fancied they saw them. However, to-morrow we + shall get inside, and Bertie and I will stop there all night, and if we + neither see nor hear anything of them you may be quite sure that there are + none there." + </p> + <p> + "But the traditions say they have strangled many and torn them, señor; + their bodies have been found in the daytime and carried off." + </p> + <p> + "It is quite possible that they were strangled and torn there, but you may + be sure that it was the work not of demons, but of the men who were set to + guard the place from intruders. Well, those men have gone. We found two + skeletons, which must have been there at least a hundred years, perhaps a + great deal more. They were lying on the stairs, the only way of getting + into the place, and they would have been removed long ago if anyone had + been passing in or out." + </p> + <p> + By this time they had arrived at the camp. "I knew you would come back all + safe, señors," Donna Maria said triumphantly; "I told Dias so over and + over again. But what have you seen?" + </p> + <p> + "I see something now—or rather I don't see something now that I + should like to see," Bertie laughed. "I thought you would have got a good + dinner ready for me, but I do not see any signs of its being even begun." + </p> + <p> + The woman laughed. "I have been too busy praying, señor, and have been + keeping up Dias's spirits. I never knew him faint-hearted before, and it + really almost frightened me; but I will set about getting dinner at once." + </p> + <p> + "No, no," Harry said; "we are really not hungry. We had a good meal before + we started. So do you three sit down and I will tell you all we have + seen." + </p> + <p> + The three natives listened with intense interest. When he had done, Maria + clapped her hands. "It must be a wonderful place," she said. "I wish I had + gone with you, I will go to-morrow if you will take me." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly we will take you, Maria; and I have no doubt that Dias will go + too." + </p> + <p> + "I will go as far as the place," said Dias, "but I will not promise to go + in." + </p> + <p> + "I won't press you, Dias. When we have slept there a night I have no doubt + you will become convinced that it is quite safe. And now about the ladder. + We shall really want two to be comfortable—one for getting up to the + window, that must be made of wood; the other, which will be used for + getting up and down the wall in the ravine, may be made of ropes. But I + think that that had best be hung from the top of the ravine above it, so + as to avoid having to climb over those rough stones at the foot, which are + really very awkward. One might very well twist one's ankle among them." + </p> + <p> + "I will go at once, señor, and get the poles," Dias said. "You may as well + come with me, José. We passed a wood in the valley about five miles off; + there we can cut down a couple of young trees. If we put the saddles on + two of the riding mules, when we have got the poles clear we can fasten + the ends to ropes and trail them behind us." + </p> + <p> + "We shall also want some of the branches you cut off, Dias. You had better + say thirty lengths of about two feet long, so that we may place the rungs + nine inches apart. You had better get poles thirty feet long, for we may + not have just the height by a couple of feet." + </p> + <p> + The two natives at once rode off, and the brothers set to work to collect + sticks for the fire. + </p> + <p> + "It is too bad, señors, that this should not have been done while you were + away, but we thought of nothing but your danger." + </p> + <p> + "You were perfectly right, Maria; if we were in peril, you did the best + thing of all to obtain help for us. As to the dinner, there is no hurry + whatever for it. What have you got to eat?" + </p> + <p> + "There is nothing, señor, but a few of the fish we fried two days ago, and + the ham that we smoked of that bear." + </p> + <p> + "I will take the line, then, and go down and try to catch some fresh + fish," Bertie said. "There is a good-sized pool about half-way between + here and the ravine. I might get some fish there." + </p> + <p> + "I will take my gun, Bertie, and go up to the bushes by the ravine, and + see if I can get a bird or two. There is no other shelter anywhere about + here." + </p> + <p> + In half an hour the lad brought a dozen fish into the camp. None of them + were above half a pound, but they were nearly of a size. + </p> + <p> + "These will be very nice," the woman said with a smile as he handed them + to her. "I have thrown away the others. I do not think we dried them + enough; they were certainly going bad. I have heard your brother fire + several times, and as he does not often miss, I have no doubt he will + bring us something." + </p> + <p> + Twenty minutes later Harry was seen coming along. When he arrived he threw + down a large bunch of wild pigeons. + </p> + <p> + "There are ten brace," he said. "That will give us four apiece. I found + nothing in the bushes, but I suddenly remembered that when we went across + from the ravine to the house, lots of wild pigeons rose from the sides of + the rocks. We did not give them a thought at the time, our attention being + fixed upon the building. But when I got nothing above, I suddenly + remembered them, and concluded that they had their nests in the crannies + of the rocks. So I walked along to the top, and as I did so numbers of + them flew up. I shot a couple; most of the others soon settled again, but + some kept flying round and round, and in ten minutes I got as many as I + wanted. Then of course I had to go down into the ravine by the rope and + the steps to gather them up. I returned the way we did, by the rope we had + left hanging from the top of the wall." + </p> + <p> + Maria was already at work on the birds. Taking them by the legs, she + dipped them for a minute into a pot of boiling water, and as she took them + out Bertie pulled off the feathers. Then she cut off the heads and feet, + cleaned them, and spitted them on José's ramrod, and, raking out a line of + embers from the fire, laid the ends of the ramrod on two forked twigs + while she attended to the fish. + </p> + <p> + "But they will be done before the others arrive," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor; there they come! They will be here in a quarter of an hour. + The cakes are ready and hot, so we will lay the pigeons on them, and they + will be nicely flavoured by the time that we have eaten the fish and are + ready for them." + </p> + <p> + Dias and José soon arrived at a gallop, with the long poles trailing + behind them and a fagot of short sticks fastened to each saddle. + </p> + <p> + "Those are capital poles, Dias," Harry said as he examined them—"strong + enough for anything. We will chop notches in them for the rungs to lie in. + There will be no fear then of their shifting, which they might do if the + lashings stretched. Now, we have got a capital dinner just done to a turn, + so you see we have not been lazy while you were away. + </p> + <p> + "You see," he said, after they had finished breakfast, "my shooting has + quite settled the point that no Indians are in the castle. If there had + been they would certainly have come to the windows to see who was firing. + I kept an eye on the castle between each shot, and saw no signs of any + movement. It is a capital thing that so many pigeons live among the rocks. + If we content ourselves with say five brace a day, they will last us a + long time, and will be a change from salt and dried meat, which we should + otherwise have to depend upon, for we cannot be sending away for fresh + meat two or three times a week. We can get fish, though I don't suppose + that will last very long, for the pool will soon be fished out, and I + don't think that there is water enough in other places for fish of that + size." + </p> + <p> + "We can get them from the sea, Harry. We have got plenty of large hooks + and lines, which we used on the other side of the mountains. If any of the + window openings on that side are large enough, we can let down the lines + from there. If not, we can do it from the top where I went down." + </p> + <p> + "I should not like that," Harry said. "One might slip on that short + grass." + </p> + <p> + "Well, one could dive out through the passage and sit on that ledge of + rocks, and fish either inside them or in the sea outside." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, we might do that, Bertie, and certainly it would be a first-rate + thing if we could get plenty of fish. It would keep us in good health and + make a nice change. I think to-morrow morning, Dias, we had better fix our + camp close up to the mouth of the ravine. Out here in the open valley we + can be seen from the hills, and if anyone caught sight of the animals, it + would very soon get talked about, and we should have a party down here to + see who we were and what we were about." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, that would be much better. I should not have liked to go + nearer this morning; but now that you have been there twice, and have + returned safely, I am ready to move." + </p> + <p> + "It would certainly be better; besides, it would save us a couple of + miles' walk each time we wanted a meal. However, when we once set to work + I have no doubt we shall establish ourselves in the castle. Of course one + of us will come down morning and evening to see to the animals." + </p> + <p> + As soon as the meal was finished they set to work to make the ladder. A + short stick was cut as a guide to the space that was to be left between + the rungs. Bertie and José marked off the distances on the two poles, and + Dias and Harry with their axes cut the grooves in which the sticks were to + lie. Then the poles were laid a foot apart, and the work of pressing the + sticks into their places began. They agreed that the ropes should not be + cut up, as they would be wanted for fastening on the loads whenever the + mules went to fetch food or powder. Two of the head-ropes were used on + each side, and a firm job was made. + </p> + <p> + "When you go, Dias, for the powder and so on, you must get another supply + of rope. We shall want a longer ladder than this in the ravine, and also a + rope to lift powder and firewood and so on into the castle, and perhaps + for other things that one does not think of at present. Tomorrow we will + unfasten the cord by which we descended to the wall, as we shall not want + to use that in future. I think to-morrow, when we go to the castle, as you + and José do not mean to accompany us, you might take your axes and cut + down a lot of those stumps among the brushwood, split them up, and pitch + them into the courtyard of the castle. It would be well to lay in a good + stock of firewood. We shall want it for cooking and lighting of an + evening. We have only one or two torches left, and we shall want a + cheerful fire." + </p> + <p> + "I may go with you to-morrow, may I not?" Maria said. + </p> + <p> + "Certainly you may, if you wish." + </p> + <p> + "I should like to," she said. "In your company I sha'n't be a bit afraid + of demons; and I want to see the place." + </p> + <p> + "That is right, Maria, and it shows at any rate that your curiosity is + stronger than your superstition." + </p> + <p> + "If Maria goes I will go," Dias said. "I don't like it; but if she went + and I didn't I should never hear the last of it." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," Harry said with a laugh, "I do think she would have the + better of you in the future if you didn't. So you see you will be both + conquering your superstitions—she, because her curiosity is greater; + you, because you are more afraid of her tongue than you are of the + demons." + </p> + <p> + "A woman never forgets, señor; if she once has something to throw up in a + man's teeth it comes out whenever she is angry." + </p> + <p> + "I suppose so, Dias. Bertie and I have had no experience that way, but we + will take your word for it." + </p> + <p> + The next morning they moved the mules and all their belongings to the + extreme end of the valley. Then they had an early breakfast. José took up + his axe and the others their arms; the former turned back for the point + where he could climb the hill. Dias and Harry took the heavy end of the + ladder, Bertie the light one, and they started up the ravine. Maria + followed with a store of bread that she had baked the day before. It was + hard work carrying the ladder up the rocks at the foot of the wall. When + it was securely fastened there, they mounted and dragged it up to them. + </p> + <p> + When they came out into the open space there was a pause. "It is, as you + said, a strange place, señor." + </p> + <p> + "It is, Dias, an extraordinary place; and if the people who built it + wanted, as I suppose they did, to avoid observation, they could not have + chosen a better. When those trees were growing it would have been + impossible to catch sight of them without coming down the ravine." + </p> + <p> + "It looks very still," Dias said in a doubtful voice. + </p> + <p> + "That is generally the case when a place is empty, Dias, Now let us go on + at once and get the ladder up." + </p> + <p> + As soon as the ladder was in position Harry mounted, closely followed by + Bertie. Dias hesitated; but a merry laugh from his wife settled the point, + and he followed with an expression of grave determination on his face. As + soon as he was on the ladder his wife followed him with a light step. + </p> + <p> + As Harry reached the top, he found that the sill of the window was two + feet and a half above the floor of the apartment. He stepped down and then + looked round. The room occupied the whole width of the house, and was some + twenty feet wide. Four rows of pillars ran across it, supporting the roof + above. The ends of the room were in semi-darkness. It was not above ten + feet in height. There were rude carvings on the pillars and the walls. + </p> + <p> + By the time he had made these observations the others had joined him. "I + see people there," Dias said, in an awed voice, pointing to one end of the + room. Harry dropped the barrel of his rifle into the palm of his left + hand. After gazing two seconds he placed it on his shoulder, saying, + "There are people, Dias, but they won't do us any harm;" and he walked in + that direction. Two figures lay on the ground; four others were in a + sitting position, close to each other, against the end wall. Some bows and + arrows and spears lay near them. All were dressed in a garment of rough + cloth. Harry walked up to one and touched it on the head with the muzzle + of his gun. As he did so it crumbled away; the bones rattled on the stone + floor as they fell. Donna Maria gave a little cry. + </p> + <p> + "They are dead!" she exclaimed. "They must have been dead years and years + ago." + </p> + <p> + "Two or three hundred, I should think. Your legends are evidently true, + Dias. There was a party left here to keep strangers from entering this + place. Now, before we go farther, let us think this out. We will sit down + on the ledge of the window. But before we do so, take a good look at their + arms and skulls, Dias. You have often been with travellers to the ruins; + let us hear what you say." + </p> + <p> + Dias, who was now assured that he had only to deal with human beings, + examined them carefully, looking at the ornaments that still hung round + their necks, and then said: "They are not the old people, señor; these + were Incas." + </p> + <p> + "That is an important point; now let us see how this is to be explained. + Now," he said, as they sat down, "it is clear that the Incas did know this + building. They may have discovered treasures here or they may not; but it + would certainly seem that they were as anxious as the Chimoos had been to + keep its existence a secret, and it is certain that they must have had + some interest in doing so. We have reason to believe that the Spaniards at + least did not know of it. There is no doubt whatever that these men were + not killed in fight; on the contrary, their sitting position proves that + they died quietly, and probably at the same time. We see no signs of food; + we may find some as we search the place. If we do not, we must take it + that they either died from an outbreak of some epidemic or from hunger. + And it is quite probable that the two skeletons on the steps were two of + their companions who were going out to seek for food, and that they fell + from weakness; one clearly died in the act of trying to lift the other. + What do you think of that, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I think that what you say is likely. But why should they have died from + hunger?" + </p> + <p> + "It is probable that others were in the secret, and were in the habit of + bringing provisions to them, and perhaps of relieving them at certain + periods. We know that there were fierce battles in the early times of the + Spaniards. In one of these battles the whole of those who were acquainted + with the secret may have fallen. Or it may have been earlier after the + conquest had been completed, when the Spaniards drove tens of thousands of + men to work as slaves in the mines. The people here may have remained at + their post, hoping for relief until it was too late. Two of the strongest + may have started at last, but have been too weak to climb the steps, and + died there. Their comrades may have never known their fate, but have sat + down to die here, as you see. I should think it probable that the second + of my suggestions is likely to be the right one, and that this did not + take place until perhaps a hundred years after the arrival of the + Spaniards, otherwise those legends of men who came near this place being + killed would never have been handed down. If all this is as I suggest, + either the Incas knew that the Chimoos had buried treasure here, or they + themselves buried some, although, as you say, there is no tradition of + treasure having been taken here. But it is possible that that treasure + ship, which undoubtedly sailed from some place along the coast and was + never again heard of, really came here; that her treasure was landed, and + the vessel then destroyed. In either case, there is strong reason for hope + that there is treasure somewhere in this castle if we can but find it." + </p> + <p> + "We will find it," Bertie said confidently. "What you say must be true. + These Indians would never have been fools enough to sit here and die + without some good reason for it. Well, I vote that before we do anything + else we clear these bones out." + </p> + <p> + "We can do that the first thing to-morrow morning, Bertie. We can't just + throw them out of the window. The bones are of men who died doing their + duty to their country. We will leave them as they are to-day, and + to-morrow we will bring up one of the big leather bags, place the bones in + it, and take them down into the valley and bury them." + </p> + <p> + "Then you won't sleep here to-night, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "No; I have not a shadow of superstition, but I do not think it would be + lively here with those things at the end of the room. Now, let us look + about a bit. + </p> + <p> + "This was evidently the great hall of the place; do you not think so, + Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor; the house gets narrower as it nears the sea. This is by far + the best lighted room on this side. No doubt the rooms on this floor were + the abode of the chief who built it, and his principal followers; the + others would be above." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will light the two torches. Yes, there is no doubt that this was + the room. You see there are brackets against all the pillars for holding + torches. Before we go farther we will see what they are made of." + </p> + <p> + He took his knife out of his pocket and went up to one of the brackets, + which consisted of bars of metal an inch and a half square and eighteen + inches long. They widened out at the end, and here was a round hole about + two inches in diameter, evidently intended to put the torch in. The metal + was black with age. He scraped a few inches off one of them with his + knife. "Silver!" he exclaimed. "It would have been better if they had been + gold. But as there are four on each pillar, and twelve pillars, they would + make a tidy weight. That is a good beginning, Bertie. If they are the same + in all the rooms there would be several tons of it." + </p> + <p> + There was but one door to the room; through this they passed. Dias, now + that there was some explanation for what he considered the work of the + demons, had a more assured air. One passage led straight on; two others + ran parallel to the wall of the room they had left. + </p> + <p> + "We will examine these first," Harry said. "It is likely enough they lead + to the stairs to the lower room. There must be two floors below us, one + above the level of the top of the tunnel, the other below that must be + divided in two by it." + </p> + <p> + As they advanced into the passage there was a strange and sudden clamour, + a roaring sound mingled with sharp shrieks and strange little piping + squeaks. Maria ran back with a shriek of alarm, and there was a strange + rush overhead. The torches were both extinguished, and Harry and his + brother discharged their rifles almost at the same moment. Dias burst into + a shout of laughter as they both dropped their weapons and swung their + double-barrelled guns forward. "What on earth is it, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "It is bats and birds, señor. I have seen them come out of caves that way + many times. I dare say the place is full of bats. The birds would only + come into rooms where there is some light." + </p> + <p> + Turning round they saw quite a cloud of bats flying out through the door. + </p> + <p> + "Confound it!" Harry said. "They have given me the worst fright I ever had + in my life." + </p> + <p> + They went back to the room, they had left. Both Harry and Bertie had lost + every tinge of colour from their faces. + </p> + <p> + "I am very glad, Harry," Bertie said, with an attempt at a laugh, "that + you were frightened. I was scared almost out of my life." + </p> + <p> + Maria had thrown herself down on her face. + </p> + <p> + "Ah, señors," Dias said triumphantly, "you thought they were demons!" + </p> + <p> + "I did not think they were demons, Dias, but what they were I could not + tell you. I never heard any such sound before. I am not ashamed to say + that I did feel badly frightened. Now, see to your wife, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "There is nothing to be afraid of, Maria. What are you lying there for?" + </p> + <p> + The woman raised herself slightly. "Are you alive?" she said in a dazed + way. + </p> + <p> + "Alive? of course I am! You don't suppose I am going to be frightened at a + lot of bats? There, look at them, they are still streaming out." + </p> + <p> + "It is all right, Maria," Harry said. "You have had a fright; and so have + Bertie and I, so you need not be ashamed of yourself. It is all very well + for Dias to laugh, but he says he has seen such things before." + </p> + <p> + "If you were afraid, señor, I need not be ashamed that I was; I really did + think it was the demons." + </p> + <p> + "There is no such thing, Maria; but it was as good an imitation of them as + you are ever likely to see." + </p> + <p> + "I was in a horrible funk, Maria," Bertie said, "and I am only just + getting over it; I feel I am quite as pale as you. What are you looking so + pleased about, Dias?" he asked almost angrily. + </p> + <p> + "I am pleased, señor, now I have got even with Maria. The first time she + says to me 'demons', I shall say to her 'bats'." + </p> + <p> + "Now, let us start again," Harry said as they all laughed. "But instead of + going down, we will go upstairs. I have not pulled myself quite together + yet, and I don't suppose you have." + </p> + <p> + "No, my knees are quite wobbling about, and if I saw anything, I certainly + could not aim straight just at present. And it's rum; we had the main-mast + struck by lightning off the Cape one voyage I made, and I did not feel a + bit like this." + </p> + <p> + "I dare say not, Bertie. We all feel brave in dangers that we are + accustomed to; it is what we don't know that frightens us. We will sit + here on the window-sill for another five minutes before we move again. + José, you have got some pulque in your gourd, I suppose?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Then we will all take a drink of it. I don't like the stuff, but just at + present I feel that it won't come amiss at all." + </p> + <p> + Some of the spirit was poured into a tin mug they had with them, and mixed + with water, with which they had filled their water-bottles from the stream + before starting. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0016" id="link2HCH0016"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVI — THE SEARCH BEGINS + </h2> + <p> + In a few minutes all were ready to go on again. Harry had asked Maria if + she would like to go down the ladder and wait till they returned. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, I should not like it at all. I don't care how full of bats the + rooms are, now that I know what they are. As for Dias, I have no doubt + that the first time he heard them he was just as frightened." + </p> + <p> + "No, I was not; but I dare say I should have been if the man I was with—I + was then only about José's age—had not told me that the cavern was + full of bats. There was a great storm coming on, and he proposed that we + should take shelter there. We brought the mules into the mouth of the + cave, and he said, 'Now, we will light a torch and go in a bit farther, + and then you will be astonished. It is a bat cavern, and I have no doubt + there are thousands of them here. They won't hurt us, though they may + knock out our torch, and the noise they make is enough to scare one out of + one's senses, if one does not know what it is.' Though I did know, I own I + was frightened a bit; but since then I have been into several such caves, + so I knew in a moment what it was. I ought to have warned the señors, for + an old house like this, where there is very little light, is just the + place for them." + </p> + <p> + "But there were birds too, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I expect they were nearer. Perhaps some of them were in the other + rooms, where they would be close to the openings. But they were probably + scared too by the noise of the bats, and as the windows behind were too + small for them all to fly out together, they made for the light instead." + </p> + <p> + "Well, now, let us start," Harry said, getting up. They again lit their + torches, and this time found everything perfectly quiet in the passage. + Two or three yards beyond the spot at which they had before arrived they + saw a staircase to the left. It was faintly lighted from above, and, + mounting it, they found themselves in a room extending over the whole + width and depth of the house. The roof at the eastern end was not + supported by pillars, but by walls three feet wide and seven or eight feet + apart. The first line of these was evidently over the wall of the room + they had left. There were four lines of similar supports erected, they had + no doubt, over the walls of rooms below. The light from the four windows + in front, and from an irregular opening at the other end some three feet + high and six inches wide, afforded sufficient light for them to move about + without difficulty. There were many signs of human habitation here. Along + the sides were the remains of mats, which had apparently divided spaces + six feet wide into small apartments. Turning these over they found many + trifles—arrow-heads, bead-necklaces, fragments of pots, and even a + child's doll. + </p> + <p> + "I expect this is the room where the married troops lived and slept," + Harry said; "there is not much to see here." + </p> + <p> + The two stories above were exactly similar, except that there were no + remains of dividing mats nor of female ornaments. They walked to the + narrow end. Here the opening for light was of a different shape from those + in the rooms below. It had apparently been originally of the same shape, + but had been altered. In the middle it was, like the others, three feet + high and six inches wide, but a foot from the bottom there was a wide cut, + a foot high and three feet wide. As they approached it Dias gave an + exclamation of surprise. Two skeletons lay below it. "They must have been + on watch here, señor, when they died," he said as they came up to them. + </p> + <p> + "It is a rum place to watch," Bertie said, "for you cannot see out." + </p> + <p> + "You are right, Bertie, it is a curious hole." + </p> + <p> + The wall was over two feet thick; all the other openings had been driven + straight through it, and, as they had noticed, were doubtless made in the + stones before they were placed there, for inside they were cleanly cut, + and it was only within three inches of the outer face that the edges had + been left rough. This opening was of quite a different character. It + sloped at a sharp angle, and no view of the open sea could be obtained, + but only one of the line of rocks at the foot of the cliffs. It was + roughly made, and by the marks of tools, probably of hardened copper, it + had evidently been cut from the inside. + </p> + <p> + Harry stood looking for some time. "I cannot understand their cutting the + hole like this. It could not be noticed from the sea that there was an + opening at all; that is plain enough. But why make the hole at all when + you can see nothing from it? And yet a watch has been placed here, while + there was none at the other places where they could make out any passing + ship." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps," Bertie said, "it was done in order that if from the other + places boats were seen approaching, they could chuck big stones down from + here and sink any boat that might row inside the rocks into the entrance + to the passage, which, as this is in the middle of the room, must be just + under us." + </p> + <p> + "In that case they would have kept a supply of big stones here. I have no + doubt whatever that it was made some time after the castle was built, and + I should say, judging by its unfinished state, the work was done in haste. + But what for, goodness only knows. Well now, having made no discoveries + whatever on the upper floor, we will go down. It is certain that there can + be no great treasure hidden under any of these floors, there is not depth + enough for hiding-places. I counted the steps as we came upstairs, and + there cannot be much more than two feet between the floor of one room and + the ceiling in the next. I fancy that this is of single stones, each the + flooring length of the space between the half-walls. You see that there is + a long beam of stone running on the top of the dividing wall, and the ends + of these stones appear to rest on it. It is below that we must look for + hiding-places." + </p> + <p> + They descended to the first floor. They found that the space behind the + great room was divided into a number of chambers. All of these, with the + exception of the small one on the sea-face, were necessarily in absolute + darkness, and in all were brackets for torches, similar to those in the + principal chamber. Bertie counted them, and found that, including those + first met with, they numbered one hundred and twenty-three. + </p> + <p> + "How much do you think they weigh apiece?" he asked Harry when the tour + was finished. + </p> + <p> + "I have not the slightest idea, Bertie. I should think about fifteen + pounds, but it may be five pounds less than that. They would certainly + give a very nasty knock on the head." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, I was not thinking of knocks on the head. If there are a hundred bars + at fifteen pounds apiece, it is a big amount of silver; if they are only + ten pounds each—and really I think that is nearer the mark—they + weigh a thousand pounds. What is silver worth a pound?" + </p> + <p> + "It varies. You can put it at five shillings an ounce; that would be three + pounds sterling for one of silver—three thousand pounds in a rough + calculation for the lot." + </p> + <p> + "Well, that is not a bad beginning, Harry; it would pay all the expenses + and leave a couple of thousand over." + </p> + <p> + Harry shrugged his shoulders. "A drop in the ocean as far as I am + concerned, Bertie. Still, it is a beginning; and you may be sure that they + did not take all this trouble to guard this castle for the sake of three + thousand pounds' worth of silver." + </p> + <p> + They now went down to the next floor. Here there were two staircases, and + the space was divided into two parts by a wall along the centre. There + were no openings whatever for light. One half had evidently been devoted + to arms. Here still lay hundreds of spear-shafts, tens of thousands of + arrows, piles of hide shields, and caps of the same material. + </p> + <p> + "This store must have been larger than was required for the garrison of + the place," Harry said, "it must have been a reserve for re-arming a whole + tribe." + </p> + <p> + Besides the arms there were great bales of rough cloth and piles of skins, + all in a marvellous state of preservation owing to the dryness of the air. + After thoroughly examining the room they went up the stairs leading into + it and descended those into the adjoining chamber. This was divided into + compartments by transverse walls four feet shorter than the width, thereby + leaving a passage through from end to end. Here in confusion—for the + most part turned inside out—were sacks of matting and bags of + leather. One of the compartments was filled with great jars arranged in + tiers. Some of the compartments were quite empty. + </p> + <p> + "I think, señor, that these were stores of loose grain, probably maize. I + do not see a single grain left." + </p> + <p> + They looked carefully round with the torches. "This carries out our idea, + Dias, that the people upstairs died of hunger. I have no doubt, as you + say, that the sacks did contain grain. If these had been cleared in the + ordinary way there would certainly remain a good deal loosely scattered + about. They might have been full or half-full at the time the place was + left as we found it. Possibly, instead of ten men, the garrison may have + been ten times as strong at first, but in the fifty or hundred years + before the last survivors died they may have dwindled to a tenth of that + number. However, it is plain that, as you say, the store of food was not + carried away, but was consumed to the last grain. In the same way you can + see, by the way the sacks and bags are tumbled about and turned inside + out, how careful was the search for any remnant that might have been + overlooked when they were first emptied. It all points to starvation." + </p> + <p> + Three of the largest divisions bore evident traces that at some time or + other, animals, probably llamas or vicuñas, had been closely penned there. + Another had been occupied by a store of hay, some of which still remained. + When they had thoroughly examined this room, Harry looked at his watch and + said, "It is late in the afternoon—our torches are nearly finished; + however, there is time for a casual look round at the cellars below. + To-morrow we will begin a regular search there." + </p> + <p> + They descended by the staircase to the basement. + </p> + <p> + "How narrow this place is!" Bertie exclaimed. "It is not much more than + half the width of the room above." + </p> + <p> + "Of course it is not; the two rooms above occupied the whole width of the + house, these only occupy the width between the passage and the rock-wall + on each side. You see, the tunnel is twelve feet wide, and we may take it + that these walls are at least three feet thick—it is not as if they + had been built of brick, or even of stones cut to shape. They knew nothing + of the arch, and, as you saw outside, this came up nearly to a point. The + stones were longer and longer with each course, each projecting over the + one below it, until, when they were within two feet of joining, a very + long slab was laid across them. The stones may be three feet wide at the + bottom and ten feet at the top, and you see the wall extends over here in + the same way—as of course it must have done, otherwise the whole + thing would have overbalanced and fallen in before that slab at the top + was added. So, you see, there is the width of the tunnel, twelve feet, and + the two walls, say six feet more, to be taken off the fifty feet. So the + cellars by the side of the passage can only be about sixteen feet and a + half at this end, which is what they seem to be, and will go away to + nothing at the other end, as we shall see presently." + </p> + <p> + The first thing they saw was a sunken tank in the floor. This was full of + water. It was about four feet square, and on sounding it with one of the + ramrods, they found it was about the same in depth, the water coming to + within a foot of the top. It was against the wall facing the ravine. + </p> + <p> + "This must have some connection with the stream. Otherwise it would have + been dry long ago." + </p> + <p> + "We did not see any hole when we went down the passage," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "No. Most likely a hole something like this was cut in the rock outside, + and a pipe driven to the bottom of this cistern. They would only have to + fill the one in the tunnel with cut blocks to within a foot of the + surface, and with smaller stones to the same level as the bed of the + stream; then the water in the cistern would always be level with that + outside. They put it in this end so as to be well out of reach of the salt + water farther in. They were no fools who built this place. However closely + they were besieged, and even if the enemy occupied the space in front of + the house, their water-supply was secure." + </p> + <p> + "But in time of floods, Harry, if the water rose a foot in the passage—and + we saw it did more than that—it would flood the whole of this + basement." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, Bertie; but you may be sure that there was some provision + against that. They would have some valve that they could shut, or possibly + there was a block of wood covered with leather that they could push into + the pipe at the bottom of this cistern." + </p> + <p> + Beyond a considerable store of firewood, in large and small blocks, + nothing could be seen in the chamber. + </p> + <p> + "I expect these two places were used as prisons," Harry said, "though in + case a very large force were assembled some may have slept here. At + ordinary times the upper rooms would be quite sufficient. But you see they + had to build the whole height of the rocky arch, and they wanted the + entrance to the place to be so far above the ground-level that it would be + extremely difficult for an enemy to climb into it. A hostile force could + only have come in at that entrance, and a small body of determined men + might have held it against a host. These lower chambers were simply + cellars; the store-rooms were above them, and the habitable part of the + castle. Now let us look at the chamber on the other side; no doubt we + shall find it just like this." + </p> + <p> + This proved to be the case. There were another cistern and more piles of + firewood, otherwise it was empty. After a short survey they returned to + the main chamber, bringing up with them two of the empty leather bags. In + these they placed the bones of the dead, the remains all crumbling when + touched, as the first skeleton had done. The bags were lowered to the + ground, and the four searchers descended and carried them to the mouth of + the ravine. In a spare bag which they brought with them they placed the + bones of the two skeletons on the steps, and then carried them all out to + the open valley. + </p> + <p> + "We will bury them when we move the camp down here to-morrow morning," + Harry said. "We forgot the two up at that window. That is no matter, we + can throw them out to-morrow; they will lie as well at the bottom of the + sea as in the earth here." + </p> + <p> + Not much was said as they returned to the castle. They had been a very + silent party all day. The gloom and darkness, the way in which their + voices echoed in the empty hall, had exercised a depressing effect on + them; and Donna Maria, generally the most talkative of the party, had not + quite recovered from the shock which the exit of the bats had given her. + It was not until she had cooked a meal, and they all sat down to it, that + they quite recovered their spirits. They had found José awaiting their + return. He had a blazing fire, having brought down as much firewood as he + could carry, and Dias had briefly told him the result of their + explorations. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Harry, what do you think altogether?" Bertie asked after the meal + was over. + </p> + <p> + "I think we ought to be very well satisfied," he replied. "Everything has + borne out the ideas we had. The castle may have been built as a fortress + by some great chief, certainly before the time of the Incas, or it may + have been used for a prison. The ornaments and things we found showed that + it was known to the Incas. They would have had no occasion to use it when + they were undisputed masters of the country, but when the troubles came + with the Spaniards a garrison was placed here, and possibly some of their + chiefs took refuge in the place. Then came the time when all opposition to + the invaders ceased, and only a small body of men were left here to guard + the secret, and the treasure if there were any. Generations may have + passed before the last of the garrison died of hunger, and probably all + others who were in the secret fell in some insurrection or died in the + mines. All this seems plain enough, except that possibly there was no + treasure. That left by the Chimoos may have been discovered by the Incas. + I should think it extremely likely that the ship Dias mentioned as setting + out with a large amount of treasure was intended to land its stores here. + </p> + <p> + "It may have done so, or it may have sunk at sea. I am inclined to think + that it was lost, because the traditions concerning these hidden treasures + seem to be extremely accurate; and yet, as Dias says, none tell of any + Inca treasure being concealed here. However, it is quite possible that the + treasure did come here and was landed, and that the ship was then broken + up, so that it might be supposed she was lost at sea, and that this was + kept so profound a secret by the men here, that the news was never + generally known even among the natives. So far our search to-day has been + successful, but I see that a hunt for the treasure will be a very + difficult one. Certainly in the upper chambers there doesn't appear any + possibility of such a hiding-place existing. The whole space is accounted + for. The walls are all of solid stone, and have no special thickness. If + the roofs had been arched there might be empty spaces on each side of the + spring of the arch, but they are supported by pillars or walls, with only + just space between the floors for the beams of solid stone. Of course it + is in the lowest room that one would expect to find hiding-places like + those we saw at Pachacamac." He paused. + </p> + <p> + "Well, why should they not be there, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Because, as we saw, the floor is at most twelve inches above the + water-level. How is it possible that they could have constructed chambers + below that level, that is in the bed of a torrent? It is probable that the + solid rock lies many feet below the bed of the stream. A portion of that + great arch must from time to time have fallen into it; and it may be that + the river once ran forty or fifty feet below its present level. In all the + places that we have seen these treasure chambers were formed in solid + adobe foundations, as the temples always stood on artificial terraces. + With all our appliances at the present time it would be next to impossible + to sink in a stratum of great rock fragments below the water level, and I + do not believe that the old people here could have done so even had it + been a solid rock. The difficulties of excavating chambers in it would + have been enormous. They could split rocks with the grain, and all the + stone walls we have seen were made of regular pieces, and evidently formed + of stone so split. They were able to give them a sort of facing with great + labour, but the tools they had were not made of material hard enough to + work in solid rock, and the labour of excavating such chambers would have + been stupendous. Therefore I am at a loss to imagine where any such + chambers can be in that castle." + </p> + <p> + Dias nodded gravely. He had been with travellers who had done a great deal + of excavation, and he was able to understand Harry's argument. Maria, who + was listening attentively, also understood it. José simply rolled + cigarettes and smoked them. It was a matter for his elders, and he did not + even try to follow what Harry was saying. There was some minutes' silence, + and then Bertie said, "But the floors are all even." + </p> + <p> + "What do you mean, Bertie?" Harry asked in a puzzled tone. + </p> + <p> + "I mean, Harry, that they run straight along. There is no dip in them." + </p> + <p> + "Of course there isn't. Who ever heard of building floors on the slope?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, that is what I mean. We know that the tunnel slopes down its own + height. It is twelve feet high at the entrance, and at the lower end it is + some inches below the level, so it falls twelve feet at least. At the end + where the cistern is, the floor of the basement is only a few inches above + the bottom of the passage; therefore at the other end it must be twelve + feet above the water-level." + </p> + <p> + "You are right, Bertie!" Harry exclaimed. "What a fool I was not to think + of it! There must be a space underneath it a hundred feet long, sloping + from nothing down to twelve feet. There is room for a dozen chambers such + as those we saw on each side of the tunnel. Well done, Bertie! you have + given me fresh hope. It would be a splendid hiding-place, for any + searchers who came down and saw the water in the cistern would believe at + once that, as neither the Chimoos nor the Incas could have known how to + build under water, there was no use in searching for hidden chambers under + this floor. You see, neither of them had any knowledge of cement or + mortar. All their bricks and stones are laid without anything of the sort; + and whatever amount of labour was available no chamber could be made under + water, for as fast as holes were dug the water would come in, and even if + they could line it with stone-work the water would penetrate through the + cracks. Now, Dias, that we see with certainty where we have to dig, we can + make our preparations. I will write down a list of the things we decided + the other day we should want:—Six kegs of powder, two hundred feet + of fuse, four boring-tools, six steel wedges, the smallest smith's fire + you can buy—for we shall have to sharpen the tools,—six + borers, a large bundle of torches, four sledge-hammers—we have + enough pickaxes and shovels,—and another fifty fathoms, that is a + hundred yards, of rope. I don't know anything else that we shall want in + the mining way. + </p> + <p> + "You and your wife had better settle what provisions you must get. We + shall certainly need a good supply of flour—a couple of sacks, I + should think—tea, coffee, and sugar, dried or salted meat. And you + might get a supply of smoked fish. I have no doubt that we shall catch + fresh fish here in the sea, but we shall all be too busy to spend much + time on that. You had better get three or four gallons of pulque; one + cannot be always drinking coffee. We have still got a good stock of whisky + and brandy. Your wife will certainly want a good supply of red pepper and + other things for her stews. It would not be a bad thing to have a couple + of crates of poultry. Don't pack them too closely, or half of them will be + smothered before you get them here. Dead meat would be of no use, for it + won't keep in this heat. We can turn them all out in the courtyard in + front of the castle, and they can pick up their living there among the + lower slopes of the cliffs. We can give them a few handfuls of grain a + day. Don't get too many cocks, and let the hens be young ones. They ought + to supply us with plenty of eggs and some broods of chickens. You must + calculate what the weight will be, and take the mules accordingly." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, señor. I need not be away more than three days at most. It is + only about twenty miles to Ancon." + </p> + <p> + "You might take the two llamas down with you and sell them there. They + have done good work, and I should not like to kill and eat them. So mind + you sell them to someone who wants them for carriage work. We shall not + require them any more for that purpose. Will you want to take José with + you?" + </p> + <p> + "I think not, señor, for I should say that four baggage mules will be + ample, and I can lead them myself; and certainly you will find José useful + here." + </p> + <p> + Dias and his wife then withdrew a short distance from the fire, and + engaged in an animated conversation as to the things she required. + </p> + <p> + "Don't stint matters," Harry said, raising his voice. "We may be here for + the next two or three months, and the less frequently you have to go down + to buy things the better. It would be easy to account for your first + purchases by saying that you were going on an expedition to the mountains, + but you could not go to the place with the same story again." + </p> + <p> + "There are other places I can go to, señor; but I will get a good store of + everything this time." + </p> + <p> + Dias started at daybreak with four mules and the two llamas. The others + rolled up the tent-beds and the remaining stores, loaded up the other + mules, and moved down to the mouth of the ravine. Here they pitched the + little tents again. + </p> + <p> + "They will form a central point for the mules to come to," Harry said. "We + will leave the sacks of maize here, but give the animals a good feed now. + They will be sure to keep close to the spot. All the other things we will + carry into the castle; but before we start we will bury these bags of + bones." + </p> + <p> + When this was done, and the saddles taken off and piled together against + the rocks, the other things were made up in portable packets, and they + started up the ravine. They made three journeys before everything was + brought to the foot of the ladder leading up to the window. Then the two + brothers mounted, and hauled the things up with a rope which José, who + remained below, fastened to them. When the last was up he went to the foot + of the rock and brought several armfuls of the wood he had thrown down on + the previous day. This was also hauled up. + </p> + <p> + "You had better fetch some more, José. We mean to keep a big fire burning + here night and day; it will make the place cheerful. I will have a fire + also burning where we are at work below. Now, señora, we will rig up some + blankets on a line between the pillars at the end of the room opposite to + that in which we found the skeletons, so as to make a special apartment + for you and Dias. We will spread our beds at night near the fire." + </p> + <p> + The screen was soon made. A cord was run from the wall to the pillar next + to it, some five feet above the floor, and three blankets were sufficient + to fill the space. + </p> + <p> + Harry was about to make another line from the pillar, when Maria said: + </p> + <p> + "I would rather not, señor; I am not a bit afraid. This screen is quite + large enough, and it will be more cheerful not to be shut up altogether, + as then, when I am lying down, I can see the reflection of the fire on the + walls, and it will be much more cheerful." + </p> + <p> + Then a blazing fire was lit. The wood was almost as dry as tinder, and + burnt without smoke. It was built almost touching the back wall, in which, + some five feet above the fire, Harry with a pick made a hole four inches + deep. + </p> + <p> + While he was doing this, José went down and cut a sapling four inches in + diameter, growing in a cleft on the rock, and from this cut off two + six-foot lengths and brought them up. One end of the thickest of these was + driven into the hole and tightly wedged in there, the other end was lashed + securely to an upright beam. + </p> + <p> + "There, Maria," he said when it was finished, "you will be able to hang + your pots and kettles from that at any height you like above the fire. + Now, you can set to work as soon as you like, to get breakfast for us. We + have been at work for four or five hours, and have good appetites." + </p> + <p> + "I have the cakes ready to bake, señor, and I sha'n't be long before I get + an olla ready for you." + </p> + <p> + "Well, José, what do you think of the place?" Harry asked. + </p> + <p> + "I should like it better if it were not so big," the lad said. "I shall + want a broom, señor, to sweep out the dust." + </p> + <p> + "It is three inches deep," Maria said. + </p> + <p> + "I should not bother about that, Maria; it would be a tremendous job to + sweep such a big room, and the dust is so fine that it would settle again + and cover everything. Besides, it will be a good deal softer to lay our + beds on than the stones would be, so I think you had better let it remain + as it is, especially as you are fond of going about without your shoes. I + think I will rig up a blanket against the doorway. It will make the place + look a good deal more snug, and will keep the bats from returning." + </p> + <p> + "I am not afraid of the bats, now I know what they are; but I should be + constantly expecting them to rush out again." + </p> + <p> + "I expect a good many went back last night," Harry said. "We won't put the + blankets up till after dark. They are sure to come out again; then, as + soon as they have gone, we will close it, and they won't be able to get in + when they come back before daybreak." + </p> + <p> + Harry's expectations were fulfilled. At dusk a stream of bats rushed out + again, but this time quite noiselessly. The rush lasted for three or four + minutes. As soon as they had gone, the blankets were hung up, and fastened + across the doorway. + </p> + <p> + "They will be puzzled when they come back." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor," Maria said; "but when they find that they can't get in here, + they will come in through the openings above." + </p> + <p> + "So they will; I did not think of that. But when they once find that they + cannot get out here in the evening, they will go out where they came in, + and we shall have no more trouble with them. I don't know whether they are + good to eat?" + </p> + <p> + Maria gave a little cry of horror. + </p> + <p> + "Oh, señor! I could not eat such horrible things!" + </p> + <p> + "Their appearance is against them, Maria; but when people eat alligators, + frogs, snakes, and even rats, I don't see why a bat should be bad. + However, we won't touch them unless we are threatened by starvation." + </p> + <p> + "I should indeed be starving before I could touch bats' flesh, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Well," Harry said, "if people eat monkeys, rats, and squirrels—and + it seems to me that a bat is something of a mixture of the three—one + might certainly eat bats, and if we are driven to it I should not mind + trying; but I promise you that I won't ask you to cook them." + </p> + <p> + They chatted for another hour, and then Maria went off to her corner. The + brothers spread their beds by the fire, and José had his blanket and + poncho, and it was arranged that any of them who woke should put fresh + logs on the fire. + </p> + <p> + They were all roused just before dawn by a squeaking and twittering noise. + They threw on fresh logs, and as these blazed up they could see a cloud of + bats flying overhead. They kept on going to the doorway, and when they + found they could not get through they retired with angry squeaks. The + light was gradually breaking, and in a few minutes all had flown out + through the opening. Harry and his brother followed them, and could see + them flitting about the upper windows. Presently, as if by a common + impulse, they poured in through the various openings. + </p> + <p> + "I don't suppose we shall see any more of them," Harry said, "and I own + that I shall be glad. There is something very weird in their noiseless + flitting about, and in the shadows the fire casts on the ceiling." + </p> + <p> + "They are a great deal larger than any bats I have seen," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "I have seen as large, or larger, at Bombay and some of the towns on the + coast." + </p> + <p> + "They bite people's toes when they are asleep, don't they?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, the great vampire bat does, but I have never heard of any others + doing so. They live on insects, and some of them are, I believe, + vegetarian." + </p> + <p> + "Are vampire bats found here?" + </p> + <p> + "I do not think so; I fancy that they inhabit Java and other islands in + the Malay Archipelago. However, they are certainly rare, wherever they + come from, and you can dismiss them altogether from your mind." + </p> + <p> + "I was glad when I heard your voices, señors," Maria said when she + appeared a quarter of an hour later. "I knew they would not hurt me; but I + was horribly frightened, and wrapped myself up in my blanket and lay there + till I heard you talking, and I heard the logs thrown on the fire; then I + felt that it was all right." + </p> + <p> + "I don't suppose they will come again, Maria." + </p> + <p> + After drinking a cup of coffee, with a small piece of maize cake, Bertie + said: + </p> + <p> + "What is the programme for to-day?" + </p> + <p> + "We can't do much till Dias comes back. We may as well go down and have a + look at the lower rooms. I don't think there is much dust on the floor + there, but while José is away looking after the mules we will cut enough + bushes to make a couple of brooms. We shall want the place swept as clean + as possible, so that we can look about, but I don't think there is the + least chance of our being able to move the stones. Before we do anything + we will go down to the pool and have a swim, and dive out through the + entrance and have a look at those rocks." + </p> + <p> + "That is right," Bertie said. "I was longing for one yesterday morning, + but of course the first thing to be done was to examine this place." + </p> + <p> + "Would it be safe for me to bathe, señor?" + </p> + <p> + "Quite safe, Maria; the slope is very gradual, and you need have no fear + of getting out of your depth suddenly. We will be off at once, Bertie." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0017" id="link2HCH0017"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVII — AT WORK + </h2> + <p> + Harry and his brother went to the edge of the pool, where they undressed + and waded out. They found that the bottom of the passage sloped more + gradually at the edge of the water than it did higher up, and they were + able to walk out till they came to the point where the roof dipped into + the water. They dived, and in a few strokes came up beyond the roof. + </p> + <p> + "This is glorious!" Bertie said. "We have often bathed in pools, but this + is a different thing altogether. It is more than a year since we had our + last dip in the sea, the day we arrived at Callao." + </p> + <p> + Although there was little or no wind, the rollers were breaking on the + line of rocks outside, pouring over the lower points in volumes of foam, + and coming in broken waves up the passage. + </p> + <p> + "We mustn't go beyond the point, Bertie, or we may be dashed against the + foot of the cliff. We will climb up that rock to the left; it is not too + steep, and I think we can manage it. From there we shall get a good view + of this side of the house and of the situation in general." + </p> + <p> + It required considerable care to climb the rocks, and more than once they + hurt their feet on sharp projections. The top of the rock, however, was + smooth by the action of time and sea, and they were able to sit down on it + in comfort. + </p> + <p> + "The castle is just as you described it, Bertie; and certainly no one + sailing past, however close he came outside these rocks, would be able to + detect it. No doubt the stone of which it is built is the same as that of + the cliffs. Most likely it was taken from the ravine where the passage now + is, and had fallen from the arch above. It might have been more noticeable + at first, but now it is weathered into exactly the same tint as the + cliffs. The openings are very dodgily placed, and a stranger would not + dream that they went many inches in. Now, from where we stand we can look + up into that curious opening on the top story. I have been puzzling over + that ever since I saw it, but can't think of any possible reason for its + having been cut like that, except to enable them to throw stones on to any + boat that came into this passage behind the rocks; and yet that can hardly + have been the case, for, as I remarked, there are no stones piled up + there. Certainly they had a very large number of arrows, but stones would + be very much more useful than arrows against a boat almost under their + feet. However, that does not concern us now. This line of rocks must + greatly aid in hiding the house from the sea. They are higher than you + thought they were, looking down at them from above. We are quite thirty + feet above the water, and at two or three points they are at least ten or + twelve feet higher. Of course a short way out no one would be able to see + that they were detached from the cliff, or that there was any passage + whatever behind them. + </p> + <p> + "Besides, they break the force of the waves. If it was not for them it + would be impossible for any boat to come up close to the face of the + house, and a heavy storm might even break down the wall altogether. A + tremendous sea would roll in here in a westerly gale; and if it hadn't + been for these rocks it would have been necessary to build the lower part + of the house absolutely solid to resist the sea. It is possible that the + rocks were higher than they now are when the place was first constructed, + in which case the house might have been almost entirely hidden from sight. + Well, we may as well go back again, Bertie; we know all there is to be + known about this side." + </p> + <p> + They swam back into the tunnel, dressed, and went out. + </p> + <p> + "We have come out, Maria," Bertie called. "The coast is clear for you. The + water is not so deep as we thought it was, and you can walk out to the + point where the roof comes down on to the water without getting out of + your depth." + </p> + <p> + It did not take them long to cut a number of switches to serve as brooms, + and a couple of handles. They carried them up into the house, and lashed + the switches firmly on to the handles. The work was rough, but the brooms + when completed were large, and, although not strong enough for heavy work, + would do well to sweep aside the thin layer of almost impalpable dust on + the floor below. + </p> + <p> + "Shall we take wood down there, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "No; I think a fire would be a drawback rather than an assistance. It + would be very valuable if we were working at one spot, but it could give + no general light in a place a hundred feet long. We will take a torch + down, and hold it and sweep by turns. We shall only want, to begin with, + to make a clear path a couple of feet wide down the middle. Of course + later on we shall clear it all. That will be sufficient to enable us to + see how the floor is constructed, whether with big blocks or small ones, + how closely they are fitted together, and so on. It is certainly unlikely + that we shall find any indication as to where chambers exist." + </p> + <p> + It took but a very short time to clear the path; the dust was so light + that one sweep of the broom cleared it away. When they got to the farther + end they returned to examine the floor. For four or five feet from the + cistern the rock had been evidently untouched, except to cut off any + projecting points. Then there was a clear line running across the path. + Bertie held the torch down close to it. Harry knelt down and examined it. + </p> + <p> + "This is a clean cut, Bertie. It is evidently solid above this, but the + stone is not quite the same colour on each side of it, and it looks as if + they had cut away the rock here and begun to build so as to keep the floor + level. The cut may be six inches deep and it may be a foot, that doesn't + matter. The face of this stone is very smooth, but it is not cut; it is, I + think, the face of the natural fracture. Move the torch along and let us + see where the next join is. Ah, here it is!" + </p> + <p> + The slab was four feet across. + </p> + <p> + "You had better sweep the dust off both ways, Bertie, so that we may see + what size it is." + </p> + <p> + It was, they found, about eight feet long. + </p> + <p> + "It has straight edges, Harry, almost as straight as if it had been sawn." + </p> + <p> + "Very likely it was sawn, Bertie; They could have had no tools that would + cut a hard stone like this regularly, but as they were certainly clever + builders they must have employed some means to do it. Possibly they used a + saw without teeth, for however much they might have hardened the copper, + the teeth could not have stood, but if they had a hard copper band fixed + like the saw some masons use, and kept the stone moistened with fine sand, + they might have cut into it. Of course it would have been a slow process; + but they would not have needed to go far into the stone, for when they got + down two or three inches they might have broken it through by dropping a + heavy weight on the end. It would not have mattered if the fracture had + not been straight below the cut, for only on the surface would they have + wanted to fit accurately to the next stone. In another way they might have + got a straight edge, that is, by driving very dry wedges into the cut made + by the saw, and then moistening them. I know that great stones can be + split in that way. They may have used both methods. However, it doesn't + matter to us much how they did it. It is clear that they could in some way + or other cut stones. As they took the trouble to do so here, we may + conclude that they were anxious to have a smooth floor that would be + extremely difficult to get up. + </p> + <p> + "They would never have taken all this trouble if they had merely been + making a floor for a cellar. For that purpose it would only have been + necessary to throw rocks and stones of all sizes into the vacant space + below, and when it was nearly full, to level it with small stones and + sand. That they chose to undertake such tremendous labour as the making of + so regular a floor as this must have been, shows that they had some very + strong motive for doing so." + </p> + <p> + Going carefully along the track they had cleared, they found that the + stones were of different sizes; some were but two feet wide, others as + much as ten, but all fitted so closely together that it was difficult to + see the joints. + </p> + <p> + "It is going to be a hard job to get these out, Bertie," Harry said, when + they had completed their examination, "and it is lucky for us that the + room gradually narrows from sixteen feet wide to two at the other end, and + when we stepped it we made it eighty feet long. We need not take up the + stones near the rock wall, for the ravine would naturally narrow as it + went lower, and the depth would be greatest by the side of the wall of the + tunnel." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we shall soon blow up the stones when we have got the powder." + </p> + <p> + "I hope so, Bertie; but I see that we shall have difficulty unless these + top stones are extraordinarily thick." + </p> + <p> + Bertie looked surprised. "Why, I should have thought the thicker they were + the more difficult to break up." + </p> + <p> + "Beyond a certain point that would be so. But suppose they are six inches + thick, you may take it for granted that underneath there will be rubble, + loose stuff, except where any chambers may be built. If we were to bore a + hole through this top layer the powder, instead of splitting the stones + up, would expend its force among the loose stuff beneath it; and besides, + instead of remaining in its place, it might get scattered, and we would + then get no explosion at all." + </p> + <p> + "Then we should only have to make the hole four inches deep, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "As a result of which there would only be two inches of tamping over the + powder, and this would blow right out, as if from a little mortar, and + would have no effect whatever upon the stone. I have no doubt that we + shall find some way to get over these difficulties, but it is evident that + the work will not be all clear sailing." + </p> + <p> + "Of course we shall manage it somehow, Harry, even if we have to smash up + all the stones with the sledge-hammers Dias will bring us." + </p> + <p> + "Is breakfast nearly ready, señora? That swim in the sea has given us a + prodigious appetite. Did you enjoy it?" + </p> + <p> + Maria nodded. + </p> + <p> + "It is very nice, señor; but I should have liked it better if the water + had not been so blue. It seems so strange bathing in blue water." + </p> + <p> + "You will soon get accustomed to it," Bertie laughed. "There are no pools + except that one two miles up the valley. Besides, it is much nicer to have + a great bathing chamber all to yourself. Here comes José!" + </p> + <p> + "Well, José, are the mules all right?" he shouted. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, but I had difficulty in catching them. They had evidently been + frightened by something, and were three miles up the valley with their + coats all staring. It must have been either a puma or a jaguar. Of course + they must have got wind of him in time; but as, fortunately, they were not + tethered, they were able to get away from him." + </p> + <p> + "I should think he must be up somewhere among the bushes, José," Harry + said. "We had better go down tonight and see if he returns again. We shall + be losing some of the mules if we don't put a stop to his marauding. + Besides, it will be very dangerous for you, José, cutting the wood up + there, if he is lurking somewhere. It is fortunate that you escaped + yesterday." + </p> + <p> + "I expect he was on the other side of the ravine, señor; and even if he + had not been, the sound of the chopping would have scared him. They will + not often attack in the daytime." + </p> + <p> + When they had finished their breakfast José asked what he should do next. + </p> + <p> + "There is nothing else to do, so it would be as well to take our pickaxes + and get some of those brackets out of the walls. We will begin with the + other rooms of this floor and leave these here till the last." + </p> + <p> + "I will come and hold a torch for you, señors," Maria said. "I like to be + doing something. I will wash up first, and then I shall have nothing to do + till it is time to get ready for dinner. Now I know there is a savage + beast about I should not like to go down the ladder." + </p> + <p> + "There is very little chance of his coming down the rocks," Harry said. + "He is more likely to be lying somewhere on the other side watching the + mules." + </p> + <p> + No move was made until the woman was ready to start. Then they lit two + torches. She took one and Bertie the other, while José and Harry took two + picks. It was hard work, for the brackets were driven far into the pillars + and walls. It was necessary to knock away the stones round them to a depth + of two or three inches before they could be got out. They worked one at + each side of a bracket, relieving each other by turns, and after four + hours' work only eighteen brackets had been got out. As far as they could + tell by lifting them, the weight was somewhat greater than they had at + first supposed. Harry could hold one out in each hand for a minute and a + half, Bertie and José for a little over half a minute, and they agreed + that they must be about twenty pounds each. + </p> + <p> + By this time their shoulders ached, and it was agreed that they had done a + good day's work. For the rest of the day they did nothing but sit on the + sill of the window and smoke quietly. The next day's work was similar, and + twenty more brackets were got out. Late in the afternoon they saw Dias + coming down the steps, and at once went down the ladder to meet him. + </p> + <p> + "Have you got everything, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I think so, señor, and I can tell you that the mules have had a pretty + heavy load to bring back." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will go with you at once, Dias, and bring some of the things up. + I expect you have had nothing to eat since the morning. Before you do + anything else you had better go in. Your wife has been keeping a dish hot + for you, as she did not know when you might arrive." + </p> + <p> + "I shall not be long before I come and help you, señor. I have unsaddled + the mules and turned them out to graze." + </p> + <p> + "It is just as well, Dias, for there is a beast somewhere about that gave + them a fright last night. We will get all the eatables up to-night, the + powder and drills and hammers we can very well leave till to-morrow + morning." + </p> + <p> + It took them four trips to bring the provisions over, for it required two + of them to carry each sack of flour, and indeed all had to give their aid + in getting them up the rocky slope at the foot of the wall. + </p> + <p> + "No one seemed to think it unusual, your taking so large a load, I hope, + Dias?" Harry said as they sat down to their evening meal. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor. The man I bought the powder of was a little surprised at the + amount I wanted; but I said that I might be absent many weeks in the + mountains, and might want to drive a level in any lode that I might + discover. I led him to believe that I had seen a spot in the mountains + that gave good indications, and that two of my comrades were waiting there + for my return to begin work at it. I sold the llamas to a man who carries + goods from Ancon up to Canta, and got the same price that you gave for + them." + </p> + <p> + Harry then told him the work on which he had been engaged since he had + been away. + </p> + <p> + "Of course there is no hurry about the brackets, but as we could do + nothing else without the powder and drills, it was just as well to get + them out, as otherwise we might have been delayed when we had done our + other work. We think that they weigh twenty pounds each, so that + altogether they will be worth nearly four thousand pounds. Not a bad + start. I am afraid we sha'n't make such quick work down below." + </p> + <p> + "We shall see," Dias said cheerfully, for now that his fear of the demons + had passed he was as eager as Harry himself to begin the search for the + treasure. + </p> + <p> + "Has Maria seen any more bats?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, she has seen some more bats," his wife said, "but no demons. Dias, + what do you think? Don Harry suggested that we might eat the bats." + </p> + <p> + "I have heard of their being eaten," Dias said, "and a man who ate them + raw told me that he had never enjoyed anything more. But I should not like + to try it myself, unless I were driven to it as he was." + </p> + <p> + "How was that, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "He was a muleteer, señor, and was up in the mountains. He had a cargo of + silver on his mule, and during the day he had seen some men who he doubted + not were brigands on the top of the ravine he passed through. He knew of a + cavern where he had once taken refuge with the animals during a storm. It + lay on the hillside some twenty or thirty yards away from the road. The + entrance was hidden by bushes, and he had first noticed it by seeing a + bear come out as he was passing along. He had his pistols, and thought + that it was better to risk meeting a bear than a brigand. He arrived + opposite the cave just as it became dark, and at once led the mules up + there. He first lighted a torch—the muleteers always carry these + with them—and then went in with his pistols ready, but there were no + signs of a bear anywhere near the entrance. + </p> + <p> + "He drove the mules in and put out his torch. The entrance had been only + wide enough for the laden animals to pass, but it widened out a great deal + inside. He took off the loads, piled them up in the narrow part to make a + barricade, and then sat down at the entrance and listened. He soon heard + five or six men come down the road talking. They were walking fast, and + one was saying that he could not be more than half a mile ahead, and that + they should soon catch him. When they had gone, he went some distance in + the cave and relighted his torch. He went on and on. The cave was a very + large one, and when he had gone, as he thought, four or five hundred + yards, it branched off into three. He took the middle one, and followed it + for a long way. At last it opened into a large chamber from which there + were several passages. Here he found a large number of things that had + evidently been stolen from muleteers. There were at least a dozen mule + loads of silver; goods of all kinds that had been brought up from the + coast; the ashes of fires, and a great many bones and skins of llamas, and + some sacks of flour. + </p> + <p> + "He thought he would now return to the mules; but apparently he entered + the wrong passage, for he went on till he felt sure he ought to be in the + chamber where he had left the animals, and he was turning to go back when + he tripped over a stone and fell, and his torch went out. Then he felt in + his pocket for his box of matches, and to his horror found that it had + gone. It must have dropped out when he was examining the passages. He did + not think much of it at first, but he had passed several openings on his + way, and in the dark he probably turned down one of these. At any rate he + lost his way somehow, and wandered about, he thinks, for hours; but it + might have been much less, for he told me that he quite lost his head. At + last he came out into a place where he could only feel the rock on one + side of him, and knew that he must be in a large chamber. + </p> + <p> + "Looking up he saw, to his joy, a faint light, and moving a little, caught + sight of a star. He was utterly worn out, and threw himself down. He was + awakened by a strange rustling sound, and looking up saw that daylight was + breaking, and that a stream of bats was pouring in through a hole, which + was about three feet wide. He made several efforts to climb up to it, but + failed. The bats hung thickly from every projecting point in the rocks. He + hurt himself badly in one of the attempts to get up, and twisted his foot. + All day he lay there. Then the idea struck him that he would kill a bat, + cut it open, and use it as a poultice to his foot. The creatures did not + move when he touched them, and he cut off the head of one of them and + split it open. He did this three or four times during the day, and felt + that the application was easing the pain of his ankle. + </p> + <p> + "When it became dusk the bats flew out again, and he knew his only chance + was to keep his ankle perfectly rested. In the morning he killed some more + bats. He was by this time tortured with thirst, and sucked the blood of + one of them, and in the afternoon ate one raw. Another night passed, and + in the morning he felt so much better that he could make another trial. He + ate another bat to give him strength, and in the middle of the day made a + fresh attempt. He had while lying there carefully examined the wall of + rock, at the top of which was the opening, and had made up his mind at + what point would be best to try. This time he succeeded. He made his way + down the hillside, and found that he was a quarter of a mile higher up the + pass than the spot at which he had left the mules. He hobbled down, and to + his delight found his animals still in the cavern. + </p> + <p> + "He had when he first got there opened their sack of grain in order to + ensure their keeping quiet. There was still some remaining at the bottom. + He lost no time in loading them and leading them out, and made his way + down the pass without seeing anything of the robbers. Afterwards he went + back there with a good supply of torches, found his way to the cave, and + brought down two mule-loads of silver. Gradually he brought the rest of + the goods down, and today he is a rich man." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I think under those circumstances, Dias, I would have eaten bats + myself. It was certainly a clever idea of his to convert them into + poultices, though the general opinion is that cold bandages are the best + for a sprained ankle." + </p> + <p> + Then they discussed their plans for the next day. "I know nothing about + blasting, señor. You give me instructions, and I will do my best to carry + them out; but it is useless for me to talk of what I know nothing about." + </p> + <p> + "There is a lot of common sense in that, and yet in every work, Dias, + sometimes while a skilled man is puzzling how to do a thing a looker-on + will suggest a satisfactory plan. That treasure has been buried there I + have no doubt whatever. They would never have gone to the labour of paving + those cellars as carefully as they have done unless for some special + purpose. The floor was undoubtedly made when the house was built, and if + we find treasure-chambers there they will be those of the old people. Of + course they may have been discovered by the Incas, and when they in turn + wanted to bury treasure this place might occur to them as being + particularly well fitted to escape search by Spaniards. However, to-morrow + we shall learn something more about them. The first thing to do in the + morning, when we have brought up the rest of the goods, is to sweep the + floors of those chambers carefully. When we have done that we will + determine where to set to work." + </p> + <p> + Two trips brought up the powder and instruments. + </p> + <p> + "We will take one of the kegs of powder down with us," said Harry, "and + leave the other five in the empty room behind this. It is just as well not + to have them in this room; the sparks fly about, and some things might + catch fire. I don't think there is any real danger, but, at the same time, + it is best to be on the safe side." + </p> + <p> + "There are a dozen pounds of candles in this bundle, señor. You did not + tell me to get them, but I thought they might be useful." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Dias! they certainly will be useful. What are they?—tallow?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Then before we go down we will get a couple of pieces of flat wood, and + drive a peg into each, sharpened at the upper end. Candles stuck on these + will stand upright, and we can put them down close to where we are + working. They will give a better light than a torch, and leave us all free + to use the tools. Did you think of buying some more tinder?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, I have five boxes, and half a dozen more flints." + </p> + <p> + They carried the keg of powder, the sledges, drills, and wedges + downstairs, and then Dias and José set to work to sweep out the two + chambers. The work was easy, but they were obliged to stop several times, + being almost choked with the light dust. Harry and Bertie offered to take + their turn, but the others would not hear of it, and they were glad to go + up to what they called their drawing-room until the work was done and the + dust had settled a little. Then they examined the pavement carefully with + their torches. They had hoped that they might find either copper rings, or + at least holes where rings had been fastened, but there were no signs + whatever of such things in either of the chambers. + </p> + <p> + "We will begin to work half-way down," Harry said. "Of course the treasure + may lie near the cistern end, but the depth below the floor would be very + shallow there. More likely the chambers would be at the deep end. If we + begin in the middle we may be pretty sure that we have not passed them. We + will begin rather nearer the passage wall than the other, as the depth + there will be greater. It does not matter which stone we take, one is as + likely as another. Step ten paces from the cistern, Bertie, and the stone + you stop on we will try first." + </p> + <p> + When Bertie came to a stand-still they carefully examined the pavement. + "You are standing on one of the cracks, Bertie; I will stay there while + you all bring the tools along." + </p> + <p> + "Shall I open the powder?" Bertie asked. + </p> + <p> + "No. It is no good doing that until we have quite decided what we are + going to do. The wedges certainly won't go into this crack. I think our + best plan will be to sink a bore-hole about two inches from the crack. We + will drive it in in a slanting direction towards the edge, and in that way + it will have more chance of blowing a piece out. First of all, we must + make a slight indentation with a pick, otherwise we sha'n't get the bore + to work. I will begin." + </p> + <p> + He took a pick and struck several blows. + </p> + <p> + "It is very hard stone," he said. "I have scarcely made a mark upon it." + </p> + <p> + He worked for some time, and then let Bertie take the pick. The lad struck + a blow with all his strength, and then dropped the pick with a loud cry, + wringing his hands as he did so. + </p> + <p> + "You have jarred your hands, Bertie; you should not hold the haft so + tightly." + </p> + <p> + "It did sting!" Bertie said. "I feel as if I had taken hold of a red-hot + poker. It has jarred my arm up to the shoulder; I can't go on at present." + </p> + <p> + "You try, Dias." + </p> + <p> + Dias went more carefully to work, knelt down on one knee, and proceeded to + give a number of what seemed light blows. + </p> + <p> + "That is better than I did, Dias. The stone is crumbling into dust, and we + shall be able to use the borer in a short time. Perhaps it will be better + after all to drive the hole down straight. It will be easier to begin + with; when we see how thick the stone is we shall know better how to + proceed." + </p> + <p> + In ten minutes Dias had made a hole a quarter of an inch deep. + </p> + <p> + "Now, give me one of the borers—that one about two and a half feet + long. I will hold it, and you strike to begin with, Dias, only mind my + fingers. Keep your eye fixed on the top of the borer, and take one or two + gentle strokes to begin with; then, when you know the distance you have to + stand from it, do your best. You needn't really be afraid of striking my + fingers. I shall hold the drill at least a foot from the top." + </p> + <p> + Dias began very carefully, gradually adding to the strength of the blows + as he got the right distance, and was soon striking hard. After each blow + Harry turned the borer a slight distance round. When he heard the native's + breath coming fast he told José to take a turn. The lad was nervous; the + first blow he struck only grazed the top of the borer, and narrowly missed + Harry's fingers. José dropped the sledge. "I can't do it, señor; I am + afraid of hitting your fingers. I will sit down and hold it; it does not + matter if you hit me." + </p> + <p> + "It would matter a good deal, José. No, no; you have got to learn." + </p> + <p> + "Would it not be well, señor," Dias said, "to take the borers and three + hammers outside, and try them in soft ground? We could work them there + till we all got accustomed always to hit them fair. There would be no + occasion for them to be held, and we should get confident. I could have + hit twice as hard as I did, if I hadn't been afraid of missing it." + </p> + <p> + "I think that is a very good plan, Dias. The loss of a day or two will + make no difference. We shall make up for it afterwards." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly the drills and hammers were all taken up, and they were soon + at work. Two or three gentle taps were given to the borers, to make them + stand upright, and then all four began work. At first they often either + missed the heads of the borers or struck them unevenly. + </p> + <p> + "It is well, Dias, that we carried out your suggestion, as I see I should + have had an uncommonly good chance of getting my fingers smashed, or a + wrist broken. I have missed as often as any of you." + </p> + <p> + They stopped frequently for breath, and at the end of an hour were glad to + lay down their hammers. Dias was comparatively fresh; his practice as a + woodsman now did him good service. + </p> + <p> + "I should have thought from the number of trees that I have helped to cut + down," Bertie said, "that I could hit pretty hard, but this is a great + deal stiffer work. I should say that this hammer is at least twice the + weight of the axe, and it is the lightest of the four. I ache a good deal + worse than I did when I first chopped that tree down." + </p> + <p> + "So do I, Bertie. We will stick at this till we get accustomed to the + work. By doing so we shall gain strength as well as skill." + </p> + <p> + "I will get some grease, señor, from Maria, and then I will rub your + shoulders, and arms; that will do you a great deal of good." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Dias! It would be a good plan." + </p> + <p> + Dias did this to José as well as to the brothers, and then José in turn + rubbed him. + </p> + <p> + They waited half an hour, and then Harry said: "Let us have another + spell." This time a quarter of an hour sufficed. "It is of no use, Harry; + I can't go on any longer," Bertie said. "I feel as if my shoulders were + broken." + </p> + <p> + "I am beginning to feel the same, Bertie. However, we are all hitting + straighter now. We will go up into the shade and take it quietly for two + or three hours; then we will have a spell again." + </p> + <p> + However, after the rest, they all agreed that it would be useless to try + again, for they could not lift their arms over their heads without feeling + acute pain. Three days were spent at this exercise, and at the end of that + time they had gained confidence, and the heads of the drills were no + longer missed. + </p> + <p> + After the first day they only worked for a quarter of an hour at a time, + taking an hour's rest. The pain in their arms had begun to abate. On the + following day they practised striking alternately, three standing round + one borer. They found this at first awkward, but by the end of the day + they were able to strike in regular order, the blows falling faster after + each other on to the drill. + </p> + <p> + "I think we shall do now," said Bertie. "No doubt we shall hit harder with + a fortnight's practice, and shall be able to keep it up longer. However, I + think that even now we have sufficient confidence in striking to be able + to hold the borer without any fear of an accident." + </p> + <p> + The next day they began work early in the cellar. José volunteered to take + the first turn to hold the drill. + </p> + <p> + "You understand, José, you must turn it round a little after each stroke, + and in that way it will cut the hole regularly." + </p> + <p> + Harry took his place on one side of José, who sat with a leg on each side + of the drill. Dias stood facing Harry, Bertie behind José holding the + torch so that its light fell strongly on the head of the drill. At first + the two men struck gently, but gradually, as they grew confident, + increased the weight of their strokes until they were hitting with their + full power. After ten minutes they stopped. "Let us look at the hole," + Harry said. "How far has it got down?" + </p> + <p> + José moved his position and Harry examined the hole. "About an eighth of + an inch," he said. "Let us scrape the dust out of it." + </p> + <p> + "Shall we take a spell now, Harry?" Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "No, we will wait five minutes and then go on again, and after that we + will change places with you, relieving each other every twenty minutes." + </p> + <p> + The work went on, and at the end of two hours the hole was three inches + deep. Another hour and a half and the drill suddenly went down. + </p> + <p> + "We are through it," Bertie said, "and I am not sorry." + </p> + <p> + "Now I will lift the drill up gently, Bertie; do you kneel down, and when + I stop, take hold of it close to the floor, so that we may see the + thickness of the stone." + </p> + <p> + "Five inches," he said as he measured it. "Now put on a little grease, + Dias. I will lower it again, and we shall be perhaps able then to get some + idea of what is underneath." + </p> + <p> + He lowered the drill and turned it round two or three times, and then + carefully raised it. Some sand and little stones were sticking to it. + </p> + <p> + "Sand and gravel," he said. "That settles that point. Now we have done a + good morning's work, and let us go up and have breakfast." + </p> + <p> + Maria looked enquiringly at them. "I was just coming down for you. Well, + what have you done?" + </p> + <p> + "We have drilled one hole, Maria, and none of us have got our fingers + smashed, so I think we have every reason to be satisfied with our first + experience at the work." + </p> + <p> + As they breakfasted they talked matters over. Harry said that he was + certain that the thickness of the stone was not sufficient for them to + break it up by blasting. "We shall have to try some other plan. It is + equally certain that we cannot smash the stone with the sledge-hammers, + and I don't think that the wedges would break it. Of course if we got one + stone out it would be comparatively easy to lift the next, as we could put + the crowbars under it. If we can do it in no other way, we must drill a + line of holes close to each other right across the stone, and we might + then break off the piece between them and the crack and get our crowbars + under the slab. It might be worth while to drill holes a foot apart, from + the point where we have begun to the other end of the room. Of course if + we found that gravel and stones were everywhere under the slabs we should + learn nothing; but the opening to the chambers is probably covered by + another stone, and if we found that, we could put in one or two more holes + so as to be sure that it was flat, in which case we might smash it + somehow. Of course, if we don't come upon a flat stone we shall conclude + that they put a layer of sand and fine gravel over the slabs covering the + vaults, and must then, as I say, get up one stone and gradually lift all + the rest, clearing out the gravel as we go to the depth of a foot or so. + In that way we shall make sure that we shall not miss any chamber there + may be. + </p> + <p> + "I think that would certainly be the best plan. At present we are groping + altogether in the dark, and it will take us a fortnight at least to make + that row of holes close to each other, as you propose." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0018" id="link2HCH0018"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XVIII — DISAPPOINTMENT + </h2> + <p> + Six more days were spent in driving holes according to Harry's plan. The + result was in all cases the same. Sand and small stones were brought up + attached to the grease. They had now sunk the holes at a much more rapid + rate than at first, for they were accustomed to the work, their muscles + had hardened, and they were able to strike more frequently and with + greater force. They would have got on still more quickly had it not been + for the trouble in sharpening the drills. These were heated in the small + blacksmith's fire Dias had brought. They were first placed in the fire, + but this was not sufficiently hot to raise them beyond a dull red glow. + When this was done a shovelful of glowing fragments was taken from the + fire and placed on the hearth, and among these the small bellows raised + the ends of the drills to a white heat, when of course they were easily + worked. At first they had some difficulty in tempering them. Sometimes, + when cooled, the points were too soft, at other times too brittle; but at + the end of a week they had arrived at the proper medium. But one of the + party had to work steadily to keep the drills in good order. + </p> + <p> + Bertie was daily employed at this work, as José generally failed to give + the proper temper to the tools. Bertie, however, generally managed to get + in two or three hours' work below. Although perfectly ready to do his + share, he was by no means sorry to be otherwise employed for a part of the + day, and as he was now able to talk Spanish with perfect fluency he and + Donna Maria maintained a lively conversation whenever they were together. + All the party, however, were glad when Sunday came round and gave them a + day of complete rest; then they would bathe, fish, shoot pigeons, or lie + in the shade, each according to his fancy, and recommence work with fresh + vigour the next morning. + </p> + <p> + Just a fortnight after they had begun work they were about to begin a hole + in a fresh stone. Talking it over, they had come to the conclusion that + this was the most likely spot in the cellar for the situation of an + underground chamber. Farther on there would scarce be width for one, for + it was here but eight feet across. Where they had already tried there + would scarcely have been depth enough. This seemed to them to be the happy + medium. + </p> + <p> + Before setting to work Dias passed his torch over the stone. Presently he + stopped. "Will you light two of the candles, señor; the torch flickers too + much to see very plainly." + </p> + <p> + Somewhat surprised, for no such close examination had been made before, + the candles were lighted and handed to him. Dias knelt down, and, with his + face close to the stone, moved about carefully, examining it for some + minutes without speaking. + </p> + <p> + "This stone, señor, is broken," he said at last, "broken into a dozen + pieces, and they have been so carefully fitted together again that the + dust that settled upon it quite prevented our seeing it till we swept it + again just now, and it was only because there was a tiny chip out where I + first looked that I noticed it." + </p> + <p> + Harry knelt down and also examined the stone. Like all the others, it had + not been faced with tools. Consequently, although roughly even, there were + slight irregularities in the surface. Now, as Dias pointed them out to + him, he saw that there were lines running through it here and there. + </p> + <p> + "Look here, señor. The stone has been struck here. Here are some dents." + </p> + <p> + These were scarcely noticeable. The surface had taken the same colour as + the rest of the stone. They were of irregular size, and from a quarter of + an inch to an inch in diameter, and nearly in the centre of the stone, + from which point several of the cracks started. + </p> + <p> + "It certainly looks as if the stone had been struck with something heavy," + Harry said. "I should think, by the appearance, some very heavy piece of + rock must have been dropped upon it." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, señor, very heavy rock—so heavy that there must have been many + men to lift it." + </p> + <p> + "It must have been heavy indeed to break up this slab." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps it is not so thick as the others," Dias suggested. + </p> + <p> + "I don't like it, Dias. Well, let us set to work. We will try the wedges + there. They were no use against the solid stone, but they might move these + pieces. Put one of the borers just at the place from which these cracks + start—at least, I suppose they are cracks—and let us drive it + in for an inch. You hold it, José. Don't turn it, we want it to go in just + in a line with this crack. I know we cannot drive it in far, but at least + we may make it go deep enough to give a wedge a hold in it." + </p> + <p> + Five such small holes were made in a crack that seemed to form a rough + circle, then the wedges were put in, and they began to work with sledges. + In ten minutes Harry, examining the place carefully, said: "The bit of + stone is breaking up. There are lines running across it from the wedges. + Give me the heaviest sledge." He swung it round his head and brought it + down half a dozen times in the centre of the wedges. The cracks opened so + far that he could see them without stooping. + </p> + <p> + "Now we will try with the crowbars," he said. + </p> + <p> + In ten minutes a fragment of the stone was got up; then they hammered on + the wedges again, and a piece of rock, which was roughly seven or eight + inches in diameter, broke completely off. + </p> + <p> + "It is only about two and a half inches thick," Harry said as he drew one + of the fragments out. And, holding the candle to the hole, he went on: + "And there is another slab underneath. That settles it. We are at the top + of one of these vaults. The question is, is it empty? I am afraid it is. + This stone has evidently been broken up and fitted in again with wonderful + care." + </p> + <p> + "Why should it be fitted in carefully if they emptied the chamber?" + </p> + <p> + "That I can't tell you, Dias, and it is of no use trying to guess now. + First of all, we will get the rest of the stone up. It won't be difficult, + for now that we have made a start we can use our crowbars. José, run up + and tell my brother to come down. We shall want him to help with the + crowbar; and besides, he would, of course, wish to be here, now that we + are on the point of making a discovery one way or the other." + </p> + <p> + In a minute Bertie came down with José, and Donna Maria followed. "José + tells me you have broken a hole in one of the stones," Bertie exclaimed as + he ran up. + </p> + <p> + "We have got a bit out of a broken stone, Bertie. This stone had been + broken before, and evidently not by accident. It is only half the + thickness of the others, and, as you can see, there is another slab + underneath." + </p> + <p> + "Who can have broken it, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "That question we cannot decide, but I should say probably the Incas. We + agreed that it was very possible they discovered the hidden treasures of + the Chimoos. They must have learned, as the Spaniards did, how cleverly + these places were hidden, and it must have been as evident to them as it + is to us, that if there was a hiding-place here, this must be the spot." + </p> + <p> + When one or two more pieces of the stone had been got out by the aid of + crowbars, the rest was removed without the least difficulty. Another slab + two feet square was exposed. In the middle of this was a copper ring, and + the slab fitted, into a stone casing about eighteen inches wide. As soon + as this casing was cleared, Dias and José took their places on one side, + the two brothers on the other. A crowbar was thrust through the ring, and + all of them, taking hold of the ends, lifted with all their strength. At + first the stone did not move, but at the second effort it lifted suddenly. + It was the same thickness as the one they had broken, and, on being moved, + was easily handled. The torches were thrust down, and all peered eagerly + into the vault. So far as they could see it was empty. + </p> + <p> + "Shall I jump down, señor?' + </p> + <p> + "No, the air may be bad, José. Run up and bring down a short length of + rope, twenty feet will be ample. Now, let your torch drop down, Dias. If + it burns, it will be safe for us to go down; if not, we must keep on + dropping blazing brands into it till they burn." + </p> + <p> + As, however, the torch burnt brightly, Harry lay down, and, saying, "Hold + my legs, Bertie!" looked down into the vault. Eighteen inches below the + surface, the hole widened out suddenly. A minute later Harry's head + appeared above the surface again. + </p> + <p> + "It is empty," he said in as cheerful a voice as he could manage. "Of + course it is a disappointment," he went on, "but I felt certain that it + would be so directly we found the stone was cracked. The only hope was + that the first finders of the treasure afterwards used the place for the + same purpose. That they thought it possible they might do so is clear by + the care with which they fitted the stones together." + </p> + <p> + None of the others spoke. The disappointment was a heavy one. Bertie broke + the silence by saying; "Well, better luck next time. They may have found + out this place, but there may be others which they did not find." + </p> + <p> + "Quite so, Bertie. Now we have got up one stone, It will be comparatively + easy work getting up the others. We will take up every stone to the end, + and then work back till we get to a place where there is not more than a + couple of feet between the bottom of the stone and the top of the rock." + </p> + <p> + At this moment José ran into the room with the rope. Harry took it, and + dropped one end until it nearly touched the floor below. "Hold on," he + said, "and I will slip down first." Half a minute later he stood at the + bottom of the chamber, beside the torch, which was still burning. + </p> + <p> + "It is only about three feet across at the bottom," he said; "the wall by + the passage goes straight up, on the other side it is the bare rock, so it + is almost wedge-shaped. It is twenty feet long, and five feet high up to + its roof, that makes it nearly seven to the upper part of the mouth." The + vault was absolutely empty. He moved about for a minute and then said: + "Gold has been stored here. There are particles of gold at the bottom, and + there is gold-dust in the cracks of the broken face of the rock. Now I + will come up again. Hold the rope tight; I will climb about a yard, and + then I can get my fingers on the ledge." + </p> + <p> + He was soon up. "Now, do any of you want to go down?" Dias and José shook + their heads; and Bertie grumbled, "I don't want to look at the beastly + hole; it has been trouble enough to get at it." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I think we will not do any more to-day, Dias. It has rather taken + the heart out of one. Still, we could not expect to hit upon the treasure + for the first time. We will go up and talk it over, and when we have + smoked a pipe or two we shall be more inclined to take a cheerful view of + the matter. We won't talk about it till we have got to the end of our + second pipe." + </p> + <p> + The tobacco did its usual work, and it was with quite a cheerful voice + that Bertie broke the silence: "The Incas must have been pretty sharp + fellows to find that hole, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, very likely they heard that the Chimoos had treasure there. Indeed + they must have known, because, you see, not one of the other stones is + broken, so they evidently knew where that chamber was situated." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I suppose that was it. Well, we are in fine working order now, and + we sha'n't be very long getting the other stones up." + </p> + <p> + "Not very long this side anyhow, Bertie. We shall want some short blocks + of wood to put under the stones as we raise them. I expect they are all + five inches thick, and they must be a very big weight. Evidently it is + going to be a longish job. As we have been a fortnight without fresh meat, + Dias had better go off and buy half a dozen sheep. We won't have dead meat + this time. He can bring them slung over the mules, and we can kill them as + we want them." + </p> + <p> + "We have not had fresh meat, but we have not done badly, Harry; we have + generally had a good many eggs and some pigeons, and José has brought us + in fish from that pool. But they have dwindled down lately. He only + brought in a couple of fish yesterday evening." + </p> + <p> + "Well, the pigeons are getting scarcer too, Bertie. We have killed a good + many, but the rest are getting very shy, and I think most of them must + have gone off and settled in new places on the face of the rocks above the + ravine. While Dias is away, we will try and lay in a stock of sea-fish. We + can swim out and sit on the rocks during the day, and lay our lines at + night. We have worked very hard for a fortnight, and we deserve a + holiday." + </p> + <p> + Dias, when he was spoken to, said he would start at once with four mules + for Huacha. "It is not above fifteen miles," he said, "and I can get there + this evening. I should think that I could buy the sheep there; if not, I + must go on to Huaura. Each mule will bring two sheep. Of course I could + drive them, but that would seem more singular." + </p> + <p> + "You had certainly better take the mules, Dias. Tie the sheep carefully on + them, so that they will not be hurt." + </p> + <p> + "I will take eight of the leather bags, señor. The sheep are not large, + and I will sling one on each side of the mules." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, it would be as well, while you are about it, to bring eight. You may + as well get some more coffee. We drink a lot of that, and like it strong. + If your wife thinks we shall want more sugar, or anything else, by all + means get some." + </p> + <p> + As soon as Dias started, the lines were got ready. They cut a couple of + saplings to serve as rods, and José, digging among the rocks, found plenty + of worms, beetles, and grubs for bait. In addition, they took a cake or + two of maize, to break up and throw in to attract the fish. + </p> + <p> + "We had better swim out in our flannel shirts and trousers," Harry said. + "They will soon dry, and they will keep off the sun. If we were to sit + there without them, we should get blistered from head to foot." + </p> + <p> + "Shall we fish outside the rocks, or inside, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "We will try both; but I think we are likelier to catch most inside. I + should think a back-water like that would attract them." + </p> + <p> + They met with equal success on both sides of the rocks, and by evening had + caught over forty fish, at least half of which weighed over four pounds. + Then they set the long lines, each carrying forty hooks, and returned to + the castle with as many fish as they could possibly carry. Maria was + delighted with the addition to her larder, and she and José set to work at + once to clean and split them. In the morning they were hung in strings + from the broad window. Maria said they would get the benefit of the heat + from the walls, and any air there might be would be able to pass round + them. + </p> + <p> + By means of the night-lines they caught almost as many fish as they had + done with their rods, and that day they had the satisfaction of bringing + in more than they could carry in one journey. + </p> + <p> + "We have got plenty now to keep us going for another three weeks," Harry + said, "and we can always replenish our stock when we choose." + </p> + <p> + Dias returned at sunset carrying one sheep over his shoulders. + </p> + <p> + "I have left the others out there, señor; I don't think there is any fear + of their straying. There is no fresh grass anywhere except near the + stream, and moreover, being strange to the valley, they will naturally + keep near the mules." + </p> + <p> + Another month passed in continuous labour. The stones had all been taken + up in the basement they had first visited, but no other chamber had been + found. The parallel chamber had given them much trouble at starting, as no + stone had been found showing any cracks upon it, and they had had to blast + one stone to pieces before they could begin to cut up the others. No + chamber whatever had been discovered until they were within six feet of + the farther end. Then one was found, but it showed no signs whatever of + having ever been used. "So far so bad," Harry said when the supper had + been eaten almost in silence; "but that is no reason why we should be + disheartened. If the Incas buried a treasure they may have thought it + prudent to choose some other spot than that used by the old people." + </p> + <p> + "But where could it be, Harry? You agreed that there was not sufficient + depth between the floors for any place of concealment." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, Bertie, of course. I have been thinking of it a lot during + the past few days, when the chances of our finding a treasure under the + basement were nearly extinguished. There are still the side walls." + </p> + <p> + "The side walls!" Bertie repeated. "Surely they are built against the + rock?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, but we don't know how straight the wall of rock is. You see, they + did not build against it at all in the basement, but above that the side + walls begin. The rock must have been irregular, and as the walls were + built the space behind may have been filled in or may not. When they came + to build they may have found that there was a cavern or caverns in the + rock—nothing is more likely—and they may have left some sort + of entrance to these caverns, either as a place of refuge to the garrison + if the place were taken, or as a hiding-place. They might have thought it + more secure for this purpose than the underground chamber, which was their + general hiding-place. At any rate it is possible, and to-morrow I vote + that we have a thorough inspection of the walls of the storeroom below + this. That would be the most likely place, for near the sea-level the + chances of finding caverns would be much greater than higher up." + </p> + <p> + Bertie's face brightened as Harry proceeded. + </p> + <p> + "It certainly seems possible, Harry. Of course the other place seemed so + much more likely to us that we have never given the side walls a thought. + We may find something there after all. I do hope we may, old boy. I cannot + believe that after things have gone altogether so well with us, and we + have been twice so near finding treasure, that we should fail after all. + Which side shall we begin on?" + </p> + <p> + "We will have a look at them before we decide, Bertie. We have not really + examined them since the first day; I really forget what stores we found in + the two side-rooms." + </p> + <p> + An examination in the morning showed that the passage near the entrance to + the rock on the left-hand side had been used for fuel, that on the other + side was filled at the upper end with skins for some distance, and spears + and sheaves of arrows were piled against the outer wall along the rest of + the distance. + </p> + <p> + "Which do you think is the most likely hiding-place?" + </p> + <p> + "I should say the right-hand passage. The other with the fire-wood in it + might be visited every day, but the spears and arrows would only be wanted + in case of any attacks upon the castle, or to arm a large force going out + to give battle there. They would naturally put anything they wanted to + hide in the passage less likely to be visited." + </p> + <p> + "That does seem probable," Bertie agreed; "therefore, hurrah for the + right-hand side!" + </p> + <p> + "I still think, señor," Dias said, "that there must be treasure concealed + somewhere. I should not think a guard would have been placed here, and + remained here so many years still keeping watch, as we find they did at + that big loophole on the top floor, unless there was something to watch." + </p> + <p> + "Quite so, Dias. I have thought that over in every way, and I can see no + possible motive for their being here except to prevent the place from + being examined. That was needless if there was nothing to guard, and + nothing to take away, except these silver brackets, which in those days + would scarcely have been worth the trouble of getting out and carrying + away. There must be treasure somewhere. We know now that it is not in the + basement, and we will try these side walls, even if we have to blow half + of them in; there is no doubt that the stones are at least as thick as + those at the end, but they will not be difficult to manage. I noticed in + the upper story that they had not taken the trouble to fit them nearly so + accurately as they did those of the outer walls. I don't say that they + didn't fit well, but the stones were of irregular sizes, and I have no + doubt that in many places we could prize them out with a crowbar. Once an + opening is made, there will be no difficulty in getting a lot of them out, + as the old people did not use cement or mortar. Well, to-morrow morning we + will move all the spears and arrows across to the other side of that + passage and have a good look at the stones, but we will go up first and + look at the side walls of all the other rooms and see if they are of the + same build. There may be some difference which we have not noticed. You + see all the side walls of this room are built like those in front. I + didn't notice whether it was the same in the other rooms." + </p> + <p> + "I will look at once," Dias said, lighting a torch at the fire. + </p> + <p> + "No, señor," he said, when in ten minutes he returned; "none of the walls + on this floor are built of stone like this. This was the grand chamber, + the stones are all nearly one size, and so well fitted that you can hardly + see where they join each other. In the other rooms they are not so, but + the stones are, as you noticed above, irregular in size, and although they + fit closely, there is no attempt to conceal the cracks." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, Dias! Well, we won't look any more to-night; we shall see in + the morning if the room below us is built in the same way. I have no doubt + it is. At any rate we have done enough for to-day. There is some whisky + left in that bottle, Bertie, and we may as well make ourselves a glass of + grog. Maria, you had better get down that jar of pulque. We will drink to + better luck next time." + </p> + <p> + The woman smiled faintly. She did not often do so now, her spirits had + gradually gone down as the hopes of success faded. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Maria," Harry said, "you had better take a glass of pulque for + yourself. I know you don't often touch it, but you have been working so of + late that I think you want it more than any of us." + </p> + <p> + "I cannot help feeling low-spirited, señor," she said. "I have so hoped + that you would find the treasure you wanted, and marry this lady you love, + and it would be such joy for us to have in some small way repaid the + service you rendered us, that I felt quite broken down. I know I ought not + to have been, when you and your brother bear the disappointment so + bravely." + </p> + <p> + "'It is of no use crying over spilt milk', which is an English saying, + Maria. Besides, it is possible that the milk may not be spilt yet, and + until lately your good spirits have helped us greatly to keep ours up. If + I were once convinced that we had failed, I have no doubt I should feel + hard hit; but I am a long way from giving up hope yet. There is treasure + here, and if I have to blow up the whole of the old place I will find it. + I have got six months yet, and in six months one can do wonders. Anyhow, + these brackets will pay us very well for our work. I certainly should not + have earned half the sum in any other way in the same time. And even if I + fail in my great object, I shall have the satisfaction of knowing that I + have done all in my power to gain it. She will know that I have done my + best. I have always told her, when I have written, how much I owe to you + and Dias, how faithfully you have served me, and how you have always been + so bright and pleasant. I have no doubt it has cheered her up as well as + me." + </p> + <p> + Maria was wiping her eyes now. "You are too good, señor; it is so little I + can do, or Dias either, to show our gratitude." + </p> + <p> + "Nonsense! You show it in every way, even in the matter-of-fact way of + always giving us excellent food, which is by no means unimportant. Now we + will all turn in, and make a fresh start to-morrow morning." + </p> + <p> + They were up at daybreak, and after taking their usual cup of coffee lit + the torches and descended the stairs to the floor below. + </p> + <p> + As soon as they reached the right-hand wall, Harry exclaimed: "Why, this + is built in the same way as the one we have left! The stones are squared + and fitted together as closely as those in the drawing-room. Then why + should that be, except in that one room? The side walls all the way up are + roughly built. Why should they have taken the trouble on this floor to + build these, which are only meant as store-rooms, when even in the rooms + above, which were meant for the habitation of the chief and his family, + the rough work was deemed sufficiently good? There must have been some + motive for this, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "There must have been, señor; it is certainly strange." + </p> + <p> + "First of all, let us clear the wall and take a general view of it. + Guessing won't help us; but I have the strongest hopes that behind one of + these stones lies a cavern. By the way, Dias, take a torch and go into the + next chamber and see if the stones are solid there." + </p> + <p> + "They are just the same as those here," Dias said when he returned. + </p> + <p> + "I would rather that it had been the other way," Harry said, "for then I + should have been more sure that there was some special reason for their + building them in this way here." + </p> + <p> + It took them all half an hour's work to move the spears and arrows to the + other side. + </p> + <p> + "Do you think, Harry, if we were to tap the stones we should be able to + find whether there is a hollow behind any of them?" + </p> + <p> + Harry shook his head. + </p> + <p> + "Not in the least. I have no doubt these stones are two or three feet + thick, and there could be no difference in the sound they would make if + struck, whether they were filled in solid behind or had no backing. To + begin with, we will make a careful examination of the walls. Possibly we + shall see some signs of a stone having been moved. It would be very much + more difficult to take one of the great blocks out and put it in again + than it would be to get up one of the paving-stones." + </p> + <p> + When they had gone about half-way along, examining each stone with the + greatest care, Bertie, who was ahead of the rest, and passing the candle + he held along the edge of every joint, said, "Look here! this stone + projects nearly half an inch beyond the rest." + </p> + <p> + The others gathered round him. The stone was of unusual size, being fully + two and a half feet wide and four feet long, the bottom joint being two + feet above the floor. + </p> + <p> + Bertie moved along to let the others look at the edge. He was keeping his + finger on the joint, and they had scarcely come up when he said, "The + other end of the stone's sunk in about as much as this end projects." + </p> + <p> + "Something certainly occurred to shift this stone a little," Harry said, + examining it carefully. "It is curious. If others had been displaced, one + would have put it down to the shock of an earthquake—a common enough + occurrence here—but both above and below it the stones are level + with the others, and nowhere about the house have we seen such another + displacement. Look! there is a heap of rubbish along the foot of the wall + here. Stir it up, Dias, and let us see what it is." + </p> + <p> + "It is sand and small stones, and some chips that look like chips of + rock." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, these bits look, as you say, as if they had been chipped off a rock, + not like water-worn stones. Though how they got here, where everywhere + else things are perfectly tidy, I cannot say. However, we can think that + over afterwards. Now for the stone! Let us all put our weight against this + projecting end. I don't in the least expect that we can move it, but at + any rate we can try." + </p> + <p> + They all pushed together. + </p> + <p> + "I think it moved a little," Harry said, and looked at the edge. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, it is not above half as far out now as it was." + </p> + <p> + "That is curious, for if it is as thick as we took it to be, it would + weigh at least a couple of tons. We won't try to push it in any farther. I + am sorry we pushed it at all. Now, give me that heavy sledge, José, + possibly there may be a hollow sound to it. I will hit at the other end, + for I don't want this to go in any farther." + </p> + <p> + He went to the stone beyond it first and struck two or three blows with + all his strength. Then he did the same with the stone that they were + examining. + </p> + <p> + "I don't think it gives such a dead sound," he said. + </p> + <p> + The others were all of the same opinion. + </p> + <p> + "Good! This is another piece of luck," he said. "We have certainly hit on + something out of the way." + </p> + <p> + "Your hammering has brought this end out again, Harry," Bertie said. + </p> + <p> + "So it has, and it has pushed this end in a little. Let us try again." But + although all took turns with the sledges, they could make no further + impression on the stone. + </p> + <p> + "Well, we will try the drills," Harry said. "In the first place, we will + find out how thick it is." + </p> + <p> + They at once set to work with the drill. Progress was slower than it had + been before, because, instead of striking down on the head of the drill, + they had now to swing the hammer sideways and lost the advantage of its + weight; and they were obliged to work very carefully, as a miss would have + seriously damaged the one holding the drill. It took them four hours' + steady work to get the hole in three inches. Ten minutes later, to their + astonishment, the drill suddenly disappeared. Dias, who was striking, + nearly fell, for instead of the resistance he had expected, the drill shot + forward; the hammer hit José, who had this time been holding the drill, a + heavy blow on the arm, causing him to utter a shout of pain. + </p> + <p> + Harry, who was sitting down having breakfast, having just handed his + hammer to Bertie, jumped to his feet. + </p> + <p> + "How did you manage that, Dias? I suppose it slipped off the head. You + must have hit José a very heavy blow." + </p> + <p> + "I have hit him a heavy blow, señor, and nearly tumbled down myself; but I + struck the drill fairly enough, and it has gone." + </p> + <p> + "Gone where, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "I think it must have gone right through the hole, señor." + </p> + <p> + "Then there is an empty space behind!" Harry shouted joyfully. "However," + he went on in changed tones, "we must see to José first. That blow may + have fractured his arm. Let me look, José. No, I don't think anything is + broken, but there is a nasty cut on the wrist. It is fortunate that you + were not striking straight down, Dias, for I am sure we have not put + anything approaching the strength into our blows, now we are hitting + sideways, that we exerted before. You had better go up to Maria, José, and + get her to bathe your wrist with cold water, and put on a bandage." + </p> + <p> + "Now, señor, what shall we do next?" + </p> + <p> + "Well, now that we know that its weight cannot be anything very great, and + that certainly to some extent it can be moved, we will try hammering again + at that end. Do you stand three or four feet beyond it, so as to be able + to bring your sledge down with all your strength just on the lower corner. + I will face you and strike six or eight inches above where you hit. Of + course we must both bring our hammers down at the same instant. We shall + be able to do that after two or three trials. Stand at the other end of + the stone, Bertie, and tell us if it moves at all." + </p> + <p> + After one or two attempts the two men got to swing their hammers so as to + strike precisely at the same moment, and when half a dozen blows had + fallen, Bertie said: "It comes out a little at each blow. It is not much, + but it comes." + </p> + <p> + Three or four minutes later he reported, "It is an inch and a half out + now, and there is room to get the end of a crowbar in here." + </p> + <p> + "That is curious," Harry said as he lowered his sledgehammer, and, taking + up the candle, examined the end where he had been striking. + </p> + <p> + "This is sunk about the same distance, Bertie. The stone must work somehow + on a pivot." + </p> + <p> + They now put a crowbar into the end Bertie had been watching, and all + three threw their weight on the lever. Slowly the stone yielded to the + pressure, and moved farther and farther out. It was pushed open until the + crowbar could act no longer as a lever, but they could now get a hold of + the inside edge. It was only very slowly and with repeated efforts that + they could turn the stone round, and at last it stood fairly at right + angles to the wall, dividing the opening into equal parts about two feet + four each. + </p> + <p> + "There is a pivot under it; that is quite evident. It may be a copper ball + in the stone below, or it may be that a knob of the upper stone projects + into a hole in the lower. However, it does not matter how it works. Here + is an opening into something. Dias, will you go upstairs and tell your + wife and José to come down? They had better bring half a dozen more + torches. Our stock here is getting low, and we shall want as much light as + possible. It is only fair that we should all share in the discovery." + </p> + <p> + Dias went off. + </p> + <p> + "Now, Bertie, we must not let our hopes grow too high. I think it is more + likely than not that we shall find nothing here." + </p> + <p> + "Why do you think so, Harry? I made sure we had as good as got the + treasure." + </p> + <p> + "I think, if there had been treasure," Harry went on, "that this stone + would have been closed with the greatest care. They would hardly have left + it so carelessly closed that anyone who examined the wall would have + noticed it, just as we did. We found the other places most carefully + closed, though there was nothing in them." + </p> + <p> + "Perhaps there was something that prevented them from shutting—a + little stone or something." + </p> + <p> + "But we know that that wasn't so, Bertie, because the stone yielded to our + weight; and if it did so now, it could have been shut with the greatest + ease originally, when no doubt the pivot was kept oiled, and the whole + worked perfectly smoothly. It is almost certain that they were able in + some way to fasten it securely when it was shut. What is that piece of + square stone lying there?" + </p> + <p> + "It fell down from above just as the slab opened." + </p> + <p> + Harry took it up. It was about six inches long by two inches square. + </p> + <p> + "It is a very hard stone," he said—"granite, I should say. I expect + you will find that it fits into a hole in the stone above." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, there is a hole here," Bertie said, feeling it; "the stone goes + right in." + </p> + <p> + "Well, I think, Bertie, you will find a hole in that end of the stone we + moved that it will fit." + </p> + <p> + Bertie crept in, and felt along the top of the stone. + </p> + <p> + "Yes, there is a hole here about the same size as the stone, but it is not + more than three inches deep." + </p> + <p> + "Then, that stone was the bolt, Bertie. You see it was pushed up, and the + door then closed; and when the stone was exactly in its place, it would + drop into the hole and keep it from moving, and nothing short of breaking + up the bolt would give an entrance. It is lucky that we did not push it + quite to; another quarter of an inch and that bolt would have fallen, and + we could not have moved it unless by smashing the whole thing into bits. + That was why they did not quite close the stone; they wanted to get in + again." + </p> + <p> + "Here come the others!" + </p> + <p> + Maria had been washing some clothes in the stream, and they had therefore + been longer in coming than if she had been in the room. They all looked + greatly excited. + </p> + <p> + "So you have found it, señor!" Dias exclaimed in delight. + </p> + <p> + "We have found an entrance into somewhere, but I am afraid it will be as + empty as the other chambers." + </p> + <p> + "Why do you think so, señor?" Dias asked in dismay. + </p> + <p> + Harry repeated the reasons he had given Bertie for his belief that the + stone must have been left in such a position as to be easily opened when + required. + </p> + <p> + "Why should it have been left so?" + </p> + <p> + "Because the treasure they expected had never arrived. It is possible that + when the Incas discovered the treasure in that chamber we searched, they + may also have found this entrance. It may have been shown to them by one + of the prisoners, and they may have broken the stone here into pieces as + they broke that over the chamber afterwards. Seeing what a splendid + hiding-place it was, they may have, when the Spaniards first arrived, made + another stone to fit, with the intention of using it for a hiding-place + themselves. The fact that the stone was left so that it could be at once + opened is conclusive proof to my mind that the treasure never came. That + heap of sand, small stones, and chips of rock is another proof that they + were ready to receive treasure, and it was probably swept out of the + chamber that is behind here, and would, of course, have been removed when + the treasure was put in and the door closed; but as the treasure never did + come, it was left where it lay. However, we will now go and see. I have + only kept you waiting because I did not want you to be disappointed." + </p> + <p> + One by one they crept through the opening. For four feet in, the passage + was the same width as the stone, but two feet deeper; then it at once + opened into a large cavern. + </p> + <p> + "This wall was four feet thick, you see, Dias. Apparently squared stone + was only used for the facing, as the stones are of irregular shape on the + back. This would be a natural cavern, and a splendid hiding-place it + makes. No doubt its existence was one of the reasons for building this + castle." + </p> + <p> + The cavern was some twelve feet wide and thirty feet high at the mouth; + the floor sloped up sharply, and the sides contracted, and met forty feet + from the mouth. The floor had been cut into steps two feet wide, running + across the cave and extending to the back. These steps were faced with a + perfectly flat slab of stone. The cave was empty. + </p> + <p> + The natives uttered loud exclamations of disappointment and regret. + </p> + <p> + Harry had so thoroughly made up his mind that nothing would be found there + that he surveyed the place calmly and in silence. Bertie imitated his + example with some difficulty, for he too was bitterly disappointed. + </p> + <p> + "You see, Dias," Harry went on quietly, "this place was prepared to + receive treasure. The steps have all been swept perfectly clean. You see, + the gold could be piled up, and no doubt the steps were cut and faced with + stone to prevent any gold-dust that might fall from the bags, in which, no + doubt, it would be brought, and small nuggets, from falling into the + cracks and crevices of the rock. I should say that in all probability they + expected that treasure ship that was lost, and had everything in readiness + for hiding the cargo here directly it came. It never did come. The door + was shut as far as it could be without the bolt falling down and fastening + it; then they waited for the ship; and if it did not arrive, other + treasure might be brought by land. Well, it cannot be helped. So far we + have failed. There may still be treasure hidden somewhere. We cannot say + that we have searched the place thoroughly yet." + </p> + <p> + For another six weeks they worked hard. The wall was broken through in + several places, but no signs of the existence of any other cavern or + hiding-place was discovered. + </p> + <p> + "I should give it up," Harry said, when at the end of that time they were + sitting gloomily round the fire, "but for one thing: I can see no possible + explanation why a party of men should have been left here, and a guard + kept, for perhaps a hundred years, perhaps more, and the stories about + demons been circulated, and people who ventured to approach been murdered, + unless there had been some good reason for it. That reason could only have + been, as far as I can see, that there was a treasure hidden here. I have + turned it over and over in my mind a thousand times, and I can think of no + other reason. Can you, Bertie, or you, Dias?" + </p> + <p> + "No," Bertie replied. "I have often thought about it; but, as you say, + there must have been some good reason, for no people in their senses would + have spent their lives in this old place, and starved here, unless they + had some cause for it." + </p> + <p> + Dias made no reply beyond shaking his head. + </p> + <p> + "You see," Harry went on, "they kept up their watch to the end. There were + those two skeletons of men who had died at their post at that curious + window where nothing could be seen. I hate to give up the search, and yet + we seem to have tried every point where there was a possibility of a + hiding-place existing." + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0019" id="link2HCH0019"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XIX — THE TREASURE + </h2> + <p> + The next morning Harry said: + </p> + <p> + "I will go upstairs to that look-out place again. I have been up there + pretty nearly every day, and stared down. I can't get it out of my mind + that the key of the mystery lies there, and that that hole was made for + some other purpose than merely throwing stones out on to any of those who + might go in behind the rocks. I have puzzled and worried over it." + </p> + <p> + "Shall I come up with you, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "No, I would rather you didn't. I will go up by myself and spend the + morning there; some idea may occur to me. You may as well all have a quiet + day of it." + </p> + <p> + He lit his pipe and went upstairs. José went off to the mules, and Bertie + descended the ladder, and strolled round what they called the courtyard, + looking for eggs among the rocks and in the tufts of grass growing higher + up. Dias scattered a few handfuls of maize to the chickens and then + assisted Maria to catch two of them; after which he descended the ladder + and sat down gloomily upon a stone. He had become more and more depressed + in spirits as the search became daily more hopeless; and although he + worked as hard as anyone, he seldom spoke, while Harry and his brother + often joked, and showed no outward signs of disappointment. An hour + passed, and then Harry appeared suddenly at the window. + </p> + <p> + "Bertie, Dias, come up at once, I have an idea!" + </p> + <p> + They ran to the ladder and climbed up. The excitement with which he spoke + showed that the idea was an important one. "Now, Dias," he broke out as + they joined him, "we know, don't we, that a part of the Incas' treasure + was sent off by boat, and the belief of the Indians was that it was never + heard of again." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, señor. There was certainly a storm the day after it started, + and, as I have told you, it was never heard of again. Had it been, a + report of it would surely have come down." + </p> + <p> + "I believe, Dias, that the boat was dashed to pieces against that line of + rocks outside the entrance to the passage. We have reason to believe that + the people here were expecting the treasure to arrive, and had the + entrance to the cave in readiness to receive it. Certainly no better place + could have been chosen for concealment. The boat may have been coming here + when the storm broke and drove them towards the shore. They probably + attempted to gain the mouth of the cove, but missed it, and were dashed to + pieces against the rocks. The Indians on guard here no doubt saw it, and + would be sure that the heavy sacks or boxes containing the gold would sink + to the bottom. They would lie perfectly secure there, even more secure + than if they had been removed and placed in the cave, and could always be + recovered when the Spaniards left, so they were content to leave them + there. Still, they obeyed the orders they had received to keep watch for + ever over the treasure, and to do so knocked that strange hole through the + wall and always kept two men on guard there. + </p> + <p> + "So it must have gone on. They and those who succeeded them never wavered. + Doubtless they received food from their friends outside, or some of them + went out, as you have done, to fetch it in. Then came a time when, for + some reason or other—doubtless, as I supposed before, when the + Spaniards swept pretty nearly all the natives up to work in the mines, and + they themselves dared not issue out—the attempt to get food was + made, when too late, by the men whose skeletons we found on the steps when + we first came here; and the rest were all too feeble to repeat the + experiment, and died—the two sentinels at their post, the rest in + the room where we found them." + </p> + <p> + "Hurrah!" Bertie shouted, "I have no doubt you have hit it, Harry. I + believe, after all, that we are going to find it. That is splendid! I + shall dance at your wedding, Harry, which I had begun to think I never + should do." + </p> + <p> + "Don't be a young ass, Bertie. It is only an idea, and we have had several + ideas before, but nothing has come of them." + </p> + <p> + "Something is going to come of this, I am convinced; I would bet any money + on it. Well, shall we go and have a trial at once?" + </p> + <p> + "What do you think, Dias?" Harry said, paying no attention to Bertie's + last remark. + </p> + <p> + "I think it is quite possible, señor. Certainly, if the Indians had been + told to guard the treasure, they would do so always. You know how they + kept the secrets entrusted to them whatever tortures they were put to. If + the gold had been, as you say, lost amongst the rocks, I do think they + would have still watched the place. I thought it strange that they should + have made that hole, but when you said that they might have made it to + throw stones down it seemed to me to be likely enough; but the other + suggestion is more probable. Well, señor, I am ready to try it, but I am + not a very good swimmer." + </p> + <p> + "My brother and I are both good swimmers, and we will do that part of the + work. The hardest part will be getting it up, and you will be able to give + us your help at that." + </p> + <p> + "Well, let us be off," Bertie said; "I am all on thorns to begin. We shall + soon find it out. If it is there, it is almost certain to be at the foot + of the rocks, though, of course, it is possible that the boat sank before + striking them. At any rate, I feel sure she went down somewhere within the + area that can be seen through that hole. It won't take many days' diving + to search every yard of the bottom." + </p> + <p> + They hastily descended the ladder, and, divesting themselves of their + clothes, swam out through the opening. Dias climbed up on the rocks, the + others swam round by the ends of the barrier. The water was so warm that + they would be able to remain in it for any time without inconvenience. + </p> + <p> + "We need not begin here, Bertie; we are outside the line of sight. From + that hole I could not see the end of these rocks. We will start at the + middle, and work in opposite directions." + </p> + <p> + On arriving off the centre of the wall both dived. The depth was about + twelve feet, and as the water was perfectly clear, Harry could see four or + five feet round him. He was obliged to swim carefully, for the bottom was + covered with rocks, for the most part rounded by the action of the sea. + For an hour he continued his search, by which time he had reached nearly + the end of the line of rocks. Then he landed on a ledge of rock and sat + down, calling to Bertie to join him. + </p> + <p> + "We will rest for a quarter of an hour," he said, "and then begin again. + This time we will keep twenty or thirty feet farther out; it is more + likely to be there than close in. If the boat struck, the next wave would + sweep over her, and she would probably go down stern first, and her cargo + would fall out that way." + </p> + <p> + After their rest they started again, swam out a few strokes, and then + dived. Harry had gone down five or six times, when, on his coming to the + surface, he heard a shout, and saw Bertie swimming towards him. + </p> + <p> + "I have found them, Harry! There are a number of ingots, but they were so + heavy that I could not bring one of them to the surface." + </p> + <p> + As Harry reached him the lad turned round and swam back. "There they are, + just opposite that cleft in the rock! I looked directly I came up so as to + know the exact spot." + </p> + <p> + Harry trod water for half a minute, then took a long breath and dived. + </p> + <p> + It was as Bertie had said. Scattered among the rocks were a score of + ingots. They had lost their brilliancy, but shone with a dull copperish + hue, with bright gleams here and there where rocks had grated against + them. Putting one hand on a block of rock he lifted one of them with the + other. + </p> + <p> + "About twenty pounds," he said to himself. "Thank God, Hilda is as good as + won!" Then he rose to the surface. "Shake hands, Bertie; there is enough + there to make us all rich for life. Now we will get back again. We have to + think matters over, and see how they are to be got ashore. There is no + hurry; they have lain there for three hundred years, and would lie there + as much longer if we did not take them. We have found them, Dias!" he + shouted; and the latter gave a yell of delight. "Swim ashore, and we will + join you there." + </p> + <p> + Not another word was spoken until they had dressed and walked out. + </p> + <p> + "I am too excited even to think," Harry broke out. "It is time for dinner. + When we have had that and smoked a pipe I shall be able to talk calmly + over it." + </p> + <p> + Maria was wild with delight at the news, and laughed and cried by turns. + Even José, who was accustomed to take all things quietly, was almost as + excited. The woman was only called to herself when Harry said, laughing, + "Maria, for the first time since we started from Lima, you are letting the + dinner burn." + </p> + <p> + "To think of it!" she cried. "It is your fault, señor; you should not have + told me about it till we sat down." + </p> + <p> + "You won't have to cook much longer, Maria. You will be able now to have a + servant, and a house as big as you like, and a beautiful garden." + </p> + <p> + "I should not like that, señor; what should I do all day with myself?" + </p> + <p> + "I am glad, señor, glad for your sake," Dias said gravely. "To us it will + make no difference. You said there was enough there to make us rich. + Assuredly that is so; but not one peso of it will we touch. No man with + Indian blood in his veins, not even the poorest in Peru, would have aught + to do with an ounce of the Incas' treasures. When they were buried, a + curse was laid upon any who betrayed their hiding-place or who ever + touched the gold. It has brought a curse upon Spain. At the time the + Spaniards landed here they were a great nation. Now their glory has + departed; they no longer own the land they tyrannized over for three + hundred years, and we have heard that their power in Europe has altogether + gone. It must be the curse of the gold, or they would never have allowed + your great Englishman, Cochrane, with but two or three ships, to conquer + them here. My mind is easy as to the finding of the treasure. You came + here in spite of my prayers that you would not do so. It is you who have + made the discovery, not me. But I will take no share in the gold. From the + day I took it I should be a cursed man; my flesh would melt away, I should + suffer tortures, and should die a miserable death." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Dias, I will not try to persuade you. I know that, Christian though + you be, your native belief still clings to you, and I will not argue + against it; but I have money of my own, and from that I will give you + enough to make you comfortable for life, and that you can take without + feeling that you have incurred any curse from the finding of this + treasure." + </p> + <p> + "I thank you heartily," Dias said gratefully; "I thank you with all my + heart. I have ever been a wanderer, and now I will gladly settle down. I + do not desire wealth, but enough to live on in comfort with my wife, and + only to travel when it pleases me." + </p> + <p> + "You shall have enough for that and more, Dias." + </p> + <p> + After some more meat had been cooked and eaten, and he had smoked a pipe, + Harry said: "A boat would, of course, be the best thing, but there are + difficulties connected with it. There is no spot, as far as I know, where + we could land for fifteen miles on either side, and there would only be + small villages where everything we did would be seen and talked about. + There is no place where we could keep a boat here, for if even a slight + breeze sprang up the swell coming in round the passage between the rocks + and the cliff would smash her up in no time." + </p> + <p> + "That is so, señor." + </p> + <p> + Harry was silent again for some time, and then said: "The only plan I can + think of is to get some strong leather bags. Then we could take one down + with us when we dive, with a strong cord tied to it, put a couple of the + ingots into it, and you could haul it up on to the rocks, and so on until + we have finished a day's work. Then we could carry them to this side of + the rocks; there you could put them, three or four at a time, into the + bag, and drop them down in the water. We would swim up the tunnel and haul + them in, and then bring the bag back again. We sha'n't be able to get + anything approaching all the ingots, for a great many of them must have + gone in between the crevices of the rocks, and unless we broke it up with + powder, which would be next to impossible without a diving-dress and + air-pumps and all sorts of things, which cannot be bought in this country, + we could not get at them. However, we have only just begun to look for + them yet; we may come across a pile. Heavy as the sea must be on this + coast in a gale, I hardly think it would much affect a pile of ingots; + their weight would keep them steady even were big rocks rolled about. + </p> + <p> + "I think the best thing, Dias, would be for you to go off with two or + three mules. We shall soon be running short of provisions, and you had + better get enough flour and dried meat to last us for a month. I don't + suppose we shall be as long as that, but it is as well to have a good + store so as not to have to make the journey again. Then you had better get + twenty leather bags, such as those in which they bring the ore down from + the mountains. We have plenty of stout rope, but we shall want some thin + cord for tying the necks of the bags. You may as well bring another keg of + spirits, brandy if you can get it, a bag of coffee, and some sugar, and + anything else you think of. Now I am a millionaire we can afford to be + comfortable. By the way, we might as well this afternoon get the rest of + those silver brackets out. These are not a part of the Incas' treasure, + and you can take them as your share without fear of the curse. It would be + best for you to smelt them down; I know all of you natives can do that." + </p> + <p> + "Do you think that they are not part of the Incas' treasure, señor?" Dias + said doubtfully. + </p> + <p> + "Certainly not; they were undoubtedly here before the Incas' time. But + even had they been put there by Incas, you could not call them hidden + treasure. They might be part of the Incas' property, but certainly not + part of the treasures they hid." + </p> + <p> + "But it is altogether too much, señor; it is noble of you to offer it me." + </p> + <p> + "Not at all; we owe everything we find to you, and it would be only fair + that you should have at least a third of the gold. But still, if you won't + touch that, you must take the silver." + </p> + <p> + "But I heard you say that it was worth four thousand pounds." + </p> + <p> + "Well, if we are lucky we shall get twenty times as much, Dias." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly we will take it, señor, and grateful we shall both be to you," + Maria said; "and so will José, who will inherit it all some day, as he is + the only relative we have. I agree with Dias about the gold. I have heard + so often about the curse on it that I should be afraid." + </p> + <p> + "Well, Maria, you see there is a lot of nonsense in all your + superstitions. You know it was one of them that this place was guarded by + demons. Now you have seen for yourself that it was all humbug. If you are + afraid about the silver, I will take it to England and sell it there and + send you the money it fetches; but that would give a great deal of + trouble. It will be difficult to get the gold safely away, without being + bothered with all this silver. + </p> + <p> + "You had better buy some bags of charcoal, Dias. I suppose you will use + that small hearth we have?" + </p> + <p> + "No, señor, it would take an immense time to do it in that. I will load + one of the mules with hard bricks." + </p> + <p> + "You will want two mules to carry a hundred, Dias—I think they weigh + about four pounds and a half each. Will that be enough?" + </p> + <p> + "Plenty, señor; but I shall want another bellows. José and I can work the + two of them, and that will make a great heat. We can melt two or three + hundred pounds a day. I have helped to make many a furnace up in the + mountains, and I know very well all about the way to build and work them." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, then, that is settled. You had better start to-morrow morning + with José, and we will spend the day in finding out a little more about + the gold." + </p> + <p> + Dias started the next morning, and the two brothers were in the water most + of the day. Harry found, as he had expected, that a great deal of the + treasure had sunk out of reach between the rocks; but he came upon one + pile, which had apparently been originally packed in sacks or skins, lying + in a heap a little farther out than they had before searched. He had no + doubt that this was the point where the stern of the boat had sunk, and a + considerable portion of the contents had been shot out, while the rest had + been scattered about as the boat broke up, and as the skins rotted their + contents had fallen between the rocks. There were, as nearly as he could + calculate, two hundred and fifty to three hundred ingots in the pile. + </p> + <p> + "I need not trouble about the rest," he laughed to himself. "Each ingot, + if it weighs twenty pounds, is worth a thousand. Two hundred of them would + make me as rich as any man can want to be. I can hardly believe in my + luck; it is stupendous. Fancy a half-pay lieutenant with two hundred + thousand pounds! Old Fortescue will become one of the most complaisant of + fathers-in-law." + </p> + <p> + The evening before Dias left, Harry had written a letter for him to post + at Callao, telling Hilda to keep up a brave heart, for that he hoped to be + at home before the end of the second year with money enough to satisfy her + father. + </p> + <p> + "I should not tell you so unless I felt certain of what I am saying. I + told you before I left that it was almost a forlorn hope that I was + undertaking, and that the chances were ten thousand to one against me. I + think now that the one chance has turned up, and I hope to be home within + two months of the time that you receive this letter." + </p> + <p> + He did not say more; but even now he could scarcely believe that the good + fortune had befallen him, and feared that some unlucky fate might + interfere between him and the fulfilment of his hopes. When Dias returned + after two days' absence the work began. Each morning they worked together + at bringing up the gold and piling the ingots on the rock. It was slower + work than Harry had expected, for on hauling the bag to the rocks it was + often caught by the boulders, and he and Bertie sometimes had to dive four + or five times before they could free it and get it ashore. The gold was + piled in the tunnel just beyond the water. In a fortnight the last ingot + they could get at was stored with its fellows—two hundred and + eighty-two in all. + </p> + <p> + They had repeatedly talked over the best plan of getting the gold away, + and finally concluded that it would be risking too much to take it into a + town, and that the best plan would be for Harry to buy a boat at Callao, + which, as a naval officer, would be natural enough. They decided to + procure three times as many bags as the ingots would really require, and + that they should put in each bag three ingots only, filling it up with + pieces of stone, so that the weight should not exceed what it would have + been were the contents heavy ore. Harry arranged that he would go down to + Callao, buy a large boat, and after having made several excursions, to + accustom the officials at Callao to seeing him going about, he would make + a bargain with the captains of two ships about to sail to England, to + carry about two tons each of ore, which he could put on board them after + dark, so as to avoid the extortion he would have to submit to before the + port officials and others would allow him to ship it. The question that + puzzled them most was the best way of taking the bags into the boat. Dias + was in favour of their being carried on the mules to a point lower down + the coast, at which they could be loaded into the boat. + </p> + <p> + "It would be only necessary to carry the gold," he said, "the stones to + fill the bags could be put in there." + </p> + <p> + The objection to this was that they might be observed at work, and that at + most points it would be difficult both to run the boat up and to get her + off again through the rollers. If the boat were brought round into the + inlet she could be loaded there comfortably. The only fear was of being + caught in a gale. But as gales were by no means frequent the risk was + small; and should a sudden storm come on when she was lying there, and she + were broken up, it would be easy to recover the gold from the shallow + water behind the rocks. This was therefore settled. Only half the treasure + was to be taken away at once, and not till this had been got on board a + ship and the vessel had sailed would the boat come back for the rest of + their treasure. + </p> + <p> + Dias was at once to start with the mules and carry the silver, in two + journeys, to a safe place among the mountains. There he could bury it in + three or four hiding-places, to be fetched out as he might require it, + only taking some fifty pounds to Lima. Here he was to dispose of a portion + of it to one of the dealers who made it his business to buy up silver from + the natives. As many of these worked small mines, and sent down the + produce once a month to Lima, there would be nothing suspicious in its + being offered for sale, especially as it would be known that Dias had been + away for a very long time among the mountains. It was necessary that the + sale should be effected at once, because Harry's stock of money was + running very low, and he would have to pay for the passages of Bertie and + himself to England, and for the freight of the gold. Dias was to dispose + later on of all the remaining stores, the powder and tools, and the three + riding mules. + </p> + <p> + Two days later the last of the silver brackets had been melted, and Dias + and Harry started with the eight mules, six of them being laden with the + silver. They struck back at once into the hills, and after travelling for + two days, ascended a wild gorge. "It is not once a year that anyone would + come up here, señor. There is no way out of it. We can bury the silver + here with a certainty that it will be safe from disturbance." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, it will be safe here; and as you want it you have only to make a + journey with a couple of mules to fetch as much as you require, carry it + home, and bury it in your garden or under the house; then you could from + time to time take a few ingots into the town and dispose of them. But to + begin with, I will borrow fifty pounds weight of it, and get you to + dispose of it for me at Lima. My money is beginning to run short. I shall + have to pay for the freight of the gold and my own passage home, and to + buy a boat large enough to carry half the treasure. It is not likely that + there will be two vessels sailing at the same time, in which case I shall + make two trips. As I should not put it on board until the night before the + ship sailed, of course I could go home with the second lot." + </p> + <p> + "I shall never know what to do with a tenth part of this silver, señor. It + would never do for me to make a show of being rich; the authorities would + seize me, and perhaps torture me to make me reveal the source of my + wealth." + </p> + <p> + "Well, there are thousands of your countrymen in the deepest poverty, + Dias; you could secretly help those in distress; a single ingot, ten + pounds in weight, would be a fortune to them. And when you die you might + get a respectable lawyer to make out a will, leaving your treasure to some + charity for the benefit of Indians, giving, of course, instructions where + the treasure is to be found." + </p> + <p> + "That is good," Dias said. "Thank you, señor! that will make me very + happy." + </p> + <p> + They had brought a pick and shovel with them, and, dividing the bags, + buried them at some distance apart, rolling stones to cover up the + hiding-places, and obliterating any signs of the ground having been + disturbed. A hundred pounds were left out, and with this in their + saddle-bags they arrived at Lima two days later. + </p> + <p> + Harry went on alone into Callao. He had no difficulty in purchasing a + ship's boat in fair condition. She carried two lug-sails, and was amply + large enough for the purpose for which she was required, being nearly + thirty feet long with a beam of six feet. He got her cheaply, for the ship + to which she belonged had been wrecked some distance along the coast, and + a portion of the crew had launched her and made their way to Callao; the + mate, who was the sole surviving officer, was glad to accept the ten + pounds Harry offered for her, as this would enable the crew to exist until + they could obtain a passage home, or ship on board some British vessel + short of hands. The boat was too large to be worked by one man, and seeing + that the mate was an honest and intelligent fellow, Harry arranged with + him to aid him to sail the boat, and each day they went out for some + hours. After spending a week in apparent idleness, and getting to know + more of the man, Harry told him that he had really bought the boat for the + purpose of getting some ore he had discovered on board a ship + homeward-bound. + </p> + <p> + "You know what these Peruvians are," he said, "and how jealous they are of + our getting hold of mines, so I have got to do the thing quietly, and the + only way will be to take the ore off by night. It is on a spot some eighty + miles along the coast. I am going off tomorrow to get it ready for + embarkation, and I shall be away about a week. I find that the <i>London</i> + will leave in ten days, and I shall get it put on board the night before + she sails. While I am away, look after the boat. The <i>Nancy</i> will + sail five days later. I am going to put half on board each ship, as I am + anxious to ensure that some at least of the ore shall reach home, so as to + be analysed, and see if it is as rich as I hope. But be sure not to + mention a word of this to a soul. I should have immense trouble with the + authorities if it got about that I had discovered a mine." + </p> + <p> + "I understand, sir. You may be quite sure I shall say nothing about it." + </p> + <p> + "How are your men getting on?" + </p> + <p> + "Four are shipped on board the <i>Esmerelda</i>, which sailed yesterday, + the others are hanging on till they can get berths. I hope a few will be + able to go in the two ships you name, but they haven't applied at present. + Some of the crew may desert before the time for sailing comes, and of + course they would get better paid if they went as part of the crew than if + they merely worked their passage home." + </p> + <p> + "I am sorry for them," Harry said. "Here is another five pounds to help + them to hold on. As an old naval officer I can feel for men in such a + place." + </p> + <p> + Dias, after selling the silver, had, a week before, returned with the + mules to the castle, and on his arrival there had sent José to join Harry + and bring news to them of the day on which the boat would arrive. Dias and + Bertie were packing half the bags, of which the former took with him an + ample supply, to get the gold out on the rocks facing the entrance, so + that they could be shipped without delay. Great pains were taken in + packing the bags so that the three ingots placed in each should be + completely surrounded by stones. Anyone who might take a fancy to feel + them, in order to ascertain their contents, would have no reason to + suppose that they carried anything beyond the ore they were stated to + contain. + </p> + <p> + Harry had had no difficulty in arranging with the captain of the London to + take from a ton and a half to two tons of ore the night before he sailed, + and three days before this Harry started with the mate. There was but a + light breeze, and it was daylight next morning before they arrived. A pole + had been stuck up at the edge of the cliff just above the cavern, and as + it became dark a lantern was also placed there, so they had no trouble in + finding the entrance of the little cove. + </p> + <p> + "It is a rum-looking place, sir," the man said. "As far as I can see there + is no break in the cliffs." + </p> + <p> + "It is a curious place, but you will find the bags with the ore on the + rocks inside here ready for us, and my brother and one of my men waiting + there. They will have made us out an hour ago, so we can load up at once + and get out of this tiny creek. I don't want to stay in there any longer + than is necessary, for if there is anything of a swell we could not get + out again." + </p> + <p> + As they approached the place Harry gave a shout, which was at once + answered. The sails were lowered, and the boat passed round the edge of + the rocks. + </p> + <p> + "It is a rum place," the mate repeated. "Why, one might have rowed past + here fifty times without thinking there was water inside the rocks. Of + course you must have lowered the sacks down from the top?" + </p> + <p> + "It was a difficult job," Harry said carelessly; "but we were anxious to + get the things away quietly. If we had taken them down to the port we + should have had no end of bother, and a hundred men would have set off at + once to try and find out where we got the ore." + </p> + <p> + Bertie and Dias had everything ready, and as the boat drew up alongside + the rocks on which they were standing the former said, "Everything all + right, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I hope so. We are to put the ore on board the <i>London</i> + to-morrow after dark; she will get up her anchor at daylight. You have got + all the bags ready, I hope?" + </p> + <p> + "Everything; the others will be ready for you when you come back for + them." + </p> + <p> + "The next ship sails in about a week. Now, let us get them on board at + once, I don't want to stop in here a minute longer than is necessary. + There is scarcely a breath of wind now; if it doesn't blow up a bit in the + morning, we shall have a long row before us to get there in time. This is + my brother, Owen; the other is a mule-driver, who has been my guide and + companion for the past year, and whom I am proud to call my friend." + </p> + <p> + "You don't want anything in the way of food, do you?" Bertie asked. + </p> + <p> + "We have got some here," Harry laughed. "I am too old a sailor to put to + sea without having provisions in my craft. Now, let us get the bags on + board." + </p> + <p> + It did not take them long to transfer the sacks into the boat. + </p> + <p> + "They are pretty heavy," the mate said, "I should say a hundredweight + each." + </p> + <p> + "About that," Harry said carelessly. "This ore stuff is very heavy." + </p> + <p> + As soon as all was on board Harry said: "Now we can put out at any moment, + but I don't want to leave till dark. We may as well begin to get the rest + of the bags out here at once. We might finish that job before we start. + Then you could come down with us, Bertie, and Dias could pack up the + remaining stores to-morrow and start for Lima with the mules, and his wife + and José. + </p> + <p> + "Very well, Harry. I think we can leave the sacks here safely." + </p> + <p> + "Just as safely as if they were ashore. So far as we know no one has been + in here for the past two hundred years, and no one is likely to come in + the next week." + </p> + <p> + By evening all the work was done. The mate had been greatly surprised at + the manner in which the bags had been brought on board, but had helped in + the work and asked no questions. As soon as it was dark they rowed out + from the cove. There was not a breath of wind. Bertie volunteered to take + the first watch, the mate was to take the next. + </p> + <p> + Harry was not sorry to turn in. He had had but little sleep for the past + week. Everything had seemed to be going well, but at any moment there + might be some hitch in the arrangements, and he had been anxious and + excited. Wrapping himself in his poncho he lay down in the stern of the + boat and slept soundly until morning. + </p> + <p> + "I have had a sleep," he said on waking. "I have slept longer to-night + than I have done for the past fortnight. Now I will take the helm. How + fast have we been moving?" + </p> + <p> + "We have not gone many miles, and if what tide there is hadn't been with + us we should not have moved at all, for the sails have not been full all + night. A breeze only sprang up an hour ago, and we are not moving through + the water now at more than a knot and a half; but I think it is + freshening." + </p> + <p> + "I hope it is," Harry said. "It is not often that we have a dead calm; but + if it doesn't spring up we shall have to row. With two tons and a half of + stuff on board it is as much as we can do to move two knots an hour + through the water." + </p> + <p> + "All right, sir! when you think it is time to begin, stir me up." + </p> + <p> + In half an hour the breeze had increased so much that the boat was running + along three knots an hour. By eight o'clock she was doing a knot better. + So she ran along till, at four o'clock in the afternoon, the wind died + away again, and they could just see the masts of the ships at Callao in + the distance. + </p> + <p> + "I should think that we are about fifteen miles off," Harry said. + </p> + <p> + "About that," Bertie replied. "We had better get our oars and help her + along, she is not going much more than a knot through the water an hour." + </p> + <p> + They got out the oars and set to work. Occasionally a puff of wind gave + them a little assistance, but it was one o'clock before they arrived + alongside the <i>London</i>. + </p> + <p> + A lamp was alight at the gangway as arranged, and two sailors were on + watch. + </p> + <p> + "The captain turned in an hour ago, sir," one of them said. "He left + orders that the mate was to call him if you arrived. We will soon have him + up." + </p> + <p> + In five minutes the mate and four other sailors were on deck. + </p> + <p> + "We have got a whip rigged in readiness," the officer said. "How much do + the packages weigh, sir?" + </p> + <p> + "They are leathern bags, and weigh about a hundredweight each." + </p> + <p> + "How many are there?" + </p> + <p> + "Forty-six." + </p> + <p> + "We have got the fore-hatch open, and can hand them down in no time. If + you will pass the boat along to the chains forward we shall be ready for + you. Shall I send a couple of hands down into the boat to hook them on?" + </p> + <p> + "No, you needn't do that." + </p> + <p> + As soon as the boat reached her station a rope with a couple of small + chains attached descended. One of the chains was fastened round a bag, and + this was at once run up. By the time the rope came down again the other + chain was passed round another bag, and in a quarter of an hour the whole + were on board and down in the hold. The captain had now come out. + </p> + <p> + "So you have got them off all right, Mr. Prendergast?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes. There are forty-six bags. We will say, roughly, two ton and a half; + though I doubt whether there is as much as that. At any rate, I will pay + you for the freight agreed upon at once. They have all got labels on them, + and on your arrival, after being handed into store, are to remain till + called for. I am coming on in the <i>Nancy</i>. I do not know whether she + is faster than you are or not. At any rate, she is not likely to be long + behind you." + </p> + <p> + "I think that possibly you will be home first, sir; the <i>Nancy</i> made + the voyage out here a fortnight quicker than we did; but it depends, of + course, on what weather we meet with. I was on board her this afternoon, + and her captain and I made a bet of five pounds each as to which would be + in the port of London first. I shall have the anchor up by daylight. Now, + gentlemen, will you come down into the cabin and we will take a glass + together." + </p> + <p> + Harry did so, and after emptying a tumbler and wishing the captain a quick + and pleasant voyage, he got into the boat and rowed two or three miles + along the shore, as a landing at that time of night might cause questions + to be asked; and then they lay down and slept by turns until morning + broke. A light breeze then sprang up, and hoisting sail they returned to + Callao. The <i>London</i> was already far out at sea. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2HCH0020" id="link2HCH0020"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + CHAPTER XX — HOME + </h2> + <p> + Two days later, Dias, José, and Maria arrived at Callao, having left the + mules at Lima. + </p> + <p> + "Was it got off all right, señor?" Dias asked. + </p> + <p> + "Yes. It was a pretty near touch, for we had to row nine hours, and only + saved our time by an hour." + </p> + <p> + "And when will you start again?" + </p> + <p> + "The <i>Nancy</i> sails in four days, so I shall go down tomorrow morning. + I don't want to run the risk again of losing the boat." + </p> + <p> + "Well, we shall be stronger handed," Bertie said. "Of course I shall go + down with you; Dias says he will too; so we will be able to man four oars, + if necessary." + </p> + <p> + "What have you done with the goods?" Harry asked. + </p> + <p> + "I sold them all at Lima, señor, to the man I got them from. He took off a + third of the price, and said he could not have taken them if it had not + been that he had just got an order down from the Cerro mines, and was + short of some of the things they had ordered." + </p> + <p> + "That is all right, Dias." + </p> + <p> + Harry secured two rooms at the hotel, and they all sat talking far into + the night. "I hope you will get your silver down as comfortably as we have + got the gold." + </p> + <p> + "I have no fear about doing that, señor. The difficulty will be for me to + know what to do with it. I can never spend so much." + </p> + <p> + "Oh, nonsense, Dias!" + </p> + <p> + "I mean it, señor. Maria and I are quite agreed that we don't want any + larger house than we have got; and I know that if we did want a big one, + there would be all sorts of questions as to where I had got the money + from." + </p> + <p> + "There would be no difficulty in answering that, Dias. You told me how + your friend found five mule-loads of silver in the bats' cave. You have + only got to say that you found yours hidden away, which would be the + truth. José is nineteen now, and you will want to provide him with some + good mules, and to put by some money for him when he wants to marry and + settle. I know you spoke very highly of an institution at Lima for the + orphans of natives. You can hand them over some, and when you and Maria + don't want it any longer you can leave them the rest." + </p> + <p> + Maria cried bitterly in the morning when they said goodbye. "I shall love + you and pray for you always, señors," she sobbed. "I shall never forget + all your kindness." + </p> + <p> + "We owe you more than you owe us," Harry said. "You have always been ready + to do everything, and you have kept us alive with your merry talk and good + spirits. You may be very sure that we shall never forget you." + </p> + <p> + José was almost equally affected. "You will never come back, señor," he + said, as the tears rolled down his cheeks. + </p> + <p> + "I may some day, José. I think it likely that I shall some day get up a + company to drain that lake in the golden valley. The gold will be more + useful as money than lying there. It must depend partly upon whether the + country is settled. People will not put money into Peru as long as you are + always fighting here." + </p> + <p> + Maria and José would have accompanied them down to the boat the next + morning, but Dias pointed out to them that they were apparently only going + out for a day's sail, and that if there were any partings on the shore it + would at once attract the suspicions of the customs-house officials there. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, after a painful farewell, Dias and the two brothers went down + to the boat, where the mate was already awaiting them. The voyage was as + successful as the previous one had been. On the return journey the wind + held, and they arrived alongside of the <i>Nancy</i> by eleven o'clock; + the bags were all safely in the hold by midnight. The first mate of the + ship had two days before been taken with fever and sent ashore, and the + captain had gladly accepted the offer of Harry's assistant to take the + berth of second mate, that officer having succeeded to the post of the + first. Harry had told him that he could sell the boat, and he had, before + starting on the trip, done so, on the understanding that it would be found + on the beach in charge of Dias when the <i>Nancy</i> had sailed. + </p> + <p> + Harry had given him another ten pounds to provide himself with an outfit, + and had also asked him to distribute twenty among his former shipmates for + the same purpose, as these had lost all their clothing except what they + stood in. The ship's dinghy, with a couple of hands, towed the boat, with + Dias in it, to the shore. The muleteer was greatly affected at parting + with Harry and his brother. + </p> + <p> + "It has been a fortunate journey for us both," Dias said, "and I shall + always look back to the time we spent together with the greatest + pleasure." + </p> + <p> + "Here is a piece of paper with my address in London. I know that you will + have no difficulty in getting letters written for you. Let me hear from + you once every six months or so, telling me how you are getting on, and I + will write to you. Good-bye! We shall always remember you, and be thankful + that we had so faithful a guide here, and, I may say, so faithful a + friend." + </p> + <p> + The voyage home was an uneventful one, save that they met with a heavy + storm while rounding the Horn, and for some days the vessel was in great + danger. However, she weathered it safely, and when she arrived in the + Thames she found that the <i>London</i> had come up on the previous tide. + </p> + <p> + "If it hadn't been for that storm we should have beaten her easily," the + captain said. "But I don't mind losing that fiver, considering that we + have gained four days on her." + </p> + <p> + On landing, Harry went straight to the Bank of England and informed the + managers that he had two hundred and eighty-two ingots of gold, weighing + about twenty pounds each, which he wished to deposit in their vaults until + they could weigh them and place their value to his credit, and he + requested them to send down one of their waggons to the docks the next day + to receive them. On the following evening he had the satisfaction of + knowing that the whole of the treasure was at last in safe-keeping. Then + he took a hackney-coach and drove to Jermyn Street, where he had taken + rooms, having the night before carried there the trunks which he had + stored before he left England. He smiled as he spread out suit after suit. + </p> + <p> + "I don't know anything about the fashions now," he said, "and for aught I + can tell they may have changed altogether. However, I don't suppose there + will be such an alteration that I shall look as if I had come out of the + ark. Certainly I am not going to wait till I get a new outfit. + </p> + <p> + "It did not seem to me," he said to himself, "that I left a ridiculously + large wardrobe before I went. But after knocking about for two years with + a single change, it really does seem absurd that I should ever have + thought I absolutely required all these things. Now, I suppose I had + better write to the old man and say that I have returned, and shall call + upon him to-morrow. The chances are ten to one against my catching him in + now, and as this is rather a formal sort of business, I had better give + him due notice; but I cannot keep Hilda in suspense. I wonder whether she + has the same maid as she had before I went away. I have given the girl + more than one half-guinea, and to do her justice I believe that she was so + attached to her mistress that she would have done anything for her without + them. Still, I can't very well knock at the door and ask for Miss + Fortescue's maid; I expect I must trust the note to a footman. If she does + not get it, there is no harm done; if he hands it to her father, no doubt + it would put him in a towering rage, but he will cool down by the time I + see him in the morning." + </p> + <p> + He sat down and wrote two notes. The first was to Mr. Fortescue; it only + said:— + </p> + <p> + "Dear Sir,—I have returned from abroad, and shall do myself the + pleasure of calling upon you at eleven o'clock tomorrow morning to discuss + with you a matter of much importance to myself." + </p> + <p> + The note to Hilda was still shorter:— + </p> + <p> + "My darling,—I am home and am going to call on your father at eleven + o'clock tomorrow morning. I am two months within the two years.—Yours + devotedly, + </p> + <h3> + "HARRY PRENDERGAST." + </h3> + <p> + Having sealed both letters, he walked to Bedford Square. When the door + opened, he saw that the footman was one of those who had been in Mr. + Fortescue's service before he left. + </p> + <p> + "You have not forgotten me, Edward, have you?" + </p> + <p> + "Why, it is Mr. Prendergast! Well, sir, it is a long time since we saw + you." + </p> + <p> + "Yes, I have been abroad. Will you hand this letter to Mr. Fortescue. Is + he in at present?" + </p> + <p> + "No, sir; he and Mrs. Fortescue are both out. Miss Fortescue is out too." + </p> + <p> + "Well now, Edward, will you hand this letter quietly to Miss Fortescue + when she comes in?" and he held out the note and a guinea with it. + </p> + <p> + The man hesitated. + </p> + <p> + "You need not be afraid of giving it to her," Harry went on. "It is only + to tell her what I have told your master in my letter to him, that I am + going to call tomorrow." + </p> + <p> + "Then I shall be glad to do it," the man said—for, as usual, the + servants were pretty well acquainted with the state of affairs, and when + Harry went away, and their young mistress was evidently in disgrace with + her father, they guessed pretty accurately what had happened, and their + sympathies were with the lovers. Harry returned to Jermyn Street confident + that Hilda would get his note that evening. He had no feeling of animosity + against her father, It was natural that, as a large land-owner, and + belonging to an old family, and closely connected with more than one peer + of the realm, he should offer strong opposition to the marriage of his + daughter to a half-pay lieutenant, and he had been quite prepared for the + burst of anger with which his request for her hand had been received. He + had felt that it was a forlorn hope; but he and Hilda hoped that in time + the old man would soften, especially as they had an ally in her mother. + Hilda had three brothers, and as the estates and the bulk of Mr. + Fortescue's fortune would go to them, she was not a great heiress, though + undoubtedly she would be well dowered. + </p> + <p> + On arriving the next morning Harry was shown into the library. Mr. + Fortescue rose from his chair and bowed coldly. + </p> + <p> + "To what am I indebted for the honour of this visit, Mr. Prendergast? I + had hoped that the emphatic way in which I rejected your—you will + excuse my saying—presumptuous request for the hand of my daughter, + would have settled the matter once and for all; and I trust that your + request for an interview to-day does not imply that you intend to renew + that proposal, which I may say at once would receive, and will receive as + long as I live, the same answer as I before gave you." + </p> + <p> + "It has that object, sir," Harry said quietly, "but under somewhat changed + conditions. I asked you at that time to give me two years, in which time + possibly my circumstances might change. You refused to give me a single + week; but your daughter was more kind, and promised to wait for the two + years, which will not be up for two more months." + </p> + <p> + "She has behaved like a froward and obstinate girl," her father said + angrily. "She has refused several most eligible offers, and I have to + thank you for it. Well, sir, I hope at least that you have the grace to + feel that it is preposterous that you should any longer stand in the way + of this misguided girl." + </p> + <p> + "I have come to say that if it is her wish and yours that I should stand + aside, as you say, I will do so, and in my letters I told her that unless + circumstances should be changed before the two years have expired I would + disappear altogether from her path." + </p> + <p> + "That is something at least, sir," Mr. Fortescue said with more courtesy + than he had hitherto shown. "I need not say that there is no prospect of + your obtaining my consent, and may inform you that my daughter promised + not to withstand my commands as far as you are concerned beyond the + expiration of the two years. I do not know that there is anything more to + say." + </p> + <p> + "I should not have come here, sir, had there not been more to say, but + should simply have addressed a letter to you saying that I withdrew all + pretensions to your daughter's hand. But I have a good deal more to say. I + have during the time that I have been away succeeded in improving my + condition to a certain extent." + </p> + <p> + "Pooh, pooh, sir!" the other said angrily. "Suppose you made a thousand or + two, what possible difference could it make?" + </p> + <p> + "I am not foolish enough to suppose that it would do so; but at least this + receipt from the Bank of England, for gold deposited in their hands, will + show you that the sums you mention have been somewhat exceeded." + </p> + <p> + "Tut, tut, I don't wish to see it! it can make no possible difference in + the matter." + </p> + <p> + "At least, sir, you will do me the courtesy to read it, or if you prefer + not to do so I will read it myself." + </p> + <p> + "Give it me," Mr. Fortescue said, holding out his hand. "Let us get + through this farce as soon as possible; it is painful to us both." + </p> + <p> + He put on his spectacles, glanced at the paper, and gave a sudden start, + read it again, carefully this time, and then said slowly: + </p> + <p> + "Do you mean that the two hundred and eighty-two ingots, containing in all + five thousand six hundred and forty pounds weight of gold, are your + property? That is to say, that you are the sole owner of them, and not + only the representative of some mining company?" + </p> + <p> + "It is the sole property, Mr. Fortescue, of my brother and myself. I own + two-thirds of it. It is lost treasure recovered by us from the sea, where + it has been lying ever since the conquest of Peru by Pizarro." + </p> + <p> + "There is no mistake about this? The word pounds is not a mistake for + ounces?—although even that would represent a very large sum." + </p> + <p> + "The bank would not be likely to make such a mistake as that, sir. The + ingots weigh about twenty pounds each. I had a small piece of the gold + assayed at Callao, and its value was estimated at four pounds per ounce. + Roughly, then, the value of the sum deposited at the bank is two hundred + and seventy thousand pounds." + </p> + <p> + "Prodigious!" Mr. Fortescue murmured. + </p> + <p> + "Well, Mr. Prendergast, I own that you have astounded me. It would be + absurd to deny that this altogether alters the position. Against you + personally I have never had anything to say. You were always a welcome + visitor to my house till I saw how matters were tending. Your family, like + my own, is an old one, and your position as an officer in the King's Naval + Service is an honourable one. However, I must ask you to give me a day to + reflect over the matter, to consult with my wife, and to ascertain that my + daughter's disposition in the matter is unchanged." + </p> + <p> + "Thank you, sir! But I trust that you will allow me to have an interview + with Miss Fortescue now. It is two years since we parted, and she has + suffered great anxiety on my account, and on the matter of my safety at + least I would not keep her a moment longer in suspense." + </p> + <p> + "I think that after the turn the matter has taken your request is a + reasonable one. You are sure to find her in the drawing-room with her + mother at present. I think it is desirable that you should not see her + alone until the matter is formally arranged." + </p> + <p> + Prendergast bowed. + </p> + <p> + "I am content to wait," he said with a slight smile. + </p> + <p> + "I will take you up myself," the other said. + </p> + <p> + Harry could have done without the guidance, for he knew the house well. + However, he only bowed again, and followed the old man upstairs. + </p> + <p> + The latter opened the door and said to his wife: "My dear, I have brought + an old friend up to see you;" and as Harry entered he closed the door and + went down to the library again. + </p> + <p> + "Nearly two hundred thousand pounds!" he said. "A splendid fortune! Nearly + twice as much as I put by before I left the bar. How in the world could he + have got it? 'Got it up out of the sea,' he said; a curious story. + However, with that acknowledgment from the bank there can be no mistake + about it. Well, well, it might be worse. I always liked the young fellow + till he was fool enough to fall in love with Hilda, and worse still, she + with him. The silly girl might have had a coronet. However, there is no + accounting for these things, and I am glad that the battle between us is + at an end. I was only acting for her good, and I should have been mad to + let her throw herself away on a penniless officer on half-pay." + </p> + <p> + Mrs. Fortescue waved her hand as Harry, on entering, was about to speak to + her. + </p> + <p> + "Go to her first," she said; "she has waited long enough for you." + </p> + <p> + And he turned to Hilda. + </p> + <p> + He made a step towards her and held out his arms, and with a little cry of + joy she ran into them. + </p> + <p> + "And is it all right?" she said a minute later. "Can it really be all + right?" + </p> + <p> + "You may be quite sure that it is all right, Hilda," Mrs. Fortescue said. + "Do you think your father would have brought him up here if it hadn't + been? Now you can come to me, Harry." + </p> + <p> + "I am glad," she said heartily. "We have had a very bad time. Now, thank + God, it is all over. You see she has only had me to stand by her, for her + brothers, although they have not taken open part against her, have been + disposed to think that it was madness her wasting two years on the chance + of your making a fortune. Of course you have done so, or you would not be + in this drawing-room at present." + </p> + <p> + "I have done very well, Mrs. Fortescue. I was able to show Mr. Fortescue a + receipt for gold amounting to nearly three hundred thousand pounds, of + which two-thirds belong to me, the rest to my brother." + </p> + <p> + Mrs. Fortescue uttered an exclamation of astonishment. + </p> + <p> + "What have you been doing, Harry?" she asked—"plundering a Nabob?" + </p> + <p> + "Nabobs do not dwell in Peru," he laughed. "No, I have discovered a + long-lost treasure, which, beyond any doubt, was part of the wealth of + Atahualpa, the unfortunate monarch whom Pizarro first plundered and then + slew. It had been sent off by sea, and the vessel was lost. It is too long + a story to tell now." + </p> + <p> + "And Papa has quite consented, Harry?" + </p> + <p> + Harry smiled. + </p> + <p> + "Virtually so, as you might suppose by his bringing me up here. Actually + he has deferred the matter, pending a consultation with you and Mrs. + Fortescue, and will give me his formal answer to-morrow." + </p> + <p> + The two ladies both smiled. + </p> + <p> + "If he said that, the matter is settled," the elder said; "he has never + asked my opinion before on the subject, and I have never volunteered it. + But I am sure he has not the slightest doubt as to what I thought of it. + So we can consider it as happily settled after all. If I had thought that + there was the slightest chance of your making a fortune quickly I should + have spoken out; but as I thought it absolutely hopeless, I have done what + I could privately to support Hilda, always saying, however, that if at the + end of the two years nothing came of it, I could not in any way + countenance her throwing away the chances of her life." + </p> + <p> + "You were quite right, Mrs. Fortescue. I had fully intended to write to + Hilda at the end of that time releasing her from all promises that she had + made to me, and saying that I felt that I had no right to trouble her + further; but from what she wrote to me, I doubt whether her father would + have found her altogether amenable to his wishes even at the end of the + two years." + </p> + <p> + A month later there was a wedding in Bedford Square. Among those present + no one was more gratified than Mr. Barnett, whose surprise and + satisfaction were great when Harry told him in confidence the result of + his advice, and especially of his introduction to the Indian guide. + </p> + <p> + It had been arranged that nothing should be said as to the source from + which Harry had obtained his wealth, as it was possible that the Peruvian + government might set up some claim to it, and it was in Mr. Fortescue's + opinion very doubtful what the result would be, as it had been discovered + so close to the shore. + </p> + <p> + Harry never took any steps with reference to the gold valley, for the + constant troubles in Peru were sufficient to deter any wealthy men from + investing money there. + </p> + <p> + The correspondence between him and Dias and his wife was maintained until + they died full of years and greatly lamented by numbers of their + countrymen to whom they had been benefactors. + </p> + <p> + Bertie never went to sea again except in his own yacht, but when he came + of age, bought an estate near Southampton, and six years later brought + home a mistress for it. + </p> + <div style="height: 6em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Treasure of the Incas, by G. A. Henty + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TREASURE OF THE INCAS *** + +***** This file should be named 7070-h.htm or 7070-h.htm ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/7/0/7/7070/ + +Etext produced by Anne Soulard, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team. + +HTML file produced by David Widger + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + </body> +</html> |